Teledyne 200Eh Em Users Manual API 200EH/EM Operation

200EHEM to the manual 1fdf21b1-0289-439d-97c3-00b08cb545fa

2015-02-03

: Teledyne Teledyne-200Eh-Em-Users-Manual-464565 teledyne-200eh-em-users-manual-464565 teledyne pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 370

DownloadTeledyne Teledyne-200Eh-Em-Users-Manual- API - 200EH/EM Operation Manual Teledyne-200eh-em-users-manual
Open PDF In BrowserView PDF
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

MODEL 200EH/EM
NITROGEN OXIDES ANALYZER

© TELEDYNE ADVANCED POLLUTION INSTRUMENTATION
9480 CARROLL PARK DRIVE
SAN DIEGO, CA 92121-5201
USA
Toll-free Phone:
Phone:
Fax:
Email:
Website:

Copyright 2007-2010
Teledyne Advanced Pollution Instrumentation

800-324-5190
858-657-9800
858-657-9816
api-sales@teledyne.com
http://www.teledyne-api.com/

04521
Rev. C
DCN 5731
14 May 2010

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Safety Messages

SAFETY MESSAGES
Your safety and the safety of others is very important. We have provided many important safety messages in
this manual. Please read these messages carefully.
A safety message alerts you to potential hazards that could hurt you or others. Each safety message is
associated with a safety alert symbol. These symbols are found in the manual and inside the instrument. The
definition of these symbols is described below:

GENERAL SAFETY HAZARD: Refer to the instructions for details on the specific
hazard.

CAUTION: Hot Surface Warning.

CAUTION: Electrical Shock Hazard.

TECHNICIAN SYMBOL: All operations marked with this symbol are to be
performed by qualified maintenance personnel only.

CAUTION
The analyzer should only be used for the purpose and in the manner described in this
manual. If you use the analyzer in a manner other than that for which it was intended,
unpredictable behavior could ensue with possible hazardous consequences.

NOTE
Technical Assistance regarding the use and maintenance of the
Model 200EH/EM NOx Analyzer or any other Teledyne Instruments product
can be obtained by:
Contacting Teledyne Instruments’ Customer Service Department at 800-324-5190
or
Via the internet at http://www.teledyne-api.com/inquiries.asp

i
04521C (DCN5731)

This page intentionally left blank.

ii
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Table of Contents

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. M200EH/EM Documentation.................................................................................................................................................... 1
1.1. Using This Manual............................................................................................................................................................ 1
2. Specifications, Approvals and Warranty................................................................................................................................... 3
2.1. M200EH/EM Operating Specifications ............................................................................................................................. 3
2.2. CE Mark Compliance ....................................................................................................................................................... 4
2.3. Warranty........................................................................................................................................................................... 4
3. Getting Started ......................................................................................................................................................................... 7
3.1. Unpacking and Initial Setup.............................................................................................................................................. 7
3.1.1. M200EH/EM Layout.................................................................................................................................................. 8
3.1.2. Electrical Connections ............................................................................................................................................ 10
3.1.2.1. Power Connection........................................................................................................................................... 10
3.1.2.2. Analog Output Connections ............................................................................................................................ 11
3.1.2.3. Connecting the Status Outputs ....................................................................................................................... 12
3.1.2.4. Connecting the Control Inputs......................................................................................................................... 13
3.1.2.5. Connecting the Serial Ports ............................................................................................................................ 14
3.1.2.6. Connecting to a LAN or the Internet................................................................................................................ 14
3.1.2.7. Connecting to a Multidrop Network ................................................................................................................. 14
3.1.3. Pneumatic Connections.......................................................................................................................................... 15
3.1.3.1. Calibration Gases ........................................................................................................................................... 16
3.1.3.2. Pneumatic Connections to M200EH/EM Basic Configuration: ........................................................................ 18
3.1.3.3. Connections with Internal Valve Options Installed .......................................................................................... 19
3.2. Initial Operation .............................................................................................................................................................. 20
3.2.1. Startup .................................................................................................................................................................... 20
3.2.2. Warm-Up ................................................................................................................................................................ 22
3.2.3. Warning Messages ................................................................................................................................................. 22
3.2.4. Functional Check .................................................................................................................................................... 24
3.3. Calibration ...................................................................................................................................................................... 25
3.3.1. Basic NOx Calibration Procedure............................................................................................................................ 25
3.3.2. Basic O2 Sensor Calibration Procedure.................................................................................................................. 28
3.3.2.1. O2 Calibration Setup ....................................................................................................................................... 28
3.3.2.2. O2 Calibration Method .................................................................................................................................... 28
3.3.3. Interferences for NOX Measurements ..................................................................................................................... 31
4. Frequently Asked Questions & Glossary................................................................................................................................ 33
4.1. Frequently Asked Questions .......................................................................................................................................... 33
4.2. Glossary ......................................................................................................................................................................... 34
5. Optional Hardware and Software ........................................................................................................................................... 37
5.1. External Pumps (OPT 10) .............................................................................................................................................. 37
5.2. Rack Mount Kits (OPTs 20-23)....................................................................................................................................... 37
5.3. Carrying Strap Handle (OPT 29) .................................................................................................................................... 38
5.4. Current Loop Analog Outputs (OPT 41) ......................................................................................................................... 39
5.4.1. Converting Current Loop Analog Outputs to Standard Voltage Outputs................................................................. 39
5.5. Particulate Filter Kit (OPT 42A) ...................................................................................................................................... 40
5.6. Ozone Supply Filter (OPT 49) ........................................................................................................................................ 40
5.7. Calibration Valve Options ............................................................................................................................................... 40
5.7.1. Zero/Span Valves (OPT 50) ................................................................................................................................... 40
5.7.2. Second Range span Valve (OPT 52)...................................................................................................................... 42
5.8. Oxygen Sensor (OPT 65) ............................................................................................................................................... 45
5.8.1. Theory of Operation................................................................................................................................................ 45
5.8.1.1. Paramagnetic measurement of O2 ..................................................................................................................45
5.8.1.2. Operation Within the M200EH/EM Analyzer ................................................................................................... 46
5.8.1.3. Pneumatic Operation of the O2 Sensor ........................................................................................................... 46
5.8.2. Zero Air Scrubber (OPT 64B) ................................................................................................................................. 48
5.8.3. Zero Air Scrubber Maintenance Kit (OPT 43) ......................................................................................................... 48
5.8.4. M200EH/EM Expendables Kit (OPT 42)................................................................................................................. 48
5.8.5. M200EH/EM Spare Parts Kit (OPT 43)................................................................................................................... 48
5.9. Communication Options ................................................................................................................................................. 48
5.9.1. RS232 Modem Cables (OPTs 60 and 60A)............................................................................................................ 48
5.9.2. RS-232 Multidrop (OPT 62) .................................................................................................................................... 49
5.9.3. Ethernet (OPT 63) .................................................................................................................................................. 49
5.10. Sample Gas Conditioners (OPTs 86 & 88)................................................................................................................... 50

iii
04521C (DCN5731)

5.11. Alarm Relay Option (OPT 67)....................................................................................................................................... 51
5.12. Special Software Features ........................................................................................................................................... 53
5.12.1. Maintenance Mode Switch.................................................................................................................................... 53
5.12.2. Second Language Switch ..................................................................................................................................... 53
5.12.3. Dilution Ratio Option............................................................................................................................................. 53
5.13. Additional Manual (OPT 70) ......................................................................................................................................... 53
5.14. Extended Warranty (OPTs 92 & 93) ............................................................................................................................. 54
6. Operating Instructions ............................................................................................................................................................ 55
6.1. Overview of Operating Modes ........................................................................................................................................ 55
6.2. Sample Mode ................................................................................................................................................................. 57
6.2.1. Test Functions ........................................................................................................................................................ 57
6.2.2. Warning Messages ................................................................................................................................................. 59
6.3. Calibration Mode ............................................................................................................................................................ 60
6.3.1. Calibration Functions .............................................................................................................................................. 60
6.4. SETUP MODE................................................................................................................................................................ 61
6.5. SETUP  CFG: Viewing the Analyzer’s Configuration Information ............................................................................... 62
6.6. SETUP  ACAL: Automatic Calibration......................................................................................................................... 62
6.7. SETUP  DAS - Using the Data Acquisition System (iDAS) ........................................................................................ 63
6.7.1. iDAS Structure ........................................................................................................................................................ 64
6.7.1.1. iDAS Channels................................................................................................................................................ 64
6.7.1.2. iDAS Parameters ............................................................................................................................................ 65
6.7.1.3. iDAS Triggering Events................................................................................................................................... 65
6.7.2. Default iDAS Channels ........................................................................................................................................... 66
6.7.2.1. Viewing iDAS Data and Settings..................................................................................................................... 68
6.7.2.2. Editing iDAS Data Channels ........................................................................................................................... 69
6.7.2.3. Trigger Events................................................................................................................................................. 70
6.7.2.4. Editing iDAS Parameters ................................................................................................................................ 71
6.7.2.5. Sample Period and Report Period .................................................................................................................. 73
6.7.2.6. Number of Records......................................................................................................................................... 75
6.7.2.7. RS-232 Report Function ................................................................................................................................. 76
6.7.2.8. Compact Report.............................................................................................................................................. 76
6.7.2.9. Starting Date ................................................................................................................................................... 76
6.7.2.10. Disabling/Enabling Data Channels................................................................................................................ 77
6.7.2.11. HOLDOFF Feature ....................................................................................................................................... 77
6.7.3. Remote iDAS Configuration.................................................................................................................................... 78
6.8. SETUP  RNGE: Range Units and Dilution Configuration............................................................................................ 80
6.8.1. Range Units............................................................................................................................................................ 80
6.8.2. Dilution Ratio .......................................................................................................................................................... 81
6.9. SETUP  PASS: Password Feature ............................................................................................................................. 82
6.10. SETUP  CLK: Setting the Internal Time-of-Day Clock .............................................................................................. 84
6.11. SETUP  MORE  COMM: Setting Up the Analyser’s Communication Ports ........................................................... 86
6.11.1. Analyzer ID ........................................................................................................................................................... 86
6.11.2. COM Port Default Settings ................................................................................................................................... 87
6.11.3. RS-232 COM Port Cable Connections ................................................................................................................. 87
6.11.4. RS-485 Configuration of COM2............................................................................................................................ 89
6.11.5. DTE and DCE Communication ............................................................................................................................. 90
6.11.6. Ethernet Card Configuration ................................................................................................................................. 91
6.11.6.1. Ethernet Card COM2 Communication Modes and Baud Rate ...................................................................... 91
6.11.6.2. Configuring the Ethernet Interface Option using DHCP ................................................................................ 91
6.11.6.3. Manually Configuring the Network IP Addresses .......................................................................................... 94
6.11.6.4. Changing the Analyzer’s HOSTNAME.......................................................................................................... 96
6.11.7. Multidrop RS-232 Set Up...................................................................................................................................... 97
6.11.8. COM Port Communication Modes ........................................................................................................................ 99
6.11.9. COM Port Baud Rate.......................................................................................................................................... 101
6.11.10. COM Port Testing ............................................................................................................................................. 102
6.12. SETUP  MORE  VARS: Internal Variables (VARS) ............................................................................................. 103
6.12.1. Setting the Gas Measurement Mode .................................................................................................................. 105
6.13. SETUP  MORE  DIAG: Diagnostics MENU ........................................................................................................ 106
6.13.1. Accessing the Diagnostic Features..................................................................................................................... 107
6.13.2. Signal I/O............................................................................................................................................................ 108
6.13.3. Analog Output Step Test .................................................................................................................................... 109
6.13.4. ANALOG OUTPUTS and Reporting Ranges...................................................................................................... 110
6.13.4.1. Analog Output Signals Available on the M200EH/EM................................................................................. 110
6.13.4.2. Physical Range versus Analog Output Reporting Ranges.......................................................................... 111
6.13.5. ANALOG I/O CONFIGURATION ........................................................................................................................ 113

iv
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Table of Contents

6.13.5.1. The Analog I/O Configuration Submenu. .................................................................................................... 113
6.13.5.2. Analog Output Signal Type and Range Selection ....................................................................................... 115
6.13.5.3. Turning the Analog Output Over-Range Feature ON/OFF.......................................................................... 116
6.13.5.4. Adding a Recorder Offset to an Analog Output........................................................................................... 117
6.13.5.5. Assigning an iDAS parameter to an Analog Output Channel...................................................................... 118
Reporting Gas Concentrations via the M200EH/EM Analog Output Channels ........................................118
6.13.5.6. Setting the Reporting Range Scale for an Analog Output........................................................................... 121
6.13.5.7. Setting Data Update Rate for an Analog Output ......................................................................................... 123
6.13.5.8. Turning an Analog Output On or Off ........................................................................................................... 124
6.13.6. ANALOG OUTPUT CALIBRATION .................................................................................................................... 125
6.13.6.1. Automatic Analog Output Calibration .......................................................................................................... 126
6.13.6.2. Manual Calibration of Analog Output configured for Voltage Ranges ......................................................... 127
6.13.6.3. Manual Calibration of Analog Outputs configured for Current Loop Ranges .............................................. 128
6.13.6.4. AIN Calibration............................................................................................................................................ 131
6.13.7. OTHER DIAG MENU FUNCTIONS .................................................................................................................... 132
6.13.7.1. Display Sequence Configuration................................................................................................................. 132
6.13.7.2. Optic Test ................................................................................................................................................... 135
6.13.7.3. Electrical Test ............................................................................................................................................. 136
6.13.7.4. Ozone Generator Override ......................................................................................................................... 137
6.13.7.5. Flow Calibration .......................................................................................................................................... 138
6.14. SETUP – ALRM: Using the optional Gas Concentration Alarms (OPT 67) ................................................................ 139
6.15. REMOTE OPERATION OF THE ANALYZER ............................................................................................................ 140
6.15.1. Remote Operation Using the External Digital I/O ............................................................................................... 140
6.15.1.1. Status Outputs ............................................................................................................................................ 140
6.15.1.2. Control Inputs.............................................................................................................................................. 141
6.15.2. Remote Operation Using the External Serial I/O ................................................................................................ 142
6.15.2.1. Terminal Operating Modes ......................................................................................................................... 142
6.15.2.2. Help Commands in Terminal Mode............................................................................................................. 143
6.15.2.3. Command Syntax ....................................................................................................................................... 143
6.15.2.4. Data Types.................................................................................................................................................. 144
6.15.2.5. Status Reporting ......................................................................................................................................... 145
6.15.2.6. Remote Access by Modem ......................................................................................................................... 145
6.15.2.7. COM Port Password Security ..................................................................................................................... 147
6.15.2.8. APICOM Remote Control Program ............................................................................................................. 148
6.15.3. Additional Communications Documentation ....................................................................................................... 148
6.15.4. Using the M200EH/EM with a Hessen Protocol Network.................................................................................... 149
6.15.4.1. General Overview of Hessen Protocol ........................................................................................................ 149
6.15.4.2. Hessen COMM Port Configuration.............................................................................................................. 149
6.15.4.3. Selecting a Hessen Protocol Type .............................................................................................................. 150
6.15.4.4. Setting The Hessen Protocol Response Mode ........................................................................................... 151
6.15.4.5. Hessen Protocol Gas ID ............................................................................................................................. 152
6.15.4.6. Setting Hessen Protocol Status Flags......................................................................................................... 153
6.15.4.7. Instrument ID Code..................................................................................................................................... 154
7. Calibration Procedures......................................................................................................................................................... 155
7.1. Calibration Preparations ............................................................................................................................................... 155
7.1.1. Required Equipment, Supplies, and Expendables................................................................................................ 155
7.1.2. Zero Air................................................................................................................................................................. 155
7.1.3. Span Calibration Gas Standards & Traceability.................................................................................................... 156
7.1.3.1. Traceability ................................................................................................................................................... 156
7.1.4. Data Recording Devices ....................................................................................................................................... 157
7.1.5. NO2 Conversion Efficiency ................................................................................................................................... 157
7.1.5.1. Determining / Updating the NO2 Converter Efficiency................................................................................... 157
7.2. Manual Calibration ....................................................................................................................................................... 160
7.3. Calibration Checks ....................................................................................................................................................... 163
7.4. Manual Calibration with Zero/Span Valves................................................................................................................... 164
7.5. Calibration Checks with Zero/Span Valves................................................................................................................... 167
7.6. Calibration With Remote Contact Closures .................................................................................................................. 168
7.7. Automatic Calibration (AutoCal) ................................................................................................................................... 169
7.8. Calibration Quality Analysis.......................................................................................................................................... 172
8. EPA Protocol Calibration...................................................................................................................................................... 173
9. Instrument Maintenance....................................................................................................................................................... 175
9.1. Maintenance Schedule ................................................................................................................................................. 175
9.2. Predictive Diagnostics .................................................................................................................................................. 177
9.3. Maintenance Procedures.............................................................................................................................................. 177
9.3.1. Changing the Sample Particulate Filter ................................................................................................................ 178

v
04521C (DCN5731)

9.3.2. Changing the O3 Dryer Particulate Filter............................................................................................................... 179
9.3.3. Maintaining the External Sample Pump................................................................................................................ 180
9.3.3.1. Rebuilding the Pump..................................................................................................................................... 180
9.3.3.2. Changing the Inline Exhaust Scrubber.......................................................................................................... 180
9.3.4. Changing the Pump and IZS Dust Filters ............................................................................................................. 180
9.3.5. Changing the External Zero Air Scrubber ............................................................................................................. 182
9.3.6. Changing the NO2 converter................................................................................................................................. 183
9.3.7. Cleaning the Reaction Cell ................................................................................................................................... 184
9.3.8. Changing Critical Flow Orifices............................................................................................................................. 185
9.3.9. Checking for Light Leaks ...................................................................................................................................... 186
10. Theory of Operation ........................................................................................................................................................... 189
10.1. Measurement Principle............................................................................................................................................... 189
10.1.1. Chemiluminescence ........................................................................................................................................... 189
10.1.2. NOX and NO2 Determination ............................................................................................................................... 190
10.2. Chemiluminescence Detection ................................................................................................................................... 191
10.2.1. The Photo Multiplier Tube................................................................................................................................... 191
10.2.2. Optical Filter ....................................................................................................................................................... 192
10.2.3. Auto Zero............................................................................................................................................................ 192
10.2.4. Measurement Interferences................................................................................................................................ 193
10.2.4.1. Direct Interference ...................................................................................................................................... 193
10.2.4.2. Third Body Quenching ................................................................................................................................ 193
10.2.4.3. Light Leaks.................................................................................................................................................. 194
10.3. Pneumatic Operation.................................................................................................................................................. 195
10.3.1. Pump and Exhaust Manifold............................................................................................................................... 195
10.3.2. Sample Gas Flow ............................................................................................................................................... 196
10.3.2.1. NO/NOx and AutoZero cycles ..................................................................................................................... 196
10.3.3. Flow Rate Control - Critical Flow Orifices ........................................................................................................... 197
10.3.3.1. Critical Flow Orifice ..................................................................................................................................... 199
10.3.4. Sample Particulate Filter..................................................................................................................................... 201
10.3.5. Ozone Gas Air Flow............................................................................................................................................ 201
10.3.6. O3 Generator...................................................................................................................................................... 202
10.3.7. Perma Pure® Dryer ............................................................................................................................................. 203
10.3.8. Ozone Supply Air Filter....................................................................................................................................... 205
10.3.9. Ozone Scrubber ................................................................................................................................................. 205
10.3.10. Pneumatic Sensors........................................................................................................................................... 206
10.3.10.1. Vacuum Manifold ...................................................................................................................................... 206
10.3.10.2. Sample Pressure Sensor .......................................................................................................................... 206
10.3.10.3. Vacuum Pressure Sensor ......................................................................................................................... 207
10.3.10.4. O3 Supply Air Flow Sensor........................................................................................................................ 207
10.3.11. Dilution Manifold ............................................................................................................................................... 207
10.4. Electronic Operation ................................................................................................................................................... 209
10.4.1. CPU .................................................................................................................................................................... 210
10.4.1.1. Disk On Chip............................................................................................................................................... 211
10.4.1.2. Flash Chip................................................................................................................................................... 211
10.4.2. Sensor Module, Reaction Cell ............................................................................................................................ 211
10.4.2.1. Reaction Cell Heating Circuit ...................................................................................................................... 211
10.4.3. Photo Multiplier Tube (PMT)............................................................................................................................... 212
10.4.4. PMT Cooling System. ......................................................................................................................................... 213
10.4.4.1. TEC Control Board...................................................................................................................................... 213
10.4.5. PMT Preamplifier ................................................................................................................................................ 214
10.4.6. Pneumatic Sensor Board.................................................................................................................................... 215
10.4.7. Relay Board........................................................................................................................................................ 215
10.4.7.1. Relay PCA Location and Layout ................................................................................................................. 215
10.4.7.2. Heater Control............................................................................................................................................. 215
10.4.7.3. Thermocouple Inputs and Configuration Jumper (JP5)............................................................................... 216
10.4.7.4. Valve Control .............................................................................................................................................. 217
10.4.8. Status LEDs & Watch Dog Circuitry.................................................................................................................... 218
10.4.8.1. Watchdog Indicator (D1) ............................................................................................................................. 218
10.4.9. Motherboard ....................................................................................................................................................... 219
10.4.9.1. A to D Conversion....................................................................................................................................... 219
10.4.9.2. Sensor Inputs.............................................................................................................................................. 219
10.4.9.3. Thermistor Interface.................................................................................................................................... 220
10.4.10. Analog Outputs ................................................................................................................................................. 220
10.4.11. External Digital I/O............................................................................................................................................ 221
10.4.12. I2C Data Bus ..................................................................................................................................................... 221

vi
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Table of Contents

10.4.13. Power-up Circuit ............................................................................................................................................... 221
10.5. Power Distribution &Circuit Breaker ........................................................................................................................... 222
10.6. Communications Interface.......................................................................................................................................... 223
10.6.1. Front Panel Interface .......................................................................................................................................... 224
10.6.1.1. Analyzer Status LED’s ................................................................................................................................ 224
10.6.1.2. Keyboard .................................................................................................................................................... 224
10.6.1.3. Display ........................................................................................................................................................ 225
10.6.1.4. Keyboard/Display Interface Electronics ...................................................................................................... 225
10.7. Software Operation .................................................................................................................................................... 227
10.7.1. Adaptive Filter..................................................................................................................................................... 228
10.7.2. Calibration - Slope and Offset............................................................................................................................. 228
10.7.3. Temperature/Pressure Compensation (TPC) ..................................................................................................... 229
10.7.4. NO2 Converter Efficiency Compensation ............................................................................................................ 230
10.7.5. Internal Data Acquisition System (iDAS) ............................................................................................................ 230
11. Troubleshooting & Repair .................................................................................................................................................. 231
11.1. General Troubleshooting ............................................................................................................................................ 231
11.1.1. Warning Messages ............................................................................................................................................. 232
11.1.2. Fault Diagnosis with Test Functions ................................................................................................................... 232
11.1.3. Using the Diagnostic Signal I/O Function ........................................................................................................... 233
11.1.4. Status LED’s ....................................................................................................................................................... 235
11.1.4.1. Motherboard Status Indicator (Watchdog) .................................................................................................. 235
11.1.4.2. CPU Status Indicator .................................................................................................................................. 235
11.1.4.3. Relay Board and Status LEDs .................................................................................................................... 235
11.2. Gas Flow Problems .................................................................................................................................................... 238
11.2.1. M200EH Internal Gas Flow Diagrams ................................................................................................................ 238
11.2.2. M200EM Internal Gas Flow Diagrams ................................................................................................................ 241
11.2.3. Zero or Low Flow Problems ................................................................................................................................ 243
11.2.3.1. Sample Flow is Zero or Low........................................................................................................................ 243
11.2.3.2. Ozone Flow is Zero or Low ......................................................................................................................... 244
11.2.4. High Flow............................................................................................................................................................ 245
11.2.5. Sample Flow is Zero or Low But Analyzer Reports Correct Flow ....................................................................... 245
11.3. Calibration Problems .................................................................................................................................................. 246
11.3.1. Negative Concentrations .................................................................................................................................... 246
11.3.2. No Response...................................................................................................................................................... 246
11.3.3. Unstable Zero and Span..................................................................................................................................... 247
11.3.4. Inability to Span - No SPAN Key ........................................................................................................................ 247
11.3.5. Inability to Zero - No ZERO Key ......................................................................................................................... 248
11.3.6. Non-Linear Response......................................................................................................................................... 248
11.3.7. Discrepancy Between Analog Output and Display ............................................................................................. 249
11.3.8. Discrepancy between NO and NOX slopes......................................................................................................... 249
11.4. Other Performance Problems..................................................................................................................................... 249
11.4.1. Excessive noise .................................................................................................................................................. 249
11.4.2. Slow Response................................................................................................................................................... 249
11.4.3. Auto-zero Warnings ............................................................................................................................................ 250
11.5. Subsystem Checkout.................................................................................................................................................. 251
11.5.1. Simple Vacuum Leak and Pump Check ............................................................................................................. 251
11.5.2. Detailed Pressure Leak Check ........................................................................................................................... 251
11.5.3. Performing a Sample Flow Check ...................................................................................................................... 252
11.5.4. AC Power Configuration ..................................................................................................................................... 253
11.5.4.1. AC configuration – Internal Pump (JP7)...................................................................................................... 254
11.5.4.2. AC Configuration – Standard Heaters (JP2) ............................................................................................... 255
11.5.4.3. AC Configuration –Heaters for Option Packages (JP6) .............................................................................. 256
11.5.5. DC Power Supply Test Points ............................................................................................................................ 257
11.5.6. I2C Bus ............................................................................................................................................................... 257
11.5.7. Keyboard / Display Interface............................................................................................................................... 258
11.5.8. Genreal Relay Board Diagnostic ........................................................................................................................ 258
11.5.9. Motherboard ....................................................................................................................................................... 259
11.5.9.1. A/D functions............................................................................................................................................... 259
11.5.9.2. Analog Output Voltages .............................................................................................................................. 259
11.5.9.3. Status Outputs ............................................................................................................................................ 260
11.5.9.4. Control Inputs.............................................................................................................................................. 261
11.5.10. CPU .................................................................................................................................................................. 261
11.5.11. RS-232 Communication.................................................................................................................................... 262
11.5.11.1. General RS-232 Troubleshooting ............................................................................................................. 262
11.5.11.2. Modem or Terminal Operation .................................................................................................................. 262

vii
04521C (DCN5731)

11.5.12. PMT Sensor...................................................................................................................................................... 263
11.5.13. PMT Preamplifier Board ................................................................................................................................... 263
11.5.14. High Voltage Power Supply .............................................................................................................................. 263
11.5.15. Pneumatic Sensor Assembly ............................................................................................................................ 264
11.5.15.1. Reaction Cell Pressure ............................................................................................................................. 264
11.5.15.2. Sample Pressure ...................................................................................................................................... 264
11.5.15.3. Ozone Flow............................................................................................................................................... 265
11.5.16. NO2 Converter .................................................................................................................................................. 265
11.5.17. O3 Generator .................................................................................................................................................... 266
11.5.18. Box Temperature .............................................................................................................................................. 266
11.5.19. PMT Temperature............................................................................................................................................. 266
11.6. Repair Procedures ..................................................................................................................................................... 267
11.6.1. Disk-on-Chip Replacement................................................................................................................................. 267
11.6.2. Flash Chip Replacement or Upgrade.................................................................................................................. 268
11.6.3. O3 Generator Replacement ................................................................................................................................ 268
11.6.4. Sample and Ozone Dryer Replacement ............................................................................................................. 269
11.6.5. PMT Sensor Hardware Calibration ..................................................................................................................... 270
11.6.6. Replacing the PMT, HVPS or TEC ..................................................................................................................... 271
11.7. Removing / Replacing the Relay PCA from the Instrument ........................................................................................ 274
11.8. Technical Assistance.................................................................................................................................................. 275
12. A Primer on Electro-Static Discharge................................................................................................................................. 277
12.1. How Static Charges are Created................................................................................................................................ 277
12.2. How Electro-Static Charges Cause Damage.............................................................................................................. 278
12.3. Common Myths About ESD Damage ......................................................................................................................... 279
12.4. Basic Principles of Static Control................................................................................................................................ 279
12.4.1. General Rules..................................................................................................................................................... 280
12.4.2. Basic anti-ESD Procedures for Analyzer Repair and Maintenance .................................................................... 281
12.4.2.1. Working at the Instrument Rack.................................................................................................................. 281
12.4.2.2. Working at an Anti-ESD Work Bench.......................................................................................................... 281
12.4.2.3. Transferring Components from Rack to Bench and Back ........................................................................... 282
12.4.2.4. Opening Shipments from Teledyne Instruments Customer Service............................................................ 282
12.4.2.5. Packing Components for Return to Teledyne Instruments Customer Service. ........................................... 283

LIST OF FIGURES
Figure 3-1:
Figure 3-2:
Figure 3-3:
Figure 3-4:
Figure 3-5:
Figure 3-6:
Figure 3-7:
Figure 3-8:
Figure 3-9:
Figure 3-10:
Figure 3-11:
Figure 3-12:
Figure 3-13:
Figure 3-14:
Figure 5-1:
Figure 5-2:
Figure 5-3:
Figure 5-4:
Figure 5-5:
Figure 5-6:
Figure 5-7:
Figure 5-8:
Figure 5-9:
Figure 5-10:

M200EH/EM Layout.......................................................................................................................8
M200EH/EM Rear Panel Layout....................................................................................................9
M200EH/EM Front Panel Layout ...................................................................................................9
Analog Output Connector ............................................................................................................11
Status Output Connector .............................................................................................................12
Control Input Connector...............................................................................................................13
M200EH Internal Pneumatic Block Diagram - Standard Configuration.......................................15
M200EM Internal Pneumatic Block Diagram - Standard Configuration ......................................16
Pneumatic Connections–Basic Configuration–Using Gas Dilution Calibrator.............................18
Pneumatic Connections–Basic Configuration–Using Bottled Span Gas.....................................18
Pneumatic Connections–With Zero/Span Valve Option (50) ......................................................19
Pneumatic Connections–With 2-Span point Option (52) –Using Bottled Span Gas ...................20
Front Panel Display During Startup Sequence............................................................................21
O2 Sensor Calibration Set Up ......................................................................................................28
M200EH/EM with Carrying Strap Handle and Rack Mount Brackets..........................................38
Current Loop Option Installed on the Motherboard .....................................................................39
M200EH – Internal Pneumatics with Zero-Span Valve Option 50...............................................41
M200EM – Internal Pneumatics with Zero-Span Valve Option 50 ..............................................41
M200EH – Internal Pneumatics with Second Span Point Valve Option 52.................................44
M200EM – Internal Pneumatics with Second Span Point Valve Option 52 ................................45
Oxygen Sensor - Principle of Operation ......................................................................................46
M200EH – Internal Pneumatics with O2 Sensor Option 65 .........................................................47
M200EM – Internal Pneumatics with O2 Sensor Option 65.........................................................47
M200EH/EM Multidrop Card........................................................................................................49

viii
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
Figure 5-11:
Figure 5-12:
Figure 5-13:
Figure 6-6-1:
Figure 6-6-2:
Figure 6-6-3:
Figure 6-6-4:
Figure 6-6-5:
Figure 6-6-6:
Figure 6-6-7:
Figure 6-6-8:
Figure 6-6-9:
Figure 6-6-10:
Figure 6-6-11:
Figure 6-6-12:
Figure 6-6-13:
Figure 6-6-14:
Figure 6-6-15:
Figure 6-6-16:
Figure 6-6-17:
Table 6-29:
Figure 6-6-18:
Figure 6-6-19:
Figure 6-6-20:
Figure 7-1:
Figure 7-2:
Figure 7-3:
Figure7-4:
Figure 9-1:
Figure 9-2:
Figure 9-3:
Figure 9-4:
Figure 9-5:
Figure 9-6:
Figure 10-10-1:
Figure 10-10-2:
Figure 10-10-3:
Figure 10-10-4:
Figure 10-10-5:
Figure 10-10-6:
Figure 10-10-7:
Figure 10-10-8:
Figure 10-10-9:
Figure 10-10-10:
Figure 10-10-11:
Figure 10-10-12:
Figure 10-10-13:
Figure 10-10-14:
Figure 10-10-15:
Figure 10-10-16:
Figure 10-10-17:
Figure 10-10-18:
Figure 10-10-19:
Figure 10-10-20:
Figure 10-10-21:
Figure 10-10-22:
Figure 10-10-23:
Figure 10-10-24:

List of Figures

M200EH/EM Ethernet Card .........................................................................................................50
M200EH/EM Rear Panel with Ethernet Installed.........................................................................50
Alarm Relay Output Pin Assignments..........................................................................................52
Front Panel Display......................................................................................................................55
Viewing M200EH/EM TEST Functions ........................................................................................58
Viewing and Clearing M200EH/EM WARNING Messages .........................................................59
APICOM Graphical User Interface for Configuring the iDAS ......................................................78
iDAS Configuration Through a Terminal Emulation Program......................................................79
Back Panel connector Pin-Outs for COM1 & COM2 in RS-232 mode. .......................................87
CPU connector Pin-Outs for COM1 & COM2 in RS-232 mode...................................................88
CPU card Locations of RS-232/486 Switches, Connectors and Jumpers...................................89
Back Panel connector Pin-Outs for COM2 in RS-485 mode.......................................................90
CPU connector Pin-Outs for COM2 in RS-485 mode..................................................................90
Location of JP2 on RS232-Multidrop PCA (option 62) ...............................................................97
RS232-Multidrop PCA Host/Analyzer Interconnect Diagram ......................................................98
Analog Output Connector Key .................................................................................................. 110
Setup for Calibrating Analog Outputs ....................................................................................... 127
Setup for Calibrating Current Outputs ...................................................................................... 129
Alternative Setup for Calibrating Current Outputs .................................................................... 129
Status Output ConnectorTable 6-29: Status Output Pin Assignments..................................... 140
Status Output Pin Assignments ................................................................................................ 141
Control Inputs with local 5 V power supply ............................................................................... 142
Control Inputs with external 5 V power supply ......................................................................... 142
APICOM Remote Control Program Interface ........................................................................... 148
Gas Supply Setup for Determination of NO2 Conversion Efficiency......................................... 157
Pneumatic Connections–With Zero/Span Valve Option (50) ................................................... 160
Pneumatic Connections–With 2-Span point Option (52) –Using Bottled Span Gas ................ 160
Pneumatic Connections–With Zero/Span Valve Option (50) ................................................... 164
Sample Particulate Filter Assembly .......................................................................................... 178
Particle Filter on O3 Supply Air Dryer ....................................................................................... 179
Zero Air Scrubber Assembly..................................................................................................... 182
NO2 Converter Assembly.......................................................................................................... 183
Reaction Cell Assembly............................................................................................................ 184
Critical Flow Orifice Assembly .................................................................................................. 186
M200EH/EM Sensitivity Spectrum............................................................................................ 190
NO2 Conversion Principle ......................................................................................................... 191
Reaction Cell with PMT Tube ................................................................................................... 192
Reaction Cell During the AutoZero Cycle................................................................................. 193
External Pump Pack ................................................................................................................. 195
Location of Gas Flow Control Assemblies for M200EH............................................................ 197
Location of Gas Flow Control Assemblies for M200EM ........................................................... 198
Location of Gas Flow Control Assemblies for M200EH with O2 sensor Option 65 .................. 198
Location of Gas Flow Control Assemblies for M200EH with Second Span Point Option 52 ... 199
Flow Control Assembly & Critical Flow Orifice ......................................................................... 200
Ozone Generator Principle ....................................................................................................... 202
Semi-Permeable Membrane Drying Process ........................................................................... 203
M200EH/EM Perma Pure® Dryer.............................................................................................. 204
Vacuum Manifold ...................................................................................................................... 206
Dilution Manifold ....................................................................................................................... 208
M200EH/EM Electronic Block Diagram .................................................................................... 209
M200EH/EM CPU Board Annotated......................................................................................... 210
PMT Housing Assembly ........................................................................................................... 212
Basic PMT Design .................................................................................................................... 212
PMT Cooling System ................................................................................................................ 213
PMT Preamp Block Diagram .................................................................................................... 214
Heater Control Loop Block Diagram. ........................................................................................ 215
Thermocouple Configuration Jumper (JP5) Pin-Outs............................................................... 216
Status LED Locations – Relay PCA......................................................................................... 218

ix
04521C (DCN5731)

Figure 10-10-25: Power Distribution Block Diagram ........................................................................................... 222
Figure 10-10-26: Interface Block Diagram ........................................................................................................... 223
Figure 10-10-27: M200EH/EM Front Panel Layout .............................................................................................. 224
Figure 10-10-28: Keyboard and Display Interface Block Diagram ....................................................................... 225
Figure 10-10-29: Schematic of Basic Software Operation ................................................................................... 227
Figure 11-1:
Viewing and Clearing Warning Messages ................................................................................ 232
Figure 11-2:
Switching Signal I/O Functions ................................................................................................. 234
Figure 11-3:
Motherboard Watchdog Status Indicator .................................................................................. 235
Figure 11-4:
Relay Board PCA...................................................................................................................... 236
Figure 11-5:
M200EH – Basic Internal Gas Flow.......................................................................................... 238
Figure 11-6:
M200EH – Internal Gas Flow With OPT 50 .............................................................................. 239
Figure 11-7:
M200EH – Internal Gas Flow With OPT 52 .............................................................................. 239
Figure 11-8:
M200EH – Internal Gas Flow With OPT 65 .............................................................................. 240
Figure 11-9:
M200EH – Internal Gas Flow With OPT 50 + OPT 65 ............................................................. 240
Figure 11-10:
M200EM – Basic Internal Gas Flow ......................................................................................... 241
Figure 11-11:
M200EM – Internal Gas Flow With OPT 50 ............................................................................. 241
Figure 11-12:
M200EM – Internal Gas Flow With OPT 52 ............................................................................. 242
Figure 11-13:
M200EM – Internal Gas Flow With OPT 65 ............................................................................. 242
Figure 11-14:
M200EM – Internal Gas Flow With OPT 50 + OPT 65............................................................. 243
Figure 11-15:
Location of AC power Configuration Jumpers .......................................................................... 253
Figure 11-16:
Pump AC Power Jumpers (JP7)............................................................................................... 254
Figure 11-17:
Typical Set Up of AC Heater Jumper Set (JP2) ....................................................................... 255
Figure 11-18:
Typical Set Up of AC Heater Jumper Set (JP2) ....................................................................... 256
Figure 11-19:
Typical Set Up of Status Output Test ....................................................................................... 260
Figure 11-20:
Pressure / Flow Sensor Assembly............................................................................................ 264
Figure 11-22:
Pre-Amplifier Board Layout....................................................................................................... 270
Figure 11-22:
M200EH/EM Sensor Assembly ................................................................................................ 272
Figure 11-23:
Relay PCA with AC Relay Retainer In Place............................................................................ 274
Figure 11-24:
Relay PCA Mounting Screw Locations .................................................................................... 274
Figure 12-1: Triboelectric Charging ....................................................................................................................... 277
Figure 12-2: Basic anti-ESD Work Station ............................................................................................................ 280

LIST OF TABLES
Table 2-1:
Table 3-1:
Table 3-2:
Table 3-3:
Table 3-4:
Table 3-5:
Table 3-6:
Table 3-7:
Table 3-8:
Table 5-1:
Table 5-2:
Table 5-3:
Table 5-4:
Table 5-5:
Table 5-6
Table 6-1:
Table 6-2:
Table 6-3:
Table 6-4:
Table 6-5:

Model 200EH/EM Basic Unit Specifications ..................................................................................3
Analog Output Data Type Default Settings..................................................................................11
Analog Output Pin-Outs...............................................................................................................11
Status Output Signals ..................................................................................................................12
Control Input Signals ...................................................................................................................13
Inlet / Outlet Connector Nomenclature ........................................................................................15
NIST-SRM's Available for Traceability of NOx Calibration Gases ................................................17
Front Panel Display During System Warm-Up ............................................................................22
Possible Warning Messages at Start-Up .....................................................................................23
Zero/Span Valve States...............................................................................................................42
Two-Point Span Valve Operating States .....................................................................................43
Contents of Zero Air Scrubber Maintenance Kit ..........................................................................48
Dryer and NH3 Removal Options.................................................................................................51
Alarm Relay Output Assignments................................................................................................51
Concentration Alarm Relay Output Operation .............................................................................52
Analyzer Operating modes ..........................................................................................................56
Test Functions Defined................................................................................................................57
List of Warning Messages Revision F.0 ......................................................................................59
Primary Setup Mode Features and Functions .............................................................................61
Secondary Setup Mode Features and Functions ........................................................................61

x
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
Table 6-6:
Table 6-7:
Table 6-8:
Table 6-9:
Table 6-10:
Table 6-11:
Table 6-12:
Table 6-13:
Table 6-14:
Table 6-15:
Table 6-16:
Table 6-17:
Table 6-18:
Table 6-19:
Table 6-20:
Table 6-21:
Table 6-22:
Table 6-23:
Table 6-24:
Table 6-25:
Table 6-26:
Table 6-27:
Table 6-28:
Table 6-30:
Table 6-31:
Table 6-32:
Table 6-33:
Table 6-34:
Table 6-28:
Table 6-35:
Table 6-36:
Table 7-1:
Table 7-2:
Table 7-3:
Table 7-4:
Table 7-5:
Table 9-1:
Table 9-2:
Table 10-1:
Table 10-2:
Table 10-3:
Table 10-4:
Table 10-5:
Table 10-6:
Table 11-1:
Table 11-2:
Table 11-3:
Table 11-4:
Table 11-5:
Table 11-6:
Table 11-7:
Table 11-8:
Table 11-9:
Table 11-10:
Table 11-11:
Table 12-1:
Table 12-2:

List of Tables

Front Panel LED Status Indicators for iDAS................................................................................63
iDAS Data Channel Properties ....................................................................................................64
iDAS Data Parameter Functions..................................................................................................65
M200EH/EM Default iDAS Configuration ....................................................................................67
Password Levels..........................................................................................................................82
Ethernet Status Indicators ...........................................................................................................91
LAN/Internet Configuration Properties.........................................................................................92
Internet Configuration Keypad Functions ....................................................................................96
COMM Port Communication modes ............................................................................................99
Variable Names (VARS) ........................................................................................................... 103
M200EH/EM Diagnostic (DIAG) Functions............................................................................... 106
Analog Output Voltage Ranges with Over-Range Active ......................................................... 110
Analog Output Pin Assignments ............................................................................................... 110
Analog Output Current Loop Range ......................................................................................... 111
Example of Analog Output configuration for M200EH/EM ....................................................... 111
DIAG - Analog I/O Functions .................................................................................................... 113
Analog Output Data Type Default Settings............................................................................... 118
Analog Output iDAS Parameters Related to Gas Concentration Data..................................... 119
Voltage Tolerances for Analog Output Calibration ................................................................... 127
Current Loop Output Calibration with Resistor ......................................................................... 130
M200EH/EM Available Concentration Display Values ............................................................. 132
M200EH/EM Concentration Display Default Values................................................................. 133
Concentration Alarm Default Settings....................................................................................... 139
Control Input Pin Assignments ................................................................................................. 141
Terminal Mode Software Commands ....................................................................................... 143
Command Types....................................................................................................................... 143
Serial Interface Documents ...................................................................................................... 148
RS-232 Communication Parameters for Hessen Protocol ....................................................... 149
M200EH/EM Hessen Protocol Response Modes..................................................................... 151
M200EH/EM Hessen GAS ID List ............................................................................................ 152
Default Hessen Status Bit Assignments ................................................................................... 153
NIST-SRM's Available for Traceability of NOx Calibration Gases ............................................. 156
AutoCal Modes ......................................................................................................................... 169
AutoCal Attribute Setup Parameters......................................................................................... 169
Example Auto-Cal Sequence.................................................................................................... 170
Calibration Data Quality Evaluation .......................................................................................... 172
M200EH/EM Preventive Maintenance Schedule...................................................................... 176
Predictive Uses for Test Functions ........................................................................................... 177
List of Interferents ..................................................................................................................... 194
M200EH/EM Valve Cycle Phases ............................................................................................ 196
M200EH/EM Critical Flow Orifice Diameters and Gas Flow Rates .......................................... 200
Thermocouple Configuration Jumper (JP5) Pin-Outs............................................................... 216
Typical Thermocouple Settings For M200E Series Analyzers ................................................. 217
Front Panel Status LED’s ......................................................................................................... 224
Test Functions - Possible Causes for Out-Of-Range Values ................................................... 233
Relay Board Status LEDs ......................................................................................................... 237
AC Power Configuration for Internal Pumps (JP7) ................................................................... 254
Power Configuration for Standard AC Heaters (JP2) ............................................................... 255
Power Configuration for Optional AC Heaters (JP6) ................................................................ 256
DC Power Test Point and Wiring Color Code........................................................................... 257
DC Power Supply Acceptable Levels ....................................................................................... 257
Relay Board Control Devices.................................................................................................... 258
Analog Output Test Function - Nominal Values ....................................................................... 259
Status Outputs Pin Assignments ............................................................................................. 260
Example of HVPS Power Supply Outputs ................................................................................ 263
Static Generation Voltages for Typical Activities ...................................................................... 277
Sensitivity of Electronic Devices to Damage by ESD ............................................................... 278

xi
04521C (DCN5731)

LIST OF APPENDICES
APPENDIX A - VERSION SPECIFIC SOFTWARE DOCUMENTATION
APPENDIX A-1: M200EH/EM Software Menu Trees, Revision F.0
APPENDIX A-2: Setup Variables For Serial I/O, Revision F.0
APPENDIX A-3: Warnings and Test Functions, Revision F.0
APPENDIX A-4: M200EH/EM Signal I/O Definitions, Revision F.0
APPENDIX A-5: M200EH/EM iDAS Functions, Revision F.0
APPENDIX A-6: Terminal Command Designators, Revision F.0
APPENDIX B - M200EH/EM SPARE PARTS LIST
APPENDIX C - REPAIR QUESTIONNAIRE - M200EH/EM
APPENDIX D - ELECTRONIC SCHEMATICS

xii
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

M200EH/EM Documentation

1. M200EH/EM DOCUMENTATION
Thank you for purchasing the Model 200EH/EM Nitrogen Oxides Analyzer!
The documentation (part number 04521) for this instrument is available in several different formats:


Printed format, or;



Electronic format on a CD-ROM.

The electronic manual is in Adobe® Systems Inc. “Portable Document Format” (PDF). The Adobe® Acrobat
Reader® software, which is necessary to view these files, can be downloaded for free from the internet at
http://www.adobe.com/.
The electronic version of the manual has many advantages:


Keyword and phrase search feature



Figures, tables and internet addresses are linked so that clicking on the item will display the associated
feature or open the website.



A list of chapters and sections as well as thumbnails of each page are displayed to the left of the text.



Entries in the table of contents are linked to the corresponding locations in the manual.



Ability to print sections (or all) of the manual

Additional documentation for the Model 200EH/EM Nitrogen Oxides Analyzer is available from Teledyne
Instruments’ website at http://www.teledyne-api.com/manuals/


APICOM software manual, part number 03945



Multi-drop manual, part number 02179



DAS manual, part number 02837.

1.1. USING THIS MANUAL
This manual has the following data structures:
1.0 Table of Contents:
Outlines the contents of the manual in the order the information is presented. This is a good overview of the
topics covered in the manual. There is also a list of appendices, figures and tables. In the electronic version of
the manual, clicking on a any of these table entries automatically views that section.
2.0 Specifications and Warranty
A list of the analyzer’s performance specifications, a description of the conditions and configuration under which
EPA equivalency was approved and Teledyne Instruments’ warranty statement.
3.0 Getting Started
Concise instructions for setting up, installing and running your analyzer for the first time.
4.0 FAQ & Glossary:
Answers to the most frequently asked questions about operating the analyzer and a glossary of acronyms and
technical terms.
5.0 Optional Hardware & Software
A description of optional equipment to add functionality to your analyzer.
1
04521C (DCN5731)

M200EH/EM Documentation

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

6.0 Operation Instructions
Step by step instructions for operating the analyzer.
7.0 Calibration Procedures
General information and step by step instructions for calibrating your analyzer.
8.0 EPA Protocol Calibration
Because there is no single, standard method for EPA equivalency in application where high concentrations of
NOx are measured, no specific EPA calibration/validation method is included in this manual.
9.0 Instrument Maintenance
Description of preventative maintenance procedures that should be regularly performed on you instrument to
assure good operating condition. This includes information on using the iDAS to predict possible component
failures before they happen.
10.0 Theory of Operation
An in-depth look at the various principals by which your analyzer operates as well as a description of how the
various electronic, mechanical and pneumatic components of the instrument work and interact with each other.
A close reading of this section is invaluable for understanding the instrument’s operation.
11.0 Troubleshooting & Repair
This section includes pointers and instructions for diagnosing problems with the instrument, such as excessive
noise or drift, as well as instructions on performing repairs of the instrument’s major subsystems.
12.0 Electro-static Discharge Primer
This section describes how static electricity occurs; why it is a significant concern and; how to avoid it and avoid
allowing ESD to affect the reliable and accurate operation of your analyzer.
Appendices
For easier access and better updating, some information has been separated out of the manual and placed in a
series of appendices at the end of this manual. These include version-specific software menu trees, warning
messages, definitions of iDAS & serial I/O variables as well as spare part listings, repair questionnaire,
interconnect drawing, detailed pneumatic and electronic schematics.
NOTE
Throughout this manual, words printed in capital, bold letters, such as SETUP or ENTR
represent messages as they appear on the analyzer’s front panel display.

NOTE
The flowcharts in this manual contain typical representations of the analyzer’s display
during the various operations being described. These representations are not intended
to be exact and may differ slightly from the actual display of your instrument.

USER NOTES:

2
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Specifications, Approvals and Warranty

2. SPECIFICATIONS, APPROVALS AND WARRANTY
2.1. M200EH/EM OPERATING SPECIFICATIONS
Table 2-1:

Model 200EH/EM Basic Unit Specifications

Min/Max Range
(Physical Analog Output)

200EH: Min: 0-5 ppm; Max: 0-5000 ppm
200EM: Min: 0-1 ppm; Max: 0-200 ppm

Measurement Units

ppm, mg/m3 (user selectable)

Zero Noise

<20 ppb (RMS)

Span Noise

<0.2% of reading above 20 ppm

Lower Detectable Limit

40 ppb (2x noise as per USEPA)

Zero Drift (24 hours)

<20 ppb (at constant temperature and voltage.)

Zero Drift (7 days)

<20 ppb (at constant temperature and voltage.)

Span Drift (7 Days)

<1% of reading (at constant temperature and voltage.)

Linearity

1% of full scale

Precision

0.5% of reading

Lag Time

20 s

Rise/Fall Time

Gas Flow Rates

95% in <60 s (~10 s in NO only or NOX only modes)
200EH: -40 cm³/min sample gas through NO2 converter & sensor module
-250 cm3/min ± 10% though bypass manifold;
-290 cm³/min total flow
200EM: -250 cm³/min sample gas through NO2 converter & sensor module
O2 Sensor option adds 80 cm³/min to total flow though M200EH/EM when installed;

Temperature Range

5 - 40 C operating range

Humidity Range

0-95% RH non-condensing

Dimensions H x W x D

18 cm x 43 cm x 61 cm (7" x 17" x 23.6")

Weight, Analyzer

18 kg (40 lbs) without options

Weight, Ext Pump Pack

7 kg (16 lbs)

AC Power Rating

100 V, 50/60 Hz (3.25A);
115 V, 60 Hz (3.0 A);
220 - 240 V, 50/60 Hz (2.5 A)

Power, Ext Pump

100 V, 50/60 Hz (3.25A); 115 V, 60 Hz (3.0 A);
220 - 240 V, 50/60 Hz (2.5 A)

Environmental

Installation category (over-voltage category) II; Pollution degree 2

Analog Outputs

4 user configurable outputs

Analog Output Ranges

All Outputs: 0.1 V, 1 V, 5 V or 10 V
Three outputs convertible to 4-20 mA isolated current loop.
All Ranges with 5% under/over-range

Analog Output Resolution

1 part in 4096 of selected full-scale voltage (12 bit)

Status Outputs

8 Status outputs from opto-isolators, 7 defined, 1 spare

Control Inputs

6 Control inputs, 4 defined, 2 spare

Alarm outputs

2 relay alarms outputs (Optional equipment) with user settable alarm limits
- 1 Form C: SPDT; 3 Amp @ 125 VAC

Serial I/O

1x RS-232; 1x RS-485 or RS-232 (configurable)
Communication speed: 300 - 115200 baud (user selectable)

Certifications

CE: EN61326 (1997 w/A1: 98) Class A, FCC Part 15 Subpart B Section 15.107 Class A,
ICES-003 Class A (ANSI C63.4 1992) & AS/NZS 3548 (w/A1 & A2; 97) Class A.

3
04521C (DCN5731)

Specifications, Approvals and Warranty

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

2.2. CE MARK COMPLIANCE
Emissions Compliance
The Teledyne-Advanced Pollution Instrumentation Nitrogen Oxides Analyzers M200EH/EM, M200EH/EMH and
M200EH/EMM were tested and found to be fully compliant with:
EN61326 (1997 w/A1: 98) Class A, FCC Part 15 Subpart B Section 15.107 Class A, ICES-003 Class A (ANSI
C63.4 1992) & AS/NZS 3548 (w/A1 & A2; 97) Class A.
Tested on January 02-06, 2003 at CKC Laboratories, Inc., Report Number CE03-005.
Safety Compliance
The Teledyne-Advanced Pollution Instrumentation Nitrogen Oxides Analyzers M200EH/EM, M200EH/EMH and
M200EH/EMM were tested and found to be fully compliant with:
IEC 61010-1:90 + A1:92 + A2:95,
Tested on January 27-20, 2003.

2.3. WARRANTY
Warranty Policy (02024D)
Prior to shipment, T-API equipment is thoroughly inspected and tested. Should equipment failure occur, T-API
assures its customers that prompt service and support will be available.
COVERAGE
After the warranty period and throughout the equipment lifetime, T-API stands ready to provide on-site or in-plant
service at reasonable rates similar to those of other manufacturers in the industry. All maintenance and the first
level of field troubleshooting is to be performed by the customer.
NON-API MANUFACTURED EQUIPMENT
Equipment provided but not manufactured by T-API is warranted and will be repaired to the extent and according
to the current terms and conditions of the respective equipment manufacturers warranty.
GENERAL
During the warranty period, T-API warrants each Product manufactured by T-API to be free from defects in
material and workmanship under normal use and service. Expendable parts are excluded.
If a Product fails to conform to its specifications within the warranty period, API shall correct such defect by, in
API's discretion, repairing or replacing such defective Product or refunding the purchase price of such Product.
The warranties set forth in this section shall be of no force or effect with respect to any Product: (i) that has been
altered or subjected to misuse, negligence or accident, or (ii) that has been used in any manner other than in
accordance with the instruction provided by T-API, or (iii) not properly maintained.

4
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Specifications, Approvals and Warranty

THE WARRANTIES SET FORTH IN THIS SECTION AND THE REMEDIES THEREFORE ARE EXCLUSIVE
AND IN LIEU OF ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR PARTICULAR
PURPOSE OR OTHER WARRANTY OF QUALITY, WHETHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED. THE REMEDIES
SET FORTH IN THIS SECTION ARE THE EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES FOR BREACH OF ANY WARRANTY
CONTAINED HEREIN. API SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF OR RELATED TO THIS AGREEMENT OF T-API'S PERFORMANCE
HEREUNDER, WHETHER FOR BREACH OF WARRANTY OR OTHERWISE
Terms and Conditions
All units or components returned to Teledyne Instruments should be properly packed for handling and returned
freight prepaid to the nearest designated Service Center. After the repair, the equipment will be returned, freight
prepaid.

USER NOTES:

5
04521C (DCN5731)

04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Getting Started

3. GETTING STARTED
3.1. UNPACKING AND INITIAL SETUP
CAUTION
THE M200EH/EM WEIGHS ABOUT 17 KG (40 POUNDS) WITHOUT OPTIONS
INSTALLED. TO AVOID PERSONAL INJURY, WE RECOMMEND TO USE TWO
PERSONS TO LIFT AND CARRY THE ANALYZER.
1. Inspect the received packages for external shipping damage. If damaged, please advise the shipper
first, then Teledyne Instruments.
2. Included with your analyzer is a printed record of the final performance characterization performed on
your instrument at the factory. This record, titled Final Test and Validation Data Sheet (P/N 04413) is an
important quality assurance and calibration record for this instrument. It should be placed in the quality
records file for this instrument.
3. Carefully remove the top cover of the analyzer and check for internal shipping damage.
 Remove the set-screw located in the top, center of the Front panel.
 Remove the 2 screws fastening the top cover to the unit (one per side towards the rear).
 Slide the cover backwards until it clears the analyzer’s front bezel.
 Lift the cover straight up.
NOTE
Printed circuit assemblies (PCAs) are sensitive to electro-static discharges too small to
be felt by the human nervous system. Failure to use ESD protection when working with
electronic assemblies will void the instrument warranty.
See Chapter 12 for more information on preventing ESD damage.

CAUTION
NEVER DISCONNECT ELECTRONIC CIRCUIT BOARDS, WIRING HARNESSES OR
ELECTRONIC SUBASSEMBLIES WHILE THE UNIT IS UNDER POWER.

4. Inspect the interior of the instrument to make sure all circuit boards and other components are in good
shape and properly seated.
5. Check the connectors of the various internal wiring harnesses and pneumatic hoses to make sure they
are firmly and properly seated.
6. Verify that all of the optional hardware ordered with the unit has been installed. These are checked on
the paperwork (Form 04490) accompanying the analyzer.
7
04521C (DCN5731)

Getting Started

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

VENTILATION CLEARANCE: Whether the analyzer is set up on a bench or installed into an instrument rack, be
sure to leave sufficient ventilation clearance.
AREA

MINIMUM REQUIRED CLEARANCE

Back of the instrument

10 cm / 4 inches

Sides of the instrument

2.5 cm / 1 inch

Above and below the instrument.

2.5 cm / 1 inch

Various rack mount kits are available for this analyzer. See Chapter 5 of this manual for more information.

3.1.1. M200EH/EM LAYOUT
Figure 3-1 shows a top-down view of the analyzer. The shown configuration includes the Ethernet board, IZS
option, zero-air scrubber and an additional sample dryer. See Chapter 5 for optional equipment. Figure 3-2
shows the rear panel configuration with optional zero-air scrubber mounted to it and two optional fittings for the
IZS option. Figure 3-3, finally shows the front panel layout of the analyzer.

Figure 3-1:

M200EH/EM Layout

8
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Getting Started

AL1

ALARM OUT
AL2
AL3

AL4

NO C NC NO C NC NO C NC NO C NC

Figure 3-2:

M200EH/EM Rear Panel Layout

Figure 3-3:

M200EH/EM Front Panel Layout

9
04521C (DCN5731)

Getting Started

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

3.1.2. ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
Refer to Figure 3-2 for the location of the rear panel electrical and pneumatic connections.

3.1.2.1. Power Connection
Attach the power cord to the analyzer and plug it into a power outlet capable of carrying at least 10 A current at
your AC voltage and that it is equipped with a functioning earth ground.

CAUTION
CHECK THE VOLTAGE AND FREQUENCY LABEL ON THE REAR PANEL
OF THE INSTRUMENT (SEE FIGURE 3-2 FOR COMPATIBILITY WITH THE
LOCAL POWER BEFORE PLUGGING THE M200EH/EM INTO LINE POWER.
Do not plug in the power cord if the voltage or
frequency is incorrect.

CAUTION
POWER CONNECTION MUST HAVE FUNCTIONING GROUND
CONNECTION.
DO NOT DEFEAT THE GROUND WIRE ON POWER PLUG.
TURN OFF ANALYZER POWER BEFORE DISCONNECTING OR
CONNECTING ELECTRICAL SUBASSEMBLIES.
DO NOT OPERATE WITH COVER OFF.

The M200EH/EM analyzer can be configured for both 100-130 V and 210-240 V at either 50 or 60 Hz., To avoid
damage to your analyzer, make sure that the AC power voltage matches the voltage indicated on the rear panel
serial number label and that the frequency is between 47 and 63 Hz.

10
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Getting Started

3.1.2.2. Analog Output Connections
The M200H/EM is equipped with four analog output channels accessible through a connector on the back panel
of the instrument. Each of these outputs may be set to reflect the value of any of the instrument’s iDAS data
types. (see Table A-6 of M200EH/EM Appendix A – P/N 05147).
The following table lists the default settings for each of these channels. To change these settings, see Sections
6.13.4
Table 3-1:
PARAMETER
DATA TYPE

1

Analog Output Data Type Default Settings
CHANNEL DEFAULT SETTING

A1

A2

NXCNC1

NOCNC1

3

A3

A4

N2CNC1

NXCNC2

2

RANGE

0 - 5 VDC

REC OFS

0 mVDC

AUTO CAL.

ON

CALIBRATED

NO

OUTPUT

ON

SCALE

100 ppm

UPDATE

5 sec

1

See Table A-6 of M200EH/EM Appendix A for definitions of these iDAS data types

2

Optional current loop outputs are available for analog output channels A1-A3.

3

On analyzers with O2 sensor options installed, iDAS parameter O2CONC is assigned to output A4.

To access these signals attach a strip chart recorder and/or data-logger to the appropriate contacts of the analog
output connecter on the rear panel of the analyzer.
A1
+

-

Figure 3-4:
Table 3-2:

ANALOG OUT
A2
A3
+
+
-

A4

+

-

Analog Output Connector
Analog Output Pin-Outs

PIN

ANALOG OUTPUT

VOLTAGE SIGNAL

CURRENT SIGNAL

1

A1

V Out

I Out +

2
3

A2

Ground

I Out -

V Out

I Out +

4

Ground

I Out -

5

V Out

I Out +

Ground

I Out -

V Out

I Out +

Ground

I Out -

A3

6
7
8

A4

11
04521C (DCN5731)

Getting Started

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

3.1.2.3. Connecting the Status Outputs
If you wish to utilize the analyzer’s status outputs to interface with a device that accepts logic-level digital inputs,
such as programmable logic controller (PLC) chips, you can access them through a 12 pin connector on the
analyzer’s rear panel labeled STATUS.

Figure 3-5:

8

+

D
FOR PINS 1-8

7

EMITTER BUS

6

LOW SPAN

5

DIAGNOSTIC
MODE

4

SPAN CAL

3

ZERO CAL

2

HIGH RANGE

SYSTEM OK

1

CONC VALID

STATUS

Status Output Connector
NOTE

Most PLC’s have internal provisions for limiting the current the input will draw. When
connecting to a unit that does not have this feature, external resistors must be used to
limit the current through the individual transistor outputs to ≤50mA (120 Ω for 5V
supply).
Table 3-3: Status Output Signals
PIN #

STATUS

1

SYSTEM OK

ON if no faults are present.

CONDITION (ON = CONDUCTING)

2

CONC VALID

ON if concentration measurement (NO, NO2 or NOx) is valid.
OFF any time the hold-off feature is active.

3

HIGH RANGE

ON if unit is in high range of the Auto Range Mode.

4

ZERO CAL

ON whenever the instrument is in ZERO point calibration mode.

5

SPAN CAL

ON whenever the instrument is in SPAN point calibration mode.

6

DIAG MODE

7

LOW SPAN CAL

8

Unused

D

EMITTER BUS

ON whenever the instrument is in diagnostic mode.
ON when in low span calibration (optional equipment necessary)
The emitters of the transistors on pins 1-8 are tied together.

Unused
+

DC POWER

+ 5 VDC, 300 mA (combined rating with Control Output, if used).

Digital Ground

The ground level from the analyzer’s internal DC power supplies

12
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Getting Started

3.1.2.4. Connecting the Control Inputs
If you wish to use the analyzer to remotely activate the zero and span calibration modes, several digital control
inputs are provided through a 10-pin connector labeled CONTROL IN on the analyzer’s rear panel.
There are two methods for energizing the control inputs. The internal +5V available from the pin labeled “+” is
the most convenient method. However, if full isolation is required, an external 5 VDC power supply should be
used.
CONTROL IN

E

F

U

+

A
ZERO CAL

B

C

Figure 3-6:
Table 3-4:
STATUS DEFINITION

E

F

U

+

5 VDC Power
Supply

+

External Power Connections

Local Power Connections

INPUT #

D

LOW SPAN

D

SPAN CAL

C
LOW SPAN

B
SPAN CAL

ZERO CAL

A

CONTROL IN

Control Input Connector
Control Input Signals
ON CONDITION

A

REMOTE ZERO CAL

The analyzer is placed in Zero Calibration mode. The mode field of
the display will read ZERO CAL R.

B

REMOTE SPAN CAL

The analyzer is placed in Span Calibration mode. The mode field of
the display will read SPAN CAL R.

C

REMOTE LO SPAN CAL

The analyzer is placed in low span calibration mode as part of
performing a low span (midpoint) calibration. The mode field of the
display will read LO CAL R.

D

REMOTE RANGE HI

The analyzer is placed into high range when configured for dual
ranges..

E

SPARE

F

SPARE

U
+

Digital Ground

The ground level from the analyzer’s internal DC power supplies
(same as chassis ground).

External Power input

Input pin for +5 VDC required to activate pins A - F.

5 VDC output

Internally generated 5V DC power. To activate inputs A - F, place a
jumper between this pin and the “U” pin. The maximum amperage
through this port is 300 mA (combined with the analog output supply,
if used).

13
04521C (DCN5731)

Getting Started

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

3.1.2.5. Connecting the Serial Ports
If you wish to utilize either of the analyzer’s two serial interfaces, refer to Section 6.11 and 6.15 of this manual for
instructions on configuration and usage.

3.1.2.6. Connecting to a LAN or the Internet
If your unit has a Teledyne Instruments Ethernet card (Option 63), plug one end of a 7’ CAT5 cable into the
appropriate place on the back of the analyzer (see Figure 5-11 in Section 5.9.3) and the other end into any
nearby Ethernet access port.
NOTE:
The M200EH/EM firmware supports dynamic IP addressing or DHCP.
If your network also supports DHCP, the analyzer will automatically configure its LAN
connection appropriately,
If your network does not support DHCP, see Section 6.11.6.3 for instructions on
manually configuring the LAN connection.

3.1.2.7. Connecting to a Multidrop Network
If your unit has a Teledyne Instruments RS-232 multidrop card (Option 62), see Section 6.11.7 for instructions
on setting it up.
CAUTION
To prevent dust from getting into the analyzer, it was shipped with small plugs inserted
into each of the pneumatic fittings on the rear panel. Make sure that all dust plugs are
removed before attaching exhaust and supply gas lines.

14
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Getting Started

3.1.3. PNEUMATIC CONNECTIONS
NOTE
To prevent dust from getting into the analyzer, it was shipped with small plugs inserted
into each of the pneumatic fittings on the rear panel. Make sure that all dust plugs are
removed before attaching exhaust and supply gas lines.
Table 3-5:
REAR PANEL LABEL
SAMPLE
EXHAUST

Inlet / Outlet Connector Nomenclature
FUNCTION

Connects the sample gas to the analyzer. When operating the analyzer
without zero span option, this is also the inlet for any calibration gases.
Connects the exhaust of the analyzer with the external vacuum pump.

SPAN

On Units with zero/span valve or IZS option installed, this port connects the
external calibration gas to the analyzer.

ZERO AIR

On Units with zero/span valve or IZS option installed, this port connects the
zero air gas or the zero air cartridge to the analyzer.

Figure 3-7 and 3.8 show the internal pneumatic flow of the standard configuration of the M200EH and M200EM
respectively.

Figure 3-7:

M200EH Internal Pneumatic Block Diagram - Standard Configuration

15
04521C (DCN5731)

Getting Started

Figure 3-8:

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

M200EM Internal Pneumatic Block Diagram - Standard Configuration

Note:
Pneumatic Diagrams do not reflect the physical layout of the instrument.
The most significant differences between the M200EH and M200 EM versions in regards to pneumatic flow are:


A bypass line leading directly from the bypass manifold to the exhaust manifold is present on the
M200EH, but not in the M200EM.



The Diameter of the critical flow orifice controlling the gas flow into the sample chamber is smaller and
therefore the flow rate of sample gas through the instrument is lower.

See Section 10.3.2 for more information on these differences
See Chapter 5 for or information on the pneumatic flow though instruments with one of the M200Eh/Em’available
options installed.

3.1.3.1. Calibration Gases
Zero Air
Zero air or zero calibration gas is defined as a gas that is similar in chemical composition to the
measured medium but without the gas to be measured by the analyzer, in this case NO and NO2. If
your analyzer is equipped with an external zero air scrubber option, it is capable of creating zero air from
ambient air.

16
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Getting Started

If your application is not a measurement in ambient air, the zero calibration gas should be matched to
the matrix of the measured medium. Pure nitrogen could be used as a zero gas for applications where
NOX is measured in nitrogen. Special considerations apply if measuring NOX in a matrix that does not
contain oxygen, see Section 10.3.11 for more information.
span gas
A gas specifically mixed to match the chemical composition of the type of gas being measured at near
full scale of the desired measurement range. In this case, NOX, NO and NO2 measurements made with
the M200EH/EM, it is recommended that you use a span gas with an NO concentration equal to 80% of
the measurement range for your application.
EXAMPLE: If the application is to measure between 0 ppm and 500 ppm, an appropriate span gas
concentration would be 400 ppm NOx.
Even though NO gas in nitrogen could be used as a span gas, the matrix of the balance gas is different
and may cause interference problems or yield incorrect calibrations. The same applies to gases that
contain high concentrations of other compounds (for example, CO2 or H2O). The span gas should
match all concentrations of all gases of the measured medium as closely as possible.
Cylinders of calibrated NO gas traceable to NIST-standard reference materials specifications (also referred
to as EPA protocol calibration gases) are commercially available.

Table 3-6:

NIST-SRM's Available for Traceability of NOx Calibration Gases

NIST-SRM4

TYPE

NOMINAL
CONCENTRATION

2627a
2628a
2629a

Nitric Oxide (NO) in N2
Nitric Oxide (NO) in N2
Nitric Oxide (NO) in N2

5 ppm
10 ppm
20 ppm

1683b
1684b
1685b
1686b
1687b

Nitric Oxide (NO) in N2
Nitric Oxide (NO) in N2
Nitric Oxide (NO) in N2
Nitric Oxide (NO) in N2
Nitric Oxide (NO) in N2

50 ppm
100 ppm
250 ppm
5000 ppm
1000 ppm

2630
2631a
2635
2636a

Nitric Oxide (NO) in N2
Nitric Oxide (NO) in N2
Nitric Oxide (NO) in N2
Nitric Oxide (NO) in N2

1500 ppm
3000 ppm
800 ppm
2000 ppm

2656
2660a

Oxides of Nitrogen (NOx) in Air
Oxides of Nitrogen (NOx) in Air

2500 ppm
100 ppm

NOTE:
If a dynamic dilution system such as the Teledyne Instruments model 700 is used to
dilute high concentration gas standards to low, ambient concentrations, Make sure that:
The NO concentration of the reference gas matches the dilution range of the calibrator.
Choose a NO gas concentration that is in the middle of the dilution system’s range.

17
04521C (DCN5731)

Getting Started

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

3.1.3.2. Pneumatic Connections to M200EH/EM Basic Configuration:
Figures 3-7 and 3-8 show the most common configurations for gas supply and exhaust lines to the Model
200EH/EM Analyzer. Please refer to Figure 3-2 for the locations of pneumatic connections on the rear panel and
Table 3-5 for nomenclature.
NOTE
Sample and calibration gases should only come into contact with PTFE (Teflon) or glass
or materials. They should not come in contact with FEP or stainless steel materials.

VENT here if input

Source of

MODEL 700
Gas Dilution
Calibrator

is pressurized

SAMPLE GAS
Removed during
calibration

NOx Gas
(High Concentration)

SAMPLE

MODEL 701
Zero Gas
Generator

VENT

EXHAUST

MODEL
200EH/EM

PUMP

Figure 3-9:

Pneumatic Connections–Basic Configuration–Using Gas Dilution Calibrator
MODEL 701
Zero Gas
Generator

3-way Valve

Source of

SAMPLE GAS
Removed during
calibration

VENT here if input
is pressurized

NOX Gas
(High Concentration)

SAMPLE
EXHAUST

Manual
Control Valve
VENT

Figure 3-10:

MODEL
200EH/EM

PUMP

Pneumatic Connections–Basic Configuration–Using Bottled Span Gas

18
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Getting Started

1. Attach a 1/4" exhaust line between the external pump exhaust port of the analyzer.
2. Attach an additional 1/4" exhaust port of the pump.
CAUTION
The exhaust from the analyzer needs to be vented outside the shelter or immediate area
surrounding the instrument and conform to all safety requirements using a maximum of
10 meters of 1/4” PTFE tubing.
3. Attach a sample inlet line to the sample inlet port. Ideally, the pressure of the sample gas should be
equal to ambient atmospheric pressure.
NOTE
Maximum pressure of any gas at the sample inlet should not exceed 1.5 in-Hg above
ambient pressure and ideally should equal ambient atmospheric pressure.
In applications where the sample gas is received from a pressurized manifold, a vent
must be provided to equalize the sample gas with ambient atmospheric pressure before
it enters the analyzer. The vented gas needs to be routed outside the immediate area
or shelter surrounding the instrument.
4. Once the appropriate pneumatic connections have been made, check all pneumatic fittings for leaks
using a procedure similar to that defined in Section 11.5.1.

3.1.3.3. Connections with Internal Valve Options Installed
If your analyzer is equiped with either the zero/span valve option (50) or the 2-span point valve option(52), the
pneumatic connections should be made as shown in figures 3-11 & 3-12:

VENT here if input
VENT

at HIGH Span
Concentration

Calibrated NO

MODEL 700
Gas Dilution
Calibrator

MODEL 701
Zero Gas
Generator

is pressurized

Source of
SAMPLE Gas

PUMP

Sample
Exhaust
Span Point

External Zero
Air Scrubber

Figure 3-11:

Filter

Zero Air

MODEL
200EH/EM

Pneumatic Connections–With Zero/Span Valve Option (50)

19
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

On/Off
Valves

Source of
SAMPLE Gas

VENT
at LOW Span
Concentration

VENT here if input
is pressurized

PUMP
VENT

Calibrated NO

at HIGH Span
Concentration

Calibrated NO

Getting Started

Sample
Exhaust
High Span Point
Low Span Point

External Zero
Air Scrubber

Figure 3-12:

Filter

Zero Air

MODEL
200EH/EM

Pneumatic Connections–With 2-Span point Option (52) –Using Bottled Span Gas

Once the appropriate pneumatic connections have been made, check all pneumatic fittings for leaks using the
procedures defined in Section 11.5.

3.2. INITIAL OPERATION
CAUTION!
If the presence of ozone is detected at any time, call Teledyne API Customer Service as soon as possible:
800-324-5190 or email: api-customerservice@teledyne.com

If you are unfamiliar with the theory of operation of the M200EH/EM analyzer, we recommend that you read
Chapter 10 before proceeding. For information on navigating the analyzer’s software menus, see the menu
trees described in Appendix A-1.

3.2.1. STARTUP
After electrical and pneumatic connections are made, turn on the instrument and supply power to the external
pump.


The exhaust and PMT cooler fans should start.



The display should immediately display a single, horizontal dash in the upper left corner of the display.
This will last approximately 30 seconds while the CPU loads the operating system.

Once the CPU has completed this activity, it will begin loading the analyzer firmware and configuration data.
During this process, a string of messages will appear on the analyzer’s front panel display as shown in Figure
3-13. The analyzer should automatically switch to SAMPLE mode after completing the boot-up sequence and
start monitoring NOX, NO, NO2 gases.

20
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

SELECT START OR REMOTE

:

System waits 3 seconds
then automatically begins its
initialization routine.
No action required.

3

START

.

CHECKING FLASH STATUS

:

CHECKING FIRMWARE STATUS

1

:

System is checking the format
of the instrument’s flash
memory chip.

1

STARTING INSTRUMENT CODE

:

1

STARTING INSTRUMENT W/FLASH

:

1

Getting Started

System is checking the
firmware stored in the
instrument’s memory
If at this point,
**FLASH FORMAT INVALID**
appears, contact Teledyne Instruments
customer service

The instrument is loading
configuration and calibration
data from the flash chip

The instrument is loading
the analyzer firmware.

M100E NOX ANALYZER
BOOT PROGRESS [XXXXX 50%_ _ _ _ _]

SOFTWARE REVISION X.X
BOOT PROGRESS [XXXXXXXX 75% _ _]

SAMPLE
TEST

SYSTEM RESET
CAL

NOX=XXX.X
CLR SETUP

The revision level of the firmware installed in your
analyzer is briefly displayed
The startup process may hesitate at this point if the
Ethernet option is installed, DHCP mode is turned on and
the instrument is not connected to a functioning network.

Firmware fully
booted

Press CLR to clear initial
warning messages.
(see Section 3.2.3)

Figure 3-13:

Front Panel Display During Startup Sequence

21
04521C (DCN5731)

Getting Started

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

3.2.2. WARM-UP
The M200EH/EM requires about 45 minutes warm-up time before reliable NOX, NO and NO2 measurements can
be taken. During that time, various portions of the instrument’s front panel will behave as follows.
Table 3-7:
NAME
Concentration
Field
Mode Field

COLOR

Front Panel Display During System Warm-Up
BEHAVIOR

SIGNIFICANCE

N/A

Switches between
NOX, NO and NO2

This is normal operation.

N/A

Displays blinking
“SAMPLE”

Instrument is in sample mode but is still in the process
of warming up (hold-off period is active).

Sample

Green

On

Unit is operating in sample mode, front panel display
is continuously updated.

Cal

Yellow

Off

The instrument’s calibration is not enabled.

Fault

Red

Blinking

The analyzer is warming up and out of specification for
a fault-free reading.

STATUS LEDs

See Figure 3-3 for locations

3.2.3. WARNING MESSAGES
During warm-up, internal temperatures and other parameters may be outside of specified limits. The software
will suppress most warning conditions for 30 minutes after power up.

SAMPLE
TEST

HVPS WARNING
CAL

SAMPLE

CLR

SAMPLE

MSG

HVPS WARNING
CAL

MSG

TEST deactivates warning
messages

SETUP

RANGE=200.0 PPM

< TST TST > CAL

TEST

MSG

NOX = 0.0

NO = 0.0
CLR

SETUP

NOX = 0.0
CLR

NOTE:
If the warning message persists after several attempts to
clear it, the message may indicate a real problem and not
an artifact of the warm-up period

SETUP

MSG activates warning
messages.
 keys replaced with
TEST key

Press CLR to clear the current
message.
If more than one warning is active, the
next message will take its place
Once the last warning has been
cleared, the analyzer returns to
SAMPLE mode

22
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Getting Started

The following table includes a brief description of the various warning messages that may appear after the
warm-up time. If warning messages persist after 30 minutes, investigate their cause using the troubleshooting
guidelines in Chapter 11. To view and clear warning messages, use the following key strokes:
Table 3-8: Possible Warning Messages at Start-Up
MESSAGE

DEFINITION

ANALOG CAL WARNING

The instrument’s A/D circuitry or one of its analog outputs is not
calibrated.

AZERO WRN XXX.X MV

The reading taken during the auto-zero cycle is outside of
specified limits. The value XXX.X indicates the auto-zero
reading at the time of the warning.

BOX TEMP WARNING

The temperature inside the M200EH/EM chassis is outside the
specified limits.

CANNOT DYN SPAN

Remote span calibration failed while the dynamic span feature
was ON

CANNOT DYN ZERO

Remote zero calibration failed while the dynamic zero feature
was ON.

CONFIG INITIALIZED

Configuration was reset to factory defaults or was erased.

CONV TEMP WARNING
DATA INITIALIZED
FRONT PANEL WARN
HVPS WARNING

NO2 converter temperature is outside of specified limits.
iDAS data and settings were erased.
Firmware is unable to communicate with the front panel.
High voltage power supply for the PMT is outside of specified
limits.

IZS TEMP WARNING

On units with IZS options installed: The permeation tube
temperature is outside of specified limits (if installed).

MANIFOLD TEMP WARN

Bypass manifold temperature is outside of warning limits.

O2 CELL TEMP WARN

O2 sensor cell temperature is outside of warning limits (if
installed).

OZONE FLOW WARNING
OZONE GEN OFF

Ozone flow is outside of specified limits.
Ozone generator is off, which is intentional for the warm-up
period. This is the only warning message that automatically
clears itself after warm up.

PMT TEMP WARNING

PMT temperature is outside of specified limits.

RCELL PRESS WARN

Reaction cell pressure is outside of specified limits.

RCELL TEMP WARNING

Reaction cell temperature is outside of specified limits.

REAR BOARD NOT DET

The CPU is unable to communicate with the motherboard.

RELAY BOARD WARN

The firmware is unable to communicate with the relay board.

SAMPLE FLOW WARN

The flow rate of the sample gas is outside the specified limits.

SYSTEM RESET

This message appears every time the analyzer was powered
up.

23
04521C (DCN5731)

Getting Started

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

3.2.4. FUNCTIONAL CHECK
After the analyzer’s components have warmed up for at least 30 minutes, verify that the software properly
supports any hardware options that were installed.
Check to make sure that the analyzer is functioning within allowable operating parameters. Appendix A and C
include a list of test functions viewable from the analyzer’s front panel as well as their expected values. These
functions are also useful tools for diagnosing performance problems with your analyzer (Chapter 11). The
enclosed Final Test and Validation Data Sheet (part number 04490) lists these values before the instrument left
the factory. To view the current values of these test functions press the  keys:

SAMPLE

A1:NXCNC1=100 PPM

< TST TST > CAL

Toggle  keys to
scroll through list of functions

1

default settings for user
selectable reporting range
settings.
2
Only appears if O2 sensor
option is installed.

NOX = XXX
SETUP

A1:NXCNC1=100 PPM1
A2:N0CNC1=100 PPM1
A3:N2CNC1=25 PPM1
A4:NXCNC2=100%1
NOX STB
SAMP FLOW
0ZONE FLOW
PMT
NORM PMT
AZERO
Refer to
HVPS
Section 6.2.1
RCELL TEMP
for definitions
BOX TEMP
PMT TEMP
of these test
MF TEMP
functions.
O2 CELL TEMP2
MOLY TEMP
RCEL
SAMP
NOX SLOPE
NOX OFFSET
NO SLOPE
NO OFFSET
O2 SLOPE2
O2 OFFSET2
TIME

24
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Getting Started

3.3. CALIBRATION
3.3.1. BASIC NOX CALIBRATION PROCEDURE
The initial calibration should be carried out using the same reporting range set up as used during the analyzer’s
factory calibration. This will allow you to compare your calibration results to the factory calibration as listed on
the Final Test and Validation Data Sheet.
The following procedure assumes that the instrument does not have any of the available zero/span (Z/S) or TwoPoint Span valve options installed. Chapter 7 contains instructions for calibrating instruments with these options.
If both available iDAS parameters for a specific gas type are being reported via the instruments analog outputs
e.g. NXCNC1 and NXCNC2, separate calibrations should be carried out for each parameter.


Use the LOW button when calibrating for NXCNC1



Use the HIGH button when calibrating for NXCNC2.

See Section 6.13.3 & 6.13.4 for more information on analog output reporting ranges

STEP 1 - Set Units:
To select the concentration units of measure press:
SAMPLE
< TST TST >

SETUP X.X

A1:NXCNC1=100PPM

NOX=XXX.X

CAL

SETUP

PRIMARY SETUP MENU

CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE

SETUP X.X
UNIT

Press this button to
select the
concentration units
of measure:

PPM

RANGE CONTROL MENU

DIL

SETUP X.X
PPB

EXIT

EXIT

CONC UNITS: PPM
ENTR EXIT

PPM or MGM

STEP 2 - Dilution Ratio:
25
04521C (DCN5731)

Getting Started

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

If the dilution ration option is enabled on your M200EH/EM and your application involves diluting the sample gas
before it enters the analyzer, set the dilution ration as follows:
SAMPLE
< TST TST >

A1:NXCNC1=100PPM
CAL

NOX=XXX.X
SETUP
SETUP X.X

SETUP X.X

UNIT

PRIMARY SETUP MENU

CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE

RANGE CONTROL MENU

DIL

EXIT

EXIT
SETUP X.X
0

0

IL FACTOR:1.0 Gain
0

0

.0

ENTR EXIT

Toggle these
buttons to select the
dilution ratio factor

EXIT ignores the new setting
and returns to the previous
display.
ENTR accepts the new setting
and returns to the
previous display..

STEP 3 – Set NOx and NO span gas concentrations :
Set the expected NO and NOx span gas concentration. These should be 80% of range of concentration values
likely to be encountered in this application. The default factory setting is 100 ppm. If one of the configurable
analog outputs is to be set to transmit concentration values, use 80% of the reporting range set for that output
(see Section 6.13.4.5)
If you supply NO span gas to the analyzer as well as NOx, the values for expected NO and NOx span gas
concentrations need to be identical.
SAMPLE

A1:NXCNC1=100PPM

< TST TST >

SAMPLE
NOX

NOX=XXX.X

CAL

SETUP

GAS TO CAL:NOX
O2

ENTR EXIT

SAMPLE

RANGE TO CAL:LOW

LOW HIGH
M-P CAL

ENTR EXIT
A1:NXCNC1 =100PPM

NOX=X.XXX

 ZERO SPAN CONC

M-P CAL
NOX

CONCENTRATION MENU
NO CONV

M-P CAL
0

The NOX & NO span concentration
values automatically default to
80.0 Conc.
If this is not the the concentration of
the span gas being used, toggle
these buttons to set the correct
concentration of the NO X and NO
calibration gases.

EXIT

EXIT

NOX SPAN CONC:80.0 Conc
0

8

0

.0

ENTR EXIT

EXIT ignores the new
setting and returns to
the previous display.

ENTR accepts the new
setting and returns to
the
CONCENTRATION
MENU.
If using NO span gas
in addition to NOX
repeat last step.

26
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Getting Started

STEP 4 – Zero/Span Calibration :
To perform the zero/span calibration procedure:
SAMPLE
Analyzer continues to
cycle through NOx,
NO, and NO2
measurements
throughout this
procedure.

A1:NXCNC1=100PPM

< TST TST >

NOX=XXX.X

CAL

SETUP

Toggle TST> button until ...

SAMPLE

NOX STB= XXX.X PPM

< TST TST >

Set the Display to show
the NOX STB test
function.
This function calculates
the stability of the NO/NOx
measurement

NOX=XXX.X

CAL

SETUP

Allow zero gas to enter the sample port
at the rear of the analyzer.

Wait until NOX STB
falls below 0.5 ppm.
This may take several
minutes.

SAMPLE

NOX STB= XXX.X PPM

< TST TST >

SAMPLE
NOX

NOX=XXX.X

CAL

SETUP

GAS TO CAL:NOX

O2

ENTR EXIT

SAMPLE

RANGE TO CAL:LOW

LOW HIGH

M-P CAL

ENTR EXIT

NOX STB= XXX.X PPM



M-P CAL

NOX=XXX.X

ZERO CONC

NOX STB= XXX.X PPM

 ENTR

EXIT

NOX=X.XXX

CONC

EXIT

Allow span gas to enter the sample port
at the rear of the analyzer.

Press ENTR to changes
the OFFSET & SLOPE
values for both the NO
and NOx measurements.
Press EXIT to leave the
calibration unchanged and
return to the previous
menu.

Wait until NOX STB
falls below 0.5 ppm.
This may take several
minutes.

SAMPLE

NOX STB= XXX.X PPM

< TST TST >

SAMPLE
NOX

You may see both keys.
If either the ZERO or SPAN
buttons fail to appear see
Section 11 for
troubleshooting tips.

SETUP

GAS TO CAL:NOX
O2

ENTR EXIT

SAMPLE
The SPAN key now appears
during the transition from
zero to span.

CAL

RANGE TO CAL:LOW

LOW HIGH

M-P CAL

ENTR EXIT

NOX STB= XXX.X PPM

 ZERO SPAN CONC

M-P CAL

NOX STB= XXX.X PPM

 ENTR

M-P CAL

NOX=XXX.X

CONC

NOX STB= XXX.X PPM

 ENTR

CONC

NOX=X.XXX
EXIT

NOX=X.XXX
EXIT

NOX=X.XXX
EXIT

Press ENTR to changes
the OFFSET & SLOPE
values for both the NO
and NOx measurements.
Press EXIT to leave the
calibration unchanged and
return to the previous
menu.

EXIT at this point
returns to the
SAMPLE menu.

27
04521C (DCN5731)

Getting Started

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

3.3.2. BASIC O2 SENSOR CALIBRATION PROCEDURE
If your instrument has an O2 sensor option installed that should be calibrated as well.

3.3.2.1. O2 Calibration Setup
The pneumatic connections for calibrating are as follows:
VENT here if input

Source of

is pressurized

Removed during
calibration

at HIGH Span
Concentration

at 20.8% Span
Concentration

3-way
Valve
Calibrated O2

Calibrated N2

SAMPLE GAS

SAMPLE
EXHAUST

Manual
Control Valve
VENT

Figure 3-14:

MODEL
200EH/EM

PUMP

O2 Sensor Calibration Set Up

O2 SENSOR ZERO GAS: Teledyne Instruments’ recommends using pure N2 when calibration the zero point of
your O2 sensor option.
O2 SENSOR SPAN GAS: Teledyne Instruments’ recommends using 21% O2 in N2 when calibration the span
point of your O2 sensor option.

3.3.2.2. O2 Calibration Method
STEP 1 – Set O2 span gas concentration :
Set the expected O2 span gas concentration.
This should be equal to the percent concentration of the O2 span gas of the selected reporting range (default
factory setting = 20.8%; the approximate O2 content of ambient air).

28
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Getting Started

STEP 2 – activate O2 sensor stability function
To change the stability test function from NOx concentration to the O2 sensor output, press:

SAMPLE

A1:NXCNC1=100PPM

< TST TST >

SETUP X.X

NOX=XXX.X

CAL

SETUP

COMM

0) DAS_HOLD_OFF=15.0 Minutes

 JUMP

EDIT PRNT EXIT

PRIMARY SETUP MENU

CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE

SETUP X.X

SETUP X.X

EXIT

Continue pressing NEXT until ...

SECONDARY SETUP MENU

VARS DIAG

ALRM

EXIT

SETUP X.X

2) STABIL_GAS=NOX

 JUMP
SETUP X.X
8

1

EDIT PRNT EXIT

ENTER PASSWORD:818
8

ENTR EXIT

SETUP X.X
NO

NO2

SETUP X.X
NO

Press EXIT 3
times to return
to SAMPLE
menu

NO2

STABIL_GAS:NOX
NOX

O2

ENTR EXIT

STABIL_GAS:O2
NOX

O2

ENTR EXIT

NOTE
Use the same procedure to reset the STB test function to NOx when the O2 calibration
procedure is complete.

29
04521C (DCN5731)

Getting Started

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

STEP 4 – O2 ZERO/SPAN CALIBRATION :
To perform the zero/span calibration procedure:

30
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Getting Started

The Model 200EH/EM analyzer is now ready for operation.
NOTE
Once you have completed the above set-up procedures, please fill out the quality
questionnaire that was shipped with your unit and return it to Teledyne Instruments.
This information is vital to our efforts in continuously improving our service
and our products. Thank you.

3.3.3. INTERFERENCES FOR NOX MEASUREMENTS
The chemiluminescence method for detecting NOX is subject to interference from a number of sources including
water vapor (H2O), ammonia (NH3), sulfur dioxide (SO2) and carbon dioxide (CO2) but the Model 200EH/EM has
been designed to reject most of these interferences. Section 10.2.4 contains more detailed information on
interferences.
Ammonia is the most common interferent, which is converted to NO in the analyzer’s NO2 converter and creates
a NOX signal artifact. If the Model 200EH/EM is installed in an environment with high ammonia, steps should be
taken to remove the interferent from the sample gas before it enters the reaction cell. Teledyne Instruments
offers a sample gas conditioning option to remove ammonia and water vapor (Section 5.10).
Carbon dioxide diminishes the NOX signal when present in high concentrations. If the analyzer is used in an
application with excess CO2, contact Teledyne Instruments customer service for possible solutions. Excess
water vapor can be removed with one of the dryer options described in Section 5.10 In ambient air applications,
SO2 interference is usually negligible.
Interferences are discussed in more detail in Section 10.2.4.

USER NOTES:

31
04521C (DCN5731)

04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Frequently Asked Questions & Glossary

4. FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS & GLOSSARY
4.1. FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
The following list contains some of the most commonly asked questions relating to the Model 200EH/EM NOx
Analyzer.
Q: Why is the ZERO or SPAN key not displayed during calibration?
A: The M200EH/EM disables certain keys whenever the chosen value is out of range for that particular
parameter. In this case, the expected span or zero value is too different from the actually measured value
and the instrument does not allow to span or zero to that point. If, for example, the span set point is 80 ppm
and the measurement response is only .5 ppm, the SPAN button will not appear to prevent the user from
spanning to an out-of-range response curve. Chapter 11 describes this in detail.
Q: Why does the ENTR key sometimes disappear on the front panel display?
A: Sometimes the ENTR key will disappear if you select a setting that is invalid or out of the allowable range for
that parameter, such as trying to set the 24-hour clock to 25:00:00 or a M200EH reporting range to less than
more than 5000 ppm (200 ppm for a M200EM). Once you adjust the setting to an allowable value, the ENTR
key will re-appear.
Q: Why does the analyzer not respond to span gas?
A: There are several reasons why this can happen. Section 11.3.2 has some possible answers to this question.
Q: Can I automate the calibration of my analyzer?
A: Any analyzer with zero/span valve options can be automatically calibrated using the instrument’s AutoCal
feature.
Q: What do I do if the concentration on the instrument's front panel display does not match the value recorded or
displayed on my data logger even if both instruments are properly calibrated?
A: This most commonly occurs for one of the following reasons: (1) a difference in circuit ground between the
analyzer and the data logger or a wiring problem; (2) a scale problem with the input to the data logger. The
analog outputs of the analyzer can be manually calibrated to compensate for either or both of these effects,
see Section 6.13.4; analog outputs are not calibrated, which can happen after a firmware upgrade (Section
6.13.5).
Q: How do I measure the sample flow?
A: Sample flow is measured by attaching a calibrated flow meter to the sample inlet port when the instrument is
operating.


For the M200EH in its basic configuration, the sample flow should be 290 cm³/min 10%.



For the M200Em in its basic configuration, the sample flow should be 250 cm³/min 10%.

See Table 10-3 for more detailed information bout gas flow rates.
Chapter 11 includes detailed instructions on performing a check of the sample gas flow.
Q: How often do I need to change the particulate filter?
A: Once per week. Table 9-1 contains a maintenance schedule listing the most important, regular maintenance
tasks. Highly polluted sample air may require more frequent changes.
Q: How long does the sample pump last?

33
04521C (DCN5731)

Frequently Asked Questions & Glossary

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

A: The sample pump should last one to two years and the pump head should be replaced when necessary. Use
the RCEL pressure indicator on the front panel to see if the pump needs replacement. If this value goes
above 10 in-Hg-A, on average, the pump head needs to be rebuild.
Q: Do I need a strip chart recorder or external data logger?
A: No, the M200EH/EM is equipped with a very powerful internal data acquisition system (iDAS). Section 6.7
describes the setup and operation in detail.
Q: Why does my RS-232 serial connection not work?
A: There are many possible reasons: 1) the wrong cable, please use the provided or a generic “straight-through”
cable (do not use a “null-modem” type cable), 2) The DCE/DTE switch on the back of the analyzer is not set
properly; make sure that both green and red lights are on, 3) the baud rate of the analyzer’s COM port does
not match that of the serial port of your computer/data logger. See Section 11.5.11 more trouble-shooting
information.

4.2. GLOSSARY
Acronym – A short form or abbreviation for a longer term. Often artificially made up of the first letters of the
phrase’s words.
APICOM – Name of a remote control program offered by Teledyne-API to its customers
ASSY - Acronym for Assembly.
cm3 – metric abbreviation for cubic centimeter. Same as the obsolete abbreviation “cc”.
Chemical formulas used in this document:


CO2 – carbon dioxide



H2O – water vapor



HNO3 – nitric acid



NOX – nitrogen oxides, here defined as the sum of NO and NO2



NO – nitric oxide



NO2 – nitrogen dioxide



NOy – nitrogen oxides, often called odd nitrogen, the sum of NO, NO2 (NOX) plus other compounds
such as HNO3. Definitions vary widely and may include nitrate (NO3-), PAN, N2O and other
compounds.



NH3 – ammonia



O2 - molecular oxygen



O3 - ozone



SO2 – sulfur dioxide

DAS - Acronym for Data Acquisition System, the old acronym of iDAS
DIAG - Acronym for diagnostics, the diagnostic menu or settings of the analyzer
DHCP: acronym for dynamic host configuration protocol. A protocol used by LAN or Internet servers to
automatically set up the interface protocols between themselves and any other addressable device connected to
the network.
34
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Frequently Asked Questions & Glossary

DOC – Acronym for Disk On Chip, the analyzer’s central storage area for analyzer operating system, firmware,
and data. This is a solid state device without mechanical, moving parts that acts as a computer hard disk drive
under DOS with disk drive label “C”. DOC chips come with 8 mb space in the E-series analyzer standard
configuration but are available in larger sizes
DOS - Disk Operating System. The E-series analyzers use DR DOS
EEPROM - also referred to as a FLASH chip.
FEP - Acronym for Fluorinated Ethylene Propylene polymer, one of the polymers that du Pont markets as
Teflon® (along with PFA and PTFE).
FLASH - flash memory is non-volatile, solid-state memory.
I2C bus – read: I-square-C bus. A serial, clocked serial bus for communication between individual analyzer
components
IC – Acronym for Integrated Circuit, a modern, semi-conductor circuit that can contain many basic components
such as resistors, transistors, capacitors etc in a miniaturized package used in electronic assemblies.
iDAS - Acronym for Internal Data Acquisition System, previously referred to as DAS.
LAN - acronym for local area network
LED - Acronym for Light Emitting Diode.
PCA - Acronym for Printed Circuit Assembly, this is the  PCB with electronic components installed and ready
to use
PCB - Acronym for printed circuit board, the bare circuit board without components
PLC – Acronym for programmable logic controller, a device that is used to control instruments based on a logic
level signal coming from the analyzer
PFA – Acronym for Per-Fluoro-Alkoxy, an inert polymer. One of the polymers that du Pont markets as Teflon®
(along with FEP and PTFE).
PTFE – Acronym for Poly-Tetra-Fluoro-Ethylene, a very inert polymer material used to handle gases that may
react on other surfaces. One of the polymers that du Pont markets as Teflon® (along with FEP and PFA).
PVC – Acronym for Poly Vinyl Chloride, a polymer used for downstream tubing in the M200EH/EM.
RS-232 - An electronic communication protocol of a serial communications port
RS-485 - An electronic communication protocol of a serial communications port
TCP/IP - Acronym for Transfer Control Protocol / Internet Protocol, the standard communications protocol for
Ethernet devices and the Internet
VARS - Acronym for variables, the variables menu or settings of the analyzer

USER NOTES:

35
04521C (DCN5731)

04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Optional Hardware and Software

5. OPTIONAL HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE
This section includes a descriptions of the hardware and software options available for the Model 200EH/EM
Nitrogen Oxides Analyzer. For assistance with ordering these options please contact the sales department of
Teledyne - Advanced Pollution Instruments at:
TOLL-FREE:
TEL:
FAX:
E-MAIL:
WEB SITE:

800-324-5190
+1 858-657-9800
+1 858-657-9816
apisales@teledyne.com
http://www.teledyne-api.com/

5.1. EXTERNAL PUMPS (OPT 10)
The M200EH/EM comes equipped with an external pump specified upon ordering. Whereas the analyzer can
be re-configured for other voltages, operation at other than the original voltage/frequency may require a different
external pump. A variety of external pumps are available for the M200EH/EM series analyzers. The range of
available pump options meets all typical AC power supply standards while exhibiting the same pneumatic
performance.
TELEDYNE
INSTRUMENTS PART NO.

DESCRIPTION

009810300

External pump for 115 VAC / 60 Hz power supply

009810400

External pump for 230 VAC / 50 Hz power supply

009810500

External pump for 110 VAC / 50 Hz power supply

009810600

External pump for 100 VAC / 50 Hz power supply

009810700

External pump for 220-240 VAC / 50-60 Hz power supply

5.2. RACK MOUNT KITS (OPTS 20-23)
There are several options for mounting the analyzer in standard 19” racks. The slides are three-part extensions,
one mounts to the rack, one mounts to the analyzer chassis and the middle part remains on the rack slide when
the analyzer is taken out. The analyzer locks into place when fully extended and cannot be pulled out without
pushing two buttons, one on each side.
The rack mount brackets for the analyzer requires that you have a support structure in your rack to support the
weight of the analyzer. The brackets cannot carry the full weight of an analyzer and are meant only to fix the
analyzer to the front of a rack and to prevent it from sliding out of the rack through user intervention or vibration.
OPTION NUMBER
OPT 20A
OPT 20B
OPT 21
OPT 23

DESCRIPTION
Rack mount brackets with 26 in. chassis slides.
Rack mount brackets with 24 in. chassis slides.
Rack mount brackets only
Rack mount for external pump (no slides).

37
04521C (DCN5731)

Optional Hardware and Software

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

5.3. CARRYING STRAP HANDLE (OPT 29)
The chassis of the M200EH/EM analyzer allows to attach a strap handle for carrying the instrument (Figure 5-1).
The handle is located on the right side and pulls out to accommodate a hand for transport. When pushed in, the
handle is nearly flush with the chassis, only protruding out about 9 mm (3/8”).

Figure 5-1:

M200EH/EM with Carrying Strap Handle and Rack Mount Brackets
NOTE:

Installing the strap handle prevents the use of the rack mount slides, although the rack
mount brackets, Option 21, can still be used.

CAUTION
THE M200EH/EM WEIGHS ABOUT 17 KG (40 POUNDS) WITHOUT
OPTIONS INSTALLED.
TO AVOID PERSONAL INJURY:


WE RECOMMEND TWO PERSONS LIFT AND CARRY THE
ANALYZER.



MAKE SURE TO DISCONNECT ALL CABLES AND TUBING
FROM THE ANALYZER BEFORE CARRYING IT.

38
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Optional Hardware and Software

5.4. CURRENT LOOP ANALOG OUTPUTS (OPT 41)
This option adds isolated, voltage-to-current conversion circuitry to the analyzer’s analog outputs. This option
may be ordered separately for the first three of the analog outputs and can be installed at the factory or added
later. Call Teledyne Instruments sales for pricing and availability.
The current loop option can be configured for any output range between 0 and 20 mA (for example 0-20, 2-20 or
4-20 mA). Information on calibrating or adjusting these outputs can be found in Section 6.13.5.3.
Analog Output A2

J19
J 23

Voltage Output
Shunts installed

Voltage Output
Shunts installed

Current Loop Option
Installed on J21
(Analog Output A2)

Figure 5-2:

Current Loop Option Installed on the Motherboard

5.4.1. CONVERTING CURRENT LOOP ANALOG OUTPUTS TO STANDARD
VOLTAGE OUTPUTS.
NOTE
Servicing or handling of circuit components requires electrostatic discharge protection,
i.e. ESD grounding straps, mats and containers. Failure to use ESD protection when
working with electronic assemblies will void the instrument warranty.
See Chapter 12 for more information on preventing ESD damage.
To convert an output configured for current loop operation to the standard 0 to 5 VDC output operation:
5. Turn off power to the analyzer.
6. If a recording device was connected to the output being modified, disconnect it.
7. Remove the top cover
 Remove the set screw located in the top, center of the rear panel
 Remove the screws fastening the top cover to the unit (four per side).
 Lift the cover straight up.
8. Disconnect the current loop option PCA from the appropriate connector on the motherboard.

39
04521C (DCN5731)

Optional Hardware and Software

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

9. Place a shunt between the leftmost two pins of the connector (see Figure 5-1).
 6 spare shunts (P/N CN0000132) were shipped with the instrument attached to JP1 on the back of
the instruments keyboard and display PCA
10. Reattach the top case to the analyzer.
11. The analyzer is now ready to have a voltage-sensing, recording device attached to that output

5.5. PARTICULATE FILTER KIT (OPT 42A)
This option includes a one-year supply of 50 replacement, Teflon membrane, particulate filters, 47 mm in
diameter, 1 micrometer pore size. Operation of the particulate filter and weekly maintenance are mandatory on
the M200EH/EM.

5.6. OZONE SUPPLY FILTER (OPT 49)
This filter removes very fine particulates as well as nitric acid, sulfates, nitrates and other compounds from the
ozone supply air stream. The filter is pneumatically connected between ozone generator and reaction cell. The
corona discharge ozone generator produces small amounts of the above mentioned compounds, which may
deposit on the reaction cell walls and – over time – cause drift and non-linear response. Having this filter in line
minimizes these problems and maximizes the reaction cell cleaning intervals. The filter and its maintenance is
shown in detail in Section9.3.3. Refer to Figure 3-1 for location of this optional filter.

5.7. CALIBRATION VALVE OPTIONS
5.7.1. ZERO/SPAN VALVES (OPT 50)
The Model 200EH/EM NOx analyzer can be equipped with a zero/span valve option for controlling the flow of
calibration gases generated from external sources. This option contains two solenoid valves located inside the
analyzer that allow the user to switch either zero, span or sample gas to the instrument’s sensor.
The user can control these valves from the front panel keyboard either manually or by activating the instrument’s
CAL or AutoCal features (Section 7.7). The valves may also be opened and closed remotely through the serial
ports (Section 6.11) or through the external, digital control inputs (Section 6.15).
This option also includes a two-stage, external zero air scrubber assembly that removes all NO and NO2 from
the zero air source (ambient air). The scrubber is filled with 50% Purafil Chemisorbant® (for conversion of NO to
NO2) and 50% activated charcoal (for removal of NO2). This assembly also includes a small particle filter to
prevent scrubber particles to enter the analyzer as well as two more rear panel fittings so each gas can enter the
analyzer separately.
Figure 5-3 & 5-4 shows the internal, pneumatic layouts the zero/span valve option installed for a Model 200EH
and M200EM respectively.

40
04521C (DCN5731)

Optional Hardware and Software

EXHAUST MANIFOLD

NOX Exhaust
Scrubber

2-Stage
NOX Scrubber

O3 FLOW
SENSOR

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Filter

Figure 5-3:

M200EH – Internal Pneumatics with Zero-Span Valve Option 50

Figure 5-4:

M200EM – Internal Pneumatics with Zero-Span Valve Option 50

41
04521C (DCN5731)

Optional Hardware and Software

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
Table 5-1:

MODE

Zero/Span Valve States

VALVE

CONDITION

Sample/Cal

Open to sample gas inlet

Zero/Span

Open to zero air inlet

ZERO
CALIBRATION

Sample/Cal

Open to zero/span inlet (activated)

Zero/Span

Open to zero air inlet

SPAN
CALIBRATION

Sample/Cal

Open to zero/span inlet (activated)

SAMPLE

Zero/Span

Open to span gas inlet / IZS gas (activated)

The state of the zero/span valves can also be controlled:


Manually from the analyzer’s front panel by using the SIGNAL I/O controls located under the DIAG
Menu (Section 6.13.1),



By activating the instrument’s AutoCal feature (Section 7.7),



Remotely by using the external digital control inputs (Section 6.15.1.2) or Ethernet option.



Remotely through the RS-232/485 serial I/O ports (Section 6-11).

All supply lines should be vented outside of the analyzer’s enclosure. In order to prevent back-diffusion and
pressure drop effects, these vent lines should be between 2 and 10 meters in length.

5.7.2. SECOND RANGE SPAN VALVE (OPT 52)
This option includes a special set of valves that allows two separate NOx mixtures to enter the analyzer from two
independent sources. Typically these two gas mixtures will come from two, separate, pressurized bottles of
certified calibration gas: one mixed to produce a NO, NO2 or NOx concentration equal to the expected span
calibration value for the application and the other mixed to produce a concentration at or near the midpoint of the
intended measurement range. Individual gas inlets, labeled HIGH SPAN and LOW SPAN are provided at the
back on the analyzer.
The valves allow the user to switch between the two sources via keys on the front panel or from a remote
location by way of either the analyzer’s digital control inputs or by sending commands over it’s serial I/O port(s).
NOTE
The analyzer’s software only allows the SLOPE and OFFSET to be calculated when
sample is being routed through the HIGH SPAN inlet.
The LOW SPAN gas is for midpoint reference checks only.

The state of the optional valves can be controlled:


Manually from the analyzer’s front panel by using the SIGNAL I/O controls located under the DIAG
Menu (Section 6-13.1),



By activating the instrument’s CAL or AutoCal features (Section 7.7),



Remotely by using the external digital control inputs (Section 6.15.1.2) or Ethernet option.



Remotely through the RS-232/485 serial I/O ports (Section 6.11).

42
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Optional Hardware and Software

Table 5-2: Two-Point Span Valve Operating States
MODE

SAMPLE

ZERO
CAL

HIGH
SPAN
CAL

Low Span
Check

VALVE

CONDITION

Sample/Cal

Open to SAMPLE inlet

Zero Gas Valve

Closed to ZERO AIR inlet

High Span Valve

Closed to HIGH SPAN inlet

Low Span Valve

Closed to LOW SPAN inlet

Sample/Cal

Closed to SAMPLE inlet

Zero Gas Valve

Open to ZERO AIR inlet

High Span Valve

Closed to HIGH SPAN inlet

Low Span Valve

Closed to LOW SPAN inlet

Sample/Cal

Closed to SAMPLE inlet

Zero Gas Valve

Closed to ZERO AIR inlet

High Span Valve

Open to HIGH SPAN inlet

Low Span Valve

Closed to LOW SPAN inlet

Sample/Cal

Closed to SAMPLE inlet

Zero Gas Valve

Closed to ZERO AIR inlet

High Span Valve

Closed to HIGH SPAN inlet

Low Span Valve

Open to LOW SPAN inlet

43
04521C (DCN5731)

Optional Hardware and Software

Figure 5-5:

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

M200EH – Internal Pneumatics with Second Span Point Valve Option 52

44
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Optional Hardware and Software

Orifice Dia.
0.003"

HIGH
SPAN AIR
INLET

LOW
SPAN AIR
INLET

ZERO AIR
INLET

Span/Cal
Valve

NO/NOX
VALVE

BYPASS
MANIFOLD

VACUUM
PRESSURE
SENSOR

NO2
Converter

High Span
Valve

SAMPLE
PRESSURE
SENSOR

AUTOZERO
VALVE

Low Span
Valve

O3
Purifier

Zero Gas
Valve

Orifice Dia.
0.007"

GAS INPUT
MANIFOLD
EXHAUST
GAS
OUTLET

O3
GENERATOR

O3
Scrubber

REACTION
CELL

PMT

EXHAUST MANIFOLD

NOX Exhaust
Scrubber

O3 FLOW
SENSOR

SAMPLE
GAS
INLET

FLOW PRESSURE
SENSOR PCA

Orifice Dia.
0.004"

PUMP

Filter

Figure 5-6:

PERMAPURE
DRYER

INSTRUMENT CHASSIS

M200EM – Internal Pneumatics with Second Span Point Valve Option 52

5.8. OXYGEN SENSOR (OPT 65)
5.8.1. THEORY OF OPERATION
5.8.1.1. Paramagnetic measurement of O2
The oxygen sensor used in the M200EH/EM analyzer utilizes the fact that oxygen is attracted into strong
magnetic field, most other gases are not, to obtain fast, accurate oxygen measurements.
The sensor’s core is made up of two nitrogen filled glass spheres, which are mounted on a rotating suspension
within a magnetic field (Figure 5-7). A mirror is mounted centrally on the suspension and light is shone onto the
mirror that reflects the light onto a pair of photocells. The signal generated by the photocells is passed to a
feedback loop, which outputs a current to a wire winding (in effect, a small DC electric motor) mounted on the
suspended mirror.

45
04521C (DCN5731)

Optional Hardware and Software

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Oxygen from the sample stream is attracted into the magnetic field displacing the nitrogen filled spheres and
causing the suspended mirror to rotate. This changes the amount of light reflected onto the photocells and
therefore the output levels of the photocells. The feedback loop increases the amount of current fed into the
winding in order to move the mirror back into its original position. The more O2 present, the more the mirror
moves and the more current is fed into the winding by the feedback control loop.
A sensor measures the amount of current generated by the feedback control loop which is directly proportional
to the concentration of oxygen within the sample gas mixture (see Figure 5-7).

Figure 5-7:

Oxygen Sensor - Principle of Operation

5.8.1.2. Operation Within the M200EH/EM Analyzer
The oxygen sensor option is transparently integrated into the core analyzer operation. All functions can be
viewed or accessed through the front panel, just like the functions for NOX.


The O2 concentration is displayed in the upper right-hand corner, alternating with NOX, NO and NO2
concentrations.



Test functions for O2 slope and offset are viewable from the front panel along with the analyzer’s other
test functions.



O2 sensor calibration is performed via the front panel CAL function and is performed in a nearly
identical manner as the standard NOX/NO calibration. See Chapter 0 for more details.



Stability of the O2 sensor can be viewed (see 3.3.2.1)

The O2 concentration range is 0-100% (user selectable) with 0.1% precision and accuracy and is available to be
output via one of the instrument’s four user selectable analog outputs (see Section 6.13.4).
The temperature of the O2 sensor is maintained at a constant 50° C by means of a PID loop and can be viewed
on the front panel as test function O2 TEMP.
The O2 sensor assembly itself does not have any serviceable parts and is enclosed in an insulated canister.

5.8.1.3. Pneumatic Operation of the O2 Sensor
Pneumatically, the O2 sensor is connected to the bypass manifold and draws a flow of about 80 cm³/min in
addition to the normal sample flow rate (See Table 10.-3 for nominal sample inlet gas flow rates) and is
separately controlled with its own critical flow orifice located inside the vacuum manifold.
Figures 15-8 shows the internal pneumatics of the M200EH with the O2 Sensor installed.
Figures 15-9 shows the internal pneumatics of the M200EM with the O2 Sensor installed.
46
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Optional Hardware and Software

Figure 5-8:

M200EH – Internal Pneumatics with O2 Sensor Option 65

Figure 5-9:

M200EM – Internal Pneumatics with O2 Sensor Option 65

47
04521C (DCN5731)

Optional Hardware and Software

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

5.8.2. ZERO AIR SCRUBBER (OPT 64B)
This kit includes a zero air scrubber cartridge, which can be used to produce and supply zero air to the
analyzer’s ZERO inlet port. The cartridge mounts to the outside rear panel by means of two rubberized clips and
contains two chemicals, 50% volume of Purafil Chemisorbant to convert NO to NO2, followed 50% volume of
charcoal to absorb NO2.
The zero air scrubber exit contains a particle filter that retains any dust coming from the cartridge and connects
with a 0.25” PVC tubing to the ZERO inlet port. The chemicals need to be exchanged periodically (use Option
43) to prevent saturation and break-through of NOX into the zero air stream. This kit is recommended if no other
zero air source is available and if the analyzer is equipped with the zero/span valve option (Section 5.7.1). The
kit is included in the IZS option but not in the zero/span valve option.

5.8.3. ZERO AIR SCRUBBER MAINTENANCE KIT (OPT 43)
This kit includes the items needed to refurbish the external zero air scrubber.
Table 5-3:

Contents of Zero Air Scrubber Maintenance Kit

TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS PART
DESCRIPTION
NO.
005960000
Activated charcoal refill
®
059700000
Purafil Chemisorbant refill
1
FL0000001
Sintered filter for critical orifice port
FL0000003
Replacement particulate filter for zero air inlet fitting
1
OR0000001
O-Ring (qty:2) for critical orifice port
1
These items are required for units with IZS option only. They are used for rebuilding the IZS-exhaust critical flow
orifice on the analyzer’s exhaust manifold.

5.8.4. M200EH/EM EXPENDABLES KIT (OPT 42)
This kit includes a recommended set of expendables for one year of operation of the M200EH/EM. See
Appendix B for a detailed listing of the contents.

5.8.5. M200EH/EM SPARE PARTS KIT (OPT 43)
This kit includes a recommended set of spare parts for 2-3 years of operation of the M200EH/EM. It includes
items such as the orifice holder, a spare PMT and other items that are recommended as backups to minimize
down-time in case of component failures. See Appendix B for a detailed listing of the contents.

5.9. COMMUNICATION OPTIONS
5.9.1. RS232 MODEM CABLES (OPTS 60 AND 60A)
The analyzer can have come standard with a shielded, straight-through DB-9F to DB-9F cable of about 1.8 m
length, which should fit most computers of recent build. This cable can be ordered as Option 60.
Option 60A consists of a shielded, straight-through serial cable of about 1.8 m length to connect the analyzer’s
COM1 port to a computer, a code activated switch or any other communications device that is equipped with a
DB-25 female connector. The cable is terminated with one DB-9 female connector and one DB-25 male
connector. The DB-9 connector fits the analyzer’s COM1 port.

48
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Optional Hardware and Software

5.9.2. RS-232 MULTIDROP (OPT 62)
The multidrop option is used with any of the RS-232 serial ports to enable communications of up to eight
analyzers with the host computer over a chain of RS-232 cables via the instruments COM1 Port. It is subject to
the distance limitations of the RS 232 standard.
The option consists of a small printed circuit assembly, which is plugs into to the analyzer’s CPU card (see
Figure 5-10) and is connected to the RS-232 and COM2 DB9 connectors on the instrument’s back panel via a
cable to the motherboard. One option 62 is required for each analyzer along with one 6’ straight-through, DB9
male  DB9 Female cable (P/N WR0000101).
This option can be installed in conjunction with the Ethernet option (Option 63) allowing the instrument to
communicate on both types of networks simultaneously. For more information on using and setting up this
option see Section 6.11.7)

Rear Panel

CPU Card

(as seen from inside)

Multidrop
Card

Figure 5-10:

M200EH/EM Multidrop Card

5.9.3. ETHERNET (OPT 63)
The Ethernet option allows the analyzer to be connected to any Ethernet local area network (LAN) running
TCP/IP. The local area network must have routers capable of operating at 10BaseT. If Internet access is
available through the LAN, this option also allows communication with the instrument over the public Internet.
When installed, this option is electronically connected to the instrument’s COM2 serial port making that port no
longer available for RS-232/RS-485 communications through the COM2 connector on the rear panel. The
option consists of a Teledyne Instruments designed Ethernet card (see Figure 5-11), which is mechanically
attached to the instrument’s rear panel (see Figure 5-12). A 7-foot long CAT-5 network cable, terminated at both
ends with standard RJ-45 connectors, is included as well. Maximum communication speed is limited by the RS232 port to 115.2 kBaud.

49
04521C (DCN5731)

Optional Hardware and Software

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Figure 5-11:

Ethernet
Card

M200EH/EM Ethernet Card

CPU
Card

Rear Panel
(as seen from inside)

Female RJ-45
Connector

LNK LED
ACT LED
TxD LED
RxD LED

RE-232
Connector To
Motherboard

Interior View

Figure 5-12:

Exterior View

M200EH/EM Rear Panel with Ethernet Installed

This option can be installed in conjunction with the RS-2323 multidrop (option 62) allowing the instrument to
communicate on both types of networks simultaneously. For more information on using and setting up this
option see Section 6.11.6)

5.10. SAMPLE GAS CONDITIONERS (OPTS 86 & 88)
Several permeation devices using Nafion® permeation gas exchange tubes are available for applications with
high moisture and/or moderate levels of NH3 in the sample gas. This type of sample conditioner is part of the
standard M200EH/EM equipment to remove H2O and NH3 from the ozone generator supply gas stream but can
be purchased for the sample gas stream as well. All gas conditioners remove water vapor to a dew point of
about –20° C (~600 ppm H2O) and effectively remove concentrations of ammonia up to about 1 ppm. More
information about these dryers and their performance is available at http://www.permapure.com/.
The following options include the hardware required to install the dryers.

50
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
Table 5-4:

Optional Hardware and Software

Dryer and NH3 Removal Options

OPTION NUMBER

DESCRIPTION

STANDARD
EQUIPMENT

Single gas conditioner (dryer / NH3 removal) for ozone generator supply
gas stream only. Includes mounting bracket for two dryers (Option 86
mounts on the back).

OPT 86

Single gas conditioner (dryer / NH3 removal) for sample gas stream only.
Mounts on the back of the existing dryer bracket. Converts analyzer to
dual-conditioner instrument.

OPT 88

Single combination gas conditioner (dryer / NH3 removal) for both the
sample gas and ozone supply air. Replaces the standard dryer for O3
air and comes with mounting bracket.

The combination conditioner is a low-cost option for drying both the sample gas and ozone supply air with one
dryer. However, this dryer can only be used in applications where both sample and calibration gases (after
dilution) are at or near ambient and constant concentrations of oxygen (about 21%), because the ozone
generator needs a high and constant amount of oxygen to generate ozone properly. Stack applications or
industrial applications in which the sample gas has a significantly reduced or highly variable concentration of
oxygen need to use the separate dryer option 86. The combination conditioner needs to be specified upon
ordering the analyzer.

5.11. ALARM RELAY OPTION (OPT 67)
The M200EH/EM can be equipped with a set of 2 concentration alarms. Each alarm can be independently
enabled or disabled as well as programmed with its own, individual alarm limit point (see Section 6.14 for details
on programming the alarms).
The status of each alarm is available via a set of alarm relay outputs located on the lower right hand corner of
the analyzer’s rear panel (see Figure 3-2). While there are four relay outputs on the back of the analyzer, only
Two of the outputs correspond to the instrument’s two concentration alarms.

Table 5-5:
RELAY NAME
ASSIGNED ALARM
1

Alarm Relay Output Assignments

AL1

AL2

AL3

AL4

ST_SYSTEM_OK21

CONCENTRATION
ALARM 1

CONCENTRATION
ALARM 2

SPARE

ST_SYSTEM OK2 is a second system OK status alam available on some analyzers.

51
04521C (DCN5731)

Optional Hardware and Software

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

ALARM OUT
AL2
AL3

AL1

AL4

NO C NC NO C NC NO C NC NO C NC

ST_SYSTEM_OK2
(Optional Alert)

CONCENTRATION
ALARM 1

Figure 5-13:

CONCENTRATION
ALARM 2

SPARE

Alarm Relay Output Pin Assignments

Each of the two concentration relay outputs has 3-pin connections that allow the relay to be connected for either
normally open or normally closed operation. Table 5-6 describes how to connect the alarm relays.
Table 5-6

RELAY

FUNCTION

Concentration Alarm 1

AL2

Active

N
O

C

N
C

COMMENTS

Gas concentration level is above the trigger limit set for
CONC_ALARM_1
 iDAS Trigger CONCW1 ACTIVATED

Inactive

Gas concentration level is below the trigger limit set for
CONC_ALARM_1

Concentration Alarm 2

Gas concentration level is above the trigger limit set for
CONC_ALARM_2

Active

 iDAS Trigger CONCW2 ACTIVATED
 CONC ALARM2 WARN appears on Analyzer Display

Concentration Alarm 2

Inactive
1

RELAY PIN
1
STATE

 CONC ALARM1 WARN appears on Analyzer Display
Concentration Alarm 1

AL3

Concentration Alarm Relay Output Operation

Gas concentration level is below the trigger limit set for
CONC_ALARM_2

NO = Normally Open operation.
C = Common
NC = Normally Closed operation.

52
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Optional Hardware and Software

5.12. SPECIAL SOFTWARE FEATURES
5.12.1. MAINTENANCE MODE SWITCH
Teledyne Instruments analyzers are equipped with a switch that places the instrument in maintenance mode.
When present, the switch is accessed by opening the hinged front panel and is located on the rearward facing
side of the display/keyboard driver PCA; on the left side; near the particulate filter.
When in maintenance mode the instrument ignores all commands received via the COMM ports that alter the
operation state of the instrument This includes all calibration commands, diagnostic menu commands and the
reset instrument command. The instrument continues to measure concentration and send data when requested.
This feature is of particular use for instruments connected to multidrop or Hessen protocol networks.

5.12.2. SECOND LANGUAGE SWITCH
Teledyne Instruments analyzers are equipped with a switch that activates an alternate set of display messages
in a language other than the instrument’s default language. This switch is accessed by opening the hinged front
panel and is located on the rearward facing side of the display/keyboard driver PCA; on the right side.
To activate this feature, the instrument must also have a specially programmed Disk on Chip containing the
second language. Contact Teledyne Instruments Customer Service personnel for more information.

5.12.3. DILUTION RATIO OPTION
The dilution ration feature is a software option that is designed for applications where the sample gas is diluted
before being analyzed by the Model 200EH/EM. Typically this occurs in continuous emission monitoring (CEM)
applications where the quality of gas in a smoke stack is being tested and the sampling method used to remove
the gas from the stack dilutes the gas.
Once the degree of dilution is known, this feature allows the user to add an appropriate scaling factor to the
analyzer’s NO, NO2 and NOx concentration calculations so that the measurement range and concentration
values displayed on the instrument’s front panel display and reported via the instruments various outputs reflect
the undiluted values.
Contact Teledyne Instruments Customer Service personnel for information on activating this feature.
Instructions for using the dilution ratio option can be found in Section 6.8.1.

5.13. ADDITIONAL MANUAL (OPT 70)
Additional copies of the printed user’s manual can be purchased from the factory. Please specify the serial
number of your analyzer so that we can match the manual version.
This operators manual is also available on CD. The electronic document is stored in Adobe Systems Inc.
Portable Document Format (PDF) and is viewable with Adobe Acrobat Reader® software, which can be
downloaded for free at http://www.adobe.com/
The electronic version of this manual can also be downloaded for free at http://www.teledyne-api.com/manuals/.
Note that the online version is optimized for fast download and may not print with the same quality as the
manual on CD.

53
04521C (DCN5731)

Optional Hardware and Software

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

5.14. EXTENDED WARRANTY (OPTS 92 & 93)
Two options are available for extending the standard manufacturer’s warranty (Section 2.2). Both options have
to be specified upon ordering the analyzer.
OPTION NUMBER

DESCRIPTION

OPT 92

Extends warranty to cover a two (2) year period from the date of
purchase.

OPT 93

Extends warranty to cover a five (5) year period from the date of
purchase.

USER NOTES:

54
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Operating Instructions

6. OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
To assist in navigating the analyzer’s software, a series of menu trees can be found in Appendix A of this
manual.
NOTE
The flow charts appearing in this section contain typical representations of the
analyzer’s display during the various operations being described. These
representations may differ slightly from the actual display of your instrument.
The ENTR key may disappear if you select a setting that is invalid or out of the allowable
range for that parameter, such as trying to set the 24-hour clock to 25:00:00. Once you
adjust the setting to an allowable value, the ENTR key will re-appear.

6.1. OVERVIEW OF OPERATING MODES
The M200EH/EM software has a variety of operating modes. Most commonly, the analyzer will be operating in
SAMPLE mode. In this mode, a continuous read-out of the NO, NO2 and NOx concentrations are displayed on
the front panel and are available to be output as analog signals from the analyzer’s rear panel terminals. Also,
calibrations can be performed, and TEST functions and WARNING messages can be examined.
The second most important operating mode is SETUP mode. This mode is used for performing certain
configuration operations, such as for the iDAS system, configuring the reporting ranges, or the serial (RS232/RS-485/Ethernet) communication channels. The SET UP mode is also used for performing various
diagnostic tests during troubleshooting.

Mode Field

SAMPLE
 CAL

Figure 6-6-1:

NOX=050.1
SETUP

Front Panel Display

The mode field of the front panel display indicates to the user which operating mode the unit is currently running.

55
04521C (DCN5731)

Operating Instructions

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Besides SAMPLE and SETUP, other modes the analyzer can be operated in are:
Table 6-1:
MODE

Analyzer Operating modes
EXPLANATION

SAMPLE

Sampling normally, flashing text indicates adaptive filter is on.

M-P CAL

This is the basic calibration mode of the instrument and is activated
by pressing the CAL key.

SETUP X.#2

SETUP mode is being used to configure the analyzer. The gas
measurement will continue during this process.

SAMPLE A

Indicates that unit is in SAMPLE mode and AUTOCAL feature is
activated.

ZERO CAL M1

Unit is performing ZERO calibration procedure initiated manually by
the user.

ZERO CAL A1

Unit is performing ZERO calibration procedure initiated automatically
by the AUTOCAL feature.

ZERO CAL R1

Unit is performing ZERO calibration procedure initiated remotely
through the COM ports or digital control inputs.

LO CAL A

Unit is performing LOW SPAN (midpoint) calibration initiated
automatically by the analyzer’s AUTOCAL feature.

LO CAL R

Unit is performing LOW SPAN (midpoint) calibration initiated remotely
through the COM ports or digital control inputs.

SPAN CAL M1

Unit is performing SPAN calibration initiated manually by the user.

SPAN CAL A1

Unit is performing SPAN calibration initiated automatically by the
analyzer’s AUTOCAL feature.

SPAN CAL R1

Unit is performing SPAN calibration initiated remotely through the
COM ports or digital control inputs.

DIAG

One of the analyzer’s diagnostic modes is active (Section 6.13).

1

Only Appears on units with Z/S valve or IZS options.
The revision of the analyzer firmware is displayed following the word SETUP, e.g., SETUP
F.0.
2

The third operating mode is the CAL mode, which allows calibration of the analyzer in various ways. Because of
its importance, this mode is described separately in Chapter 7.

56
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Operating Instructions

6.2. SAMPLE MODE
This is the analyzer’s standard operating mode. In this mode, the instrument is analyzing NO and NOX and
calculating NO2 concentrations.

6.2.1. TEST FUNCTIONS
A series of test functions is available at the front panel while the analyzer is in SAMPLE mode. These
parameters provide information about the present operating status of the instrument and are useful during
troubleshooting (Section 11.1.2). They can also be recorded in one of the iDAS channels (Section 6.7) for data
analysis or output on one of the configurable analog outputs.
Table 6-2:
DISPLAY

PARAMETER

UNITS

Test Functions Defined
DESCRIPTION

A1:NXCNC1=100 PPM
Analog output
range
configuration

A2:N0CNC1=100 PPM

These functions show the default settings for the enabled analog
output channels. See section 6.13.4 for more information.

A3:N2CNC1=25 PPM
A4:NXCNC2=100%

The stability is a standard deviation of the NOX concentration over 25
samples, each recorded every 10 seconds. A low NOX STB value
indicates low variability in NOX.

NOX STB

STABILITY

PPM, MGM

SAMP FLW

SAMPLE FLOW

cm³/min (cc/m)

OZONE FL

OZONE

cm³/min (cc/m)

PMT

PMT Signal

MV

The raw output voltage of the PMT.

NORM PMT

NORMALIZED PMT
Signal

MV

The output voltage of the PMT after normalization for auto-zero offset and
temperature/pressure compensation (if activated).

AZERO

AUTO-ZERO

MV

The PMT signal with zero NOX, which is usually slightly different from 0 V.
This offset is subtracted from the PMT signal and adjusts for variations in
the zero signal.

HVPS

HVPS

V

The PMT high voltage power supply.

RCELL TEMP

REACTION CELL TEMP

C

The current temperature of the reaction cell.

BOX TEMP

BOX TEMPERATURE

C

The ambient temperature of the inside of the analyzer case.

PMT TEMP

PMT TEMPERATURE

C

The current temperature of the PMT.

IZS TEMP

IZS TEMPERATURE

1

C

The current temperature of the internal zero/span option. Only appears
when IZS option is enabled.

MOLY TEMP

CONV TEMPERATURE

RCEL

REACTION CELL
PRESSURE

in-Hg-A

The current gas pressure of the reaction cell as measured at the vacuum
manifold. This is the vacuum pressure created by the external pump.

SAMP

SAMPLE PRESSURE

in-Hg-A

The current pressure of the sample gas as it enters the reaction cell,
measured between the NO/NOx and Auto-Zero valves.

NOX SLOPE

NOx SLOPE

--

The slope of the current NOx calibration as calculated from a linear fit
during the analyzer’s last zero/span calibration.

NOX OFFS

NOx OFFSET

MV

The offset of the current NOx calibration as calculated from a linear fit
during the analyzer’s last zero/span calibration.

NO SLOPE

NO SLOPE

--

The slope of the current NO calibration as calculated from a linear fit
during the analyzer’s last zero/span calibration.

NO OFFS

NO OFFSET

MV

The offset of the current NO calibration as calculated from a linear fit
during the analyzer’s last zero/span calibration.

C

The flow rate of the sample gas through the reaction cell. This value is
not measured but calculated from the sample pressure.
Flow rate of the O3 gas stream as measured with a flow meter

The current temperature of the NO2 converter.

NO2

NO2 concentration

PPM, MGM

The current NO2 concentration in the chosen unit.

NOX

NOx concentration

PPM, MGM

The current NOx concentration in the chosen unit.

PPM, MGM

The current NO concentration in the chosen unit.

NO

NO concentration

TEST

TEST SIGNAL

MV

TIME

CLOCK TIME

hh:mm:ss

2

Signal of a user-defined test function on output channel A4.
The current day time for iDAS records and calibration events.

57
04521C (DCN5731)

Operating Instructions

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

SAMPLE

A1:NXCNC1=100 PPM

< TST TST > CAL

1

NOX = XXX
SETUP
1

Toggle  keys to
scroll through list of functions

1

Default settings for user
selectable reporting range
settings.
2
Only appears if O2 sensor
option is installed.

Figure 6-6-2:

A1:NXCNC1=100 PPM
1
A2:N0CNC1=100 PPM
1
A3:N2CNC1=25 PPM
1
A4:NXCNC2=100%
NOX STB
SAMP FLOW
0ZONE FLOW
PMT
NORM PMT
AZERO
Refer to
HVPS
Section
RCELL TEMP
BOX TEMP
6.2.1 for
PMT TEMP
definitions
MF TEMP
of these
2
O2 CELL TEMP
test
MOLY TEMP
functions.
RCEL
SAMP
NOX SLOPE
NOX OFFSET
NO SLOPE
NO OFFSET
O2 SLOPE2
2
O2 OFFSET
TIME

Viewing M200EH/EM TEST Functions

NOTE
A value of “XXXX” displayed for any of the TEST functions indicates an out-of-range
reading or the analyzer’s inability to calculate it.
All pressure measurements are represented in terms of absolute pressure. Absolute,
atmospheric pressure is 29.92 in-Hg-A at sea level. It decreases about 1 in-Hg per 300
m gain in altitude. A variety of factors such as air conditioning and passing storms can
cause changes in the absolute atmospheric pressure.

58
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Operating Instructions

6.2.2. WARNING MESSAGES
The most common instrument failures will be reported as a warning on the analyzer’s front panel and through
the COM ports. Section 11.1.2 explains how to use these messages to troubleshoot problems. Section 0 shows
how to view and clear warning messages.

Table 6-3: List of Warning Messages Revision F.0
MESSAGE
ANALOG CAL WARNING
AZERO WRN XXX.X MV
BOX TEMP WARNING
CANNOT DYN SPAN
CANNOT DYN ZERO
CONFIG INITIALIZED
CONV TEMP WARNING
DATA INITIALIZED
HVPS WARNING
IZS TEMP WARNING
OZONE FLOW WARNING
OZONE GEN OFF
PMT TEMP WARNING
RCELL PRESS WARN
RCELL TEMP WARNING
REAR BOARD NOT DET
RELAY BOARD WARN
SAMPLE FLOW WARN
SYSTEM RESET

MEANING
The instruments analog-to-digital converter (A/D) circuitry or one of the analog
outputs are not calibrated.
The reading taken during the Auto-zero cycle is outside the specified limits. The
value shown here as “XXX.X” indicates the actual auto-zero reading at the time of
the warning.
The temperature inside the M200EH/EM chassis is outside the specified limits.
Remote span calibration failed while the dynamic span feature was ON.
Remote zero calibration failed while the dynamic zero feature was ON.
Configuration storage was reset to factory configuration or was erased.
NO2 converter temperature is outside of specified limits.
iDAS data storage was erased.
High voltage power supply for the PMT is outside of specified limits.
On units with IZS option installed: The IZS temperature is outside of specified
limits.
Ozone flow is outside of specified limits.
Ozone generator is off. This is the only warning message that automatically
clears itself when the ozone generator is turned on.
PMT temperature is outside of specified limits.
Reaction cell pressure is outside of specified limits.
Reaction cell temperature is outside of specified limits.
The firmware is unable to communicate with the motherboard.
The firmware is unable to communicate with the relay board.
The flow rate of the sample gas is outside the specified limits.
The computer rebooted or was powered up.

To view and clear warning messages
SAMPLE
TEST deactivates warning
messages

TEST

A1:NXCNC1=100PPM
CAL

MSG

A1:NXCNC1=100PPM

SAMPLE

MSG

< TST TST > CAL

HVPS WARNING

SAMPLE
NOTE:
If the warning message persists
after several attempts to clear it,
the message may indicate a
real problem and not an artifact
of the warm-up period

Figure 6-6-3:

TEST

CAL

Make sure warning messages are
not due to real problems.

MSG

NOX=XXX.X
CLR

SETUP

NO=XXX.X
CLR

SETUP

NO2=XXX.X
CLR

SETUP

MSG activates warning
messages.
 keys replaced with
TEST key
All Warning messages are hidden,
but MSG button appears

Press CLR to clear the current
message.
If more than one warning is active, the
next message will take its place
Once the last warning has been
cleared, the analyzer returns to
SAMPLE mode

Viewing and Clearing M200EH/EM WARNING Messages

59
04521C (DCN5731)

Operating Instructions

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

6.3. CALIBRATION MODE
6.3.1. CALIBRATION FUNCTIONS
Pressing the CAL key switches the M200EH/EM into calibration mode. In this mode, the user can calibrate the
instrument with the use of calibrated zero or span gases.
If the instrument includes either the zero/span valve option or IZS option, the display will also include CALZ and
CALS keys. Pressing either of these keys also puts the instrument into multipoint calibration mode.


The CALZ key is used to initiate a calibration of the zero point.



The CALS key is used to calibrate the span point of the analyzer. It is recommended that this span
calibration is performed at 90% of full scale of the analyzer’s currently selected reporting range.

Because of their critical importance and complexity, calibration operations are described in detail in other
sections of the manual:


Chapter 7 details basic calibration and calibration check operations.

For more information concerning the zero/span, zero/span/shutoff valve options, see Section 5.7.

60
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Operating Instructions

6.4. SETUP MODE
The SETUP mode contains a variety of choices that are used to configure the analyzer’s hardware and software
features, perform diagnostic procedures, gather information on the instruments performance and configure or
access data from the internal data acquisition system (iDAS). The areas access under the Setup mode are:

Table 6-4: Primary Setup Mode Features and Functions
MODE OR FEATURE

KEYPAD
LABEL

Analyzer Configuration

CFG

DESCRIPTION

MANUAL
SECTION

Lists key hardware and software configuration information

6.5

Used to set up an operate the AutoCal feature. Only appears if
the analyzer has one of the internal valve options installed

7.7

Used to set up the iDAS system and view recorded data

6.7
6.8

Auto Cal Feature

ACAL

Internal Data Acquisition
(iDAS)

DAS

Analog Output Reporting
Range Configuration

RNGE

Used to set the units of measure for the display and set the
dilution ratio on instruments with that option active.

Calibration Password Security

PASS

Turns the password feature ON/OFF

6.9

Internal Clock Configuration

CLK

Used to Set or adjust the instrument’s internal clock

6.10

Advanced SETUP features

MORE

This button accesses the instruments secondary setup menu

See
Table 6-5

Table 6-5: Secondary Setup Mode Features and Functions

1

MODE OR FEATURE

KEYPAD
LABEL

External Communication
Channel Configuration

COMM

Used to set up and operate the analyzer’s various external I/O
channels including RS-232; RS 485, modem communication
and/or Ethernet access.

System Status Variables

VARS

Used to view various variables related to the instruments current
operational status

System Diagnostic Features
and
Analog Output Configuration

DIAG

Alarm Limit Configuration1

ALRM

DESCRIPTION

Used to access a variety of functions that are used to configure,
test or diagnose problems with a variety of the analyzer’s basic
systems.

MANUAL
SECTION
6.11 &
6.15
6.12

6.13

Most notably, the menus used to configure the output signals
generated by the instruments Analog outputs are located here.
Used to turn the instrument’s two alarms on and off as well as
set the trigger limits for each.

6.14

Only present if the optional alarm relay outputs (Option 67) are installed.

NOTE
Any changes made to a variable during one of the following procedures is not
acknowledged by the instrument until the ENTR Key is pressed
If the EXIT key is pressed before the ENTR key, the analyzer will beep, alerting the user
that the newly entered value has not been accepted.

61
04521C (DCN5731)

Operating Instructions

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

6.5. SETUP  CFG: VIEWING THE ANALYZER’S
CONFIGURATION INFORMATION
Pressing the CFG key displays the instrument configuration information. This display lists the analyzer model,
serial number, firmware revision, software library revision, CPU type and other information. Use this information
to identify the software and hardware when contacting customer service. Special instrument or software
features or installed options may also be listed here.
SAMPLE

A1:NXCNC1=100PPM

< TST TST > CAL
Press NEXT of PREV to move back
and forth through the following list
of Configuration information:
 MODEL NAME
 SERIAL NUMBER
 SOFTWARE REVISION
 LIBRARY REVISION

 iCHIP SOFTWARE REVISION1

 HESSEN PROTOCOL REVISION1

 ACTIVE SPECIAL SOFTWARE
OPTIONS1
 CPU TYPE
 DATE FACTORY CONFIGURATION
SAVED

SAMPLE

NOX=XXX.X
SETUP

PRIMARY SETUP MENU

CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE

SAMPLE
NEXT

EXIT

M100E NOX ANALYZER

PREV

EXIT

Press EXIT at
any time to
return to the
SAMPLE display
Press EXIT at
any time to
return to
SETUP menu

1

Only appears if relevant option of Feature is active.

6.6. SETUP  ACAL: AUTOMATIC CALIBRATION
Instruments with one of the internal valve options installed can be set to automatically run calibration procedures
and calibration checks. These automatic procedures are programmed using the submenus and functions found
under the ACAL menu.
A menu tree showing the ACAL menu’s entire structure can be found in Appendix A-1 of this manual.
Instructions for using the ACAL feature are located in the Section 7.7 of this manual along with all other
information related to calibrating the M200EH/EM analyzer.

62
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Operating Instructions

6.7. SETUP  DAS - USING THE DATA ACQUISITION SYSTEM
(iDAS)
The M200EH/EM analyzer contains a flexible and powerful, internal data acquisition system (iDAS) that enables
the analyzer to store concentration and calibration data as well as a host of diagnostic parameters. The iDAS of
the M200EH/EM can store up to about one million data points, which can, cover days, weeks or months of
valuable measurements. The data are stored in non-volatile memory and are retained even when the instrument
is powered off. Data are stored in plain text format for easy retrieval and use in common data analysis programs
(such as spreadsheet-type programs).
NOTE:
Please be aware that all stored data will be erased if the analyzer’s disk-on-chip, CPU
board or configuration is replaced/reset.
The iDAS is designed to be flexible. Users have full control over the type, length and reporting time of the data.
The iDAS permits users to access stored data through the instrument’s front panel or its communication ports.
Teledyne Instruments also offers APICOM, a program that provides a visual interface for configuration and data
retrieval of the iDAS or using a remote computer. Additionally, the analyzer’s four analog output channels can
be programmed to carry data related to any of the available iDAS parameters.
The principal use of the iDAS is logging data for trend analysis and predictive diagnostics, which can assist in
identifying possible problems before they affect the functionality of the analyzer. The secondary use is for data
analysis, documentation and archival in electronic format.

IDAS STATUS
The green SAMPLE LED on the instrument front panel, which indicates the analyzer status, also indicates
certain aspects of the iDAS status:

Table 6-6: Front Panel LED Status Indicators for iDAS
LED STATE

IDAS STATUS

Off

System is in calibration mode. Data logging can be enabled or disabled for this mode.
Calibration data are typically stored at the end of calibration periods, concentration data
are typically not sampled, diagnostic data should be collected.

Blinking

Instrument is in hold-off mode, a short period after the system exits calibrations. IDAS
channels can be enabled or disabled for this period. Concentration data are typically
disabled whereas diagnostic should be collected.

On

Sampling normally.

The iDAS can be disabled only by disabling or deleting its individual data channels.

63
04521C (DCN5731)

Operating Instructions

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

6.7.1. IDAS STRUCTURE
The iDAS is designed around the feature of a “record”, an automatically stored single data point. (e.g.
concentration, PMT signal level, etc.). Records are organized into data channels which are defined by
properties that characterize the:


Type of date recorded (e.g. concentration, PMT signal level, etc.);



Trigger event that causes the record to be made (e.g. every minute, upon exiting calibration mode,
etc.);



How many records to be stored, as well as;



How the information is to be stored (e.g. average over 1 hour, individual points, minimum value over
last 5 minutes, etc.).

The configuration of each iDAS channel is stored in the analyzer’s memory as a script, which can be edited from
the front panel or downloaded, edited and uploaded to the instrument in form of a string of plain-text lines
through the communication ports.

6.7.1.1. iDAS Channels
The key to the flexibility of the iDAS is its ability to store a large number of combinations of triggering events and
data parameters in the form of data channels. Users may create up to 20 data channels. For each channel one
triggering event is selected and one or all of the M200EH/EM’s 25 data parameters are allowed. The number of
parameters and channels is limited by available memory.
The properties that define the structure of an iDAS data channel are:

Table 6-7: iDAS Data Channel Properties
PROPERTY

DEFAULT

SETTING RANGE

The name of the data channel.

“NONE”

Up to 6 letters or digits1.

TRIGGERING
EVENT

The event that triggers the data channel to
measure and store the datum

ATIMER

Any available event
(see Appendix A-5).

NUMBER AND
LIST OF
PARAMETERS

A User-configurable list of data types to be
recorded in any given channel.

1 - PMTDET

Any available parameter
(see Appendix A-5).

000:01:00

000:00:01 to
366:23:59
(Days:Hours:Minutes)

100

1 to 1 million, limited by
available storage space.

OFF

OFF or ON

ON

OFF or ON

OFF

OFF or ON

NAME

REPORT PERIOD
NUMBER OF
RECORDS
RS-232 REPORT
CHANNEL
ENABLED
CAL HOLD OFF

DESCRIPTION

The amount of time between each channel data
point.
The number of reports that will be stored in the
data file. Once the limit is exceeded, the oldest
data is over-written.
Enables the analyzer to automatically report
channel values to the RS-232 ports.
Enables or disables the channel. Allows a channel
to be temporarily turned off without deleting it.
Disables sampling of data parameters while
2
instrument is in calibration mode .

1

More with APICOM, but only the first six are displayed on the front panel).

2

When enabled records are not recorded until the DAS HOLD OFF period is passed after calibration mode. DAS HOLD OFF set in
the VARS menu (see Section 6.12.)

64
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Operating Instructions

6.7.1.2. iDAS Parameters
Data parameters are types of data that may be measured by the analyzers instrumentality concentrations of
measured gases, temperatures of heated zones,, pressures and flows of the pneumatic subsystem as well as
calibration data such as slope and offset for each gas. For each Teledyne Instruments analyzer model, the list
of available data parameters is different, fully defined and not customizable (see Appendix A.5 for a list of
M200EH/EM parameters).
Most data parameters have associated measurement units, such as mV, ppm, cm³/min, etc., although some
parameters have no units. The only units that can be changed are those of the concentration readings
according to the SETUP-RANGE settings.
NOTE
The iDAS does not keep track of the unit of each concentration value and iDAS data files
may contain concentrations in multiple units if the unit was changed during data
acquisition.
Each data parameter has user-configurable functions that define how the data are recorded.

Table 6-8: iDAS Data Parameter Functions
FUNCTION
PARAMETER
SAMPLE MODE

EFFECT
Instrument-specific parameter name.

INST: Records instantaneous reading.
AVG: Records average reading during reporting interval.
MIN: Records minimum (instantaneous) reading during reporting interval.
MAX: Records maximum (instantaneous) reading during reporting interval.
SDEV: Records the standard deviation of the data points recorded during the reporting
interval.

PRECISION
STORE NUM.
SAMPLES

Decimal precision of parameter value(0-4).

OFF: stores only the average (default).
ON: stores the average and the number of samples in each average for a parameter.
This property is only useful when the AVG sample mode is used. Note that the
number of samples is the same for all parameters in one channel and needs to be
specified only for one of the parameters.

6.7.1.3. iDAS Triggering Events
Triggering events define when and how the iDAS records a measurement of any given data channel. Triggering
events are firmware-specific and are listed in Appendix A-5. The most common triggering events are:


ATIMER: Sampling occurs at regular intervals specified by an automatic timer. Trending information is
often stored via such intervals, as either individual datum or averaged.



EXITZR, EXITSP, SLPCHG (exit zero, exit span, slope change): Sampling at the end of an irregularly
occurring event such as calibration or when the slope changes. These events create individual data
points. Zero and slope values can be used to monitor response drift and to document when the
instrument was calibrated.



WARNINGS: Some data may be useful when stored if one of several warning messages appears. This
is helpful for trouble-shooting by monitoring when a particular warning occurred.

65
04521C (DCN5731)

Operating Instructions

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

6.7.2. DEFAULT IDAS CHANNELS
The M200EH/EM is configured with a basic iDAS configuration, which is enabled by default. New data channels
are also enabled by default but each channel may be turned off for later or occasional use. Note that iDAS
operation is suspended while its configuration is edited through the front panel. To prevent such data loss, it is
recommended to use the APICOM graphical user interface for iDAS changes.
A set of default data channels has been included in the analyzer’s software for logging nitrogen oxides
concentrations, calibration and predictive diagnostic data. They are:


CONC: Samples NOX, NO and NO2 concentration at one minute intervals and stores an average every
hour with a time and date stamp along with the number of (1-minute) samples within each average(for
statistical evaluation). Readings during calibration and calibration hold off are not included in the data.
By default, the last 800 hourly averages are stored.



CALDAT: Every time a zero or span calibration is performed CALDAT logs concentration, slope and
offset values for NOX and NO with a time and date stamp. The NOX stability (to evaluate calibration
stability) as well as the converter efficiency (for reference) are also stored. This data channel will store
data from the last 200 calibrations and can be used to document analyzer calibration. The slope and
offset data can be used to detect trends in (instrument response.



CALCHECK: This channel logs concentrations and the stability each time a zero or span check (not
calibration) is finished. This allows the user to track the quality of zero and span responses over time
and assist in evaluating the quality of zero and span gases and the analyzer’s noise specifications. The
last 200 data points are retained.



DIAG: Daily averages of temperature zones, flow and pressure data as well as some other diagnostic
parameters (HVPS, AZERO). These data are useful for predictive diagnostics and maintenance of the
M200EH/EM. The last 1100 daily averages are stored to cover more than four years of analyzer
performance.



HIRES: Records one minute, instantaneous data of all active parameters in the M200EH/EM. Shortterm trends as well as signal noise levels can be detected and documented. Readings during calibration
and the calibration hold off period are included in the averages. The last 1500 data points are stored,
which covers a little more than one day of continuous data acquisition. This data channel is disabled by
default but may be turned on when needed such as for trouble-shooting problems with the analyzer.

The default data channels can be used as they are, or they can be customized from the front panel or through
APICOM to fit a specific application. The Teledyne Instruments website contains this default and other sample
iDAS scripts for free download. We recommend that the user backs up any iDAS configuration and its data
before altering it.
NOTE
Teledyne-API recommends downloading and storing existing data and the iDAS
configurations regularly for permanent documentation and future data analysis.
Sending an iDAS configuration to the analyzer through its COM ports will replace the
existing configuration and will delete all stored data.

66
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Operating Instructions

Table 6-9: M200EH/EM Default iDAS Configuration
PARAMETERS
CHANNELS with PROPERTIES
Name: CONC
Event: ATIMER
Sample Period: 000:00:01
Report Period: 000:01:00
Number of Records: 800
RS-232 report: OFF
Channel enabled: ON
DAS HOLDOFF: ON

Name: CALDAT
Event: SLPCHG
Number of Records: 200
RS-232 report: OFF
Channel enabled: ON
DAS HOLDOFF: OFF

Name: CALCHECK
Event: EXITMP
Number of Records: 200
RS-232 report: OFF
Channel enabled: ON
DAS HOLDOFF: OFF

Name: CALCHECK
Event: EXITMP
Number of Records: 200
RS-232 report: OFF
Channel enabled: ON
DAS HOLDOFF: OFF

Name: HIRES
Event: ATIMER
Sample Period: 000:00:01
Report Period: 000:00:01
Number of Records: 1500
RS-232 report: OFF
Channel enabled: OFF
DAS HOLDOFF: OFF

NAME

MODE

EVENT

PRECISION

NUM
SAMPLES

NOXCNC1

AVG

--

4

ON

NOCNC1

AVG

--

4

OFF

N2CNC1

AVG

--

4

OFF

STABIL

AVG

--

4

OM

NXZSC1

--

SLPCHG

4

OFF

NOXSLP1
NOXOFFS1
NOZSC1

----

SLPCHG
SLPCHG
SLPCHG

4
4
4

OFF
OFF
OFF

NOSLP1
NOOFFS1
N2ZSC1
CNVEF1
STABIL

------

SLPCHG
SLPCHG
SLPCHG
SLPCHG
SLPCHG

4
4
4
4
4

OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF

NXZSC1

--

EXITMP

4

OFF

NOZSC1

--

EXITMP

4

OFF

N2ZSC1

--

EXITMP

4

OFF

STABIL

--

EXITMP

4

OFF

SMPFLW
O3FLOW

AVG
AVG

---

2
2

OFF
OFF

RCPRESS
SMPPRES
RCTEMP
PMTTMP
CNVTMP
BOXTMP

AVG
AVG
AVG
AVG
AVG
AVG

-------

2
2
2
2
2
2

OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF

HVPS
AZERO

AVG
AVG

---

2
2

OFF
OFF

NOXCNC1

AVG

--

4

OFF

NOCNC1
N2CNC1
STABIL
SMPFLW
O3FLOW
RCPRESS
SMPPRES

AVG
AVG
AVG
AVG
AVG
AVG
AVG

--------

4
4
4
2
2
2
2

OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF

RCTEMP
PMTTMP
CNVTMP
BOXTMP
HVPS
AZERO
REFGND

AVG
AVG
AVG
AVG
AVG
AVG
AVG

-------

2
2
2
2
1
2
1

OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF

REF4096

AVG

1

OFF

67
04521C (DCN5731)

Operating Instructions

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

6.7.2.1. Viewing iDAS Data and Settings
IDAS data and settings can be viewed on the front panel through the following keystroke sequence.
VIEW KEYPAD FUNCTIONS
SAMPLE

A1:NXCNC1=100PPM

< TST TST > CAL

EXIT will return to the
main SAMPLE Display.

SETUP X.X

SETUP

PRIMARY SETUP MENU

CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE

SETUP X.X

KEY

FUNCTION



Moves to the previous
Parameter

NX10

Moves the view forward 10
data points/channels

NEXT

Moves to the next data
point/channel

PREV

Moves to the previous data
point/channel

PV10

Moves the view back 10 data
points/channels

NOX=XXX.X

EXIT

DATA ACQUISITION

VIEW EDIT

EXIT

Keys only appear as needed
SETUP X.X
NEXT

SETUP X.X
PREV

NEXT

CONC : DATA AVAILABLE
VIEW

EXIT
SETUP X.X

287:10:00

PV10 PREV

NEXT NX10 

cc/m
EXIT

EXIT

PV10 PREV
SETUP X.X

PRM>

DIAG: DATA AVAILABLE

SETUP X.X

Default
setting for
HIRES is
DISABLED.

NEXT NX10 

CALDAT: DATA AVAILABLE

SETUP X.X

SETUP X.X

NXCNC1: XXX.X PPM

00:00::00 PMTDET=0000.0000 m


EXIT

HIRES: NO DATA AVAILABLE
EXIT

68
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Operating Instructions

6.7.2.2. Editing iDAS Data Channels
IDAS configuration is most conveniently done through the APICOM remote control program. The following list of
key strokes shows how to edit using the front panel.
SAMPLE

A1:NXCNC1=100PPM

NOX=XXX.X

< TST TST > CAL

EXIT will return to the
previous SAMPLE
display.

SETUP X.X

SETUP

PRIMARY SETUP MENU

CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE

SETUP X.X

EXIT

DATA ACQUISITION

VIEW EDIT

SETUP X.X
8

1

EXIT

ENTER DAS PASS: 818

8

ENTR EXIT

Edit Data Channel Menu
Moves the
display up &
down the list of
Data Channels

Inserts a new Data
Channel into the list
BEFORE the Channel
currently being displayed

Moves the display
between the
PROPERTIES for this
data channel.

SETUP X.X

0) CONC:

PREV NEXT

INS

ATIMER,
DEL EDIT

8,
PRNT

800
EXIT

Exits to the Main
Data Acquisition
Menu

Exports the
configuration of all
data channels to
RS-232 interface.
Deletes The Data
Channel currently
being displayed
SETUP X.X

NAME:CONC

 EDIT PRNT

Allows to edit the channel name, see next key sequence.

EXIT

EXITS returns to
the previous
Menu

Reports the configuration of current
data channels to the RS-232 ports.

When editing the data channels, the top line of the display indicates some of the configuration
parameters. For example, the display line:
0) CONC : ATIMER, 4, 800
Translates to the following configuration:
Channel No.: 0
NAME: CONC
TRIGGER EVENT: ATIMER
PARAMETERS: Four parameters are included in this channel
EVENT: This channel is set up to record 800 data points.

69
04521C (DCN5731)

Operating Instructions

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

To edit the name of a data channel, follow the above key sequence and then press:
FROM THE PREVIOUS KEY SEQUENCE …

SETUP X.X
 EDIT

SETUP X.X
C

NAME:CONC

O

PRINT

EXIT

NAME:CONC
N

C

-

-

ENTR

EXIT

ENTR accepts the new
string and returns to the
previous menu.
EXIT ignores the new
string and returns to the
previous menu.

Press each key repeatedly to cycle through the available character
set:
0-9, A-Z, space ’ ~ !  # $ % ^ & * ( ) - _ = +[ ] { } < >\ | ; : , . / ?

6.7.2.3. Trigger Events
To edit the list of data parameters associated with a specific data channel, press:
From the DATA ACQUISITION menu
(see Section 6.7.2.2)
Edit Data Channel Menu
SETUP X.X

0) CONC:

PREV NEXT

SETUP X.X


PRNT

800
EXIT

EXITS to the Main
Data Acquisition
menu

PRINT

EXIT

EVENT:ATIMER

SET> EDIT

SETUP X.X

DEL EDIT

8,

NAME:CONC

SET> EDIT

SETUP X.X
 EDIT

8,

800
EXIT

PRNT

PRINT

Exits to the main
Data Acquisition
menu

EXIT

Press SET> key until…

SETUP X.X
 EDIT

SETUP X.X

YES

PARAMETERS:

8

PRINT

EXIT

EDIT PARAMS (DELETE DATA)

NO returns to
the previous
menu and
retains all data.

NO

Edit Data Parameter Menu
Moves the
display between
available
Parameters

Inserts a new Parameter
before the currently
displayed Parameter

SETUP X.X
PREV NEXT

0) PARAM=DETREP, MODE=INST
INS

DEL EDIT

Deletes the Parameter
currently displayed.

EXIT

Exits to the main
Data Acquisition
menu

Use to configure
the functions for
this Parameter.

71
04521C (DCN5731)

Operating Instructions

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

To configure the parameters for a specific data parameter, press:
FROM THE EDIT DATA PARAMETER MENU
(see previous section)
SETUP X.X

0) PARAM=NXCNC!, MODE=AVG

PREV NEXT

SETUP X.X

INS

DEL EDIT

EXIT

PARAMETERS: NOCNC1
EXIT

SET> EDIT
SETUP X.X

PARAMETER: NXCNC1

PREV NEXT

ENTR

EXIT

Cycle through list of available
Parameters.

SETUP X.X


SAMPLE MODE: INST
EXIT

EDIT
SETUP X.X
INST

AVG

SAMPLE MODE: INST
MIN

MAX

EXIT

Press the key for the desired mode

SETUP X.X PRECISION:4


EDIT

EXIT

ENTR accepts the
new setting and
returns to the previous
menu.
EXIT ignores the new
setting and returns to
the previous menu.

SETUP X.X PRECISION: 4
1

EXIT

Set for 0-4

SETUP X.X STORE NUM. SAMPLES: OFF
 EDIT

DEL EDIT

8,
PRNT

PRINT

8500
EXIT

Exits to the main
Data Acquisition
menu.

EXIT

Press SET> key until you reach REPORT PERIOD (OR SAMPLE PERIOD) …

SETUP X.X
 EDIT

SETUP X.X

Set the number of days
between reports (0-366).

Press keys to set hours
between reports in the format :
HH:MM (max: 23:59). This is a
24 hour clock . PM hours are 13
thru 23, midnight is 00:00.
Example 2:15 PM = 14:15

0

0

SETUP X.X
0

REPORT PERIOD:000:01:00

1

PRINT

EXIT

REPORT PERIODD:DAYS:0
0

ENTR

EXIT

REPORT PERIODD:TIME:01:01
0

0

ENTR

EXIT

IIf at any time an illegal entry is selected (e.g., days > 366)
the ENTR key will disappear from the display.

ENTR accepts the new string and
returns to the previous menu.
EXIT ignores the new string and
returns to the previous menu.

74
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Operating Instructions

6.7.2.6. Number of Records
The number of data records in the M200EH/EM is limited to a cumulative one million data points in all channels
(one megabyte of space on the disk-on-chip). However, the actual number of records is also limited by the total
number of parameters and channels and other settings in the iDAS configuration. Every additional data channel,
parameter, number of samples setting etc. will reduce the maximum amount of data points somewhat. In
general, however, the maximum data capacity is divided amongst all channels (max: 20) and parameters (max:
50 per channel).
The iDAS will check the amount of available data space and prevent the user from specifying too many records
at any given point. If, for example, the iDAS memory space can accommodate 375 more data records, the
ENTR key will disappear when trying to specify more than that number of records. This check for memory space
may also make an upload of an iDAS configuration with APICOM or a Terminal program fail, if the combined
number of records would be exceeded. In this case, it is suggested to either try from the front panel what the
maximum number of records can be or use trial-and-error in designing the iDAS script or calculate the number of
records using the DAS or APICOM manuals. To set the number of records for one channel from the front panel,
follow the instruction shown in section 6.7.2.2 then press.
Edit Data
Channel
DATA ACQUISITION menu
From
the Menu
(see Section 6.7.2.2)

SETUP X.X

0) CONC:

PREV NEXT

INS

SETUP X.X
 EDIT

PRINT

EXIT

Press SET> key until…

SETUP X.X
 EDIT

SETUP X.X
YES

PRINT

EXIT

EDIT RECOPRDS (DELET DATA)

NO returns to the
previous menu.

NO

SETUP X.X
0

NUMBER OF RECORDS:000

0

REPORT PERIODD:DAYS:0
0

0

0

ENTR

EXIT

ENTR accepts the new
setting and returns to the
previous menu.
EXIT ignores the new setting
and returns to the previous
menu.

75
04521C (DCN5731)

Operating Instructions

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

6.7.2.7. RS-232 Report Function
The M200EH/EM iDAS can automatically report data to the communications ports, where they can be captured
with a terminal emulation program or simply viewed by the user.
To enable automatic COM port reporting, follow the instruction shown in section 6.7.2.2 then press:
From the DATA ACQUISITION menu
(see Section 6.7.2.2)

Edit Data Channel Menu
SETUP X.X
PREV NEXT

0) CONC:
INS

SETUP X.X
 EDIT

PRINT

EXIT

Press SET> key until…

SETUP X.X
 EDIT

SETUP X.X
Toggle key to turn
reporting ON or OFF

OFF

RS-232 REPORT: OFF
PRINT

EXIT

RS-232 REPORT: OFF
ENTR

EXIT

ENTR accepts the new
setting and returns to the
previous menu.
EXIT ignores the new setting
and returns to the previous
menu.

6.7.2.8. Compact Report
When enabled, this option avoids unnecessary line breaks on all RS-232 reports. Instead of reporting each
parameter in one channel on a separate line, up to five parameters are reported in one line, instead. For
example, channel DIAG would report its record in two lines (10 parameters) instead of 10 lines. Individual lines
carry the same time stamp and are labeled in sequence.

6.7.2.9. Starting Date
This option allows to specify a starting date for any given channel in case the user wants to start data acquisition
only after a certain time and date. If the Starting Date is in the past, the iDAS ignores this setting.

76
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Operating Instructions

6.7.2.10. Disabling/Enabling Data Channels
Data channels can be temporarily disabled, which can reduce the read/write wear on the disk-on-chip. The
HIRES channel of the M200EH/EM, for example, is disabled by default.
To disable a data channel, follow the instruction shown in section 6.7.2.2 then press:
From the DATA ACQUISITION menu
(see Section 6.7.2.2)

Edit Data Channel Menu
SETUP X.X

0) CONC:

PREV NEXT

INS

SETUP X.X
 EDIT

PRINT

EXIT

Press SET> key until…

SETUP X.X
 EDIT

PRINT

EXIT

CHANNEL ENABLE:ON

OFF

ENTR

EXIT

ENTR accepts the new
setting and returns to the
previous menu.
EXIT ignores the new setting
and returns to the previous
menu.

6.7.2.11. HOLDOFF Feature
The iDAS HOLDOFF feature allows to prevent data collection during calibrations and during the
DAS_HOLDOFF period enabled and specified in the VARS (Section 6.12). To enable or disable the HOLDOFF
for any one iDAS channel, follow the instruction shown in section 6.7.2.2 then press:
From the DATA ACQUISITION menu
(see Section 6.7.2.2)

Edit Data Channel Menu
SETUP X.X

0) CONC:

PREV NEXT

SETUP X.X
 EDIT

PRINT

EXIT

Press SET> key until…

SETUP X.X

CAL HOLD OFF:ON

SET> EDIT

SETUP X.X
Toggle key to turn
HOLDOFF ON or OFF

ON

PRINT

EXIT

CAL HOLD OFF:ON
ENTR

EXIT

ENTR accepts the new
setting and returns to the
previous menu.
EXIT ignores the new setting
and returns to the previous
menu.

77
04521C (DCN5731)

Operating Instructions

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

6.7.3. REMOTE IDAS CONFIGURATION
Editing channels, parameters and triggering events as described in 6.7 is much more conveniently done in one
step through the APICOM remote control program using the graphical interface shown in Figure 6-6-4. Refer to
Section 6.15 for details on remote access to the M200EH/EM analyzer.

Figure 6-6-4:

APICOM Graphical User Interface for Configuring the iDAS

Once an iDAS configuration is edited (which can be done offline and without interrupting DAS data collection), it
is conveniently uploaded to the instrument and can be stored on a computer for later review, alteration or
documentation and archival. Refer to the APICOM manual for details on these procedures. The APICOM user
manual (Teledyne Instruments part number 039450000) is included in the APICOM installation file, which can be
downloaded at http://www.teledyne-api.com/software/apicom/.
Although Teledyne Instruments recommends the use of APICOM, the iDAS can also be accessed and
configured through a terminal emulation program such as HyperTerminal (Figure 6-6-5). However, all
configuration commands must be created following a strict syntax or be pasted in from of a text file, which was
edited offline and then uploaded through a specific transfer procedure.

78
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Figure 6-6-5:

Operating Instructions

iDAS Configuration Through a Terminal Emulation Program

Both procedures are best started by downloading the default iDAS configuration, getting familiar with its
command structure and syntax conventions, and then altering a copy of the original file offline before uploading
the new configuration.
CAUTION
Whereas the editing, adding and deleting of iDAS channels and parameters of one
channel through the front-panel keyboard can be done without affecting the other
channels, uploading an iDAS configuration script to the analyzer through its
communication ports will erase all data, parameters and channels by replacing them
with the new iDAS configuration. It is advised to download and backup all data and the
original iDAS configuration before attempting any iDAS changes.

79
04521C (DCN5731)

Operating Instructions

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

6.8. SETUP  RNGE: RANGE UNITS AND DILUTION
CONFIGURATION
This Menu is used to set the units of measure to be associated with the analyzer’s reporting ranges (see Section
6.13.3.2. for more information on reporting ranges vs. physical ranges) and for instruments with the sample gas
dilution option operating, to set the dilution ratio.

6.8.1. RANGE UNITS
The M200EH/EM can display concentrations in parts per million (106 mols per mol, PPM) or milligrams per cubic
meter (mg/m3, MG). Changing units affects all of the display, COM port and iDAS values for all reporting ranges
regardless of the analyzer’s range mode. To change the concentration units:
SAMPLE

A1:NXCNC1= 100.0 PPM

NOX=XXX.X

< TST TST > CAL

SETUP X.X

SETUP

PRIMARY SETUP MENU

CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE

SETUP X.
UNIT

RANGE CONTROL MENU

DIL

SETUP X.X

Select the preferred
concentration unit.

EXIT

EXIT

CONC UNITS: PPM

PPM MGM

SETUP X.X

EXIT returns
to the main
menu.

ENTER EXIT

CONC UNITS: MGM

PPM MGM

ENTER EXIT

ENTR accepts
the new unit,
EXIT returns
to the SETUP
menu.

Conversion factors from volumetric to mass units used in the M200EH/EM:

NO: ppm x 1.34 = mg/m3
NO2: ppm x 2.05 = mg/m3
Concentrations displayed in mg/m3 and µg/m3 use 0° C and 760 Torr as standard temperature and pressure
(STP). Consult your local regulations for the STP used by your agency. EPA protocol applications, for example,
use 25° C as the reference temperature. Changing the units may cause a bias in the measurements if standard
temperature and pressure other than 0C and 760 Torr are used. This problem can be avoided by recalibrating
the analyzer after any change from a volumetric to a mass unit or vice versa.
CAUTION
In order to avoid a reference temperature bias, the analyzer must be recalibrated after
every change in reporting units.

80
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Operating Instructions

6.8.2. DILUTION RATIO
The dilution ratio is a software option that allows the user to compensate for any dilution of the sample gas
before it enters the sample inlet.
12. The SPAN value entered during calibration is the maximum expected concentration of the undiluted
calibration gas
13. The span gas should be either supplied through the same dilution inlet system as the sample gas or be
supplied at an appropriately lower actual concentration.
For example, with a dilution set to 100, a 1 ppm gas can be used to calibrate a 100 ppm sample gas if
the span gas is not routed through the dilution system.
On the other hand, if a 100 ppm span gas is used, it needs to pass through the same dilution steps as
the sample gas.
14. Set the dilution factor as a gain (e.g., a value of 20 means 20 parts diluent and 1 part of sample gas):
The analyzer will multiply the measured gas concentrations with this dilution factor and displays the
result.
SAMPLE

A1:NXCNC1=100PPM

NOX=XXX.X

< TST TST > CAL

SETUP

PRIMARY SETUP MENU

SETUP C.3

CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE

DIL only appears
if the dilution ratio
option has been
installed

Toggle these keys to
set the dilution factor.
This is the number by
which the analyzer will
multiply the NO, NO2
and NOx concentrations
of the gas passing
through the reaction
cell.

SETUP C.3
UNIT

RANGE CONTROL MENU

DIL

EXIT

SETUP C.3
0

0

0

EXIT ignores the
new setting.

DIL FACTOR: 1.0 GAIN
0

SETUP C.3
0

EXIT

1

.0

ENTR

EXIT

ENTR accepts the
new setting.

DIL FACTOR: 20.0 GAIN
2

0

.0

ENTR

EXIT

The analyzer multiplies the measured gas concentrations with this dilution factor and displays the result.
Calibrate the analyzer. Once the above settings have been entered, the instrument needs to be recalibrated
using one of the methods discussed in Chapter 0.

81
04521C (DCN5731)

Operating Instructions

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

6.9. SETUP  PASS: PASSWORD FEATURE
The M200EH/EM provides password protection of the calibration and setup functions to prevent unauthorized
adjustments. When the passwords have been enabled in the PASS menu item, the system will prompt the user
for a password anytime a password-protected function is requested.
There are three levels of password protection, which correspond to operator, maintenance, and configuration
functions. Each level allows access to all of the functions in the previous level.

Table 6-10: Password Levels
PASSWORD

LEVEL

MENU ACCESS ALLOWED

No password

Operator

TEST, MSG, CLR

101

Maintenance

CAL, CALZ, CALS

818

Configuration

SETUP, VARS, DIAG

To enable or disable passwords, press the following keystroke sequence:

SAMPLE
< TST TST >

SETUP X.X

A1:NXCNC1=100PPM

NOX=XXX.X

CAL

SETUP

PRIMARY SETUP MENU

CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE

SETUP X.X

Toggle this
button to
enable, disable
password
feasture

OFF

SETUP X.X
ON

EXIT

PASSWORD ENABLE: OFF
ENTR EXIT

PASSWORD ENABLE: ON
ENTR EXIT

Example: If all passwords are enabled, the following keypad sequence would be required to enter the SETUP
menu:

82
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
SAMPLE

A1:NXCNC1=100PPM

Operating Instructions
NOX=XXX.X

< TST TST > CAL

prompts for
password
number

SAMPLE

Press individual
keys to set
numbers

SAMPLE

0

8

SETUP

ENTER SETUP PASS: 0
0

0

ENTR

EXIT

ENTER SETUP PASS: 0
1

SETUP X.X

8

ENTR

EXIT

Example: this
password enables the
SETUP mode

PRIMARY SETUP MENU

CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE

EXIT

Note that the instrument still prompts for a password when entering the VARS and DIAG menus, even if
passwords are disabled, but it displays the default password (818) upon entering these menus. The user only
has to press ENTR to access the password-protected menus but does not have to enter the required number
code.

83
04521C (DCN5731)

Operating Instructions

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

6.10. SETUP  CLK: SETTING THE INTERNAL TIME-OF-DAY
CLOCK
The M200EH/EM has a built-in clock for the AutoCal timer, Time TEST function, and time stamps on COM port
messages and iDAS data entries.

To set the time-of-day, press:

SAMPLE

A1:NXCNC1=100PPM

NOX=XXX.X

< TST TST > CAL

SETUP X.X

SETUP

PRIMARY SETUP MENU

CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE
SETUP X.X
Enter Current
Time-of-Day

SETUP X.X

SETUP X.X3
1 2 :0 0

TIME-OF-DAY CLOCK

TIME DATE

EXIT

SETUP X.X

TIME: 12:00

1 2 :0 0

0 1

ENTR EXIT

JAN

0 1

ENTR EXIT

0 2

ENTR EXIT

DATE: 01-JAN-02
0 2

ENTR EXIT

TIME-OF-DAY CLOCK

TIME DATE
SETUP X.X

JAN

Enter Current
Date-of-Year

DATE: 01-JAN-02

SETUP X.X

TIME: 12:00

SETUP X.X

EXIT

EXIT
PRIMARY SETUP MENU

CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE

EXIT

EXIT returns
to the main
SAMPLE display

84
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Operating Instructions

In order to compensate for CPU clocks which run fast or slow, there is a variable to speed up or slow down the
clock by a fixed amount every day.

To change this variable, press:
SAMPLE

A1:NXCNC1=100PPM

NOX=XXX.X

< TST TST > CAL

SETUP

SETUPX.X

PREV NEXT JUMP

PRIMARY SETUP MENU

SETUP X.X

CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE

EDIT PRNT EXIT

Continue to press NEXT until …
EXIT

SETUP X.X

7) CLOCK_ADJ=0 Sec/Day

SECONDARY SETUP MENU

SETUP X.X

PREV
COMM VARS DIAG

JUMP

SAMPLE

ENTER SETUP PASS : 818
1

8

EDIT PRNT EXIT

EXIT
SETUP X.X

8

1 ) MEASURE_MODE=NOX-NO

+

0

CLOCK_ADJ:0 Sec/Day

0

ENTR EXIT

ENTR EXIT
Enter sign and number of seconds per
day the clock gains (-) or loses (+).

SETUP X.X

0 ) DAS_HOLD_OFF=15.0 Minutes
SETUP X.X

NEXT JUMP

7) CLOCK_ADJ=0 Sec/Day

EDIT PRNT EXIT
PREV NEXT JUMP

EDIT PRNT EXIT
3x EXIT returns
to the main SAMPLE display

85
04521C (DCN5731)

Operating Instructions

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

6.11. SETUP  MORE  COMM: SETTING UP THE ANALYSER’S
COMMUNICATION PORTS
The M200EH/EM is equipped with two serial communication ports located on the rear panel (see Figure 3-2).
Both ports operate similarly and give the user the ability to communicate with, issue commands to, and receive
data from the analyzer through an external computer system or terminal. By default, both ports operate on the
RS-232 protocol.
The COM1 port can also be configured to operate in single or RS-232 multidrop mode (option 62; See Section
5.9.2 and 6.11.7).
The COM2 port, can be configured for standard RS-232 operation, half-duplex RS-485 communication or for
access via an LAN by installing the Teledyne Instruments Ethernet interface card (option 63; see Section 5.9.3
and 6.11.6).
A code-activated switch (CAS), can also be used on either port to connect typically between 2 and 16
send/receive instruments (host computer(s) printers, dataloggers, analyzers, monitors, calibrators, etc.) into one
communications hub. Contact Teledyne Instruments sales for more information on CAS systems.

6.11.1. ANALYZER ID
Each type of Teledyne Instruments analyzer is configured with a default ID code. The default ID code for all
M200EH/EM analyzers is 200. The ID number is only important if more than one analyzer is connected to the
same communications channel such as when several analyzers are on the same Ethernet LAN (see Section
6.11.6); in a RS-232 multidrop chain (see Section 6.11.7) or operating over a RS-485 network (see Section
6.11.4). If two analyzers of the same model type are used on one channel, the ID codes of one or both of the
instruments needs to be changed so that they are unique to the instruments. To edit the instrument’s ID code,
press:
SAMPLE

A1:NXCNC1=100PPM

NOX=XXX.X

< TST TST > CAL

SETUP X.X

SETUP

PRIMARY SETUP MENU

CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE

EXIT

SETUP X.X
ID

Toggle these keys to
cycle through the
available character set:
0-9

INET

COMMUNICATIONS MENU
COM1

SETUP X.
0

2

EXIT

ENTR key accepts the
new settings

MACHINE ID: 200 ID
0

0

ENTR EXIT

EXIT key ignores the new
settings

The ID can be any 4 digit number and can also be used to identify analyzers in any number of ways (e.g.
location numbers, company asset number, etc.)

86
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Operating Instructions

6.11.2. COM PORT DEFAULT SETTINGS
As received from the factory, the analyzer is set up to emulate a DCE or modem, with pin 3 of the DB-9
connector designated for receiving data and pin 2 designated for sending data.


COM1: RS-232 (fixed), DB-9 male connector.
o Baud rate: 19200 bits per second (baud).
o Data Bits: 8 data bits with 1 stop bit.
o Parity: None.



COM2: RS-232 (configurable), DB-9 female connector.
o Baud rate: 115000 bits per second (baud).
o Data Bits: 8 data bits with 1 stop bit.
o Parity: None.
CAUTION

Cables that appear to be compatible because of matching connectors may incorporate
internal wiring that make the link inoperable. Check cables acquired from sources other
than Teledyne Instruments for pin assignments before using.

6.11.3. RS-232 COM PORT CABLE CONNECTIONS
In its default configuration, the M200EH/EM analyzer has two available RS-232 Com ports accessible via 2 DB-9
connectors on the back panel of the instrument. The COM1 connector is a male DB-9 connector and the COM2
is a female DB9 connector.

Female DB-9 (COM2)

Male DB-9 (RS-232)

(As seen from outside analyzer)

(As seen from outside analyzer)

TXD

TXD
GND

RXD
1

2
6

3
7

4
8

5

GND

RXD
1

9

6
CTS

RTS

2

3
7

4
8

5
9
CTS

RTS
(DTE mode)

(DTE mode)

RXD
GND

TXD
1

2
6

3
7

4
8

5
9
RTS

CTS
(DCE mode)

Figure 6-6-6:

Back Panel connector Pin-Outs for COM1 & COM2 in RS-232 mode.

87
04521C (DCN5731)

Operating Instructions

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

The signals from these two connectors are routed from the motherboard via a wiring harness to two 10-pin
connectors on the CPU card, CN3 (COM1) and CN4 (COM2).
CN3 & CN4
(Located on CPU card)

CTS
RTS

RXD
2

4

6

8

10

1

3

5

7

9

TXD

GND

(As seen from inside analyzer)

Figure 6-6-7:

CPU connector Pin-Outs for COM1 & COM2 in RS-232 mode.

Teledyne Instruments offers two mating cables, one of which should be applicable for your use.


Part number WR000077, a DB-9 female to DB-9 female cable, 6 feet long. Allows connection of COM1
with the serial port of most personal computers. Also available as Option 60 (see Section 5.9.1).



Part number WR000024, a DB-9 female to DB-25 male cable. Allows connection to the most common
styles of modems (e.g. Hayes-compatible) and code activated switches.

Both cables are configured with straight-through wiring and should require no additional adapters.
To assist in properly connecting the serial ports to either a computer or a modem, there are activity indicators
just above the RS-232 port. Once a cable is connected between the analyzer and a computer or modem, both
the red and green LEDs should be on. If the lights for COM 1 are not lit, use small switch on the rear panel to
switch it between DTE and DCE modes (see 16.10.5). If both LEDs are still not illuminated, check the cable for
proper wiring.

88
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Operating Instructions

6.11.4. RS-485 CONFIGURATION OF COM2
As delivered from the factory, COM2 is configured for RS-232 communications. This port can be re-configured
for operation as a non-isolated, half-duplex RS-485 port capable of supporting up to 32 instruments with a
maximum distance between the host and the furthest instrument being 4000 feet. If you require full-duplex or
isolated operation, please contact Teledyne Instruments Customer Service.


To reconfigure COM2 as an RS-285 port set switch 6 of SW1 to the ON position(see Figure 6-8).



The RS-485 port can be configured with or without a 150 Ω termination resistor. To include the resistor,
install jumper at position JP3 on the CPU board (see Figure 6-8). To configure COM2 as an unterminated RS-485 port leave JP3 open.

CN4
JP3

COM2 – RS-232

CN3
COM1 – RS-232

CN5
COM2 – RS-485

SW1

Pin 6

Figure 6-6-8:

CPU card Locations of RS-232/486 Switches, Connectors and Jumpers

89
04521C (DCN5731)

Operating Instructions

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

When COM2 is configured for RS-485 operation the port uses the same female DB-9 connector on the back of
the instrument as when Com2 is configured for RS-232 operation, however, the pin assignments are different.

Female DB-9 (COM2)
(As seen from outside analyzer)

RX/TXGND

RX/TX+
1

2
6

3
7

4
8

5
9

(RS-485)

Figure 6-6-9:

Back Panel connector Pin-Outs for COM2 in RS-485 mode.

The signal from this connector is routed from the motherboard via a wiring harness to a 6-pin connector on the
CPU card, CN5.

CN5
(Located on CPU card)

RX/TXGND

RX/TX+
2

4

6

1

3

5

(As seen from inside analyzer)

Figure 6-6-10: CPU connector Pin-Outs for COM2 in RS-485 mode.

6.11.5. DTE AND DCE COMMUNICATION
RS-232 was developed for allowing communications between data terminal equipment (DTE) and data
communication equipment (DCE). Basic terminals always fall into the DTE category whereas modems are
always considered DCE devices. The difference between the two is the pin assignment of the Data Receive and
Data Transmit functions.


DTE devices receive data on pin 2 and transmit data on pin 3.



DCE devices receive data on pin 3 and transmit data on pin 2.

To allow the analyzer to be used with terminals (DTE), modems (DCE) and computers (which can be either), a
switch mounted below the serial ports on the rear panel allows the user to set the configuration of COM1 for one
of these two modes. This switch exchanges the receive and transmit lines on COM1 emulating a cross-over or
null-modem cable. The switch has no effect on COM2.

90
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Operating Instructions

6.11.6. ETHERNET CARD CONFIGURATION
When equipped with the optional Ethernet interface, the analyzer can be connected to any standard 10BaseT
Ethernet network via low-cost network hubs, switches or routers. The interface operates as a standard TCP/IP
device on port 3000. This allows a remote computer to connect through the internet to the analyzer using
APICOM, terminal emulators or other programs.
The firmware on board the Ethernet card automatically sets the communication modes and baud rate (115 200
kBaud ) for the COM2 port. Once the Ethernet option is installed and activated, the COM2 submenu is replaced
by a new submenu, INET. This submenu is used to manage and configure the Ethernet interface with your LAN
or Internet Server(s).
The card has four LEDs that are visible on the rear panel of the analyzer, indicating its current operating status.
Table 6-11: Ethernet Status Indicators
LED

FUNCTION

LNK (green)

ON when connection to the LAN is valid.

ACT (yellow)

Flickers on any activity on the LAN.

TxD (green)

Flickers when the RS-232 port is transmitting data.

RxD (yellow)

Flickers when the RS-232 port is receiving data.

6.11.6.1. Ethernet Card COM2 Communication Modes and Baud Rate
The firmware on board the Ethernet card automatically sets the communication modes for the COM2 port. The
baud rate is also automatically set at 115 200 kBaud.

6.11.6.2. Configuring the Ethernet Interface Option using DHCP
The Ethernet option for you M200EH/EM uses Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) to automatically
configure its interface with your LAN. This requires your network servers also be running DHCP. The analyzer
will do this the first time you turn the instrument on after it has been physically connected to your network. Once
the instrument is connected and turned on it will appear as an active device on your network without any extra
set up steps or lengthy procedures.
Should you need to, the Ethernet configuration properties are viewable via the analyzer’s front panel See Table
6-12.

91
04521C (DCN5731)

Operating Instructions

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Table 6-12: LAN/Internet Configuration Properties
PROPERTY

DEFAULT STATE

DESCRIPTION
This displays whether the DHCP is
turned ON or OFF.

DHCP STATUS

On

Editable

INSTRUMENT
IP ADDRESS

Configured by
DHCP

EDIT key
disabled when
DHCP is ON

This string of four packets of 1 to 3
numbers each (e.g. 192.168.76.55.) is
the address of the analyzer itself.

Configured by
DHCP

EDIT key
disabled when
DHCP is ON

A string of numbers very similar to the
Instrument IP address (e.g.
192.168.76.1.)that is the address of
the computer used by your LAN to
access the Internet.

GATEWAY IP
ADDRESS

Also a string of four packets of 1 to 3
numbers each (e.g. 255.255.252.0)
that defines that identifies the LAN the
device is connected to.

SUBNET MASK

TCP PORT1

HOST NAME

1

Configured by
DHCP

3000

M200EH (EM)

EDIT key
disabled when
DHCP is ON

All addressable devices and
computers on a LAN must have the
same subnet mask. Any transmissions
sent devices with different assumed to
be outside of the LAN and are routed
through gateway computer onto the
Internet.

Editable

This number defines the terminal
control port by which the instrument is
addressed by terminal emulation
software, such as Internet or Teledyne
Instruments’ APICOM.

Editable

The name by which your analyzer will
appear when addressed from other
computers on the LAN or via the
Internet. While the default setting for
all Teledyne Instruments analyzers is
the model number, the host name may
be changed to fit customer needs.

Do not change the setting for this property unless instructed to by Teledyne Instruments
Customer Service personnel.

92
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Operating Instructions

NOTE
It is a good idea to check these settings the first time you power up your analyzer after
it has been physically connected to the LAN/Internet to make sure that the DHCP has
successfully downloaded the appropriate information from you network server(s).
If the gateway IP, instrument IP and the subnet mask are all zeroes (e.g. “0.0.0.0”),
the DCHP was not successful.
You may have to manually configure the analyzer’s Ethernet properties.
See your network administrator.

To view the above properties, press:

SAMPLE
NOX=XXX.X

SETUP X.X

A1:NXCNC1=100PPM

DHCP: ON

SET>

SETUP X.X

SETUP X.X

PRIMARY SETUP MENU



SETUP X.X

COMMUNICATIONS MENU



TCP PORT: 3000

SET>

SETUP X.X


SETUP X.X

SECONDARY SETUP MENU

EDIT

EDIT

HOSTNAME: M200EH
EDIT
Do not alter unless
directed to by Teledyne
Instruments Customer
Service personnel

93
04521C (DCN5731)

Operating Instructions

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

6.11.6.3. Manually Configuring the Network IP Addresses
There are several circumstances when you may need to manually configure the interface settings of the
analyzer’s Ethernet card. The INET sub-menu may also be used to edit the Ethernet card’s configuration
properties


Your LAN is not running a DHCP software package,



The DHCP software is unable to initialize the analyzer’s interface;



You wish to program the interface with a specific set of IP addresses that may not be the ones
automatically chosen by DHCP.

Editing the Ethernet Interface properties is a two step process.
STEP 1: Turn DHCP OFF: While DHCP is turned ON, the ability to manually set INSTRUMENT IP, GATEWAY
IP and SUBNET MASK is disabled

SAMPLE

A1:NXCNC1=100PPM

NOX=XXX.X

< TST TST > CAL

SETUP X.X

SETUP X.X
ID

INET

EXIT

1

EXIT

EXIT

OFF

Continue with editing of Ethernet interface
properties (see Step 2, below).

ENTR

EXIT

DHCP: ON
EXIT

DHCP: ON

ON

SETUP X.X

COMMUNICATIONS MENU

8

 EDIT

SETUP X.X

SECONDARY SETUP MENU

COM1

ENTER SETUP PASS : 818

SETUP X.X

PRIMARY SETUP MENU

COMM VARS DIAG

8

SETUP

CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE

SETUP X.X

SAMPLE

ENTR EXIT

DHCP: ON
ENTR EXIT

ENTR accept
new settings
EXIT ignores
new settings

94
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Operating Instructions

STEP 2: Configure the INSTRUMENT IP, GATEWAY IP and SUBNET MASK addresses by pressing:
Internet Configuration Keypad Functions
From Step 1 above)

SETUP X.X

DHCP: OFF

SET> EDIT

SETUP X.X

EXIT

FUNCTION

[0]

Press this key to cycle through the range of
numerals and available characters (“0 – 9” & “ . ”)



Moves the cursor one character left or right.

DEL

Deletes a character at the cursor location.

ENTR

Accepts the new setting and returns to the previous
menu.

EXIT

Ignores the new setting and returns to the previous
menu.

Some keys only appear as needed.

INST IP: 000.000.000.000

 EDIT

KEY

EXIT

SETUP X.X

Cursor
location is
indicated by
brackets

INST IP: [0] 00.000.000



DEL [0]

ENTR EXIT

SETUP X.X GATEWAY IP: 000.000.000.000
 EDIT

EXIT

SETUP X.X

GATEWAY IP: [0] 00.000.000



DEL [?]

ENTR EXIT

SETUP X.X SUBNET MASK:255.255.255.0
 EDIT

EXIT

SETUP X.X SUBNET MASK:[2]55.255.255.0
SETUP X.X TCP PORT 3000


EDIT

DEL [?]

ENTR EXIT

EXIT
The PORT number needs to remain at 3000.
Do not change this setting unless instructed to by
Teledyne Instruments Customer Service personnel.

SETUP X.X

SETUP X.X

INITIALIZING INET 0%
…
INITIALIZING INET 100%

INITIALIZATI0N SUCCEEDED

SETUP X.X
ID

INET

SETUP X.X

INITIALIZATION FAILED

Contact your IT
Network Administrator

COMMUNICATIONS MENU
COM1

EXIT

95
04521C (DCN5731)

Operating Instructions

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

6.11.6.4. Changing the Analyzer’s HOSTNAME
The HOSTNAME is the name by which the analyzer appears on your network. The default name for all
Teledyne Instruments Model 200EH/EME analyzers is M????. To change this name (particularly if you have
more than one M200EH/EM analyzer on your network), press.

SAMPLE

A1:NXCNC1=100PPM

< TST TST > CAL

SET>

SETUP

CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE

SECONDARY SETUP MENU

COMMUNICATIONS MENU

INET

EDIT

EXIT

EXIT
SETUP X.X

ID

HOSTNAME: 200E

 UNTIL …

PRIMARY SETUP MENU

SETUP X.X

DHCP: ON

SETUP X.X

NOX=XXX.X



COM1

HOSTNAME: [M]200E
INS

DEL

[?]

ENTR EXIT

EXIT

Use these keys (See Table 6-19)
to edit HOSTNAME
SAMPLE

ENTER SETUP PASS : 818
SETUP X.X

8

1

8

ENTR

HOSTNAME: 200E-FIELD1

EXIT


Moves the cursor one character to the right.

INS

Inserts a character before the cursor location.

DEL

Deletes a character at the cursor location.

[?]

Press this key to cycle through the range of numerals and characters available for insertion.

0-9, A-Z, space ’ ~ !  # $ % ^ & * ( ) - _ = +[ ] { } < >\ | ; : , . / ?
ENTR

Accepts the new setting and returns to the previous menu.

EXIT

Ignores the new setting and returns to the previous menu.

Some keys only appear as needed.

96
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Operating Instructions

6.11.7. MULTIDROP RS-232 SET UP
The RS-232 multidrop consists of a printed circuit assembly that plugs onto the CN3, CN4, and CN5 connectors
of the CPU card (see Figure 6-11) and the cabling to connect it to the analyzer’s motherboard. This PCA
includes all circuitry required to enable your analyzer for multidrop operation. It converts the instrument’s COM1
port to multidrop configuration allowing up to eight analyzers to be connected the same I/O port of the host
computer.
Because both of the DB9 connectors on the analyzer’s back panel are needed to construct the multidrop chain,
COM2 is no longer available for separate RS-232 or RS-485 operation, however, with the addition of an Ethernet
Option (option 63, see Sections 5.9.3 and 6.11.6) the COM2 port is available for communication over a 10BaseT
LAN.

JP2
Rear Panel

CPU Card

(as seen from inside)

Cable to
Ethernet
Card

Multidrop
PCA
Cable to
Motherboard

Figure 6-6-11: Location of JP2 on RS232-Multidrop PCA (option 62)
Each analyzer in the multidrop chain must have:


One Teledyne Instruments option 62 installed.



One 6’ straight-through, DB9 male  DB9 Female cable (Teledyne Instruments P/N WR0000101) is
required for each analyzer.

To set up the network, for each analyzer:
1. Turn the analyzer on and change its ID code (see Section 6.11.1) to a unique 4-digit number.
2. Remove the top cover (see Section 3.1) of the analyzer and locate JP2 on the multidrop PCA (see
Figure 6-11)
3. Make sure that the jumpers are in place connection pins 9  10 and 11  12.
4. If the analyzer is to be the last instrument on the chain, make sure a jumper is in place connecting pins
21  22.

97
04521C (DCN5731)

Operating Instructions

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

5. If you are adding an analyzer to the end of an already existing chain, don’t forget to remove JP2, pins 21
 22 on the multidrop PCA on the analyzer that was previous the last instrument in the chain.
6. Close the instrument.
7. Using straight-through, DB9 male  DB9 Female cables, interconnect the host and the analyzers as
shown in Figure 6-12.
NOTE:
Teledyne Instruments recommends setting up the first link, between the Host and the
first analyzer and testing it before setting up the rest of the chain.



KEY:

Host

Female DB9

RS-232 port

Male DB9

Analyzer

Analyzer

Analyzer

Last Analyzer

COM2

COM2

COM2

COM2

RS-232

RS-232

RS-232

RS-232

Make Sure
Jumper between
JP2 pins 21  22
is installed.

Figure 6-6-12: RS232-Multidrop PCA Host/Analyzer Interconnect Diagram

98
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Operating Instructions

6.11.8. COM PORT COMMUNICATION MODES
Each of the analyzer’s serial ports can be configured to operate in a number of different modes, which are listed
in the following table. Each COM port needs to be configured independently.

Table 6-14: COMM Port Communication modes
MODE1

ID

DESCRIPTION

1

Quiet mode suppresses any feedback from the analyzer (iDAS reports, and warning
messages) to the remote device and is typically used when the port is communicating
with a computer program such as APICOM. Such feedback is still available but a
command must be issued to receive them.

COMPUTER

2

Computer mode inhibits echoing of typed characters and is used when the port is
communicating with a computer program, such as APICOM.

SECURITY

4

When enabled, the serial port requires a password before it will respond. The only
command that is active is the help screen (? CR).

HESSEN
PROTOCOL

16

QUIET

The Hessen communications protocol is used in some European countries. Teledyne
Instruments part number 02252 contains more information on this protocol.
When turned on this mode switches the COMM port settings
from

E, 7, 1

2048

No parity; 8 data bits; 1 stop bit
to
Even parity; 7 data bits; 1 stop bit

RS-485

1024

Configures the COM2 Port for RS-485 communication. RS-485 mode has precedence
over multidrop mode if both are enabled.

MULTIDROP
PROTOCOL

32

Multidrop protocol allows a multi-instrument configuration on a single communications
channel. Multidrop requires the use of instrument IDs.

ENABLE
MODEM

64

Enables to send a modem initialization string at power-up. Asserts certain lines in the
RS-232 port to enable the modem to communicate.

ERROR
CHECKING2

128

Fixes certain types of parity errors at certain Hessen protocol installations.

XON/XOFF
HANDSHAKE2

256

Disables XON/XOFF data flow control also known as software handshaking.

HARDWARE
HANDSHAKE

8

HARDWARE
FIFO2

512

COMMAND
PROMPT

4096

Enables CTS/RTS style hardwired transmission handshaking. This style of data
transmission handshaking is commonly used with modems or terminal emulation
protocols as well as by Teledyne Instrument’s APICOM software.
Improves data transfer rate when on of the COMM ports.
Enables a command prompt when in terminal mode.

1

Modes are listed in the order in which they appear in the
SETUP  MORE  COMM  COM[1 OR 2]  MODE menu

2

The default sting for this feature is ON. Do not disable unless instructed to by Teledyne Instruments Customer Service
personnel.

99
04521C (DCN5731)

Operating Instructions

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Press the following keys to select a communication mode for a one of the COMM Ports, such as the following
example where HESSEN PROTOCOL mode is enabled:
SAMPLE

A1:NXCNC1=100PPM

NOX=XXX.X

< TST TST > CAL

SETUP

PRIMARY SETUP MENU

SETUP X.X

CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE

SECONDARY SETUP MENU

SETUP X.X

COMM VARS DIAG

Select which COM
port to configure

SETUP X.X
ID

The sum of the mode
IDs of the selected
modes is displayed
here

ALRM

EXIT

EXIT returns
to the
previous
menu

COMMUNICATIONS MENU

INET

COM1

SETUP X.X
SET>

EXIT

EXIT

COM1 MODE:0
EDIT

SETUP X.X

EXIT

COM1 QUIET MODE: OFF

NEXT OFF

ENTR EXIT

Continue pressing next until …

SETUP X.X
Use PREV and NEXT keys
to move between available
modes.
A mode is enabled by
toggling the ON/OFF key.

PREV NEXT

SETUP X.X

COM1 HESSEN PROTOCOL : OFF
OFF

ENTR EXIT

COM1 HESSEN PROTOCOL : ON

PREV NEXT ON

ENTR EXIT

ENTR key accepts the
new settings
EXIT key ignores the new
settings

Continue pressing the NEXT and PREV keys to select any other
modes you which to enable or disable

100
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Operating Instructions

6.11.9. COM PORT BAUD RATE
To select the baud rate of one of the COM Ports, press:
SAMPLE

A1:NXCNC1=100PPM

NOX=XXX.X

< TST TST > CAL

SETUP

PRIMARY SETUP MENU

SETUP X.X

CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE

EXIT

SECONDARY SETUP MENU

SETUP X.X

COMM VARS DIAG

Select which COM port
to configure.

SETUP X.X

COMMUNICATIONS MENU

ID

COM1

INET

SETUP X.X
Press SET> until you
reach
COM1 BAUD RATE

EXIT

SET>

EXIT returns
to the
previous
menu

EXIT

COM1 MODE:0
EDIT

EXIT

EXAMPLE

Use PREV and NEXT
keys to move
between available
baud rates.
300
1200
4800
9600
19200
38400
57600
115200

SETUP X.X


COM1 BAUD RATE:19200
EDIT

SETUP X.X
PREV NEXT

SETUP X.X
NEXT ON

EXIT

EXIT key
ignores the
new
setting

COM1 BAUD RATE:19200
ENTR

EXIT

ENTR key
accepts
the new
setting

COM1 BAUD RATE:9600
ENTR

EXIT

101
04521C (DCN5731)

Operating Instructions

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

6.11.10. COM PORT TESTING
The serial ports can be tested for correct connection and output in the COMM menu. This test sends a string of
256 ‘w’ characters to the selected COM port. While the test is running, the red LED on the rear panel of the
analyzer should flicker.
To initiate the test press the following key sequence.

SAMPLE

A1:NXCNC1=100PPM

NOX=XXX.X

< TST TST > CAL

SETUP X.X

SETUP

SETUP X.X
SET>

SETUP X.X

EXIT

SETUP X.X


SETUP X.X

EDIT

PRIMARY SETUP MENU

CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE

SETUP X.X

COM1 MODE:0

COM1 : TEST PORT
TEST

EXIT

COMMUNICATIONS MENU
COM1

EXIT

SETUP X.X
 CAL

SETUP X.X

SETUP

PRIMARY SETUP MENU

CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE

SETUP X.X

EXIT

SECONDARY SETUP MENU

COMM VARS DIAG

SETUP X.X

EXIT
EXIT ignores the new setting.

ENTER VARS PASS: 818

ENTR accepts the new setting.
8

1

8

SETUP X.X

ENTR EXIT

0 ) DAS_HOLD_OFF=15.0 Minutes
SETUP X.X

NEXT JUMP

SETUP X.X

1

5

.0

ENTR EXIT
Toggle this keys to change setting

EDIT PRNT EXIT

See Section 6.12.1. for
information on setting the
MEASRUE MODE

2 ) STABIL_GAS=NOX

PREV NEXT JUMP

EDIT PRNT EXIT

SETUP X.X
NO

SETUP X.X

0) DAS_HOLD_OFF=15.0 Minutes

1 ) MEASURE_MODE=NOX-NO

NEXT JUMP

SETUP X.X

EDIT PRNT EXIT

NO2

2 ) STABIL GAS =NOX
NOX

O2

ENTR EXIT

3 ) TPC_ENABLE=ON

PREV NEXT JUMP

EDIT PRNT EXIT

Choose Gas
SETUP X.X

3 ) TPC_ENABLE=ON

ON
SETUP X.X

ENTR EXIT

4 ) DYN_ZERO=ON

PREV NEXT JUMP

EDIT PRNT EXIT

Toggle this keys to change setting
SETUP X.X

4 ) DYN_ZERO=ON

ON
SETUP X.X

ENTR EXIT

5) DYN_SPAN=ON

PREV NEXT JUMP

EDIT PRNT EXIT

Toggle this keys to change setting
SETUP X.X

5 ) DYN_SPAN=ON

ON

SETUP X.X

ENTR EXIT
Toggle this keys to change setting

6) CONC_PRECUISION : 1

PREV NEXT JUMP

EDIT PRNT EXIT

SETUP X.X
AUTO

6) CONC_PRECUISION : 3
0

1

2

3

4

ENTR EXIT

Toggle these keys to change setting
SETUP X.X

7) CLOCK_ADJ=0 Sec/Day

PREV NEXT JUMP

EDIT PRNT EXIT

SETUP X.X
+

0

0

7) CLOCK_ADJ=0 Sec/Day
ENTR EXIT
Toggle this keys to change setting

104
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Operating Instructions

6.12.1. SETTING THE GAS MEASUREMENT MODE
In its standard operating mode the M200EH/EM measures NO, NO2 and NOx. It can be set to measure only NO
or Only NOX s can be set to measure NO or NOx. To select one of these three measurement modes, press:

SAMPLE

A1:NXCNC1=100PPM

NOX=XXX.X

< TST TST > CAL

SETUP X.X

SETUP

PRIMARY SETUP MENU

CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE

SETUP X.X

SECONDARY SETUP MENU

COMM VARS DIAG

SAMPLE
8

1

8

ENTR EXIT

0 ) DAS_HOLD_OFF=15 minutes

NEXT JUMP

SETUP X.X

SETUP X.X

EDIT PRNT EXIT

1 ) MEASURE_MODE=NOX-NO

PREV NEXT JUMP

Press the PREV
and NEXT buttons
to move back and
forth between gas
modes

EXIT

ENTER SETUP PASS : 818

SETUP X.X

NOX-NO mode is the
default mode for the
M200EH/EM

EXIT

EDIT PRNT EXIT

MEASURE MODE: NOX-NO

PREV

ENTR EXIT

SETUP X.X

NEXT

ENTR accepts the
new setting.

MEASURE MODE: NOX

PREV NEXT

SETUP X.X

EXIT ignores the new
setting.

ENTR EXIT

MEASURE MODE: NO
ENTR EXIT

105
04521C (DCN5731)

Operating Instructions

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

6.13. SETUP  MORE  DIAG: DIAGNOSTICS MENU
A series of diagnostic tools is grouped together under the SETUP-MORE-DIAG menu. These parameters are
dependent on firmware revision. These tools can be used in a variety of troubleshooting and diagnostic
procedures and are referred to in many places of the maintenance and trouble-shooting sections.
An overview of the entire DIAG menu can be found in menu tree A-6 of Appendix A.1.

Table 6-16: M200EH/EM Diagnostic (DIAG) Functions
FRONT PANEL
MODE
INDICATOR

SECTION

DIAG I/O

6.13.2

ANALOG I/O: When entered, the analyzer performs an analog output step test.
This can be used to calibrate a chart recorder or to test the analog output
accuracy.

DIAG AOUT

6.13.3

ANALOG I/O CONFIGURATION: This submenu allows the user to configure
the analyzer’s four analog output channels, including choosing what parameter
will be output on each channel. Instructions that appear here allow adjustment
and calibration the voltage signals associated with each output as well as
calibration of the analog to digital converter circuitry on the motherboard.

DIAG AIO

6.13.4,
through
6.13.6

DISPLAY SEQUENCE CONFIGURATION: Allows the user to program which
concentration values are displayed in the .

DIAG DISP

6.13.7.1

OPTIC TEST: When activated, the analyzer performs an optic test, which turns
on an LED located inside the sensor module near the PMT (Fig. 10-15). This
diagnostic tests the response of the PMT without having to supply span gas.

DIAG OPTIC

6.13.7.2

ELECTRICAL TEST: When activated, the analyzer performs an electric test,
which generates a current intended to simulate the PMT output to verify the
signal handling and conditioning of the PMT preamp board.

DIAG ELEC

6.13.7.3

DIAG OZONE

6.13.7.4

DIAG FCAL

6.13.7.5

DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTION AND MEANING
SIGNAL I/O: Allows observation of all digital and analog signals in the
instrument. Allows certain digital signals such as valves and heaters to be
toggled ON and OFF.

OZONE GEN OVERRIDE: Allows the user to manually turn the O3 generator on
or off. This setting is retained when exiting DIAG.
FLOW CALIBRATION: This function is used to calibrate the gas flow output
signals of sample gas and ozone supply. These settings are retained when
exiting DIAG.

106
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Operating Instructions

6.13.1. ACCESSING THE DIAGNOSTIC FEATURES
To access the DIAG functions press the following keys:
SAMPLE

A1:NXCNC1=100PPM

NOX=XXX.X

DIAG

SETUP

PREV

< TST TST > CAL

EXIT returns
to the main
SAMPLE
display

SETUP X.X

EXIT returns
to the PRIMARY
SETUP MENU

SETUP X.X

CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE

EXIT

SETUP X.X
8

1

DIAG

ENTR EXIT

PREV

PREV

EXIT

ANALOG OUTPUT
NEXT

NEXT

ENTR

EXIT

ENTR

EXIT

ENTR

EXIT

OPTIC TEST
NEXT

ELECTRICAL TEST
NEXT

DIAG

ENTR

DIAG

PREV

ENTR

DISPLAY SEQUENCE CONFIG.

DIAG

ENTER DIAG PASS: 818

SIGNAL I / O

NEXT

PREV

EXIT

8

PREV

NEXT

DIAG

SECONDARY SETUP MENU

COMM VARS DIAG

From this point
forward, EXIT returns
to the
SECONDARY
SETUP MENU

DIAG

PRIMARY SETUP MENU

ANALOG I / O CONFIGURATION

ENTR

EXIT

OZONE GEN OVERRIDE
NEXT

DIAG

ENTR

EXIT

FLOW CALIBRATION

EXIT
PREV

NEXT

ENTR

EXIT

107
04521C (DCN5731)

Operating Instructions

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

6.13.2. SIGNAL I/O
The signal I/O diagnostic mode allows to review and change the digital and analog input/output functions of the
analyzer. See Appendix A-4 for a complete list of the parameters available for review under this menu.
NOTE
Any changes of signal I/O settings will remain in effect only until the signal I/O menu
is exited. Exceptions are the ozone generator override and the flow sensor calibration,
which remain as entered when exiting.
To enter the signal I/O test mode, press:
SAMPLE

A1:NXCNC1=100PPM

NOX=XXX.X
SETUP

< TST TST > CAL

SETUP X.X

PRIMARY SETUP MENU

CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE
EXIT
returns
to the main
SAMPLE
display

SETUP X.X

EXIT

SECONDARY SETUP MENU

COMM VARS DIAG

SETUP X.X
8

1

EXIT

ENTER DIAG PASS: 818

8

ENTR EXIT

SIGNAL I / O

DIAG
PREV NEXT JUMP

DIAG I / O

ENTR

EXIT

Test Signals Displayed Here

PREV NEXT JUMP

PRNT EXIT

Use the NEXT & PREV
keys to move between
signal types.

Use the JUMP key to
go directly to a
specific signal
See Appendix A-4 for
a complete list of
available SIGNALS

EXAMPLE
DIAG I / O
0

JUMP TO: 5

5

ENTR EXIT

DIAG I / O

CAL_LED = ON

PREV NEXT JUMP

ON PRNT EXIT

Enter 05 to Jump
to Signal 5:
(CAL_LED)

Exit to return
to the
DIAG menu

Pressing the PRNT key will send a formatted printout to the serial port and can be
captured with a computer or other output device.

108
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Operating Instructions

6.13.3. ANALOG OUTPUT STEP TEST
This test can be used to check the accuracy and proper operation of the analog outputs. The test forces all four
analog output channels to produce signals ranging from 0% to 100% of the full scale range in 20% increments.
This test is useful to verify the operation of the data logging/recording devices attached to the analyzer.
To begin the Analog Output Step Test press:
SAMPLE

A1:NXCNC1=100PPM

NOX=XXX.X

< TST TST > CAL

SETUP

PRIMARY SETUP MENU

SETUP X.X

CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE

SETUP X.X

EXIT

SECONDARY SETUP MENU

COMM VARS DIAG

SETUP X.X
8

1

EXIT

ENTER DIAG PASS: 818

8

DIAG

ENTR EXIT

SIGNAL I / O

NEXT

ENTR

DIAG

ANALOG OUTPUT

PREV

NEXT

DIAG AOUT

EXIT

ENTR

[0%]

EXIT

Performs
analog output
step test.
0% - 100%

EXIT

Exit-Exit
returns to the
DIAG menu

ANALOG OUTPUT

0%

DIAG AOUT

EXIT

ANALOG OUTPUT

Pressing the key under “0%” while performing the test will
pause the test at that level. Brackets will appear around
the value: example: [20%] Pressing the same key again
will resume the test.

109
04521C (DCN5731)

Operating Instructions

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

6.13.4. ANALOG OUTPUTS AND REPORTING RANGES
6.13.4.1. Analog Output Signals Available on the M200EH/EM
The analyzer has four analog output signals, accessible through a connector on the rear panel.
ANALOG OUT

A1
+

A2
-

+

-

+

A3
-

A4
+

-

0-20 mA current loop
output available for these
channels only

Figure 6-6-13: Analog Output Connector Key
The signal levels of each output can be independently configured as follows. An over-range feature is available
that allows each range to be usable from -5% to + 5% of its nominal scale:

Table 6-17: Analog Output Voltage Ranges with Over-Range Active
RANGE

MINIMUM OUTPUT

MAXIMUM OUTPUT

0-0.1 V

-5 mV

+105 mV

0-1 V

-0.05 V

+1.05 V

0-5 V

-0.25 V

+5.25 V

0-10 V

-0.5 V

+10.5 V

The default offset for all ranges is 0 VDC.

Pin assignments for the ANALOG output connector at the rear panel of the instrument:

Table 6-18: Analog Output Pin Assignments
PIN

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

ANALOG
OUTPUT

A1
A2
A3
A4

VOLTAGE
SIGNAL

CURRENT
SIGNAL

V Out

I Out +

Ground

I Out -

V Out

I Out +

Ground

I Out -

V Out

I Out +

Ground

I Out -

V Out

I Out +

Ground

I Out -

110
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Operating Instructions

Additionally A1, A2 andA3 may be equipped with optional 0-20 mA current loop drivers. A4 is not available for
the current loop option.

Table 6-19: Analog Output Current Loop Range
RANGE

MINIMUM OUTPUT

MAXIMUM OUTPUT

0-20 mA

0 mA

20 mA

These are the physical limits of the current loop modules, typical applications use 2-20 or 4-20 mA for the
lower and upper limits. Please specify desired range when ordering this option. The default offset for all
ranges is 0 mA.

All of these outputs can be configured output signals representing any of the iDAS parameters available on this
model (See Table A-6 of Appendix A.5 for a complete list).
The ability to select any one of the M200EH/EM’s 40+ iDAS data types coupled with the ability to select from a
variety of signal ranges and scales makes the analog outputs of the M200EH/EM extremely flexible.

Table 6-20: Example of Analog Output configuration for M200EH/EM
OUTPUT

IDAS
PARAMETER
ASSIGNED

SIGNAL
SCALE

A1

NXCNC1

0-5 V

A2

N2CNC2

4-20 mA

A3

PMTDET

0-1V

A4

O2CONC

0-10 V

1

With current loop option installed

6.13.4.2. Physical Range versus Analog Output Reporting Ranges
The entire measurement range of the analyzer is quite large, 0 – 5,000 ppm for the M200Eh and 0-200 PPM for
the M200EM, but many applications use only a small part of the analyzer’s full measurement range. This
creates two performance challenges:
1. The width of the analyzer’s physical range can create data resolution problems for most analog
recording devices. For example, in an application where a M200Eh is being used to measure an
expected concentration of typically less than 200 ppm NOx, the full scale of expected values is only 4%
of the instrument’s full 5000 ppm measurement range. Unmodified, the corresponding output signal
would also be recorded across only 4% of the range of the recording device.
The M200EH/EM solves this problem by allowing the user to select a scaled reporting range for the
analog outputs that only includes that portion of the physical range relevant to the specific application.
Only the reporting range of the analog outputs is scaled, the physical range of the analyzer and the
readings displayed on the front panel remain unaltered.
2. Applications where low concentrations of NO, NO2 and NOx are measured require greater sensitivity and
resolution than typically necessary for measurements of higher concentrations.
The M200EH/EM solves this issue by using two hardware physical ranges that cover the instruments
entire measurement range The analyzer’s software automatically selects which physical range is in
effect based on the analog output reporting range selected by the user:

111
04521C (DCN5731)

Operating Instructions

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

FOR THE M200EM:
 Low range spans 0 to 20 ppm NOX (20 ppm = 5 V);
 High range spans 0-200 ppm NOX (200 ppm = 5 V).
If the high end of the selected reporting range is  20 ppm. The low physical range is selected. If the
high end of the selected reporting range is > 20 ppm. The high physical range is selected.

FOR THE M200EH:
 Low range spans 0 to 500 ppm NOX (500 ppm = 5 V);
 High range spans 0-5000 ppm NOX (5000 ppm = 5 V).
If the high end of the selected reporting range is  500 ppm. The low physical range is selected. If the
high end of the selected reporting range is > 500 ppm. The high physical range is selected.
Once properly calibrated, the analyzer’s front panel will accurately report concentrations along the entire span of
its 0 and 20,000 ppb physical range regardless of which reporting range has been selected for the analog
outputs and which physical range is being used by the instruments software.
Both reporting ranges need to be calibrated independently to the same span gas concentrations in order to allow
switching back and forth between high and low ranges.

112
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Operating Instructions

6.13.5. ANALOG I/O CONFIGURATION
6.13.5.1. The Analog I/O Configuration Submenu.
Table 6-21 lists the analog I/O functions that are available in the M200EH/EM.

Table 6-21: DIAG - Analog I/O Functions
SUB MENU

FUNCTION

AOUTS
CALIBRATED:

Shows the status of the analog output calibration (YES/NO) and initiates a calibration
of all analog output channels.

DATA_OUT_1:

Configures the A1 analog output:
RANGE1: Selects the signal type (voltage or current loop) and full scale value of the
output.
OVERRANGE: Turns the ± 5% over-range feature ON/OFF for this output channel.
REC_OFS1: Sets a voltage offset (not available when RANGE is set to CURRent loop.
AUTO_CAL1: Sets the channel for automatic or manual calibration
CALIBRATED1: Performs the same calibration as AOUT CALIBRATED, but on this
one channel only.
OUTOUT: Turns the output channel ON/OFF. A signal. Equal to the low end of the
output scale (zero point) is still output by the analyzer, but no data is sent.
DATA: Allows the user to select which iDAS parameter to be output.
SCALE: Sets the top end of the reporting range scale for this channel. The analyzer
automatically chooses the units of measure appropriate for the iDAS parameter chosen
(e.g. ppm for concentration parameters; in-Hg-A for pressure measurements, etc.)
UPDATE: Sets the time interval at which the analyzer updates the data being output
on the channel.

DATA_OUT_2

Same as forDATA_OUT_1 but for analog channel 2 (NO)

DATA_OUT_3

Same as for DATA_OUT_1 but for analog channel 3 (NO2)

DATA_OUT_4

Same as for DATA_OUT_1 but for analog channel 3 (NO2)

TEST OUTPUT

Same as for DATA_OUT_1 but for analog channel 4 (TEST)

AIN CALIBRATED
1

Shows the calibration status (YES/NO) and initiates a calibration of the analog to digital
converter circuit on the motherboard.

Changes to RANGE or REC_OFS require recalibration of this output.

To configure the analyzer’s four analog outputs, set the electronic signal type of each channel and calibrate the
outputs. This consists of:
1. Selecting an output type (voltage or current, if an optional current output driver has been installed) and
the signal level that matches the input requirements of the recording device attached to the channel.
2. Determine if the over-range feature is needed and turn it on or off accordingly.
3. If a Voltage scale is in use, a bipolar recorder offset may be added to the signal if required (Section
6.13.4.4).
4. Choose an iDAS parameter to be output on the channel.
5. Set the reporting range scale for the data type chosen.
6. Set the update rate for the channel.

113
04521C (DCN5731)

Operating Instructions

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

7. Calibrating the output channel. This can be done automatically or manually for each channel (see
Sections 6.13.5).

To access the analog I/O configuration sub menu, press:
SAMPLE

A1:NXCNC1=100PPM

< TST TST >

NOX=XXX.X

CAL

SETUP

DIAG AIO

A OUTS CALIBRATED: NO


SETUP X.X

CAL

EXIT

PRIMARY SETUP MENU

CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE

EXIT

DIAG AIO

DATA_OUT_1: 5V, NXCNC1, NOCAL

 EDIT
SETUP X.X
COMM

EXIT

SECONDARY SETUP MENU

VARS DIAG

ALRM

EXIT

DIAG AIO

DATA_OUT_2: 5V, NXCNC1, NOCAL

 EDIT
SETUP X.X
8

1

8

ENTR EXIT
DIAG AIO

DIAG

ENTR

DATA_OUT_4: 5V, NXCNC1, NOCAL

 EDIT

Continue pressing NEXT until ...

AIO Configuration Submenu

DIAG AIO

ANALOG I/O CONFIGURATION
ENTR

EXIT

EXIT
DIAG AIO

PREV NEXT

DATA_OUT_3: 5V, NXCNC1, NOCAL

 EDIT

SIGNAL I/O
NEXT

DIAG

EXIT

ENTER PASSWORD:818



EXIT

AIN CALIBRATED: NO
CAL

EXIT

EXIT

114
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Operating Instructions

6.13.5.2. Analog Output Signal Type and Range Selection
To select an output signal type (DC Voltage or current) and level for one output channel press:
From the
AIO CONFIGURATION SUBMENU
(See Section 6.13.4.1)

DIAG

ANALOG I/O CONFIGURATION

PREV NEXT

DIAG AIO

ENTR

EXIT

AOUTS CALIBRATED: NO

SET>

CAL

EXIT

Continue pressing SET> until you reach the
output to be configured

DIAG AIO

DATA_OUT_3: 5V, NXCNC1, NOCAL

 EDIT
These keys set
the signal level
and type of the
selected
channel

DIAG AIO
0.1V

EXIT

DATA_OUT_3: RANGE: 5V
1V

5V

10V CURR

ENTR EXIT

Pressing ENTR records
the new setting and
returns to the previous
menu.
Pressing EXIT ignores the
new setting and returns to
the previous menu.

115
04521C (DCN5731)

Operating Instructions

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

6.13.5.3. Turning the Analog Output Over-Range Feature ON/OFF
In its default configuration a ± 5% over-range is available on each of the M200EH/EM’s analog output channels.
This over-range can be disabled if your recording device is sensitive to excess voltage or current.
NOTE:
Instruments with current range options installed on one or more of the outputs often
are delivered from the factory with the over-range feature turned OFF on those
channels.
To Turn the over-range feature on or off, press:
From the
AIO CONFIGURATION SUBMENU
(See Section 6.13.4.1)

DIAG

ANALOG I/O CONFIGURATION

PREV NEXT

DIAG AIO
SET>

ENTR

EXIT

AOUTS CALIBRATED: NO
CAL

EXIT

Continue pressing SET> until you reach the
output to be configured

DIAG AIO

DATA_OUT_2 5V, NXCNC1, NOCAL

 EDIT

DIAG AIO

DATA_OUT_2 RANGE: 5V

SET> EDIT

DIAG AIO

DIAG AIO
ON

DIAG AIO
OFF

EXIT

DATA_OUT_2 OVERRANGE: ON

 EDIT

Toggle this key
to turn the
Over-Range
feature
ON/OFF

EXIT

EXIT

DATA_OUT_2 OVERRANGE: ON
ENTR EXIT

DATA_OUT_2 OVERRANGE: OFF
ENTR EXIT

116
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Operating Instructions

6.13.5.4. Adding a Recorder Offset to an Analog Output
Some analog signal recorders require that the zero signal is significantly different from the baseline of the
recorder in order to record slightly negative readings from noise around the zero point. This can be achieved in
the M200EH/EM by defining a zero offset, a small voltage (e.g., 10% of span).
To add a zero offset to a specific analog output channel, press:
From the
AIO CONFIGURATION SUBMENU
(See Section 6.13.4.1)

DIAG

ANALOG I/O CONFIGURATION

PREV NEXT

DIAG AIO

ENTR

EXIT

AOUTS CALIBRATED: NO

SET>

CAL

EXIT

Continue pressing SET> until you reach the
output to be configured

DIAG AIO

DATA_OUT_2 5V, NXCNC1, NOCAL

 EDIT

DIAG AIO

EXIT

DATA_OUT_2 OUTPUT: 5V

SET> EDIT

EXIT

Continue pressing SET> until ...

DIAG AIO

DATA_OUT_2 REC OFS: 0 mV

 EDIT

Toggle these
keys to set ther
value of the
desired offset.

DIAG AIO
+

EXIT

DATA_OUT_2 REC OFS: 0 mV
0

0

0

0

ENTR EXIT

EXAMPLE

DIAG AIO
–

DIAG AIO

DATA_OUT_2 REC OFS: -10 mV
0

0

1

0

ENTR EXIT

DATA_OUT_2 REC OFS: -10 mV

 EDIT

EXIT

117
04521C (DCN5731)

Operating Instructions

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

6.13.5.5. Assigning an iDAS parameter to an Analog Output Channel
The M200EH/EM analog output channels can be assigned to output data from any of the 40+ available iDAS
parameters (see Table A-6 of Appendix A.5). The default settings for the four output channels are:

Table 6-22: Analog Output Data Type Default Settings
PARAMETER

DATA TYPE

1

CHANNEL DEFAULT SETTING

A1

A2

NXCNC1

NOCNC1

A3

A43

N2CNC1

NXCNC2

2

RANGE

0 - 5 VDC

REC OFS

0 mVDC

AUTO CAL.

ON

CALIBRATED

NO

OUTPUT

ON

SCALE

100 ppm

UPDATE

5 sec

1

See Table A-6 of M200EH/EM Appendix A for definitions of these iDAS data types

2

Optional current loop outputs are available for analog output channels A1-A3.

3

On analyzers with O2 sensor options installed, iDAS parameter O2CONC is assigned to output A4.

REPORTING GAS CONCENTRATIONS VIA THE M200EH/EM ANALOG OUTPUT CHANNELS
While the iDAS parameters available for output over via the analog channels A1 thru A4 include a vide variety
internal temperatures, gas flows and pressures as well as certain key internal voltage levels, most of the iDAS
parameters are related to gas concentration levels.
Two parameters exist for each gas type measured by the M200EH/EM. They are generally referred to as range
1 and range 2 (e.g. NXCNC1 and NXCNC2; NOCNC1 and NOCNC2; etc.). These take the place of the high
and low concentration ranges of previous versions of the analyzer software. Concentrations for each range are
computed using separate slopes and offsets which are also stored via separate iDAS parameters.
NOTE
If an analog output channel is set to report a gas concentration (e.g. NXCNC1; NOx
concentration; Range 1) it is generally a good idea to use 80% of the reporting range
for that channel for the span point calibration.
If both available parameters for a specific gas type are being reported (e.g. NXCNC1
and NXCNC2) separate Calibrations should be carried out for each parameter.

118
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Operating Instructions

The available gas concentration iDAS parameters for output via the M200EH/EM analog output channels are:

Table 6-23: Analog Output iDAS Parameters Related to Gas Concentration Data
REPORTING
RANGE

PARAMETER
NAME1

DESCRIPTION

NXCNC1

Concentration

NXSLP1

Slope

NXOFS1

Offset

NXZSC1

Concentration during calibration, prior to computing new slope and offset

NXCNC2

Concentration

NXSLP2

Slope

NXOFS2

Offset

NXZSC2

Concentration during calibration, prior to computing new slope and offset

NOCNC1

Concentration

NOSLP1

Slope

NOOFS1

Offset

NOZSC1

Concentration during calibration, prior to computing new slope and offset

NOCNC2

Concentration

NOSLP2

Slope

NOOFS2

Offset

NOZSC2

Concentration during calibration, prior to computing new slope and offset

NO2 Range 12
(LOW)

N2CNC1

Concentration - Computed with data from NOx Range 1 and NO Range 1

N2ZSC1

Concentration during calibration, prior to computing new slope and offset

NO2 RANGE 22
(HIGH)

N2CNC2

Concentration - Computed with data from NOx Range 2 and NO Range 2

N2ZSC2

Concentration during calibration, prior to computing new slope and offset

NOx Range 1
(LOW)

NOx RANGE 2
(HIGH)

NO Range 1
(LOW)

NO RANGE 2
(HIGH)

3

O2 Range3

O2CONC

Concentration

O2OFST3

Slope

3

Offset

3

Concentration during calibration, prior to computing new slope and offset

O2SLPE
O2ZSCN

1

Parameters are not listed in the order they appear on the iDAS list (see Table A-6 or Appendix A.5 for the proper order of the full list of
parameters)

2

Since NO2 values are computed rather than measured directly, no separate slope or offset exist.

3

Only available on instruments with O2 sensor options installed.

119
04521C (DCN5731)

Operating Instructions

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

To assign an iDAS parameter to a specific analog output channel, press,
From the
AIO CONFIGURATION SUBMENU
(See Section 6.13.4.1)

DIAG

ANALOG I/O CONFIGURATION

PREV NEXT

DIAG AIO

ENTR

EXIT

AOUTS CALIBRATED: NO

SET>

CAL

EXIT

Continue pressing SET> until you reach the
output to be configured

DIAG AIO

DATA_OUT_2 5V, NXCNC1, NOCAL

 EDIT

DIAG AIO

EXIT

DATA_OUT_2 OUTPUT: 5V

SET> EDIT

EXIT

Continue pressing SET> until ...

DIAG AIO

DATA_OUT_2 DATA: NOCNC1

 EDIT

DIAG AIO

EXIT

DATA_OUT_2 DATA: NOCNC1

PREV NEXT

ENTR EXIT

Use these keys to move up
and down the list if available
iDAS parameters
(See Table A-6 of Appendix A.5)

EXAMPLE

DIAG AIO


DIAG AIO

DATA_OUT_2 DATA: STABIL
INS

DEL

[1]

ENTR EXIT

DATA_OUT_2 DATA: STABIL

 EDIT

EXIT

120
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Operating Instructions

6.13.5.6. Setting the Reporting Range Scale for an Analog Output
Once the iDAS parameter has been set, the top end of the scale must be selected. For concentration values
this should be equal to the expected maximum value for the application. The analog channel will scale its output
accordingly.
EXAMPLE:
IDAS parameter being output: NXCNC1
Maximum value expected: 800 ppm
Output range; 10 V
Output:

0 ppm......... 0.000 V
100 ppm...... 1.250 V
200 ppm...... 2.500 V
400 ppm...... 5.000 V
750 ppm...... 9.375 V

NOTE
Regardless of how the reporting range for an analog output channel is set, the
instrument will continue to measure NO, NO2 and NOx accurately for the entire physical
range of the instrument (See Section 6.13.3.2 for information on Physical range versus
reporting range)

Each output channel can be programmed for a separate gas with independent reporting range.
EXAMPLE:
A1  NXCNC1 (NOx Range 1) 0-1000 ppm NOX.
A1  NXCNC2 (NOx Range 2) 0-1250 ppm NOX.
A3  NOCNC1 (NOx Range 1) 0-500 ppm NO.
A4  N2CNC1 (NO2 Range 1) 0-750 ppm NO2.
NOTE:
While Range 1 for each gas type is often referred to as the LOW range and Range 2 as
the HIGH range, this is simply a naming convention. The upper limit for each range can
be set to any value.
EXAMPLE: A1  NXCNC1 (NOx Range 1) 0-1500 ppm NOX
A2  NXCNC2 (NOx Range 2) 0-1000 ppm NOX.

121
04521C (DCN5731)

Operating Instructions

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

To set the reporting range for an analog output, press:
From the
AIO CONFIGURATION SUBMENU
(See Section 6.13.4.1)

DIAG

ANALOG I/O CONFIGURATION

PREV NEXT

DIAG AIO
SET>

ENTR

EXIT
DIAG AIO

AOUTS CALIBRATED: NO
CAL

DATA_OUT_2 OUTPUT: 5V

SET> EDIT

EXIT

Continue pressing SET> until ...

Continue pressing SET> until you reach the
output to be configured
DIAG AIO
DIAG AIO

DATA_OUT_2 5V, NXCNC1, NOCAL

 EDIT

EXIT

DATA_OUT_2 SCALE: 100.00 PPM

 EDIT

EXIT

EXIT
DIAG AIO


INS

DEL

[1]

ENTR EXIT

EXAMPLE

DIAG AIO


DIAG AIO

INS

DEL

[1]

ENTR EXIT

DATA_OUT_2 SCALE: 1250.00 PPM

 EDIT

EXIT

RANGE SELECTION KEYPAD FUNCTIONS
KEY

FUNCTION



Moves the cursor one character to the right.

INS

Inserts a character before the cursor location.

DEL

Deletes a character at the cursor location.

[?]

Press this key to cycle through the range of numerals and characters available for insertion:

0-9; as well as “+” & “-“.
ENTR

Accepts the new setting and returns to the previous menu.

EXIT

Ignores the new setting and returns to the previous menu.

Some keys only appear as needed.

122
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Operating Instructions

6.13.5.7. Setting Data Update Rate for an Analog Output
The data update rate for the M200EH/EM analog outputs can be adjusted to match the requirements of the
specific iDAS parameter chosen for each channel. For instance, if the parameter NXCNC1 (NOx concentration;
Range 1) is chosen for channel A1 on an instrument set for dual gas measurement mode, it would be
meaningless to have an update rate of less than 30 seconds, since the NOx-No measurement cycle takes that
long to complete. On the other hand, if the channel was set to output the PMTDET voltage or the temperature of
the moly converter it might be useful to have output updated more frequently.
To change the update rate for an individual analog output channel, press:
From the
AIO CONFIGURATION SUBMENU
(See Section 6.13.4.1)

DIAG

ANALOG I/O CONFIGURATION

PREV NEXT

DIAG AIO

ENTR

EXIT

AOUTS CALIBRATED: NO

SET>

CAL

EXIT

Continue pressing SET> until you reach the
output to be configured

DIAG AIO

DATA_OUT_2 5V, NXCNC1, NOCAL

 EDIT

DIAG AIO

EXIT

DATA_OUT_2 OUTPUT: 5V

SET> EDIT

EXIT

Continue pressing SET> until ...

DIAG AIO

DATA_OUT_2 UPDATE: 5 SEC

 EDIT

Toggle these
keys to set the
data update
rate for this
channel.

DIAG AIO
0

EXIT

DATA_OUT_2 UPDATE: 5 SEC
0

5

ENTR EXIT

EXAMPLE

DIAG AIO
0

DIAG AIO

DATA_OUT_2 UPDATE: 30 SEC
3

0

ENTR EXIT

DATA_OUT_2 UPDATE: 30 SEC

 EDIT

EXIT

123
04521C (DCN5731)

Operating Instructions

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

6.13.5.8. Turning an Analog Output On or Off
Each output can be temporarily turned off. When off no data is sent to the output. Electronically, it is still active,
there is simply no data so the signal level at the rear of the instrument will fall to zero.
To turn an individual analog output channel ON/OFF, press:
From the
AIO CONFIGURATION SUBMENU
(See Section 6.13.4.1)

DIAG

ANALOG I/O CONFIGURATION

PREV NEXT

DIAG AIO
SET>

ENTR

EXIT

AOUTS CALIBRATED: NO
CAL

EXIT

Continue pressing SET> until you reach the
output to be configured

DIAG AIO

DATA_OUT_2 5V, NXCNC1, NOCAL

 EDIT

DIAG AIO

EXIT

DATA_OUT_2 OUTPUT: 5V

SET> EDIT

EXIT

Continue pressing SET> until ...

DIAG AIO

DATA_OUT_2 OUTPUT: ON

 EDIT

Toggle this key
to turn the
channel
ON/OFF

DIAG AIO
ON

DIAG AIO
OFF

EXIT

DATA_OUT_2 OUTPUT: ON
ENTR EXIT

DATA_OUT_2 OUTPUT: OFF
ENTR EXIT

124
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Operating Instructions

6.13.6. ANALOG OUTPUT CALIBRATION
Analog calibration needs to be carried out on first startup of the analyzer (performed in the factory as part of the
configuration process) or whenever re-calibration is required.
The analog outputs can be calibrated automatically or adjusted manually (see Section 6.13.5). During automatic
calibration the analyzer tells the output circuitry to generate a zero mV signal and high-scale point signal (usually
about 90% of chosen analog signal scale) then measures actual signal of the output. Any error at zero or highscale is corrected with a slope and offset.
Automatic calibration can be performed a group via the AOUTS CALIBRATION command, or individually by
using the CAL button located inside each output channels submenu. By default, the analyzer is configured so
that calibration of all four of the outputs can be initiated with the AOUTS CALIBRATION command.
To enable or disable the Auto-Cal feature for one output channel, press.
From the
AIO CONFIGURATION SUBMENU
(See Section 6.13.4.1)

DIAG

ANALOG I/O CONFIGURATION

PREV NEXT

DIAG AIO
SET>

ENTR

EXIT

AOUTS CALIBRATED: NO
CAL

EXIT

Continue pressing SET> until you reach the
output to be configured

DIAG AIO

DATA_OUT_3: 5V, NXCNC1, NOCAL

 EDIT

DIAG AIO

EXIT

DATA_OUT_3 RANGE: 5V

SET> EDIT

EXIT

Continue pressing SET> until ...

DIAG AIO

DATA_OUT_3 AUTO CAL.:ON

 EDIT

Toggle this key to
turn AUTO CAL
ON or OFF

DIAG AIO

EXIT

DATA_OUT_3 AUTO CAL.:ON

ON

ENTR EXIT

(OFF = manual
calibration mode).
DIAG AIO

ENTR accepts
the new setting.
EXIT ignores the
new setting

DATA_OUT_3 AUTO CAL.:OFF

OFF

ENTR EXIT

NOTE:
Channels with current loop output options cannot be calibrated automatically.
Outputs Configured for 0.1V full scale should always be calibrated manually.

125
04521C (DCN5731)

Operating Instructions

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

6.13.6.1. Automatic Analog Output Calibration
To calibrate the outputs as a group with the AOUTS CALIBRATION command, press:
From the
AIO CONFIGURATION SUBMENU
(See Section 6.13.4.1)

DIAG

ANALOG I/O CONFIGURATION

PREV NEXT

ENTR

DIAG AIO

AOUTS CALIBRATED: NO

SET>

CAL

DIAG AIO
Analyzer
automatically
calibrates all
channels for which
AUTO-CAL is turned
ON

EXIT

AUTO CALIBRATING DATA_OUT_1

DIAG AIO

AUTO CALIBRATING DATA_OUT_2

DIAG AIO

NOT AUTO CAL. DATA_OUT_3

DIAG AIO

If any of the channels
have not been calibrated
ot if at least one channel
has AUTO-CAL turned
OFF, this message will
read NO.

EXIT

DIAG AIO

AUTO CALIBRATING DATA_OUT_4

This message
appears when
AUTO-CAL is
Turned OFF for
a channel

AOUTS CALIBRATED: YES

SET> CAL

EXIT

NOTE:
Manual calibration should be used for the 0.1V range or in cases where the outputs
must be closely matched to the characteristics of the recording device.
To initiate an automatic calibration for an individual output channel, press:
From the
AIO CONFIGURATION SUBMENU
(See Section 6.13.4.1)

DIAG

ANALOG I/O CONFIGURATION

PREV NEXT

DIAG AIO
SET>

ENTR

EXIT

AOUTS CALIBRATED: NO
CAL

EXIT

DIAG AIO

DATA_OUT_2 CALIBRATED:NO

 CAL

EXIT

Continue pressing SET> until you reach the
output to be configured
DIAG AIO
DIAG AIO

AUTO CALIBRATING DATA_OUT_2

DATA_OUT_2 5V, NXCNC1, NOCAL

 EDIT

EXIT
DIAG AIO

DIAG AIO



DATA_OUT_2 RANGE: 5V

SET> EDIT

DATA_OUT_2 CALIBRATED: YES
CAL

EXIT

EXIT

Continue pressing SET> until ...

126
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Operating Instructions

6.13.6.2. Manual Calibration of Analog Output configured for Voltage Ranges
For highest accuracy, the voltages of the analog outputs can be manually calibrated.
NOTE:
The menu for manually adjusting the analog output signal level will only appear if the
AUTO-CAL feature is turned off for the channel being adjusted (see Section 6.13.5.1)
Calibration is performed with a voltmeter connected across the output terminals (See Figure 6-14) and by
changing the actual output signal level using the front panel keys in 100, 10 or 1 count increments.

See Table 3-1 for
pin assignments
of Analog Out
connector on the
rear panel

V

+DC

Gnd

V OUT +

V IN +

V OUT -

V IN -

Recording
Device

ANALYZER

Figure 6-6-14: Setup for Calibrating Analog Outputs

Table 6-24: Voltage Tolerances for Analog Output Calibration
FULL
SCALE

ZERO
TOLERANCE

SPAN VOLTAGE

SPAN
TOLERANCE

MINIMUM
ADJUSTMENT
(1 count)

0.1 VDC

±0.0005V

90 mV

±0.001V

0.02 mV

1 VDC

±0.001V

900 mV

±0.001V

0.24 mV

5 VDC

±0.002V

4500 mV

±0.003V

1.22 mV

10 VDC

±0.004V

4500 mV

±0.006V

2.44 mV

127
04521C (DCN5731)

Operating Instructions

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

To manually adjust the signal levels of an analog output channel, press:
From the
AIO CONFIGURATION SUBMENU
(See Section 6.13.4.1)

DIAG

ANALOG I/O CONFIGURATION

PREV NEXT

ENTR

EXIT
DIAG AIO

DIAG AIO
SET>

AOUTS CALIBRATED: NO
CAL

Continue pressing SET> until ...

DIAG AIO
DATA_OUT_2 5V, NXCNC1, NOCAL

 EDIT

Continue adjustments until the
voltage measured at the output
of the analyzer and/or the input
of the recording device matches
the value in the upper right hand
corner of the display (within the
tolerances
listed in Table 6-24.

DATA_OUT_2 CALIBRATED:NO

 CAL

EXIT

EXIT
DIAG AIO

These keys increase / decrease
the analog output signal level
(not the value on the display)
by 100, 10 or 1 counts.

EXIT

EXIT

Continue pressing SET> until you reach the
output to be configured

DIAG AIO

DATA_OUT_2 RANGE: 5V

SET> EDIT

DATA_OUT_2 VOLT-Z: 0 mV

U100 UP10 UP

DIAG AIO

DATA_OUT_2 VOLT-S: 4500 mV

U100 UP10 UP

DIAG AIO

DOWN DN10 D100 ENTR EXIT

These menu’s
only appear if
AUTO-CAL is
turned OFF

DOWN DN10 D100 ENTR EXIT

DATA_OUT_2 CALIBRATED: YES

 CAL

EXIT

6.13.6.3. Manual Calibration of Analog Outputs configured for Current Loop Ranges
The current loop output option (see Section 5.4) uses a small converter assembly to change the DC voltage
output by the standard voltage output to a current signal ranging between 0-20 mA. Since the exact current
increment per voltage count varies from converter to converter and from instrument to instrument, analog
outputs with this option installed cannot be calibrated automatically and must be adjusted manually.
Adjusting the signal zero and full scale values of the current loop output is done in a similar manner as manually
adjusting analog outputs configured for voltage output except that:


In this case calibration is performed with a current meter connected in series with the output circuitry
(See Figure 6-6-15).



Adjustments to the output are made using the front panel keys, also in 100, 10 or 1 count increments,
but the change in the voltage driving the converter assembly is displayed on the front panel.



As before, adjustment of the output is performed until the current reading of the meter reaches the
desired point (e.g. 2 mA, 4 mA, 20 mA, etc.)

128
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

See Table 3-2 for
pin assignments of
the Analog Out
connector on the
rear panel.

Operating Instructions

mA
Current
Meter
IN

OUT

V OUT +

I IN +

V OUT -

I IN -

Recording
Device

Analyzer

Figure 6-6-15: Setup for Calibrating Current Outputs
CAUTION
Do not exceed 60 V between current loop outputs and instrument ground.

If a current meter is not available, an alternative method for calibrating the current loop outputs is to connect a
250  1% resistor across the current loop output. Using a voltmeter, connected across the resistor, follow the
procedure above but adjust the output to the following values:

V

+DC

Gnd

V OUT +

Volt
Meter

V IN +
250 O

V OUT -

V IN -

ANALYZER

Recording
Device

Figure 6-6-16: Alternative Setup for Calibrating Current Outputs

129
04521C (DCN5731)

Operating Instructions

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Table 6-25: Current Loop Output Calibration with Resistor
FULL SCALE

VOLTAGE FOR 2-20 MA
(measured across 250Ω resistor)

VOLTAGE FOR 4-20 MA
(measured across 250Ω resistor)

0%

0.5 V

1.0 V

100%

5.0 V

5.0 V

To adjust the zero and span values of the current outputs, press:
From the
AIO CONFIGURATION SUBMENU
(See Section 6.13.4.1)

DIAG

ANALOG I/O CONFIGURATION

PREV NEXT

DIAG AIO
SET>

ENTR

EXIT

AOUTS CALIBRATED: NO
CAL

EXIT

DIAG AIO
U100 UP10

Continue pressing SET> until you reach the
output to be configured

DIAG AIO

DATA_OUT_2 CURR-Z: 13 mV
UP

DOWN DN10 D100 ENTR EXIT

DATA_OUT_2: CURR, NXCNC1, NOCAL

 EDIT

EXIT

DIAG AIO
U100 UP10

DIAG AIO

DOWN DN10 D100 ENTR EXIT

EXAMPLE

U100 UP10
DIAG AIO

DATA_OUT_2 CURR-Z: 0 mV
UP

DATA_OUT_2 CURR-S: 5000 mV
UP

Increase or decrease
the current output by
100, 10 or 1 counts.
The resulting change in
output voltage is
displayed in the upper
line.
Continue adjustments
until the correct current
is measured with the
current meter.

DOWN DN10 D100 ENTR EXIT

DATA_OUT_2 RANGE: CURR

SET> EDIT

EXIT

EXAMPLE

DIAG AIO
U100 UP10

DATA_OUT_2 CURR-S: 4866 mV
UP

DOWN DN10 D100 ENTR EXIT

Continue pressing SET> until ...
DIAG AIO
DIAG AIO

DATA_OUT_2 CALIBRATED:NO

 CAL



DATA_OUT_2 CALIBRATED: YES
CAL

EXIT

EXIT

130
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Operating Instructions

6.13.6.4. AIN Calibration
This is the sub-menu calibrates the analyzer’s A-to-D conversion circuitry. This calibration should only be
necessary after major repair such as a replacement of CPU, motherboard or power supplies.

To perform a AIN CALIBRATION, press:
From the
AIO CONFIGURATION SUBMENU
(See Section 6.13.4.1)

DIAG

ANALOG I/O CONFIGURATION

PREV NEXT

DIAG AIO

ENTR

EXIT

AOUTS CALIBRATED: NO

SET>

CAL

EXIT

Continue pressing SET> until ….

DIAG AIO


NOX=XXX.X

CAL

SETUP
DIAG DISP

SETUP X.X
CFG

PRIMARY SETUP MENU

DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE

SETUP X.X
COMM

SETUP X.X
8

ALRM

EXIT

8

DIAG

EDIT ENTR EXIT

Moves back and forth
along existing list of
display values

ENTR EXIT

DIAG DISP

SIGNAL I/O
NEXT

DEL

INSERT adds a new entry on the display list
before the currently selected value.

ENTER PASSWORD:818

1

4 SEC
INS

EXIT

SECONDARY SETUP MENU

VARS DIAG

1) NOX,

PREV NEXT

ENTR

EXIT

DISPLAY DATA: NOX

PREV NEXT

ENTR EXIT

Toggle PREV and NEXT keys until desired
display value appears (See Table

Continue pressing NEXT until ...

DIAG DISP
DIAG

DISPLAY SEQUENCE CONFIG.

PREV NEXT

ENTR

PREV NEXT

6-23 ).

DISPLAY DATA: N2H
ENTR EXIT

EXIT
DIAG DISP
0

4

DISPLAY DURATION: 4 SEC

ENTR Accepts the
new setting.
EXIT discards the
new setting.

ENTR EXIT

Toggle these keys to set desired
display duration in seconds

133
04521C (DCN5731)

Operating Instructions

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

To delete an entry in the display value list, press:
SAMPLE

A1:NXCNC1=100PPM

< TST TST >

SETUP X.X

NOX=XXX.X

CAL

SETUP

PRIMARY SETUP MENU

CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE

SETUP X.X
COMM

SECONDARY SETUP MENU

VARS DIAG

SETUP X.X
8

EXIT

ALRM

EXIT

ENTER PASSWORD:818

1

8

DIAG

ENTR EXIT

SIGNAL I/O
NEXT

ENTR

EXIT

Continue pressing NEXT until ...

DIAG

DISPLAY SEQUENCE CONFIG.

PREV NEXT

DIAG DISP
PREV NEXT
Moves back and forth
along existing list of
display values

DIAG DISP
YES

ENTR

1) NOX,

EXIT

4 SEC
INS

DEL

EDIT ENTR EXIT

DELETE?

NO

DIAG DISP

DELETED

134
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Operating Instructions

6.13.7.2. Optic Test
The optic test function tests the response of the PMT sensor by turning on an LED located in the cooling block of
the PMT (Fig. 10-15). The analyzer uses the light emitted from the LED to test its photo-electronic subsystem,
including the PMT and the current to voltage converter on the pre-amplifier board. To make sure that the
analyzer measures only the light coming from the LED, the analyzer should be supplied with zero air. The optic
test should produce a PMT signal of about 2000±1000 mV. To activate the electrical test press the following key
sequence.
SAMPLE

RANGE = 500.0 PPB

NOX=X.X

< TST TST > CAL

SETUP X.X

SETUP

PRIMARY SETUP MENU

CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE

SETUP X.X

SECONDARY SETUP MENU

COMM VARS DIAG ALRM

SETUP X.X
8

1

EXIT

EXIT

ENTER DIAG PASS: 818

8

ENTR EXIT

DIAG

SIGNAL I / O

PREV NEXT JUMP

ENTR EXIT

Press NEXT until…

DIAG

OPTIC TEST

PREV NEXT

DIAG OPTIC

ENTR EXIT

A1:NXCNC1=100PPM



NOX=XXX.X
EXIT

Press TST until…

While the optic test is
activated, PMT should be
2000 mV ± 1000 mV

DIAG ELEC


PMT = 2751 MV

NOX=X.X
EXIT

NOTE
This is a coarse test for functionality and not an accurate calibration tool. The resulting
PMT signal can vary significantly over time and also changes with low-level calibration.

135
04521C (DCN5731)

Operating Instructions

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

6.13.7.3. Electrical Test
The electrical test function creates a current, which substitutes the PMT signal, and feeds it into the preamplifier
board. This signal is generated by circuitry on the pre-amplifier board itself and tests the filtering and
amplification functions of that assembly along with the A/D converter on the motherboard. It does not test the
PMT itself. The electrical test should produce a PMT signal of about 2000 ±1000 mV.
To activate the electrical test press the following keys.
SAMPLE

A1:NXCNC1=100PPM

NOX=XXX.X

< TST TST > CAL

SETUP X.X

SETUP

PRIMARY SETUP MENU

CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE

SETUP X.X

EXIT

SECONDARY SETUP MENU

COMM VARS DIAG

SETUP X.X
8

1

EXIT

ENTER DIAG PASS: 818

8

ENTR EXIT

DIAG

SIGNAL I / O

PREV NEXT JUMP

ENTR EXIT

Press NEXT until…

DIAG

ELECTRICAL TEST

PREV NEXT

DIAG ELEC

ENTR EXIT

A1:NXCNC1=100PPM



NOX=XXX.X
EXIT

Press TST until…
While the electrical test is
activated, PMT should equal:

DIAG ELEC

PMT = 1732 MV

NOX=X.X

2000 mV ± 1000 mV


EXIT

136
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Operating Instructions

6.13.7.4. Ozone Generator Override
This feature allows the user to manually turn the ozone generator off and on. This can be done before
disconnecting the generator, to prevent ozone from leaking out, or after a system restart if the user does not
want to wait for 30 minutes during warm-up time. Note that this is one of the two settings in the DIAG menu that
is retained after you exit the menu. To access this feature press the following keys. Also note that the ozone
generator does not turn on if the ozone flow conditions are out of specification (e.g., if there is no flow through
the system or the pump is broken).
SAMPLE

A1:NXCNC1=100PPM

NOX=XXX.X

< TST TST > CAL

SETUP X.X

SETUP

PRIMARY SETUP MENU

CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE

SETUP X.X

EXIT

SECONDARY SETUP MENU

COMM VARS DIAG

SETUP X.X
8

1

EXIT

ENTER DIAG PASS: 818

8

ENTR EXIT

DIAG

SIGNAL I / O

PREV NEXT JUMP

ENTR

EXIT

Press NEXT until…

DIAG

OZONE GEN OVERRIDE

PREV NEXT

DIAG OZONE
OFF

ENTR EXIT

OZONE GEN OVERRIDE
ENTR EXIT

Toggle this key to turn the O3
generator ON/OFF.

137
04521C (DCN5731)

Operating Instructions

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

6.13.7.5. Flow Calibration
The flow calibration allows the user to adjust the values of the sample flow rates as they are displayed on the
front panel and reported through COM ports to match the actual flow rate measured at the sample inlet. This
does not change the hardware measurement of the flow sensors, only the software-calculated values.
To carry out this adjustment, connect an external, sufficiently accurate flow meter to the sample inlet (see
Chapter 11 for more details). Once the flow meter is attached and is measuring actual gas flow, press:
SAMPLE

A1:NXCNC1=100PPM

NOX=XXX.X

< TST TST > CAL

SETUP X.X

SETUP

PRIMARY SETUP MENU

CFG ACAL DAS RNGE PASS CLK

SETUP X.X

MORE EXIT

SECONDARY SETUP MENU

COMM VARS DIAG

SETUP X.X
8

1

EXIT

ENTER DIAG PASS: 818

8

ENTR EXIT

DIAG

SIGNAL I / O
NEXT

ENTR EXIT

Repeat Pressing NEXT until . . .

DIAG

DIAG

ENTR EXIT

SAMPLE OZONE

0

Exit returns
to the
previous menu

FLOW SENSOR TO CAL: SAMPLE

DIAG FCAL
Adjust these values
until the displayed
flow rate equals the
flow rate being
measured by the
independent flow
meter.

Adjust these values until
the displayed flow rate
equals the flow rate being
measured by the
independent flow meter.

FLOW CALIBRATION

PREV NEXT

Choose between
sample and ozone
flow sensors.

Exit at
any time
to return
to main
the
SETUP
menu

4

ENTR EXIT

ACTUAL FLOW: 480 CC / M
8

0

ENTR EXIT

ENTR accepts the
new value and
returns to the
previous menu
EXIT ignores the
new value and
returns to the
previous menu

138
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Operating Instructions

6.14. SETUP – ALRM: USING THE OPTIONAL GAS
CONCENTRATION ALARMS (OPT 67)
The optional alarm relay outputs (Option 67) are installed includes two concentration alarms Each alarm has a
user settable limit, and is associated with an opto-isolated TTL relay accessible via the status output connector
on the instrument’s back panel (see Section 6.15.1.1). If the concentration measured by the instrument rises
above that limit, the alarm‘s status output relay is closed NO2.
The default settings for ALM1 and ALM2 are:

Table 6-28: Concentration Alarm Default Settings
ALARM

STATUS

ALM1

Disabled

ALM2
1

LIMIT SET POINT

Disabled

OUTPUT RELAY
DESIGNATION

1

100 ppm

133.9 mg/m3

AL2

300 ppm

3

AL3

401.6 mg/m

Set points listed are for PPM. Should the reporting range units of measure be changed (see Section 6.13.4.5) the
analyzer will automatically scale the set points to match the new range unit setting.

NOTE
To prevent the concentration alarms from activating during span calibration operations
make sure to press CAL or CALS button prior to introducing span gas into the analyzer.
To enable either of the concentration alarms and set the Limit points, press:
SAMPLE

A1:NXCNC1=100PPM

< TST TST > CAL

NOX=XXX.X
SETUP
SETUP X.X

SETUP X.X

ALARM MENU

PRIMARY SETUP MENU
ALM1

CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE

ALM2

SETUP X.
SETUP X.X

EXIT

EXIT

ALARM 1 LIMIT: OFF

SECONDARY SETUP MENU
OFF

COMM VARS DIAG ALRM

ENTR EXIT

EXIT

ALARM 1 LIMIT: ON

SETUP X.
ON
Toggle these keys to
cycle through the
available character set:
0-9

ENTR EXIT

ALARM 1 LIMIT: 200,00 PPM

SETUP X.
0

1

0

0

.0

0

ENTR EXIT

ENTR key accepts the
new settings
EXIT key ignores the new
settings

139
04521C (DCN5731)

Operating Instructions

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

6.15. REMOTE OPERATION OF THE ANALYZER
6.15.1. REMOTE OPERATION USING THE EXTERNAL DIGITAL I/O
6.15.1.1. Status Outputs
The status outputs report analyzer conditions via optically isolated NPN transistors, which sink up to 50 mA of
DC current. These outputs can be used interface with devices that accept logic-level digital inputs, such as
programmable logic controllers (PLC’s). Each Status bit is an open collector output that can withstand up to 40
VDC. All of the emitters of these transistors are tied together and available at D.
NOTE
Most PLC’s have internal provisions for limiting the current that the input will draw from
an external device. When connecting to a unit that does not have this feature, an
external dropping resistor must be used to limit the current through the transistor
output to less than 50 mA. At 50 mA, the transistor will drop approximately 1.2V from
its collector to emitter.
The status outputs are accessed through a 12 pin connector on the analyzer’s rear panel labeled STATUS (see
Figure 6-17). The function of each pin is defined in Table 6–29

STATUS

+
GROUND

D
EMITTERS

8

COMMON

7
LOW SPAN

6
DIAG MODE

5
SPAN CAL

4
ZERO CAL

3
HIGH RANGE

2
CONC VALID

SYSTEM OK

1

Figure 6-6-17: Status Output Connector

140
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Table 6-29:

Operating Instructions

Status Output Pin Assignments

CONNECTO
R PIN

STATUS

1

SYSTEM OK

ON if no faults are present.

2

CONC VALID

ON if concentration measurement is valid, OFF when invalid.

3

HIGH RANGE

ON if unit is in high range of any AUTO range mode.

4

ZERO CAL

ON whenever the instrument is in ZERO calibration mode.

5

SPAN CAL

ON whenever the instrument is in SPAN calibration mode.

CONDITION (ON=CONDUCTING)

6

DIAG MODE

ON whenever the instrument is in DIAGNOSTIC mode.

7

LOW RANGE

ON if unit is in low range of any AUTO range mode.

8

Unused.
The emitters of the transistors on pins 1-8 are bussed together. For
most applications, this pin should be connected to the circuit ground
of the receiving device.

D

EMITTER BUS

+

DC POWER

+ 5 VDC, 30 mA maximum (combined rating with Control Inputs).

DIGITAL
GROUND

The ground from the analyzer’s internal, 5/±15 VDC power supply.

6.15.1.2. Control Inputs
Control inputs allow the user to remotely initiate ZERO and SPAN calibration modes are provided through a 10pin connector labeled CONTROL IN on the analyzer’s rear panel. These are opto-isolated, digital inputs that are
activated when a 5 VDC signal from the “U” pin is connected to the respective input pin.

Table 6-30: Control Input Pin Assignments
INPUT

STATUS

CONDITION WHEN ENABLED

A

EXTERNAL ZERO
CAL

Zero calibration mode is activated. The mode field of the display
will read ZERO CAL R.

B

EXTERNAL SPAN
CAL

Span calibration mode is activated. The mode field of the display
will read SPAN CAL R.

C

EXTERNAL LOW
SPAN CAL

Low span (mid-point) calibration mode is activated. The mode field
of the display will read LO CAL R.

D, E & F

Unused
DIGITAL GROUND

Provided to ground an external device (e.g., recorder).

U

DC power for Input
pull ups

Input for +5 VDC required to activate inputs A - F. This voltage can
be taken from an external source or from the “+” pin.

+

Internal +5V Supply

Internal source of +5V which can be used to activate inputs when
connected to pin U.

141
04521C (DCN5731)

Operating Instructions

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

There are two methods to activate control inputs. The internal +5V available from the “+” pin is the most
convenient method (see Figure 6-18). However, to ensure that these inputs are truly isolated, a separate,
external 5 VDC power supply should be used (see Figure 6-19).
CONTROL IN

ZERO

C

D

E

F

U

+

SPAN

B
LOW SPAN

A

Figure 6-6-18: Control Inputs with local 5 V power supply
CONTROL IN

C

D

E

F

U

+

SPAN

B
LOW SPAN

ZERO

A

-

5 VDC Power
Supply

+

Figure 6-6-19: Control Inputs with external 5 V power supply

6.15.2. REMOTE OPERATION USING THE EXTERNAL SERIAL I/O
6.15.2.1. Terminal Operating Modes
The Model 200EH/EM can be remotely configured, calibrated or queried for stored data through the serial ports.
As terminals and computers use different communication schemes, the analyzer supports two communicate
modes specifically designed to interface with these two types of devices.


Computer mode is used when the analyzer is connected to a computer with a dedicated
interface program such as APICOM. More information regarding APICOM can be found in later
in this section or on the Teledyne Instruments website at http://www.teledyneapi.com/software/apicom/.



Interactive mode is used with a terminal emulation programs such as HyperTerminal or a
“dumb” computer terminal. The commands that are used to operate the analyzer in this mode
are listed in Table 6-31 and in Appendix A-6.

142
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Operating Instructions

6.15.2.2. Help Commands in Terminal Mode
Table 6-31: Terminal Mode Software Commands
COMMAND

Control-T
Control-C
CR
(carriage return)
BS
(backspace)
ESC
(escape)
? [ID] CR
Control-C
Control-P

FUNCTION

Switches the analyzer to terminal mode (echo, edit). If mode flags 1 & 2 are OFF, the interface
can be used in interactive mode with a terminal emulation program.
Switches the analyzer to computer mode (no echo, no edit).
A carriage return is required after each command line is typed into the terminal/computer. The
command will not be sent to the analyzer to be executed until this is done. On personal
computers, this is achieved by pressing the ENTER key.
Erases one character to the left of the cursor location.
Erases the entire command line.
This command prints a complete list of available commands along with the definitions of their
functionality to the display device of the terminal or computer being used. The ID number of
the analyzer is only necessary if multiple analyzers are on the same communications line, such
as the multi-drop setup.
Pauses the listing of commands.
Restarts the listing of commands.

6.15.2.3. Command Syntax
Commands are not case-sensitive and all arguments within one command (i.e. ID numbers, keywords, data
values, etc.) must be separated with a space character.
All Commands follow the syntax:
X [ID] COMMAND 
Where
X

is the command type (one letter) that defines the type of command. Allowed designators
are listed in Table 6-31 and Appendix A-6.

[ID]

is the analyzer identification number (see Section 6.11.1.). Example: the Command “? 200”
followed by a carriage return would print the list of available commands for the revision of
software currently installed in the instrument assigned ID Number 200.

COMMAND is the command designator: This string is the name of the command being issued (LIST,
ABORT, NAME, EXIT, etc.). Some commands may have additional arguments that define
how the command is to be executed. Press ?  or refer to Appendix A-6 for a list of
available command designators.


is a carriage return. All commands must be terminated by a carriage return (usually
achieved by pressing the ENTER key on a computer).

Table 6-32: Command Types
COMMAND
C
D
L
T
V
W

COMMAND TYPE
Calibration
Diagnostic
Logon
Test measurement
Variable
Warning

143
04521C (DCN5731)

Operating Instructions

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

6.15.2.4. Data Types
Data types consist of integers, hexadecimal integers, floating-point numbers, Boolean expressions and text
strings.


Integer data are used to indicate integral quantities such as a number of records, a filter length, etc.
They consist of an optional plus or minus sign, followed by one or more digits. For example, +1, -12,
123 are all valid integers.



Hexadecimal integer data are used for the same purposes as integers. They consist of the two
characters “0x,” followed by one or more hexadecimal digits (0-9, A-F, a-f), which is the ‘C’ programming
language convention. No plus or minus sign is permitted. For example, 0x1, 0x12, 0x1234abcd are all
valid hexadecimal integers.



Floating-point numbers are used to specify continuously variable values such as temperature set points,
time intervals, warning limits, voltages, etc. They consist of an optional plus or minus sign, followed by
zero or more digits, an optional decimal point, and zero or more digits. (At least one digit must appear
before or after the decimal point.) Scientific notation is not permitted. For example, +1.0, 1234.5678, 0.1, 1 are all valid floating-point numbers.



Boolean expressions are used to specify the value of variables or I/O signals that may assume only two
values. They are denoted by the keywords ON and OFF.



Text strings are used to represent data that cannot be easily represented by other data types, such as
data channel names, which may contain letters and numbers. They consist of a quotation mark,
followed by one or more printable characters, including spaces, letters, numbers, and symbols, and a
final quotation mark. For example, “a”, “1”, “123abc”, and “()[]<>” are all valid text strings. It is not
possible to include a quotation mark character within a text string.



Some commands allow you to access variables, messages, and other items, such as iDAS data
channels, by name. When using these commands, you must type the entire name of the item; you
cannot abbreviate any names.

144
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Operating Instructions

6.15.2.5. Status Reporting
Reporting of status messages as an audit trail is one of the three principal uses for the RS-232 interface (the
other two being the command line interface for controlling the instrument and the download of data in electronic
format). You can effectively disable the reporting feature by setting the interface to quiet mode (see Section
6.11.8., Table 6-14).
Status reports include iDAS data (when reporting is enabled), warning messages, calibration and diagnostic
status messages. Refer to Appendix A-3 for a list of the possible messages, and this section for information on
controlling the instrument through the RS-232 interface.

GENERAL MESSAGE FORMAT
All messages from the instrument (including those in response to a command line request) are in the format:
X DDD:HH:MM [Id] MESSAGE
Where
X

is a command type designator, a single character indicating the message type, as
shown in the Table 6-31.

DDD:HH:MM is the time stamp, the date and time when the message was issued. It consists of the
Day-of-year (DDD) as a number from 1 to 366, the hour of the day (HH) as a number
from 00 to 23, and the minute (MM) as a number from 00 to 59.
[ID]

is the analyzer ID, a number with 1 to 4 digits.

MESSAGE

is the message content that may contain warning messages, test measurements, iDAS
reports, variable values, etc.



is a carriage return / line feed pair, which terminates the message.

The uniform nature of the output messages makes it easy for a host computer to parse them into an easy
structure. Keep in mind that the front panel display does not give any information on the time a message was
issued, hence it is useful to log such messages for trouble-shooting and reference purposes. Terminal
emulation programs such as HyperTerminal can capture these messages to text files for later review.

6.15.2.6. Remote Access by Modem
The M200EH/EM can be connected to a modem for remote access. This requires a cable between the
analyzer’s COM port and the modem, typically a DB-9F to DB-25M cable (available from Teledyne Instruments
with part number WR0000024).
Once the cable has been connected, check to make sure the DTE-DCE is in the correct position. Also make
sure the M200EH/EM COM port is set for a baud rate that is compatible with the modem, which needs to
operate with an 8-bit word length with one stop bit.
The first step is to turn on the MODEM ENABLE communication mode (Mode 64, Section 6.11.8). Once this is
completed, the appropriate setup command line for your modem can be entered into the analyzer. The default
setting for this feature is
AT Y0 &D0 &H0 &I0 S0=2 &B0 &N6 &M0 E0 Q1 &W0
This string can be altered to match your modem’s initialization and can be up to 100 characters long.

145
04521C (DCN5731)

Operating Instructions

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
NOTE:

If Hessen Protocol Mode is active for a COMM port, operation via a modem is not
available on that port.

To change this setting press:
SAMPLE

A1:NXCNC1=100PPM

NOX=XXX.X

< TST TST > CAL

SETUP
SETUP X.X
SET>

SETUP X.X

COM1 MODE:0
EDIT

CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE

EXIT
SETUP X.X

EXIT returns
to the
previous
menu


SETUP X.X

EXIT

PRIMARY SETUP MENU
COM1 BAUD RATE:19200
EDIT

COMM VARS DIAG

ALRM

EXIT
SETUP X.X

Select which
COM Port is
tested

SETUP X.X
ID

COM1

EXIT

SECONDARY SETUP MENU



COMMUNICATIONS MENU
COM2

COM1 MODEM INIT:AT Y &D &H
EDIT

EXIT

EXIT
SETUP X.X


The  keys move
the [ ] cursor left and right
along the text string

COM1 MODEM INIT:[A]T Y &D &H
INS

The INS key
inserts a character
before the cursor
location.

DEL

[A]

ENTR

The DEL key
deletes a character
at the cursor
location.

EXIT

ENTR accepts the
new string and returns
to the previous menu.
EXIT ignores the new
string and returns to
the previous menu.

Press the [?]
key repeatedly to cycle through the
available character set:
0-9
A-Z
space ’ ~ !  # $ % ^ & * ( ) - _ =
+[ ] { } < >\ | ; : , . / ?

146
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Operating Instructions

To Initialize the modem press:
SAMPLE

A1:NXCNC1=100PPM

NOX=XXX.X

< TST TST > CAL

SETUP
SETUP X.X

SETUP X.X

SET>

PRIMARY SETUP MENU

CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE

COM1 MODE:0
EDIT

EXIT
SETUP X.X

EXIT returns
to the
previous
menu

SETUP X.X



SECONDARY SETUP MENU

COMM VARS DIAG

ALRM

COM1 BAUD RATE:19200
EDIT

SETUP X.X
ID

COM1

EXIT

EXIT
COM1 MODEM INIT:AT Y &D &H

SETUP X.X
Select which
COM Port is
tested

EXIT

COMMUNICATIONS MENU
COM2



EDIT

EXIT

EXIT
SETUP X.X

COM1 INITIALIZE MODEM

 INIT

SETUP X.X
EXIT returns to the
Communications Menu.

EXIT

INITIALIZING MODEM

 INIT

EXIT

6.15.2.7. COM Port Password Security
In order to provide security for remote access of the M200EH/EM, a LOGON feature can be enabled to require a
password before the instrument will accept commands. This is done by turning on the SECURITY MODE (see
Section 6.11.8). Once the SECURITY MODE is enabled, the following items apply.


A password is required before the port will respond or pass on commands.



If the port is inactive for one hour, it will automatically logoff, which can also be achieved with the
LOGOFF command.



Three unsuccessful attempts to log on with an incorrect password will cause subsequent logins to be
disabled for 1 hour, even if the correct password is used.



If not logged on, the only active command is the '?' request for the help screen.



The following messages will be returned at logon:
o

LOGON SUCCESSFUL - Correct password given

o

LOGON FAILED - Password not given or incorrect

o

LOGOFF SUCCESSFUL - Connection terminated successfully

To log on to the M200EH/EM analyzer with SECURITY MODE feature enabled, type:
LOGON 940331
940331 is the default password. To change the default password, use the variable RS232_PASS issued as
follows:
V RS232_PASS=NNNNNN
Where N is any numeral between 0 and 9.

147
04521C (DCN5731)

Operating Instructions

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

6.15.2.8. APICOM Remote Control Program
APICOM is an easy-to-use, yet powerful interface program that allows to access and control any of Teledyne
Instruments’ main line of ambient and stack-gas instruments from a remote connection through direct cable,
modem or Ethernet. Running APICOM, a user can:


Establish a link from a remote location to the M200EH/EM through direct cable connection via RS-232
modem or Ethernet.



View the instrument’s front panel and remotely access all functions that could be accessed when
standing in front of the instrument.



Remotely edit system parameters and set points.



Download, view, graph and save data for predictive diagnostics or data analysis.



Retrieve, view, edit, save and upload iDAS configurations.



Check on system parameters for trouble-shooting and quality control.

APICOM is very helpful for initial setup, data analysis, maintenance and trouble-shooting. Figure 6-20 shows
examples of APICOM’s main interface, which emulates the look and functionality of the instruments actual front
panel

Figure 6-6-20: APICOM Remote Control Program Interface
APICOM is included free of cost with the analyzer and the latest versions can also be downloaded for free at
http://www.teledyne-api.com/software/apicom/.

6.15.3. ADDITIONAL COMMUNICATIONS DOCUMENTATION
Table 6-33: Serial Interface Documents
Interface / Tool

Document Title

Part Number

Available Online*

APICOM

APICOM User Manual

039450000

YES

Multi-drop

RS-232 Multi-drop Documentation

021790000

YES

DAS Manual

Detailed description of the iDAS.

028370000

YES

* These documents can be downloaded at http://www.teledyne-api.com/manuals/

148
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Operating Instructions

6.15.4. USING THE M200EH/EM WITH A HESSEN PROTOCOL NETWORK
6.15.4.1. General Overview of Hessen Protocol
The Hessen protocol is a multidrop protocol, in which several remote instruments are connected via a common
communications channel to a host computer. The remote instruments are regarded as slaves of the host
computer. The remote instruments are unaware that they are connected to a multidrop bus and never initiate
messages. They only respond to commands from the host computer and only when they receive a command
containing their own unique ID number.
The Hessen protocol is designed to accomplish two things: to obtain the status of remote instruments, including
the concentrations of all the gases measured; and to place remote instruments into zero or span calibration or
measure mode. API’s implementation supports both of these principal features.
The Hessen protocol is not well defined, therefore while API’s application is completely compatible with the
protocol itself, it may be different from implementations by other companies.
The following subsections describe the basics for setting up your instrument to operate over a Hessen Protocol
network. For more detailed information as well as a list of host computer commands and examples of command
and response message syntax, download the Manual Addendum for Hessen Protocol from the Teledyne
Instruments’ web site: http://www.teledyne-api.com/manuals/index.asp .

6.15.4.2. Hessen COMM Port Configuration
Hessen protocol requires the communication parameters of the M200EH/EM’s COMM ports to be set differently
than the standard configuration as shown in the table below.

Table 6-34: RS-232 Communication Parameters for Hessen Protocol
Parameter

Standard

Hessen

Data Bits

8

7

Stop Bits

1

2

Parity

None

Even

Duplex

Full

Half

To change the rest of the COMM port parameters and modes (see Section 6.11.8).
To change the baud rate of the M200EH/EM’s COMM ports (see Section 6.11.9.)
NOTES


Make sure that the communication parameters of the host computer are properly
set.



The instrument software has a 200 ms. latency before it responds to commands
issued by the host computer. Activating Hessen Protocol.



Operation via modem is not available over any COMM port on which HESSEN protocol
is active.

149
04521C (DCN5731)

Operating Instructions

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

The first step in configuring the M200EH/EM to operate over a Hessen protocol network is to activate the
Hessen mode for COMM ports and configure the communication parameters for the port(s) appropriately.
Press:

SAMPLE

Repeat the
entire process to
set up the
COM2 port

A1:NXCNC1=100PPM

< TST TST > CAL

SETUP X.X

NOX=XXX.X

SETUP X.X

SETUP

NEXT OFF

PRIMARY SETUP MENU

CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE

Continue pressing next until …

PREV NEXT

SETUP X.X
ID

The sum of the mode
IDs of the selected
modes is displayed
here

COM1

ALRM

COM2

SETUP X.X

ENTR EXIT

COM1 HESSEN PROTOCOL : ON

PREV NEXT ON

EXIT

COM1 MODE:0
EDIT

OFF

EXIT

COMMUNICATIONS MENU

SETUP X.X
SET>

COM1 HESSEN PROTOCOL : OFF

SECONDARY SETUP MENU

COMM VARS DIAG

Select which COMM
port to configure

ENTR EXIT

EXIT
SETUP X.X

SETUP X.X

COM1 QUIET MODE: OFF

EXIT

ENTR EXIT

SETUP X.X

COM1 E,7,1 MODE: OFF

PREV NEXT

OFF

SETUP X.X

COM1 E,7,1 MODE: ON

Toggle OFF/ON keys
to change
activate/deactivate
selected mode.

ENTR EXIT

PREV NEXT ON

ENTR key accepts the
new settings
ENTR EXIT

EXIT key ignores the new
settings

6.15.4.3. Selecting a Hessen Protocol Type
Currently there are two version of Hessen Protocol in use. The original implementation, referred to as TYPE 1,
and a more recently released version, TYPE 2 that has more flexibility when operating with instruments that can
measure more than one type of gas. For more specific information about the difference between TYPE 1and
TYPE 2 download the Manual Addendum for Hessen Protocol from the Teledyne Instruments’ web site:
http://www.teledyne-api.com/manuals/index.asp .
To select a Hessen Protocol Type press:
SAMPLE

A1:NXCNC1=100PPM

NOX=XXX.X

< TST TST > CAL

SETUP
SETUP X.

SETUP X.X

PRIMARY SETUP MENU

CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE

SET>

HESSEN VARIATION: TYPE 1
EDIT

EXIT

ENTR key accepts the
new settings
SETUP X.X

SETUP X.X

SECONDARY SETUP MENU

COMM VARS DIAG

SETUP X.X
ID HESN
EXIT

ALRM

COMMUNICATIONS MENU
COM1

COM2

EXIT

HESSEN VARIATION: TYPE 1

TYE1 TYPE 2

EXIT key ignores the new
settings

ENTR EXIT

EXIT

Press to change
protocol type.
SETUP X.X
PREV NEXT

HESSEN VARIATION: TYPE 2
OFF

ENTR EXIT

NOTE

150
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Operating Instructions

While Hessen Protocol Mode can be activated independently for COM1 and COM2, The
TYPE selection affects both Ports.

6.15.4.4. Setting The Hessen Protocol Response Mode
The Teledyne Instruments’ implementation of Hessen Protocol allows the user to choose one of several different
modes of response for the analyzer.

Table 6-28: M200EH/EM Hessen Protocol Response Modes
MODE ID

MODE DESCRIPTION

CMD

This is the Default Setting. Reponses from the instrument are encoded as the traditional command format.
Style and format of responses depend on exact coding of the initiating command.

BCC

Responses from the instrument are always delimited with  (at the beginning of the response, 
(at the end of the response followed by a 2 digit Block Check Code (checksum), regardless of the command
encoding.

TEXT

Responses from the instrument are always delimited with  at the beginning and the end of the string,
regardless of the command encoding.

To Select a Hessen response mode, press:
SAMPLE

RANGE = 500.000 PPB

SO2 =XXX.X

< TST TST > CAL

SAMPLE
8

SETUP X.X

SETUP

ENTER SETUP PASS : 818
1

8

ENTR EXIT

ID

PRIMARY SETUP MENU

CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE

SETUP X.X

EXIT

ALRM

HESN

SETUP X.X
SET>

SECONDARY SETUP MENU

COMM VARS DIAG

SETUP X.X

COMMUNICATIONS MENU
COM1

COM2

EXIT

HESSEN VARIATION: TYPE 1

EDIT

EXIT
ENTR key accepts the
new settings

EXIT

Press to
change
response
mode.

SETUP X.X

HESSEN RESPONSE MODE :CMD



EDIT

SETUP X.X

HESSEN RESPONSE MODE :CMD

BCC TEXT

EDIT

EXIT key ignores the new
settings

EXIT

ENTR EXIT

151
04521C (DCN5731)

Operating Instructions

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

6.15.4.5. Hessen Protocol Gas ID
Since the M200EH/EM measures both NO, NO2 NO and O2 (if the optional sensor is installed), all of these
gases are listed in the Hessen protocol gas list. In its default state the Hessen protocol firmware assigns each of
these gases a Hessen ID number and actively reports all of them even if the instrument is only measuring one
(see MEASURE_MODE, Section 6.12) .
To change or edit these settings press:
SAMPLE

A1:NXCNC1=100PPM

NOX=XXX.X
KEY

< TST TST > CAL

SETUP X.X

SETUP

PRIMARY SETUP MENU

CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE

SETUP X.X

ID

HESN

SETUP X.X
SET>

Moves to next gas entry in list

NEXT>

Moves the cursor previous gas entry in list

INS

Inserts a new gas entry into the list.

DEL

Deletes the >>>>>.

ENTR

Accepts the new setting and returns to the previous menu.

EXIT

Ignores the new setting and returns to the previous menu.

SECONDARY SETUP MENU

COMM VARS DIAG

SETUP X.X

EXI

FUNCTION



EDIT

SETUP X.X

HESSEN GAS LIST



EDIT

EXIT

EXIT

HESSEN VARIATION: TYPE 1
EDIT

SETUP X.X

EXIT

EXIT
SETUP X.X

NOX, 211, REPORTED



INS

DEL

EDIT

PRNT EXIT

Use the PREV & NEXT keys to cycle
existing entries in Hessen gas list
SETUP X.X

GAS TYPE NOX



ENTR EXIT

Use the PREV & NEXT keys to cycle
through available gases
SETUP X.X
0

0

ENTR key accepts
the new settings

GAS ID: 211
0

ENTR EXIT

EXIT key ignores
the new settings

Toggle these keys to change the gas ID
number for the chosen gas.
SETUP X.X

REPORTED : ON

ON

ENTR EXIT

Toggle this key to switch reporting Between
ON and OFF

Table 6-35: M200EH/EM Hessen GAS ID List
GAS DEFAULT

HESSEN GAS ID

NOx

211

NO

212

NO2

213

O2

214

152
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Operating Instructions

6.15.4.6. Setting Hessen Protocol Status Flags
Teledyne Instruments’ implementation of Hessen protocols includes a set of status bits that are included in
responses to inform the host computer of the M200EH/EM’s condition. The default settings for these bit/flags
are:

Table 6-36: Default Hessen Status Bit Assignments
STATUS FLAG NAME

DEFAULT BIT ASSIGNMENT

WARNING FLAGS

SAMPLE FLOW WARNING

0001

OZONE FLOW WARNING

0002

RCELL PRESS WARN

0004

BOX TEMP WARNING

0008

RCELL TEMP WARNING

0010

PMT TEMP WARNING

0040

CONVERTER TEMP WARNING

0080

WARMUP MODE

1000

INVALID CONC

8000

OPERATIONAL FLAGS

In Manual Calibration Mode

0200

In O2 Calibration Mode

0400

In Zero Calibration Mode

0400

In Low Span Calibration Mode

0800

In Span Calibration Mode

0800

UNITS OF MEASURE FLAGS

UGM

0000

MGM

2000

PPB

4000

PPM

6000
0020, 0100

SPARE/UNUSED BITS
UNASSIGNED FLAGS

Box Temp Warning

Front Panel Warning

System Reset

Analog Cal Warning

Rear Board Not Detected

Cannot Dyn Zero

Relay Board Warning

Cannot Dyn Span

Manifold Temp Warn

O2 Cell Temp Warn

Ozone Gen Off

AutoZero Warning

Conc Alarm 1

Conc Alarm 2

HVPS Warning

In MP Calibration Mode

NOTES:
It is possible to assign more than one flag to the same Hessen status bit. This allows
the grouping of similar flags, such as all temperature warnings, under the same status
bit.
Be careful not to assign conflicting flags to the same bit as each status bit will be
triggered if any of the assigned flags is active.

153
04521C (DCN5731)

Operating Instructions

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

To assign or reset the status flag bit assignments, press:
SAMPLE

A1:NXCNC1=100PPM

NOX=XXX.X

< TST TST > CAL
SETUP X.X

SETUP

PRIMARY SETUP MENU

CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE

SETUP X.X

SECONDARY SETUP MENU

COMM VARS DIAG

SETUP X.X
ID

EXIT

ALRM

EXIT

COMMUNICATIONS MENU

HESN

COM1

COM2

EXIT

Repeat pressing SET> until …

SETUP X.

HESSEN STATUS FLAGS



EDIT

SETUP X.

PMT DET WARNING: 0002

PREV NEXT

EXIT

EDIT

PRNT EXIT

Repeat pressing NEXT or PREV until the desired
message flag is displayed. See Table 6-29.
For example …

SETUP X.
PREV NEXT

The  keys move
the [ ] cursor left
and right along
the bit string.

SETUP X.


SYSTEM RESET: 0000
EDIT

PRNT EXIT

SYSTEM RESET: [0]000
[0]

ENTR key accepts the
new settings
ENTR EXIT

EXIT key ignores the new
settings

Press the [?] key repeatedly to cycle through the available character set: 0-9
Note: Values of A-F can also be set but are meaningless.

6.15.4.7. Instrument ID Code
Each instrument on a Hessen Protocol network must have a unique ID code. The M200EH/EM is programmed
with a default ID code of 200. To change this code see Section 6.11.1

User Notes:

154
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Calibration Procedures

7. CALIBRATION PROCEDURES
This chapter describes calibration procedures for the M200EH/EM. All of the methods described here can be
initiated and controlled through the front panel or the COM ports.

NOTE
CALIBRATION vs. CALIBRATION CHECK
Pressing the ENTR key during the following procedures re-calculates the stored
values for OFFSET and SLOPE and alters the instrument’s calibration.
If you wish to perform a calibration check, DO NOT press the ENTR button.

7.1. CALIBRATION PREPARATIONS
7.1.1. REQUIRED EQUIPMENT, SUPPLIES, AND EXPENDABLES
Calibration of the Model 200EH/EM analyzer requires a certain amount of equipment and supplies. These
include, but are not limited to, the following:


Zero-air source (defined in Section 7.1.2).



Span gas source (defined in Section 7.1.3).



Gas lines - all gas line materials should be stainless steel or Teflon-type (PTFE or FEP). High
concentration NO gas transported over long distances may require stainless steel to avoid oxidation of
NO with O2 diffusing into the tubing.



A recording device such as a strip-chart recorder and/or data logger (optional). For electronic
documentation, the internal data acquisition system can be used.

7.1.2. ZERO AIR
Zero air is similar in chemical composition to the Earth’s atmosphere but scrubbed of all components that might
affect the analyzer’s readings. For NOX measuring devices, zero air should be devoid of NOX and large amounts
of CO2, NH3 and water vapor. Water vapor and moderate amounts of NH3 can be removed using a sample gas
conditioner (Section 5.10).
Devices such as the API Model 701 zero air generator that condition ambient air by drying and removal of
pollutants are available. We recommend this type of device for generating zero air. Please contact our sales
department for more information on this.

155
04521C (DCN5731)

Calibration Procedures

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

7.1.3. SPAN CALIBRATION GAS STANDARDS & TRACEABILITY
NOTE
We strongly recommend that span calibration is carried out with NO span gas, although
it is possible to use NO2 or a gas phase titration (GPT) system.
Quick span checks may be done with either NO, NO2 or a mixture of NO and NO2 as is
used in GPT.
Span gas is specifically mixed to match the chemical composition of the gas being measured at about 80% of
the desired full measurement range. For example, if the measurement range is 120 ppm, the span gas should
have an NO concentration of about 96 ppm.
Span gases should be certified to a specific accuracy to ensure accurate calibration of the analyzer. Typical gas
accuracy for NOX gases is 1 or 2%. NO standards should be mixed in nitrogen (to prevent oxidation of NO to
NO2 over time), whereas NO2 standards should be mixed in air (to keep it oxidized).
For oxygen measurements, we recommend s reference gas of 21% O2 in N2. the user can either utilize the NOX
standards (if mixed in air). For quick checks. ambient air can be used at an assumed concentration of 20.8%.
Generally, O2 concentration in dry, ambient air varies by less than 1%.

7.1.3.1. Traceability
All equipment used to produce calibration gases should be verified against standards of the National Institute for
Standards and Technology (NIST). To ensure NIST traceability, we recommend to acquire cylinders of working
gas that are certified to be traceable to NIST standard reference materials (SRM). These are available from a
variety of commercial sources.

Table 7-1: NIST-SRM's Available for Traceability of NOx Calibration Gases
NIST-SRM4

TYPE

NOMINAL
CONCENTRATION

2627a
2628a
2629a

Nitric Oxide (NO) in N2
Nitric Oxide (NO) in N2
Nitric Oxide (NO) in N2

5 ppm
10 ppm
20 ppm

1683b
1684b
1685b
1686b
1687b

Nitric Oxide (NO) in N2
Nitric Oxide (NO) in N2
Nitric Oxide (NO) in N2
Nitric Oxide (NO) in N2
Nitric Oxide (NO) in N2

50 ppm
100 ppm
250 ppm
5000 ppm
1000 ppm

2630
2631a
2635
2636a

Nitric Oxide (NO) in N2
Nitric Oxide (NO) in N2
Nitric Oxide (NO) in N2
Nitric Oxide (NO) in N2

1500 ppm
3000 ppm
800 ppm
2000 ppm

2656
2660a

Oxides of Nitrogen (NOx) in Air
Oxides of Nitrogen (NOx) in Air

2500 ppm
100 ppm

2659a

Oxygen in Nitrogen (O2)

21 mol %

156
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Calibration Procedures

7.1.4. DATA RECORDING DEVICES
A strip chart recorder, data acquisition system or digital data acquisition system should be used to record data
from the serial or analog outputs of the M200EH/EM. If analog readings are used, the response of the recording
system should be checked against a NIST traceable voltage source or meter. Data recording devices should be
capable of bi-polar operation so that negative readings can be recorded. For electronic data recording, the
M200EH/EM provides an internal data acquisition system (iDAS), which is described in detail in Section 6.7.
APICOM, a remote control program, is also provided as a convenient and powerful tool for data handling,
download, storage, quick check and plotting.

7.1.5. NO2 CONVERSION EFFICIENCY
To ensure accurate operation of the M200EH/EM, it is important to check the NO2 conversion efficiency (CE)
periodically and to update this value as necessary.
The default setting for the NO2 converter efficiency is 1.0000. For the analyzer to function correctly, the
converter efficiency must be between 0.9600 and 1.0200 (96-102% conversion efficiency) as per US-EPA
requirements. If the converter’s efficiency is outside these limits, the NO2 converter should be replaced.
NOTE
The currently programmed CE is recorded along with the calibration data in the iDAS for
documentation and performance analysis

7.1.5.1. Determining / Updating the NO2 Converter Efficiency
The following procedure will cause the Model 200EH/EM to automatically calculate the current NO2 conversion
efficiency.

STEP ONE:
Connect a source of calibrated NO2 span gas as shown below.

Source of

MODEL 700
Gas Dilution
Calibrator

SAMPLE GAS

VENT here if input
is pressurized

Removed during
calibration

NOx Gas
(High Concentration)

SAMPLE

MODEL 701
Zero Gas
Generator

VENT

EXHAUST

MODEL
200EH/EM

PUMP

Figure 7-1:

Gas Supply Setup for Determination of NO2 Conversion Efficiency
157

04521C (DCN5731)

Calibration Procedures

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

STEP TWO:
Set the expected NO2 span gas concentration:

SAMPLE
< TST TST >

A1:NXCNC1=100PPM
CAL

SAMPLE
NOX

M-P CAL

NOX=XXX.X

M-P CAL

GAS TO CAL:NOX

SAMPLE

NOX

ENTR EXIT

NO2

ENTR EXIT

EXIT

CONCENTRATION MENU
NO

M-P CAL

RANGE TO CAL:LOW

LOW HIGH

NOX=X.XXX

 ZERO SPAN CONC

SETUP

O2

A1:NXCNC1 =100PPM

EXIT

CONVERTER EFFICIENCY MENU

CAL

M-P CAL
0

CONV

SET

EXIT

NO2 CE CONC:80.0 Conc
0

8

0

.0

EXIT ignores the new
setting and returns to
the previous display.

ENTR EXIT

ENTR accepts the new
setting and returns to
the
CONVERTER
EFFICIENCY
MENU.
If using NO span gas
in addition to NO X
repeat last step.

The NO X & NO span concentration
values automatically default to
80.0 Conc.
If this is not the the concentration of
the span gas being used, toggle
these buttons to set the correct
concentration of the NO X and NO
calibration gases.

STEP THREE
Activate NO2 measurement stability function.

SAMPLE

RANGE = 50.000 PPM

< TST TST >

SETUP X.X

CO =X.XXX

CAL

SETUP

COMM

0) DAS_HOLD_OFF=15.0 Minutes
EDIT PRNT EXIT

PRIMARY SETUP MENU

CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE

SETUP X.X

SETUP X.X

 JUMP

EXIT

Continue pressing NEXT until ...

SECONDARY SETUP MENU

VARS DIAG

ALRM

EXIT

SETUP X.X

2) STABIL_GAS=NOX

 JUMP
SETUP X.X
8

1

EDIT PRNT EXIT

ENTER PASSWORD:818
8

ENTR EXIT

SETUP X.X
NO

NO2

SETUP X.X

Press EXIT 3
times to return
to SAMPLE
menu

NO

NO2

STABIL_GAS:NOX
NOX

O2

ENTR EXIT

STABIL_GAS:NO2
NOX

O2

ENTR EXIT

158
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Calibration Procedures

STEP FOUR:
Perform the converter efficiency calculation procedure:
SAMPLE

A1:NXCNC1=100PPM

< TST TST >

NOX=XXX.X

CAL

SETUP

Toggle TST> button until ...

SAMPLE

NOX STB= XXX.X PPM

< TST TST >

NOX

NOX=XXX.X

CAL

SAMPLE

SETUP

GAS TO CAL:NOX
O2

ENTR EXIT

SAMPLE

RANGE TO CAL:LOW

LOW HIGH

ENTR EXIT

M-P CAL

NOX STB= XXX.X PPM

OX=X.XXX

 ZERO SPAN CONC

M-P CAL
NOX

EXIT

CONCENTRATION MENU
NO

M-P CAL
NO2

Set the Display to show
the NOX STB test
function.
This function calculates
the stability of the NO/NO x
measurement

CONV

CONVERTER EFFICIENCY MENU

CAL

SET

M-P CAL
1

EXIT

EXIT

CE FACTOR:1.000 Gain
.0

0

0

0

ENTR EXIT

Allow NO 2 to enter the sample port
at the rear of the analyzer.

M-P CAL
NO2
When ENTR is
pressed, the ratio of
observed NO 2
concentration to
expected NO 2
concentration is
calculated and
stored.

CONVERTER EFFICIENCY MENU

CAL

SET

SAMPLE

NOX STB= XXX.X PPM

< TST TST >

M-P CAL
NO2

ENTR

NOX=XXX.X

Wait until NO2 STB
falls below 0.5 ppm
and the ENTR button
appears.
This may take several
minutes.

SETUP

CONVERTER EFFICIENCY MENU

CAL

M-P CAL
1

EXIT

SET

EXIT

CE FACTOR:1.012 Gain
.0

0

1

2

ENTR EXIT

Press EXIT 3 times
top return to the
SAMPLE display

159
04521C (DCN5731)

Calibration Procedures

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

7.2. MANUAL CALIBRATION
The following section describes the basic method for manually calibrating the Model 200EH/EM NOX analyzer.
If both available iDAS parameters for a specific gas type are being reported via the instruments analog outputs
e.g. NXCNC1 and NXCNC2, separate calibrations should be carried out for each parameter.


Use the LOW button when calibrating for NXCNC1



Use the HIGH button when calibrating for NXCNC2.

See Section 6.13.3 & 6.13.4 for more information on analog output reporting ranges

STEP ONE: Connect the sources of zero air and span gas as shown below.

VENT here if input
is pressurized

Source of
SAMPLE Gas

VENT

at HIGH Span
Concentration

Calibrated NO

MODEL 700
Gas Dilution
Calibrator

MODEL 701
Zero Gas
Generator

Sample

PUMP

Exhaust
Span Point

External Zero
Air Scrubber

Zero Air

Filter

Pneumatic Connections–With Zero/Span Valve Option (50)

On/Off
Valves

Source of
SAMPLE Gas

VENT
at LOW Span
Concentration

VENT here if input
is pressurized

PUMP
VENT

Calibrated NO

at HIGH Span
Concentration

Calibrated NO

Figure 7-2:

MODEL
200EH/EM

Sample
Exhaust
High Span Point
Low Span Point

External Zero
Air Scrubber

Figure 7-3:

Filter

Zero Air

MODEL
200EH/EM

Pneumatic Connections–With 2-Span point Option (52) –Using Bottled Span Gas

160
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Calibration Procedures

STEP TWO: Set Expected NO and NOX Span Gas Concentrations
Set the expected NO and NOx span gas concentration. These should be 80% of range of concentration values
likely to be encountered in this application. The default factory setting is 100 ppm. If one of the configurable
analog outputs is to be set to transmit concentration values, use 80% of the reporting range set for that output
(see Section 6.13.4.5)

SAMPLE

A1:NXCNC1=100PPM

< TST TST >

CAL

SAMPLE
NOX

NOX=XXX.X
SETUP

GAS TO CAL:NOX
O2

ENTR EXIT

SAMPLE

RANGE TO CAL:LOW

LOW HIGH

M-P CAL

ENTR EXIT

A1:NXCNC1 =100PPM

NOX=X.XXX

 ZERO SPAN CONC

M-P CAL
NOX

CONCENTRATION MENU
NO CONV

M-P CAL
0

The NOX & NO span concentration
values automatically default to
80.0 Conc.
If this is not the the concentration of
the span gas being used, toggle
these buttons to set the correct
concentration of the NO X and NO
calibration gases.

EXIT

EXIT

NOX SPAN CONC:80.0 Conc
0

8

0

.0

ENTR EXIT

EXIT ignores the new
setting and returns to
the previous display.

ENTR accepts the new
setting and returns to
the
CONCENTRATION
MENU.
If using NO span gas
in addition to NOX
repeat last step.

NOTE
The expected concentrations for both NOX and NO are usually set to the same value
unless the conversion efficiency is not equal to 1.000 or not entered properly in the
conversion efficiency setting.
When setting expected concentration values, consider impurities in your span gas
source (NO often contains 1-3% NO2 and vice versa).

161
04521C (DCN5731)

Calibration Procedures

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

STEP THREE: Perform Zero/Span Calibration:
SAMPLE
Analyzer continues to
cycle through NO x,
NO, and NO 2
measurements
throughout this
procedure.

A1:NXCNC1=100PPM

< TST TST >

NOX=XXX.X

CAL

SETUP

Toggle TST> button until ...

SAMPLE

NOX STB= XXX.X PPM

< TST TST >

Set the Display to show
the NOX STB test
function.
This function calculates
the stability of the NO/NO x
measurement

NOX=XXX.X

CAL

SETUP

Allow zero gas to enter the sample port
at the rear of the analyzer.

Wait until NOX STB
falls below 0.5 ppm.
This may take several
minutes.

SAMPLE

NOX STB= XXX.X PPM

< TST TST >

SAMPLE
NOX

NOX=XXX.X

CAL

SETUP

GAS TO CAL:NOX

O2

ENTR EXIT

SAMPLE

RANGE TO CAL:LOW

LOW HIGH

M-P CAL

ENTR EXIT

NOX STB= XXX.X PPM



M-P CAL

ZERO

CONC

NOX STB= XXX.X PPM

 ENTR

NOX=XXX.X
EXIT

NOX=X.XXX

CONC

EXIT

Allow span gas to enter the sample port
at the rear of the analyzer.

Press ENTR to changes
the OFFSET & SLOPE
values for both the NO
and NO x measurements.
Press EXIT to leave the
calibration unchanged and
return to the previous
menu.

Wait until NOX STB
falls below 0.5 ppm.
This may take several
minutes.

SAMPLE

NOX STB= XXX.X PPM

< TST TST >

SAMPLE
NOX

You may see both keys.
If either the ZERO or SPAN
buttons fail to appear see
Section 11 for
troubleshooting tips.

SETUP

GAS TO CAL:NOX
O2

ENTR EXIT

SAMPLE
The SPAN key now appears
during the transition from
zero to span.

CAL

RANGE TO CAL:LOW

LOW HIGH

M-P CAL

ENTR EXIT

NOX STB= XXX.X PPM

 ZERO SPAN CONC

M-P CAL

NOX STB= XXX.X PPM

 ENTR

M-P CAL

NOX=XXX.X

CONC

NOX STB= XXX.X PPM

 ENTR

CONC

NOX=X.XXX
EXIT

NOX=X.XXX
EXIT

NOX=X.XXX
EXIT

Press ENTR to changes
the OFFSET & SLOPE
values for both the NO
and NO x measurements.
Press EXIT to leave the
calibration unchanged and
return to the previous
menu.

EXIT at this point
returns to the
SAMPLE menu.

162
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Calibration Procedures

7.3. CALIBRATION CHECKS
Informal calibration checks, which only evaluate but do not alter the analyzer’s response curve, are
recommended as a regular maintenance item and in order to monitor the analyzer’s performance. To carry out a
calibration check rather than a full calibration, follow these steps.

STEP ONE: Connect the sources of zero air and span gas as shown in Figure 7.2 or 7.3.
STEP TWO: Perform the zero/span calibration check procedure:

SAMPLE
< TST TST >
Analyzer display
continues to cycle
through all of the
available gas
measurements
throughout this
procedure.

A1:NXCNC1=100PPM

NOX=XXX.X

CAL

SETUP

Toggle TST> button until ...

SAMPLE
< TST TST >

NOX STB= XXX.X PPM

Set the Display to show
the NOX STB test
function.
This function calculates
the stability of the NO/NO x
measurement

NOX=XXX.X

CAL

SETUP

Allow zero gas to enter the sample port
at the rear of the analyzer.

Wait until NOX STB
falls below 0.5 ppm.
This may take several
minutes.

Record NO X , NO, NO 2 or O 2 zero point
readings

Wait until NOX STB
falls below 0.5 ppm.

Allow span gas to enter the sample port
at the rear of the analyzer.

This may take several
minutes.

The ZERO and/or SPAN
keys will appear at various
points of this process.
It is not necessary to press
them.

Record NO X, NO, NO 2 or O 2 span point
readings\

163
04521C (DCN5731)

Calibration Procedures

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

7.4. MANUAL CALIBRATION WITH ZERO/SPAN VALVES
Zero and Span calibrations using the Zero/Span Valve option are similar to that described in Section 7.2, except
that:


Zero air and span gas is supplied to the analyzer through the zero gas and span gas inlets rather than
through the sample inlet.



The zero and cal operations are initiated directly and independently with dedicated keys (CALZ &
CALS)

If both available iDAS parameters for a specific gas type are being reported via the instruments analog outputs
e.g. NXCNC1 and NXCNC2, separate calibrations should be carried out for each parameter.


Use the LOW button when calibrating for NXCNC1



Use the HIGH button when calibrating for NXCNC2.

See Section 6.13.3 & 6.13.4 for more information on analog output reporting ranges

STEP ONE: Connect the sources of zero air and span gas to the respective ports on the rear panel (Figure 3-1)
as shown below.

VENT here if input
VENT

at HIGH Span
Concentration

Calibrated NO

MODEL 700
Gas Dilution
Calibrator

MODEL 701
Zero Gas
Generator

is pressurized

Source of
SAMPLE Gas

PUMP

Sample
Exhaust
Span Point

External Zero
Air Scrubber

Figure7-4:

Filter

Zero Air

MODEL
200EH/EM

Pneumatic Connections–With Zero/Span Valve Option (50)

164
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Calibration Procedures

STEP TWO: Set Expected NO and NOX Span Gas Concentrations.
Set the expected NO and NOx span gas concentration. These should be 80% of range of concentration values
likely to be encountered in this application. The default factory setting is 100 ppm. If one of the configurable
analog outputs is to be set to transmit concentration values, use 80% of the reporting range set for that output
(see Section 6.13.4.5)

SAMPLE

A1:NXCNC1=100PPM

< TST TST >

CAL CALZ CALS

SAMPLE
NOX

NOX=XXX.X
SETUP

GAS TO CAL:NOX
O2

SAMPLE

ENTR EXIT

RANGE TO CAL:LOW

LOW HIGH

ENTR EXIT

SPAN CAL M

A1:NXCNC1 =100PPM NOX=X.XXX

 ZERO SPAN CONC

EXIT

SPAN CAL M CONCENTRATION MENU
NOX

NO CONV

EXIT

SPAN CAL M NOX SPAN CONC:80.0 Conc
0

The NOX & NO span concentration
values automatically default to
80.0 Conc.
If this is not the the concentration of
the span gas being used, toggle
these buttons to set the correct
concentration of the NO X and NO
calibration gases.

0

8

0

.0

ENTR EXIT

EXIT ignores the new
setting and returns to
the previous display.

ENTR accepts the new
setting and returns to
the
CONCENTRATION
MENU.
If using NO span gas
in addition to NOX
repeat last step.

NOTE
The expected concentrations for both NOX and NO are usually set to the same value
unless the conversion efficiency is not equal to 1.000 or not entered properly in the
conversion efficiency setting.
When setting expected concentration values, consider impurities in your span gas
source (NO often contains 1-3% NO2 and vice versa).

165
04521C (DCN5731)

Calibration Procedures

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

STEP THREE: Perform Zero/Span Calibration:
SAMPLE
Analyzer continues to
cycle through NO x,
NO, and NO 2
measurements
throughout this
procedure.

A1:NXCNC1=100PPM

< TST TST >

NOX=XXX.X

CAL CALZ CALS

SETUP

Toggle TST> button until ...

SAMPLE

NOX STB= XXX.X PPM

< TST TST >

Set the Display to show
the NOX STB test
function.
This function calculates
the stability of the NO/NO x
measurement

NOX=XXX.X

CAL CALZ CALS

SETUP

Allow zero gas to enter the sample port
at the rear of the analyzer.

Wait until NOX STB
falls below 0.5 ppm.
This may take several
minutes.

SAMPLE

NOX STB= XXX.X PPM

< TST TST >

SAMPLE
NOX

SETUP

GAS TO CAL:NOX

O2

ENTR EXIT

SAMPLE
Analyzers enters
ZERO cal
mode.

NOX=XXX.X

CAL CALZ CALS

RANGE TO CAL:LOW

LOW HIGH

ENTR EXIT

ZERO CAL M

NOX STB= XXX.X PPM NOX=XXX.X



ZERO

ZERO CAL M

CONC

EXIT

NOX STB= XXX.X PPM NOX=XXX.X

 ENTR

CONC

EXIT

Allow span gas to enter the sample port
at the rear of the analyzer.

Press ENTR to changes
the OFFSET & SLOPE
values for both the NO
and NO x measurements.
Press EXIT to leave the
calibration unchanged and
return to the previous
menu.

Wait until NOX STB
falls below 0.5 ppm.
This may take several
minutes.

SAMPLE

NOX STB= XXX.X PPM

< TST TST >

SAMPLE
NOX
Analyzers enters SPAN cal
mode and the SPAN key
appears.
You may see both
keysduring the transition
from ZERO to SPAN modes.
If either the ZERO or SPAN
buttons fail to appear see
Section 11 for
troubleshooting tips.

CAL

CALZ CALS

NOX=XXX.X
SETUP

GAS TO CAL:NOX
O2

SAMPLE

ENTR EXIT

RANGE TO CAL:LOW

LOW HIGH

ENTR EXIT

SPAN CAL M NOX STB= XXX.X PPM
 ZERO SPAN CONC

SPAN CAL M NOX STB= XXX.X PPM
 ENTR

CONC

SPAN CAL M NOX STB= XXX.X PPM
 ENTR

CONC

NOX=X.XXX
EXIT

NOX=X.XXX
EXIT

NOX=X.XXX
EXIT

Press ENTR to changes
the OFFSET & SLOPE
values for both the NO
and NO x measurements.
Press EXIT to leave the
calibration unchanged and
return to the previous
menu.

EXIT at this point
returns to the
SAMPLE menu.

166
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Calibration Procedures

7.5. CALIBRATION CHECKS WITH ZERO/SPAN VALVES
Zero and span checks using the zero/span valve option are similar to that described in Section 7.4, except that
zero air and span gas are supplied to the analyzer through the zero gas and span gas inlets from two different
sources.
Informal calibration checks, which only evaluate but do not alter the analyzer’s response curve, are
recommended as a regular maintenance item and in order to monitor the analyzer’s performance. To carry out a
calibration check rather than a full calibration, follow these steps.
To perform a manual calibration check with zero/span valve or IZS option installed:

STEP ONE: Connect the sources of Zero Air and Span Gas as shown in section 7-4.
STEP TWO: Perform the zero/span check.

Set the Display to show
the NOX STB test
function.
This function calculates
the stability of the NO/NO x
measurement

SAMPLE

A1:NXCNC1=100PPM

< TST TST >

NOX=XXX.X

CAL CALZ CALS

SETUP

Toggle TST> button until ...

SAMPLE

A1:NXCNC1=100PPM

< TST TST >

ZERO CAL M

NOX STB= XXX.X PPM NOX=XXX.X



ZERO

CAL CALZ CALS

SETUP

SAMPLE
< TST TST >

Allow zero gas to enter the sample port
at the rear of the analyzer.

Wait until NOX STB
falls below 0.5 ppm.

CONC

EXIT

A1:NXCNC1=100PPM

NOX=XXX.X

NOX=XXX.X

CAL CALZ CALS

SETUP

Allow span gas to enter the sample port
at the rear of the analyzer.

Wait until NOX STB
falls below 0.5 ppm.

This may take several
minutes.
SAMPLE

A1:NXCNC1=100PPM

< TST TST >

This may take several
minutes.

NOX=XXX.X

CAL CALZ CALS

SETUP

SAMPLE

A1:NXCNC1=100PPM

< TST TST >
The ZERO and/or SPAN
keys will appear at various
points of this process.
It is not necessary to press
them.

SAMPLE
NOX

Analyzers enters
ZERO cal
mode.

NOX=XXX.X

CAL CALZ CALS

SETUP

GAS TO CAL:NOX

O2

ENTR EXIT

SAMPLE
NOX

SAMPLE

Return to
SAMPLE
Display

GAS TO CAL:NOX

O2

ENTR EXIT

RANGE TO CAL:LOW

LOW HIGH

ENTR EXIT

SAMPLE

RANGE TO CAL:LOW

LOW HIGH
ZERO CAL M

NOX STB= XXX.X PPM NOX=XXX.X



ZERO

CONC

EXIT

ENTR EXIT

SPAN CAL M NOX STB= XXX.X PPM

NOX=X.XXX

 ZERO SPAN CONC
Record NO X, NO, NO 2 or O 2 zero point
readings

Analyzers enters
SPAN cal
mode.

EXIT

Record NO X, NO, NO 2 or O 2 span point
readings\

SPAN CAL M

NOX STB= XXX.X PPM NOX=XXX.X



ZERO

CONC

EXIT

Return to
SAMPLE
Display

167
04521C (DCN5731)

Calibration Procedures

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

7.6. CALIBRATION WITH REMOTE CONTACT CLOSURES
Contact closures for controlling calibration and calibration checks are located on the rear panel CONTROL IN
connector. Instructions for setup and use of these contacts can be found in Section 6.15.1.2.
When the appropriate contacts are closed for at least 5 seconds, the instrument switches into zero, low span or
high span mode and internal zero/span valves (if installed) will be automatically switched to the appropriate
configuration. The remote calibration contact closures may be activated in any order. It is recommended that
contact closures remain closed for at least 10 minutes to establish a reliable reading; the instrument will stay in
the selected mode for as long as the contacts remain closed.
If contact closures are used in conjunction with the analyzer’s AutoCal (Section 7.7) feature and the AutoCal
attribute CALIBRATE is enabled, the M200EH/EM will not re-calibrate the analyzer until the contact is opened.
At this point, the new calibration values will be recorded before the instrument returns to SAMPLE mode. If the
AutoCal attribute CALIBRATE is disabled, the instrument will return to SAMPLE mode, leaving the instrument’s
internal calibration variables unchanged.

168
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Calibration Procedures

7.7. AUTOMATIC CALIBRATION (AUTOCAL)
The AutoCal feature allows unattended, periodic operation of the zero/span valve options by using the analyzer’s
internal time of day clock. The AutoCal feature is only available on the front panel menu (ACAL) if either the
zero/span valve or the IZS option is installed.
AutoCal operates by executing user-defined sequences to initiate the various calibration modes of the analyzer
and to open and close valves appropriately. It is possible to program and run up to three separate sequences
(SEQ1, SEQ2 and SEQ3). Each sequence can operate in one of three modes or be disabled (Table 7-2).

Table 7-2: AutoCal Modes
MODE

ACTION

DISABLED
ZERO
ZERO-LO

1

ZERO-LO-HI1

ZERO-HI
LO1
LO-HI1

HI

Disables the sequence
Causes the sequence to perform a zero calibration or check
Causes the sequence to perform a zero calibration or check followed by a mid-span
concentration calibration or check
Causes the sequence to perform a zero calibration or check followed by a mid-span
concentration calibration or check and finally a high-span point calibration or check.
Causes the sequence to perform a zero calibration or check followed by a high-span
point calibration or check.
Causes the sequence to perform a mid-span concentration calibration or check
Causes the sequence to perform a mid-span concentration calibration or check
followed by a high-span point calibration or check
Causes the sequence to perform a high-span point calibration or check.

O2 –ZERO2

Causes the sequence to do a zero-point calibration for the O2 sensor.
Causes the sequence to perform a zero calibration of the or check O2 sensor followed
O2 ZERO-SP
by a mid-span concentration calibration or check of the O2 sensor.
O2 SPAN2
Causes the sequence to perform a zero calibration or check of the O2 sensor.
1
Only applicable if analyzer is equipped with the second span point valve option (52)
2
Only applicable if instrument is equipped wit the O2 sensor option (65(.
2

Each mode has seven parameters that control operational details of the sequence(Table 7-3).

Table 7-3: AutoCal Attribute Setup Parameters
PARAMETER
TIMER
ENABLED
STARTING DATE
STARTING TIME
DELTA DAYS
DELTA TIME

DURATION

CALIBRATE
RANGE TO CAL

ACTION

Turns on the sequence timer
Sequence will operate on Starting Date
Sequence will operate at Starting Time
Number of days between each sequence trigger. If set to 7, for example, the AutoCal feature
will be enabled once every week on the same day.
Incremental delay on each delta day that the sequence starts. If set to 0, the sequence will start
at the same time each day. Delta Time is added to Delta Days for the total time between
cycles.
This parameter prevents the analyzer from being calibrated at the same daytime of each
calibration day and prevents a lack of data for one particular daytime on the days of calibration.
Duration of the each sequence step in minutes. This parameter needs to be set such that there
is enough time for the concentration signal to stabilize. The STABIL parameter shows if the
analyzer response is stable at the end of the calibration. This parameter is logged with
calibration values in the iDAS.
Enable to do a true, dynamic zero or span calibration; disable to do a calibration check only.
LOW calibrates the low range, HIGH calibrates the high range. Applies only to auto and remote
range modes; this property is not available in single and independent range modes.

169
04521C (DCN5731)

Calibration Procedures

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

The following example sets sequence #2 to carry out a zero-span calibration every other day starting at 14:00 on
01 January, 2003, lasting 30 minutes (15 for zero and 15 for span). This sequence will start 30 minutes later
each day.

Table 7-4: Example Auto-Cal Sequence
MODE AND ATTRIBUTE

VALUE

SEQUENCE

2

COMMENT

Define sequence #2

MODE

ZERO-HI

TIMER ENABLE

ON

STARTING DATE

01-JAN-03

STARTING TIME

14:00

DELTA DAYS

2

DELTA TIME

00:30

Repeat sequence 30 minutes later each time
(every 2 days and 30 minutes)

DURATION

15.0

Each sequence step will last 15 minutes (total of 30 minutes when
using zero-span mode)

CALIBRATE

ON

The instrument will recalculate the slope and offset values for the
NO and NOX channel at the end of the AutoCal sequence.

Select zero and span mode
Enable the timer
Start on or after 01 January 2003
First sequence starts at 14:00 (24-hour clock format)
Repeat this sequence every 2 days

Please note the following suggestions for programming the AutoCal feature.


The programmed Starting Time must be 5 minutes later than the real time clock (Section 6.10).



Avoid setting two or more sequences at the same time of the day. Any new sequence which is initiated
from a timer, the COM ports, or the contact closures will override any sequence in progress. Note that
two sequences with different daily increments may eventually overlap.



If at any time an illegal entry is selected, (for example: Delta Days > 366) the ENTR key will disappear
from the display.



With CALIBRATE turned on, the state of the internal setup variables DYN_SPAN and DYN_ZERO is
set to ON and the instrument will reset the slope and offset values for the NO and NOX response each
time the AutoCal program runs. This continuous re-adjustment of calibration parameters can often mask
subtle fault conditions in the analyzer. It is recommended that, if CALIBRATE is enabled, the analyzer’s
test functions, slope and offset values be checked frequently to assure high quality and accurate data
from the instrument.

170
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Calibration Procedures

To program the sample sequence shown above, follow this flow chart:
SAMPLE

RANGE = 500.0 PPB

NOX=X.X
SETUP

< TST TST > CAL CALZ CZLS

PRIMARY SETUP MENU

SETUP X.X

SEQ 1) DISABLED
EXIT

SEQ 2) DISABLED

SETUP X.X

EXIT

MODE: DISABLED

SETUP X.X

0

ENTR EXIT

0

MODE: ZERO – HI

SETUP X.X

SEQ 2) ZERO – HI, 1:00:00

SETUP X.X

EXIT

TIMER ENABLE: ON

SETUP X.X

EXIT

STARTING DATE: 01 – JAN – 02

 EDIT
Toggle
keys to
set day,
month &
year: DDMON-Y Y

SETUP X.X
0

4

SETUP X.X

STARTING DATE: 01–JAN–02
SEP

0

3

ENTR

SETUP C.4

STARTING DATE: 04 – SEP – 03

Toggle keys to
set time:
HH:MM. This is
a 24 hr clock.
PM hours are
13-24.
Example: 2:15
PM = 14:15

SETUP C.4

STARTING TIME:00:00

SETUP C.4
1

4

EXIT

5

EXIT

DELTA TIME: 00:00
:3

0

ENTR

EXIT

DURATION:15.0 MINUTES
EXIT

DURATION 15.0MINUTES
.0

ENTR

EXIT

DURATION:30.0 MINUTES

Toggle keys
to set
duration for
each
iteration of
the
sequence:
Set in
Decimal
minutes
from
0.1 – 60.0

EXIT

CALIBRATE: OFF
EXIT

CALIBRATE: OFF
ENTR

EXIT

Toggle key
between
Off and
ON

CALIBRATE: ON
EXIT

 EDIT

SEQ 2) ZERO – SPAN, 2:00:30
EXIT

PREV NEXT MODE SET

Mode

ENTR

EXIT

Toggle keys
to set
delay time for
each iteration
of the
sequence:
HH:MM
(0 – 24:00)

DELTA TIEM:00:30

Sequence #

STARTING TIME:00:00
:1

DELTA TIME00:00

ON

SETUP C.4

 EDIT

EXIT

 EDIT

SETUP C.4
EXIT

EXIT

Toggle keys
to set
number of
days
between
procedures
(1-367)

DELTA DAYS:2

 EDIT

SETUP C.4
EXIT

 EDIT

0

SETUP C.4
EXIT

STARTING DATE: 04 – SEP – 03

 EDIT

3

SETUP C.4
EXIT

ENTR

 EDIT

SETUP C.4

SET> EDIT

DELTA DAYS: 1
2

 EDIT

SETUP C.4

PREV NEXT MODE SET

Default
value
is ON

0

SETUP C.4
ENTR EXIT

EXIT

 EDIT

SETUP C.4

Toggle NEXT button until ...

PREV NEXT

DELTA DAYS: 1

 EDIT

SETUP C.4

NEXT

SETUP X.X

0

SETUP C.4

PREV NEXT MODE

EXIT

 EDIT

SETUP C.4

NEXT MODE

STARTING TIME:14:15

 EDIT

SETUP C.4

CFG ACAL DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT

SETUP X.X

SETUP C.4

EXIT returns
to the SETUP
Menu

Delta Time
Delta Days

EXIT

171
04521C (DCN5731)

Calibration Procedures

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

7.8. CALIBRATION QUALITY ANALYSIS
After completing one of the calibration procedures described above, it is important to evaluate the analyzer’s
calibration SLOPE and OFFSET parameters. These values describe the linear response curve of the analyzer,
separately for NO and NOX. The values for these terms, both individually and relative to each other, indicate the
quality of the calibration. To perform this quality evaluation, you will need to record the values of the following
test functions (Section 6.2.1 or Appendix A-3), all of which are automatically stored in the iDAS channel
CALDAT for data analysis, documentation and archival.


NO OFFS



NO SLOPE



NOX OFFS



NOX SLOPE

Make sure that these parameters are within the limits listed in Table 7-5 and frequently compare them to those
values on the Final Test and Checkout Sheet that came attached to your manual, which should not be
significantly different. If they are, refer to the troubleshooting Chapter 11.

Table 7-5: Calibration Data Quality Evaluation
FUNCTION

MINIMUM VALUE

OPTIMUM VALUE

MAXIMUM VALUE

NOX SLOPE

-0.700

1.000

1.300

NO SLOPE

-0.700

1.000

1.300

NOX OFFS

-20.0 mV

0.0 mV

150.0 mV

NO OFFS

-20.0 mV

0.0 mV

150.0 mV

The default iDAS configuration records all calibration values in channel CALDAT as well as all calibration check
(zero and span) values in its internal memory. Up to 200 data points are stored for up 4 years of data (on
weekly calibration checks) and a lifetime history of monthly calibrations. Review these data to see if the zero
and span responses change over time. These channels also store the STABIL value (standard deviation of NOX
concentration) to evaluate if the analyzer response has properly leveled off during the calibration procedure.
Finally, the CALDAT channel also stores the converter efficiency for review and documentation.

USER NOTES:

172
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

EPA Protocol Calibration

8. EPA PROTOCOL CALIBRATION
At the writing of this manual there is no EPA requirements for the monitoring of NOX or published calibration
protocols.

User Notes

173
04521C (DCN5731)

04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Instrument Maintenance

9. INSTRUMENT MAINTENANCE
Predictive diagnostic functions, including data acquisition records, failure warnings and test functions built into
the analyzer, allow the user to determine when repairs are necessary without performing unnecessary,
preventative maintenance procedures. There is, however, a minimal number of simple procedures that, when
performed regularly, will ensure that the analyzer continues to operate accurately and reliably over its lifetime.
Repair and troubleshooting procedures are covered in Chapter 11 of this manual.
NOTE
A span and zero calibration check must be performed following some of the
maintenance procedures listed below. Refer to Chapter 0.

CAUTION
Risk of electrical shock. Disconnect power before performing any
operations that require entry into the interior of the analyzer.

NOTE
The operations outlined in this chapter must be performed by
qualified maintenance personnel only.

9.1. MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
Table 9-1 shows the recommended maintenance schedule for the M200EH/EM. Please note that in certain
environments with high levels of dust, humidity or pollutant levels some maintenance procedures may need to
be performed more often than shown.

175
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Instrument Maintenance

Table 9-1: M200EH/EM Preventive Maintenance Schedule
ITEM

ACTION

FREQUENCY

CAL
CHECK

MANUAL
SECTION

Particulate Filter

Change filter

Weekly

No

9.3.1

Verify Test Functions

Review and
evaluate

Weekly

No

9.2; Appendix
C

Zero/Span Check

Evaluate offset and
slope

Weekly

--

7.3, 7.5, 7.7

Zero/Span
Calibration

Zero and span
calibration

Every 3 months

--

7.2, 7.4, 7.6,
7.7, 7,8

NO2 Converter

Replace converter
& check efficiency

Every 3 years or if
conversion efficiency
< 96%

Yes if CE
factor is
used

--

1
External Zero Air
Scrubber (Optional)

Exchange chemical

Every 3 months

No

9.3.5

External Dryer
(Optional)

Replace chemical

When indicator color
changes

No

Reaction Cell
Window

Clean optics,
Change O-rings

Annually or as
necessary

Yes

9.3.7

1
Air Inlet Filter Of
Perma Pure Dryer

Change particle
filter

Annually

No

9.3.2

Pneumatic SubSystem

Check for leaks in
gas flow paths

Annually or after
repairs involving
pneumatics

Yes on
leaks, else
no

0, 0

1
All Critical Flow
Orifice O-Rings &
Sintered Filters

Replace

Annually

Yes

9.3.8

Rebuild head

Annually

Yes

9.3.4

Inline Exhaust
Scrubber

Replace

Annually

No

Pmt Sensor
Hardware Calibration

Low-level hardware
calibration

On PMT/ preamp
changes & if
0.7< SLOPE >1.3

Yes

1

1

1

1, 2

1
2

Pump

DATE PERFORMED

11.6.5

These Items are required to maintain full warranty, all other items are strongly recommended.
A pump rebuild kit is available from Teledyne Instruments Customer Service including all instructions and required parts (see Appendix B for part numbers).

176
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Instrument Maintenance

9.2. PREDICTIVE DIAGNOSTICS
The analyzer’s test functions can be used to predict failures by looking at trends in their values. Initially it may
be useful to compare the state of these test functions to the values measured on your instrument at the factory
and recorded on the M200EH/EM Final Test and Validation Data Form (Teledyne Instruments part number
04490, attached to the manual). Table 9-2 can be used as a basis for taking action as these values change with
time. The internal data acquisition system (iDAS) is a convenient way to record and track these changes.
APICOM control software can be used to download and review these data even from remote locations (Section
6.15.2.8 describes APICOM).

Table 9-2: Predictive Uses for Test Functions
FUNCTION

EXPECTED

RCEL
pressure

Constant to
within ± 0.5

SAMPLE
pressure

Constant within
atmospheric
changes

Ozone Flow

Constant to
within ± 15

ACTUAL

INTERPRETATION & ACTION

Fluctuating

Developing leak in pneumatic system. Check for leaks

Slowly increasing

Pump performance is degrading. Replace pump head
when pressure is above 10 in-Hg-A

Fluctuating

Developing leak in pneumatic system. Check for leaks

Slowly increasing

Flow path is clogging up. Replace orifice filters

Slowly decreasing

Developing leak in pneumatic system to vacuum
(developing valve failure). Check for leaks

Slowly decreasing

Flow path is clogging up. Replace orifice filters
Developing AZERO valve failure. Replace valve

AZERO

Constant within
±20 of check-out
value

Significantly
increasing

PMT cooler failure. Check cooler, circuit, and power
supplies
Developing light leak. Leak check.
O3 air filter cartridge is exhausted. Change chemical

Slowly decreasing
signal for same
concentration

NO2 CONC

Constant for
constant
concentrations

NO2 CONC
(IZS)

Constant
response from
day to day

Decreasing over time

NO2 CONC
(IZS)

Constant
response from
day to day

Heavily fluctuating
from day to day

NO CONC

Constant for
constant
concentration

Decreasing over time

Converter efficiency may be degrading. Replace
converter.
Change in instrument response. Low level (hardware)
calibrate the sensor
Degradation of IZS permeation tube. Change
permeation tube
Ambient changes in moisture are affecting the
performance. Add a dryer to the zero air inlet.
Drift of instrument response; clean RCEL window,
change O3 air filter chemical.

9.3. MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
The following procedures need to be performed regularly as part of the standard maintenance of the Model
200EH/EM.

177
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Instrument Maintenance

9.3.1. CHANGING THE SAMPLE PARTICULATE FILTER
The particulate filter should be inspected often for signs of plugging or excess dirt. It should be replaced
according to the service interval in Table 9-1 even without obvious signs of dirt. Filters with 1 and 5 µm pore
size can clog up while retaining a clean look. We recommend to handle the filter and the wetted surfaces of the
filter housing with gloves and tweezers. We recommend not to touch any part of the housing, filter element,
PTFE retaining ring, glass cover and the O-ring with bare hands as this may cause the pores to clog quicker and
surfaces to become dirty due to possible oils from your hands.

Figure 9-1:

Sample Particulate Filter Assembly

To change the filter according to the service interval in Table 9-1, follow this procedure:
1. Turn OFF the pump to prevent drawing debris into the sample line.
2. Remove the CE Mark locking screw in the center of the front panel and open the hinged front panel and
unscrew the knurled retaining ring of the filter assembly.
3. Carefully remove the retaining ring, glass window, PTFE O-ring and filter element. We recommend to
clean the glass and O-rings at least once monthly, weekly in very polluted areas.
4. Install a new filter element, carefully centering it in the bottom of the holder.
5. Re-install the PTFE O-ring with the notches facing up (important!), the glass cover, then screw on the
hold-down ring and hand-tighten the assembly. Inspect the (visible) seal between the edge of the glass
window and the O-ring to assure proper gas tightness.
6. To fulfill CE Mark safety requirements, the front panel locking screw must be installed at all times during
operation of the analyzer.

178
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Instrument Maintenance

7. Re-start the analyzer.

9.3.2. CHANGING THE O3 DRYER PARTICULATE FILTER
The air for the O3 generator passes through a Perma Pure© dryer, which is equipped with a small particulate
filter at its inlet. This filter prevents dust from entering the Perma Pure© dryer and degrading the dryer’s
performance over time. To change the filter according to the service interval in Table 9-1:
1. Check and write down the average RCEL pressure and the OZONE flow values.
2. Turn off the analyzer, unplug the power cord and remove the cover.
3. Unscrew the nut around the port of the filter using 5/8” and 9/16” wrenches and by holding the actual
fitting body steady with a 7/16” wrench.
CAUTION
Risk of significant leak. Make sure to use proper wrenches and to not turn the fitting
against the Perma Pure© dryer. This may loosen the inner tubing and cause large leaks.
4. Take off the old filter element and replace it with a suitable equivalent
(TAPI part# FL-3).

Figure 9-2:

Particle Filter on O3 Supply Air Dryer

5. Holding the fitting steady with a 5/8” wrench, tighten the nut with your hands. If necessary use a second
wrench but do not over-tighten the nut.
6. Replace the cover, plug in the power cord and restart the analyzer.
7. Check the O3 flow rate, it should be around 80 cm³/min ± 15. Check the RCEL pressure, it should be
the same value as before.

179
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Instrument Maintenance

9.3.3. MAINTAINING THE EXTERNAL SAMPLE PUMP
9.3.3.1. Rebuilding the Pump
The sample pump head periodically wears out and must be replaced when the RCEL pressure exceeds 10 inHg-A (at sea level, adjust this value accordingly for elevated locations). A pump rebuild kit is available from the
factory. Appendix B of this manual lists the part numbers of the pump rebuild kit. Instructions and diagrams are
included in the kit.
A flow and leak check after rebuilding the sample pump is recommended. A span check and re-calibration after
this procedure is necessary as the response of the analyzer changes with the RCEL pressure.

9.3.3.2. Changing the Inline Exhaust Scrubber
CAUTION!

Do NOT attempt to change the contents of the inline exhaust scrubber cartridge; change the entire cartridge.

1. Through the SETUP>MORE>DIAG menu turn OFF the OZONE GEN OVERRIDE. Wait 10 minutes to
allow pump to pull room air through scrubber before proceeding to step 2.
2. Disconnect exhaust line from analyzer.
3. Turn off (unplug) analyzer sample pump.
4. Disconnect tubing from (NOx or charcoal) scrubber cartridge.
5. Remove scrubber from system.
6. Dispose of according to local laws.
7. Install new scrubber into system.
8. Reconnect tubing to scrubber and analyzer.
9. Turn on pump.
10. Through the SETUP menu (per Step 1 above) turn ON the OZONE GEN OVERRIDE.

NOTE:
The inline exhaust scrubber is strictly intended for Nitric Acid and NO2 only.

9.3.4. CHANGING THE PUMP AND IZS DUST FILTERS
The exhaust air from the analyzer passes a small particle filter (DFU filter, part # FL3) before entering the pump.
When this particle filter becomes visibly dirty or the pressure drop between SAMP and RCEL pressure
increases significantly, it needs replacement in order to prevent a large pressure drop with degraded analyzer
performance.

180
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Instrument Maintenance

1. Power down the analyzer and pump.
2. For internally mounted filters, skip the next two steps.
3. For externally mounted filters on the pump housing, remove the analyzer exhaust tube from the dust
filter. Remove the particle filter from the pump. To do so, push the white plastic ring into the fitting and
pull the filter out of the fitting. If necessary, use needle-nose pliers to pry the filter out of the fittings.
4. Push a new filter into the pump fitting and make sure that the arrow on the filter points towards the
pump. Push the exhaust tubing onto the filter. Skip the next two steps.
5. For internally mounted filters at the inside rear panel, remove the chassis and locate the filter between
the vacuum manifold and the exhaust port fitting.
6. Disconnect the clear tubing from the filter body and change the filter with the arrow pointing against the
gas flow. To remove the hose clamps, slide the two clamp ends in opposite directions with a needlenose pliers until the clamp comes apart. Reconnect the tubing by using the same or new clamps and
pushing tightening them until a good seal is achieved.
7. Restart the pump and clear any error warnings from the front panel display.
8. After about 5 minutes, check the RCEL pressure reading and ensure that it is similar to its value before
changing the filter but less than 10 in-Hg-A.

181
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Instrument Maintenance

9.3.5. CHANGING THE EXTERNAL ZERO AIR SCRUBBER
The external zero air scrubber contains two chemicals, pink Purafil© (Part # CH 9) and black, charcoal (Part #
CH 1). The Purafil© converts NO in the ambient air to NO2 and the following charcoal absorbs any NO2. The
chemicals need to be replaced periodically according to Table 9-1 or as needed. This procedure can be carried
out while the instrument is running. Make sure that the analyzer is not in ZERO calibration mode.
CAUTION!
The following procedures apply only to the External Zero Air Scrubber and NOT to the inline exhaust
scrubber cartridge (Section 9.3.3.2) that is part of the pump pack assembly.

1. Locate the scrubber on the outside rear panel (for location, see Scrubber Cartridge in Figure 3-2).
Figure 9-3 shows the exploded scrubber assembly.
2. Remove the old scrubber by disconnecting the 1/4” plastic tubing from the particle filter using 9/16” and
1/2" wrenches.
3. Remove the particle filter from the cartridge using 9/16” wrenches.
4. Unscrew the top of the scrubber canister and discard the Purafil© and charcoal contents. Make sure to
abide to local laws about discarding these chemicals. The rebuild kit (listed in Appendix B) comes with a
Material and Safety Data Sheet, which contains more information on these chemicals.
5. Refill the scrubber with charcoal at the bottom and with the Purafil© chemical at the top, and use three
white retainer pads (Figure 9-3) to separate the chemicals.
6. Replace the screw-top cap and tighten the cap - hand-tight only.
7. If necessary, replace the DFU filter with a new unit and discard the old. The bottom retainer pad should
catch most of the dust, the filter should not be visibly dirty (on the inside)
8. Replace the scrubber assembly into its clips on the rear panel.
9. Reconnect the plastic tubing to the fitting of the particle filter.
10. Adjust the scrubber cartridge such that it does not protrude above or below the analyzer in case the
instrument is mounted in a rack. If necessary, squeeze the clips for a tighter grip on the cartridge.

Figure 9-3:
182

Zero Air Scrubber Assembly

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Instrument Maintenance

9.3.6. CHANGING THE NO2 CONVERTER
The NO2 converter is located in the center of the instrument, see Figure 3-1 for location, and Figure 9-4 for the
assembly. The converter is designed for replacement of the cartridge only, the heater with built-in thermocouple
can be reused.
1. Turn off the analyzer power, remove the cover and allow the converter to cool.
2. Remove the top lid of the converter as well as the top layers of the insulation until the converter cartridge
can be seen.

CAUTION
THE CONVERTER OPERATES AT 315º C. SEVERE BURNS CAN RESULT IF THE
ASSEMBLY IS NOT ALLOWED TO COOL. DO NOT HANDLE THE ASSEMBLY UNTIL
IT IS AT ROOM TEMPERATURE. THIS MAY TAKE SEVERAL HOURS.

3. Remove the tube fittings from the converter.
4. Disconnect the power and the thermocouple of the converter. Unscrew the grounding clamp of the
power leads with a Phillips-head screw driver.
5. Remove the converter assembly (cartridge and band heater) from the can. Make a note of the
orientation of the tubes relative to the heater cartridge.
6. Unscrew the band heater and loosen it, take out the old converter cartridge.

Figure 9-4:
NO2
Converter Assembly
7. Wrap the band heater
around the new
replacement cartridge
and tighten the screws
using a hightemperature anti-seize
agent such as copper
paste. Make sure to
use proper alignment
of the heater with
respect to the
converter tubes.
8. Replace the converter assembly, route the cables through the holes in the can and reconnect them
properly. Reconnect the grounding clamp around the heater leads for safe operation.
9. Re-attach the tube fittings to the converter and replace the insulation and cover.
10. Replace the instrument cover and power up the analyzer.
11. Allow the converter to burn-in for 24 hours, then re-calibrate the instrument.

183
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Instrument Maintenance

9.3.7. CLEANING THE REACTION CELL
The reaction cell should be cleaned whenever troubleshooting suggests. A dirty reaction cell will cause
excessive noise, drifting zero or span values, low response or a combination of all. To clean the reaction cell, it
is necessary to remove it from the sensor housing. refer to Section 11.6.6. for an overview of the entire sensor
assembly. Use the following guide to clean the reaction cell:
1. Turn off the instrument power and vacuum pump. Refer to the Figure 9-5 for the following procedure.
2. Disconnect the black 1/4" exhaust tube and the 1/8” sample and ozone air tubes from the reaction cell.
Disconnect the heater/thermistor cable.
3. Remove four screws holding the reaction cell to the PMT housing and lift the cell and manifold out as
shown in the inset of Figure 9-5.

000940500 – Ozone Critical Flow Orifice

Figure 9-5:

Reaction Cell Assembly

4. The reaction cell will separate into two halves, the stainless steel manifold assembly and the black
plastic reaction cell with window, stainless steel cylinder and O-rings.
5. The reaction cell (both plastic part and stainless steel cylinder) and optical glass filter should be cleaned
with methanol and a clean tissue and dried thereafter.
6. Usually it is not necessary to clean the ozone flow orifice since it is protected by a sintered filter. If tests
show that cleaning is necessary, refer to Section 9.3.8 on how to clean the critical flow orifice.

184
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Instrument Maintenance

7. Do not remove the sample and ozone nozzles. They are Teflon threaded and require a special tool for
reassembly. If necessary, the manifold with nozzles attached can be cleaned in an ultrasonic bath.
8. Reassemble in proper order and re-attach the reaction cell to the sensor housing. Reconnect
pneumatics and heater connections, then re-attach the pneumatic sensor assembly and the cleaning
procedure is complete.
9. After cleaning the reaction cell, it is also recommended to exchange the ozone supply air filter chemical
10. After cleaning, the analyzer span response may drop 10 - 15% in the first 10 days as the reaction cell
window conditions. This is normal and does not require another cleaning.

9.3.8. CHANGING CRITICAL FLOW ORIFICES
There are several critical flow orifices installed in the M200EH/EM, Figure 9-5 shows one of the two most
important orifice assemblies, located on the reaction cell. Refer to Section 10.3.3 for a detailed description on
functionality and locations. Despite the fact that these flow restrictors are protected by sintered stainless steel
filters, they can, on occasion, clog up, particularly if the instrument is operated without sample filter or in an
environment with very fine, sub-micron particle-size dust.
The M200EH/EM introduces an orifice holder that makes changing the orifice very easy. In fact, it is
recommended to keep spare orifice holder assemblies at hand to minimize downtime and swap orifices in a
matter of a few minutes. Appendix B lists several complete spare part kits for this purpose.
To replace a critical flow orifice, do the following:
1. Turn off power to the instrument and vacuum pump. Remove the analyzer cover and locate the reaction
cell (Figure 9-5, Figure 11- and Figure 3-4).
2. Unscrew the 1/8” sample and ozone air tubes from the reaction cell
3. For orifices on the reaction cell (Figure 9-5): Unscrew the orifice holder with a 9/16” wrench. This part
holds all components of the critical flow assembly as shown in
Figure 9-6. Appendix B contains a list of spare part numbers.
4. For orifices in the vacuum manifold: the assembly is similar to the one shown in
Figure 9-6, but without the orifice holder, part number 04090, and bottom O-ring OR34 and with an NPT
fitting in place of the FT 10 fitting. After taking off the connecting tube, unscrew the NPT fitting.

185
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Instrument Maintenance

Figure 9-6:

Critical Flow Orifice Assembly

5. Take out the components of the assembly: a spring, a sintered filter, two O-rings and the orifice. For the
vacuum manifold only, you may need to use a scribe or pressure from the vacuum port to get the parts
out of the manifold.
6. Discard the two O-rings and the sintered filter and the critical flow orifice.
7. Re-assemble the flow control assembly with new the parts (see Appendix B for part number or
replacement kit) as shown in Figure 9-6 and re-connect them to the reaction cell manifold or the
vacuum manifold.
8. Reconnect all tubing, power up the analyzer and pump and - after a warm-up period of 30 minutes, carry
out a leak test as described in Section 0.

9.3.9. CHECKING FOR LIGHT LEAKS
When re-assembled or operated improperly, the M200EH/EM can develop small leaks around the PMT, which
let stray light from the analyzer surrounding into the PMT housing. To find such light leaks, follow the below
procedures. CAUTION: this procedure can only be carried out with the analyzer running and its cover removed.
This procedure should only be carried out by qualified personnel.
1. Scroll the TEST functions to PMT.
2. Supply zero gas to the analyzer.
3. With the instrument still running, carefully remove the analyzer cover. Take extra care not to touch any
of the inside wiring with the metal cover or your body. Do not drop screws or tools into a running
analyzer!
4. Shine a powerful flashlight or portable incandescent light at the inlet and outlet fitting and at all of the
joints of the reaction cell as well as around the PMT housing. The PMT value should not respond to the
light, the PMT signal should remain steady within its usually noise.

186
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Instrument Maintenance

5. If there is a PMT response to the external light, symmetrically tighten the reaction cell mounting screws
or replace the 1/4” vacuum tubing with new, black PTFE tubing (this tubing will fade with time and
become transparent). Often, light leaks are also caused by O-rings being left out of the assembly.
6. Carefully replace the analyzer cover.
7. If tubing was changed, carry out a leak check (Section 0).

USER NOTES:

187
04521C (DCN5731)

04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Theory of Operation

10. THEORY OF OPERATION
The M200EH/EM Nitrogen Oxides Analyzer is a microprocessor controlled instrument that determines the
concentration of nitric oxide (NO), total nitrogen oxides (NOX, the sum of NO and NO2) and nitrogen dioxide
(NO2) in a sample gas drawn through the instrument. It requires that sample and calibration gases are supplied
at ambient atmospheric pressure in order to establish a constant gas flow through the reaction cell where the
sample gas is exposed to ozone (O3), initiating a chemical reaction that gives off light (chemiluminescence). The
instrument measures the amount of chemiluminescence to determine the amount of NO in the sample gas. A
catalytic-reactive converter converts any NO2 in the sample gas to NO, which is then – including the NO in the
sample gas – is then reported as NOX. NO2 is calculated as the difference between NOX and NO.
Calibration of the instrument is performed in software and usually does not require physical adjustments to the
instrument. During calibration, the microprocessor measures the sensor output signal when gases with known
amounts of NO or NO2 are supplied and stores these results in memory. The microprocessor uses these
calibration values along with the signal from the sample gas and data of the current temperature and pressure of
the gas to calculate a final NOX concentration.
The concentration values and the original information from which it was calculated are stored in the unit’s
internal data acquisition system (iDAS Section 6.7.2) and are reported to the user through a vacuum
fluorescence display or several output ports.

10.1. MEASUREMENT PRINCIPLE
10.1.1. CHEMILUMINESCENCE
The principle of the M200EH/EM’s measurement method is the detection of chemiluminescence, which occurs
when nitrogen oxide (NO) reacts with ozone (O3). This reaction is a two-step process. In the first step, one
molecule of NO and one molecule of O3 collide and chemically react to produce one molecule of oxygen (O2)
and one molecule of nitrogen dioxide (NO2). Some of the NO2 retains a certain amount of excess energy from
the collision and, hence, remains in an excited state, which means that one of the electrons of the NO2 molecule
resides in a higher energy state than is normal (denoted by an asterisk in Equation 10-1).

NO + O3 → NO2* + O2
(Equation 10-1)
Thermodynamics requires that systems seek the lowest stable energy state, hence, the NO2 molecule quickly
returns to its ground state in a subsequent step, releasing the excess energy in form of a quantum of light (h)
with wavelengths between 600 and 3000 nm, with a peak at about 1200 nm (Equation 10-2, Figure 10-10-1).

NO2* → NO2 + hν
(Equation 10-2)
All things being constant, the relationship between the amount of NO present in the reaction cell and the amount
of light emitted from the reaction is very linear. More NO produces more light, which can be measured with a
light-sensitive sensor in the near-infrared spectrum (Figure 10-10-1). In order to maximize the yield of reaction
(1), the M200EH/EM supplies the reaction cell with a large, constant excess of ozone (about 3000-5000 ppm)
from the internal ozone generator.

189
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Theory of Operation

Model 200E Instrument Response

Intensity
140 a.u.
120 a.u.

NO + O3 Emission Spectrum
100 a.u.
80 a.u.
60 a.u.
PMT
Response

40 a.u.
Optical Hi-Pass Filter Performance

20 a.u.
0 a.u.
0.5µm

0.7µm

0.9µm

1.1µm

1.3µm

1.5µm

1.7µm

1.9µm

Wavelength
M200EH/EM
Sensitivity Window

Figure 10-10-1: M200EH/EM Sensitivity Spectrum
However, only about 20% of the NO2 that is formed through reaction 10-1 is in the excited state. In addition, the
excited NO2 can collide with another collision partner M in the reaction cell (mostly other molecules but also cell
walls) and transfer its excess energy to its collision partner without emitting any light at all (Equation 10-3). In
fact, by far the largest portion of the NO2* returns to the ground state this way, leaving only a few percent yield of
usable chemiluminescence.

NO2* + M → NO2 + M
(Equation 10-3)
In order to enhance the light yield of the reaction, the reaction cell is maintained at reduced pressure. The
probability of a collision between the NO2* molecule and a collision partner M increases proportionally with the
reaction cell pressure. This non-radiating collision with the NO2* molecules is usually referred to as quenching,
an unwanted process further described in Section 10.2.4.2.

10.1.2. NOX AND NO2 DETERMINATION
The only gas that is truly measured in the M200EH/EM is NO. Any NO2 contained in the gas is not detected in
the above process since NO2 does not react with O3 to undergo chemiluminescence.
In order to measure the concentration of NO or NOX (which is defined here as the sum of NO and NO2 in the
sample gas), the M200EH/EM periodically switches the sample gas stream through a converter cartridge filled
with molybdenum (Mo, “moly”) chips heated to a temperature of 315° C. The heated molybdenum reacts with
NO2 in the sample gas and produces a variety of molybdenum oxides and NO according to Equation 10-4.

xNO2 + yMo → xNO + M y Oz (at 315° C )
(Equation 10-4)
Once the NO2 in the sample gas has been converted to NO, it is routed to the reaction cell where it undergoes
the chemiluminescence reaction described in Equations 10-1 and 10-2.

190
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Theory of Operation

Figure 10-10-2: NO2 Conversion Principle
By converting the NO2 in the sample gas into NO, the analyzer can measure the total NOX (NO+NO2) content of
the sample gas. By switching the NO2 converter in and out of the sample gas stream every 6 - 10 seconds, the
M200EH/EM analyzer is able to quasi-continuously measure both the NO and the total NOX content.
The NO2 concentration, finally, is not measured but calculated by simply subtracting the known NO content of
the sample gas from the known NOX content.

10.2. CHEMILUMINESCENCE DETECTION
10.2.1. THE PHOTO MULTIPLIER TUBE
The M200EH/EM uses a photo-multiplier tube (PMT) to detect the amount of light created by the NO and O3
reaction in the reaction cell.
A PMT is typically a vacuum tube containing a variety of specially designed electrodes. Photons enter the PMT
and strike a negatively charged photo cathode causing it to emit electrons. These electrons are accelerated by
an applied high voltage and multiply through a sequence of such acceleration steps (dynodes) until a useable
current signal is generated. This current increases or decreases with the amount of detected light (Section
10.4.3 for more details), is converted to a voltage and amplified by the preamplifier board and then reported to
the motherboard’s analog inputs.

191
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Theory of Operation

Figure 10-10-3: Reaction Cell with PMT Tube

10.2.2. OPTICAL FILTER
Another critical component in the method by which your M200EH/EM detects chemiluminescence is the optical
filter that lies between the reaction cell and the PMT (Figure: 10-3). This filter is a high pass filter that is only
transparent to wavelengths of light above 645 nm. In conjunction with the response characteristics of the PMT,
this filter creates a very narrow window of wavelengths of light to which the M200EH/EM will respond (Figure 1010-1).
The narrow band of sensitivity allows the M200EH/EM to ignore extraneous light and radiation that might
interfere with the M200EH/EM’s measurement. For instance, some oxides of sulfur can also undergo
chemiluminescence when in contact with O3 but emit light at shorter wavelengths (usually around 260 nm to 480
nm).

10.2.3. AUTO ZERO
Inherent in the operation of any PMT is a certain amount of noise. This is due to a variety of factors such as
black body infrared radiation given off by the metal components of the reaction cell, unit to unit variations in the
PMT units and even the constant universal background radiation that surrounds us at all times. In order to
reduce this amount of noise and offset, the PMT is kept at a constant 7° C (45° F) by a thermo-electric cooler
(TEC).
While this intrinsic noise and offset is significantly reduced by cooling the PMT, it is not eradicated. To
determine how much noise remains, the M200EH/EM diverts the sample gas flow directly to the vacuum
manifold without passing the reaction cell once every minute for about 5 seconds (Figure 10-10-4). During this
time, only O3 is present in the reaction cell, effectively turning off the chemiluminescence reaction. Once the
chamber is completely dark, the M200EH/EM records the output of the PMT and keeps a running average of
these AZERO values. This average offset value is subtracted from the raw PMT readings while the instrument
is measuring NO and NOX to arrive at a auto-zero corrected reading.

192
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Theory of Operation

Figure 10-10-4: Reaction Cell During the AutoZero Cycle.

10.2.4. MEASUREMENT INTERFERENCES
It should be noted that the chemiluminescence method is subject to interferences from a number of sources.
The M200EH/EM has been successfully tested for its ability to reject interference from most of these sources.
Table 10-1 lists the most important gases, which may interfere with the detection of NO in the M200EH/EM.

10.2.4.1. Direct Interference
Some gases can directly alter the amount of light detected by the PMT due to chemiluminescence in the reaction
cell. This can either be a gas that undergoes chemiluminescence by reacting with O3 in the reaction cell or a
gas that reacts with other compounds and produces excess NO upstream of the reaction cell.

10.2.4.2. Third Body Quenching
As shown in Equation 10-3, other molecules in the reaction cell can collide with the excited NO2*, preventing the
chemiluminescence of Equation 10-2, a process known as quenching. CO2 and H2O are the most common
quenching interferences, but N2 and O2 also contribute to this interference type.
Quenching is an unwanted phenomenon and the extent to which it occurs depends on the properties of the
collision partner. larger, more polarized molecules such as H2O and CO2 quench NO chemiluminescence more
effectively than smaller, less polar and electronically “harder” molecules such as N2 and O2.
The influence of water vapor on the M200EH/EM measurement can be eliminated with an optional, internal
sample gas dryer. The concentrations of N2 and O2 are virtually constant in ambient air measurements, hence
provide a constant amount of quenching and the interference of varying CO2 amounts is negligible at low
concentrations.

193
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Theory of Operation

The M200EH and 200EM analyzers are typically used in high CO2 concentration environments. The pneumatic
setup of these two analyzer models minimizes the interference from CO2 such that the analyzers conform to the
standards set forth by the US-EPA in Method 20 - NOx from Stationary Gas Turbines, available at
http://www.epa.gov/ttn/emc/promgate.html

Table 10-1:
GAS

CO2

SOX

List of Interferents

INTERFERENCE TYPE

REJECTION METHOD

Dilution: Viscosity of CO2 molecules causes them to
collect in aperture of Critical Flow Orifice altering flow
rate of NO.

If high concentrations of CO2 are suspected,
special calibration methods must be performed to
account for the affects of the CO2.

3rd Body Quenching: CO2 molecules collide with
NO2* molecules absorbing excess energy kinetically
and preventing emission of photons.

Contact Teledyne Instruments Customer Service
department for details.

Some SOX variants can also initiate a
chemiluminescence reaction upon exposure to O3
producing excess light.

Wavelengths of light produced by
chemiluminescence of SOX are screened out by
the Optical Filter.

Chemically reacts with NH3, O2 and H2O in O3
generator to create (NH3)2SO4 (ammonium sulfate)
and NH3NO2 (ammonium nitrate) which form opaque
white deposits on optical filter window. Also forms
highly corrosive HNO3 (Nitric Acid)

Most of the ammonium sulfate and ammonium
nitrate produced is removed from the sample gas
by an air purifier located between the O3
Generator and the reaction cell.

3rd Body quenching: SOX molecules collide with NO2*
molecules absorbing excess energy kinetically and
preventing emission of photons.

If high concentrations of SOX are suspected,
special calibration methods must be performed to
account for the affects of the SO2.
Contact Teledyne Instruments Customer Service
department for details.

H20

NH3

3rd Body quenching: H2O molecules collide with NO2*
molecules absorbing excess energy kinetically and
preventing emission of photons.

Analyzer’s operating in high humidity areas must
have some method of drying applied to the
sample gas supply (Section 5.10 for more details).

Chemically reacts with NH3 and SOX in O3 generator
to create (NH3)2SO4 (ammonium sulfate) and
NH3NO2 (ammonium nitrate) which form opaque
white deposits on optical filter Window. Also forms
highly corrosive HNO3 (nitric acid)

Removed from the O3 gas stream by the Perma
Pure® Dryer (Section 10.3.7 for more details).

Direct Interference: NH3 is converted to H2O and NO
by the NO2 converter. Excess NO reacts with O3 in
reaction cell creating excess chemiluminescence.

If a high concentration of NH3 is suspected, steps
must be taken to remove the NH3 from the sample
gas prior to its entry into the NO2 converter.

Chemically reacts with H2O, O2 and SOX in O3
generator to create (NH3)2SO4 (ammonium sulfate)
and NH3NO2 (ammonium nitrate) which form opaque
white deposits on optical filter window. Also forms
highly corrosive HNO3 (nitric acid).

The Perma Pure® dryer built into the M200EH/EM
is sufficient for removing typical ambient
concentration levels of NH3.

In cases with excessively high CO2 concentrations (larger than 0.5%), the effect can be calibrated out by using
calibration gases with a CO2 content equal to the measured air. Only very high and highly variable CO2
concentrations will then be cause of measurable interference. For those applications, we recommend to use
other analyzer models. Please consult sales or our website.

10.2.4.3. Light Leaks
The M200EH/EM sensitivity curve includes a small portion of the visible light spectrum
(Figure 10-1), hence, it is important to make sure than the reaction cell is completely sealed with respect to light.
To ensure this, all pneumatic tubing leading into the reaction cell is either opaque (vacuum exit tubing) in order
to prevent light from entering the cell or light penetration is prevented by stainless steel filters and orifices (gas
entries).

194
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Theory of Operation

10.3. PNEUMATIC OPERATION
CAUTION
It is important that the sample airflow system is leak-tight and not pressurized over
ambient pressure. Regular leak checks should be performed on the analyzer as
described in the maintenance schedule, Table 9-1. Procedures for correctly performing
leak checks can be found in Section 11.5.

10.3.1. PUMP AND EXHAUST MANIFOLD
NOTE
Relative Pressure versus absolute pressure. In this manual vacuum readings are given
in inches of mercury absolute pressure (in-Hg-A), i.e. indicate an absolute pressure
referenced against zero (a perfect vacuum).
The gas flow for the M200EH/EM is created by an external pump (Figure 10-10-5) that is pneumatically
connected through a 6.4 mm / 0.25” tube to the analyzer’s exhaust port located on the rear panel (Figure 3-1).
This pump creates a vacuum of approximately 5 in-Hg-A at one standard liter/minute, which is provided to
various pneumatic components by a vacuum manifold located just in front of the rear panel (Figure 3-1). Gas
flow is created by keeping the analyzer’s sample gas inlet near ambient pressure, usually by means of a small
vent installed in the sample line at the inlet, in effect pulling the gas through the instrument’s pneumatic systems.
There are several advantages to this external pump / pull-through configuration.


By using an external pump, it is possible to remove a significant source of acoustic noise and vibration
from the immediate vicinity of the sensor. The PMT can act as a “microphone”, amplifying noise and
vibration within the chassis. This is one of the main reasons, why the M200EH/EM has an external
pump.



Pumping heats and compresses the sample air, complicating the measurement process if the pump is
upstream.



Most importantly, however, certain physical parts of the pump itself are made of materials that might
chemically react with the sample gas. Placing the pump downstream of the reaction cell avoids these
problems.

To M200EH/EM
Exhaust Port

Figure 10-10-5: External Pump Pack
195
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Theory of Operation

Finally, the M200EH/EM requires a steady, high under-pressure, which cannot be achieved reliably over
extended periods of time with small vacuum pumps. The external pump used for the M200EH/EM has a very
long lifetime and duty cycle and provides a very good vacuum for its entire lifetime. However, the pump is too
large to fit into the chassis of the analyzer.

10.3.2. SAMPLE GAS FLOW
The sample gas is the most critical flow path in the analyzer, as the medium has to be routed through a variety
of valves and tubes for the measurement of zero offset and concentrations of both NO and NOX (and possibly
the drying of the gas if the optional sample dryer is installed). At any point before and in the reaction cell, the
integrity of the sample gas cannot be compromised.
Sample gas flow in the M200EH/EM analyzer is not a directly measured value, but is rather calculated from the
sample pressure using the flow principle across a critical orifice. In general, the differential pressure ratio
between sample pressure and reaction cell pressure needs to exceed 2:1 to allow critical flow. The actual flow
rate is then only dependent on the size of the orifice and the upstream pressure. Refer to Section 10.3.3 for a
detailed description of the instrument’s method of gas flow rate control.

10.3.2.1. NO/NOx and AutoZero cycles
For the routing of the sample gas flow, the analyzer uses a variety of valves. The NO/NOX valve directs the
sample gas either directly to the reaction cell or through the unit’s NO2 converter, alternating every ~4 s. The
AutoZero valve directs the sample gas stream to completely bypass the reaction cell for dark noise
measurement once every minute, which is then subtracted as a measurement offset from the raw concentration
signal. The valve cycle phases are summarized in the following table.

Table 10-2: M200EH/EM Valve Cycle Phases
PHASE

NO/ NOX
VALVE
STATUS

NO
Measure

Open to
AutoZero
valve

NOX
Measure

Open to
NO2
converter

AUTOZERO
VALVE
STATUS

Open to
reaction cell

Open to
reaction cell

TIME
INDEX

ACTIVITY

0-2s

Wait period (NO dwell time).
Ensures reaction cell has been
flushed of previous gas.

2-4s

Analyzer measures chemiluminescence in reaction cell.

4–6s

Wait period (NOX dwell time).
Ensures reaction cell has been
flushed of previous gas.

6–8s

Analyzer measures NO + O3 chemiluminescence in reaction cell.

0–4s

Wait period (AZERO dwell time).
Ensures reaction cell has been
flushed of sample gas and chemiluminescence reaction is stopped.

FIGURE

Figure 10-10-2

Figure 10-10-2

Cycle repeats every ~8 seconds

AutoZero

Open to
AutoZero
valve

Open to
vacuum
manifold

4-6s

Figure 10-10-4

Analyzer measures background
noise without sample gas

Cycle repeats every minute

196
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Theory of Operation

10.3.3. FLOW RATE CONTROL - CRITICAL FLOW ORIFICES
The Model M200EH/EM analyzers use special flow control assemblies located at various locations around the
instrument to maintain constant flow rates for both the O3 supply air and the sample gas. These assemblies
consists of:


A critical flow orifice.



Two o-rings: Located just before and after the critical flow orifice, the o-rings seal the gap between the
walls of assembly housing and the critical flow orifice.



A spring: Applies mechanical force needed to form the seal between the o-rings, the critical flow orifice
and the assembly housing.

See Figures 10-6 through 10-9 For the location of these flow control assemblies:

VACUUM
PRESSURE
SENSOR
SAMPLE
PRESSURE
SENSOR

GAS FLOW
CONTROL
ASSEMBLIES

Figure 10-10-6: Location of Gas Flow Control Assemblies for M200EH

197
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Theory of Operation

VACUUM
PRESSURE
SENSOR
SAMPLE
PRESSURE
SENSOR

GAS FLOW
CONTROL
ASSEMBLIES

Figure 10-10-7: Location of Gas Flow Control Assemblies for M200EM

GAS FLOW
CONTROL
ASSEMBLIES

VACUUM
PRESSURE
SENSOR
SAMPLE
PRESSURE
SENSOR

Figure 10-10-8: Location of Gas Flow Control Assemblies for M200EH with O2 sensor Option 65

198
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Theory of Operation

VACUUM
PRESSURE
SENSOR
SAMPLE
PRESSURE
SENSOR

GAS FLOW
CONTROL
ASSEMBLIES

Figure 10-10-9: Location of Gas Flow Control Assemblies for M200EH with Second Span Point Option 52

NOTE:
Location of flow control assemblies in the M200EH/EM with zero/span option 50
installed are the same as shown in Figures 10-6 and 10-7.

10.3.3.1. Critical Flow Orifice
The most important component of the flow control assemblies is the critical flow orifice.
Critical flow orifices are a remarkably simple way to regulate stable gas flow rates. They operate without moving
parts by taking advantage of the laws of fluid dynamics. By restricting the flow of gas though the orifice, a
pressure differential is created. This pressure differential combined with the action of the analyzer’s pump draws
the gas through the orifice.
As the pressure on the downstream side of the orifice (the pump side) continues to drop, the speed that the gas
flows though the orifice continues to rise. Once the ratio of upstream pressure to downstream pressure is
greater than 2:1, the velocity of the gas through the orifice reaches the speed of sound. As long as that ratio
stays at least 2:1 the gas flow rate is unaffected by any fluctuations, surges, or changes in downstream pressure
because such variations only travel at the speed of sound themselves and are therefore cancelled out by the
sonic shockwave at the downstream exit of the critical flow orifice.

199
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Theory of Operation

Figure 10-10-10:

Flow Control Assembly & Critical Flow Orifice

The actual flow rate of gas through the orifice (volume of gas per unit of time), depends on the size and shape of
the aperture in the orifice. The larger the hole, the more gas molecules, moving at the speed of sound, pass
through the orifice.
With nominal pressures of 28 and 4 in-Hg-A for the sample and reaction cell pressures, respectively the
necessary ratio of sample to reaction cell pressure of 2:1 is largely exceeded and accommodates a wide range
of possible variability in atmospheric pressure and pump degradation extending the useful life of the pump.
Once the pump does degrades to the point where the vacuum pressure exceeds 14 in-Hg-A so that the ratio
between sample and vacuum pressures is less than 2:1 a critical flow rate can no longer be maintained. At this
point, the instrument will display “XXXX" indicating an invalid sample flow rate.
The following table lists the gas flow rates of the critical flow orifices in the standard M200EH/EM

Table 10-3: M200EH/EM Critical Flow Orifice Diameters and Gas Flow Rates

LOCATION

PURPOSE

ORIFICE DIAMETER

NOMINAL FLOWRATE
(cm³/min)

M200EH

M200EM

M200EH

M200EM

Bypass Manifold out to
No/NOx valve and NO2
converter

Controls rate of flow of sample gas into the NO2
converter and reaction cell.

0.003”

0.007”

40

250

Vacuum Manifold:
Bypass Manifold Port

Controls rate of sample gas flow that bypasses
the analyzer when bypassing the reaction cell
during the auto-zero cycle.

0.007”

N/A

250

N/A

290

250

80

80

370

330

TOTAL INLET GAS FLOW – Standard Configuration

Controls rate of flow of zero purge gas through
the O2 sensor (when installed and enabled) when
inactive.

Vacuum manifold: O2
sensor port

0.004"

0.004"

TOTAL INLET GAS FLOW – With O2 Sensor Option

O3 supply inlet of
reaction cell.
Dry air return of Perma
Pure® dryer

Controls rate of flow of ozone gas into the
reaction cell.

0.007”

0.007”

250

250

Controls flow rate of dry air return / purge air of
the dryer.

0.004"

0.004"

80

80

200
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Theory of Operation

In addition to controlling the gas flows, the two critical flow orifices at the inlets of the reaction cell also maintain
an under-pressure inside the reaction cell, effectively reducing the number of molecules in the chamber and
therefore increasing the chemiluminescence yield as the likelihood of third body quenching is reduced (Section
10.2.4.1). The M200EH/EM sensitivity reaches a peak at about 2 in-Hg-A, below which the sensitivity drops due
to a low number of molecules and decreased yield in the chemiluminescence reaction.

EFFECT OF TEMPERATURE ON CRITICAL FLOW
Changes in temperature will cause the critical flow orifice materials to expand or contract. Even though these
changes are extremely small, they can alter the diameter of the critical flow orifice enough to cause noticeable
changes in the flow rate though the orifice. To alleviate this problem the two most important of the flow
assemblies (those controlling the sample gas an O3 gas flow)in the M200EH/EM are maintained at a constant
temperature.

10.3.4. SAMPLE PARTICULATE FILTER
To remove particles in the sample gas, the analyzer is equipped with a PTFE membrane filter of 47 mm
diameter (also referred to as the sample filter) with a 1 µm pore size. The filter is accessible through the front
panel, which folds down (after removal of the CE Mark safety screw), and should be changed according to the
maintenance schedule in Table 9-1.
5

10.3.5. OZONE GAS AIR FLOW
The excess ozone needed for reaction with NO in the reaction cell is generated inside the analyzer because of
the instability and toxicity of ozone. Besides the ozone generator itself, this requires a dry air supply and filtering
of the gas before it is introduced into the reaction cell. Due to its toxicity and aggressive chemical behavior, O3
must also be removed from the gas stream before it can be vented through the exhaust outlet.
In contrast to the sample flow, the ozone flow is measured with a mass flow sensor, which is mounted on the
pneumatic sensor board (Figure 11-), just behind the PMT sensor assembly. This mass flow sensor has a full
scale range of 0-1000 cm³/min and can be calibrated through software to its span point (Section 6.13.7.5). As
the flow value displayed on the front panel is an actual measurement (and not a calculated value), the flow
variability may be higher than that of the sample flow, which is based on a calculation from (more stable)
differential pressures. On the other hand, the drift, i.e. long-term change, in the ozone flow rate may be higher
and usually indicates a flow problem. As with all other test parameters, we recommend to monitor the ozone
flow over time for predictive diagnostics and maintenance evaluation.
CAUTION
Ozone (O3) is a toxic gas. Obtain a Material and Safety Data Sheet
(MSDS) for this gas. Read and rigorously follow the safety guidelines described there. Always make sure that the plumbing of the
O3 generation and supply system is maintained and leak-free.

201
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Theory of Operation

10.3.6. O3 GENERATOR
The M200EH/EM uses a corona discharge (CD) tube for creating its O3. Corona discharge generation is
capable of producing high concentrations of ozone efficiently and with low excess heat. Although there are
many cell designs, the fundamental principle remains the same (Figure 10-10-11).

Figure 10-10-11:

Ozone Generator Principle

The M200EH/EM utilizes a dual-dielectric design. This method utilizes a glass tube with hollow walls. The
outermost and innermost surfaces are coated with electrically conductive material. The air flows through the
glass tube, between the two conductive coatings, in effect creating a capacitor with the air and glass acting as
the dielectric. The layers of glass also separate the conductive surfaces from the air stream to prevent reaction
with the O3. As the capacitor charges and discharges, electrons are created and accelerated across the air gap
and collide with the O2 molecules in the air stream splitting them into elemental oxygen. Some of these oxygen
atoms recombine with O2 to O3.
The quantity of ozone produced is dependent on factors such as the voltage and frequency of the alternating
current applied to the CD cells. When enough high-energy electrons are produced to ionize the O2 molecules, a
light emitting, gaseous plasma is formed, which is commonly referred to as a corona, hence the name corona
discharge generator.

202
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Theory of Operation

10.3.7. PERMA PURE® DRYER
The air supplied to the O3 generation system needs to be as dry as possible. Normal room air contains a certain
amount of water vapor, which greatly diminishes the yield of ozone produced by the ozone generator. Also,
water can react with other chemicals inside the O3 Generator to produce chemicals that damage the optical filter
located in the reaction cell (Table 10-1) such as ammonium sulfate or highly corrosive nitric acid.
To accomplish this task the M200EH/EM uses a Perma Pure® single tube permeation dryer. The dryer consists
of a single tube of Nafion® , a co-polymer similar to Teflon® that absorbs water very well but not other chemicals.
The Nafion® tube is mounted within an outer, flexible plastic tube. As gas flows through the inner Nafion® tube,
water vapor is absorbed into the membrane walls. The absorbed water is transported through the membrane
wall and evaporates into the dry, purge gas flowing through the outer tube, countercurrent to the gas in the inner
tube (Figure 10-10-12).

Figure 10-10-12:

Semi-Permeable Membrane Drying Process

This process is called per-evaporation and is driven by the humidity gradient between the inner and outer tubes
as well as the flow rates and pressure difference between inner and outer tubing. Unlike micro-porous
membrane permeation, which transfers water through a relatively slow diffusion process, per-evaporation is a
simple kinetic reaction. Therefore, the drying process occurs quickly, typically within milliseconds. The first step
in this process is a chemical reaction between the molecules of the Nafion® material and water, other chemical
components of the gases to be dried are usually unaffected. The chemical reaction is based on hydrogen bonds
between the water molecule and the Nafion material. Other small polar gases that are capable of hydrogen
bonds can be absorbed this way, too, such as ammonia (NH3) and some low molecular amines. The gases of
interest, NO and NO2, do not get absorbed and pass the dryer unaltered.
To provide a dry purge gas for the outer side of the Nafion tube, the M200EH/EM returns some of the dried air
from the inner tube to the outer tube (Figure 10-10-13). When the analyzer is first started, the humidity gradient
between the inner and outer tubes is not very large and the dryer’s efficiency is low at first but improves as this
cycle reduces the moisture in the sample gas and settles at a minimum humidity.

203
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Theory of Operation

Figure 10-10-13:

M200EH/EM Perma Pure® Dryer

Just like on startup, if the instrument is turned on after having been off for more than 30 minutes, it takes a
certain amount of time for the humidity gradient to become large enough for the Perma Pure® Dryer to
adequately dry the air. In this case, called a cold start, the O3 Generator is not turned on for 30 minutes. When
rebooting the instrument within less than 30 minutes of power-down, the generator is turned on immediately.
The Perma Pure® Dryer used in the M200EH/EM is capable of adequately drying ambient air to a dew point of ≤
-5˚C (~4000 ppm residual H2O) at a flow rate of 1 standard liter per minute (slpm) or down to ≤ -15˚C (~1600
ppm residual H2O) at 0.5 slpm. The Perma Pure® Dryer is also capable of removing ammonia from the sample
gas up to concentrations of approximately 1 ppm.

204
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Theory of Operation

10.3.8. OZONE SUPPLY AIR FILTER
The M200EH/EM uses ambient air as the supply gas for the O3 generator and may produce a variety of
byproducts. Small amounts of water, ammonia and various sulfur oxides can combine to create ammonium
sulfate, ammonium nitrate, nitric acid and other compounds. Whereas sulfates and nitrates can create powdery
residues inside the reaction cell causing sensitivity drift, nitric acid is a very aggressive compound, which can
deteriorate the analyzer’s components. In order to remove these chemical byproducts from the O3 gas stream,
the output of the O3 generator flows through a special filter between the generator and the reaction cell.
Any NOX that may be produced in the generator (from reaction of O2 or O3 and N2 in the air) and may cause an
artifact in the measurement, is calibrated out through the Auto-zero functionality, which checks the background
signal of the O3 stream only once per minute.

10.3.9. OZONE SCRUBBER
Even though ozone is unstable and typically reacts to form O2, the break-down is not quite fast enough to ensure
that it is completely removed from the exhaust gas stream of the M200EH/EM by the time the gas exits the
analyzer. Due to the high toxicity and reactivity of O3, a special catalytic ozone scrubber is used to remove all of
the O3 exiting the reaction cell. Besides its efficient destruction of O3, this catalyst does not produce any toxic or
hazardous gases as it only converts ozone to oxygen.
The O3 scrubber is located inside the NO2 converter housing next to the NO2 converter in order to utilize residual
heat given of by the converter heater. Even though the catalyst is 100% efficient at scrubbing ozone at room
temperature, heating it significantly reduces the necessary residence time (the amount of time the gas must be
in contact with the catalyst) for 100% efficiency and full efficiency can be maintained at higher gas flow rates. As
this is a true catalytic converter, there are no maintenance requirements as would be required for charcoalbased scrubbers.
A certain amount of fine, black dust may exit the catalyst, particularly if the analyzer is subjected to sudden
pressure drops (for example, when disconnecting the running pump without letting the analyzer properly and
slowly equilibrate to ambient pressure). To avoid the dust from entering the reaction cell or the pump, the
scrubber is equipped with sintered stainless steel filters of 20 µm pore size on either end and on some models,
an additional dust filter may be attached to the exhaust port.

205
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Theory of Operation

10.3.10. PNEUMATIC SENSORS
NOTE
The M200EH/EM displays all pressures in inches of mercury absolute (in-Hg-A), i.e.
absolute pressure referenced against zero (a perfect vacuum).
The M200EH/EM uses three pneumatic sensors to verify gas streams. These sensors are located on a printed
circuit assembly, called the pneumatic pressure/flow sensor board, located just behind the sensor assembly.

10.3.10.1. Vacuum Manifold
The vacuum manifold is the central exit port for all analyzer pneumatics. All gas streams of the analyzer exit
through this assembly and connect to the instrument’s pump. Figure 10-10-14 shows the standard
configuration. Configurations will vary depending on the optional equipment that is installed. An IZS option, for
example, will add another FT8 connector and orifice assembly to the manifold, an optional sample dryer may
add a Tee-fitting so that two ¼” tubes can be connected to the same port.
At this time, the vacuum manifold does not yet support the orifice holder shown in Figure 9-6. To exchange the
critical orifice installed in the vacuum manifold, the user needs to either blow the orifice out with reversed
pressure or remove the entire manifold for this task. However, orifices installed in the vacuum manifold should
not have to be cleaned under normal circumstances.

Figure 10-10-14:

Vacuum Manifold

10.3.10.2. Sample Pressure Sensor
An absolute pressure transducer connected to the input of the NO/NOX valve is used to measure the pressure of
the sample gas before it enters the analyzer’s reaction cell. This is the “upstream” pressure mentioned above,
which is used to compute sample flow rate. In conjunction with the vacuum pressure sensor, it is also used to
validate the critical flow condition (2:1 pressure ratio) through the sample gas critical flow orifice (Section 10.3.3).
If the temperature/pressure compensation (TPC) feature is turned on (Section 10.7.3), the output of this sensor
is also used to supply pressure data for that calculation.
The actual pressure value is viewable through the analyzer’s front panel display as the test function SAMP. The
flow rate of the sample gas is displayed as SAMP FLW.

206
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Theory of Operation

10.3.10.3. Vacuum Pressure Sensor
An absolute pressure transducer connected to the exhaust manifold is used to measure the pressure
downstream from and inside the instrument’s reaction cell. The output of the sensor is used by the CPU to
calculate the pressure differential between the gas upstream of the reaction cell and the gas downstream from it
and is also used as the main diagnostic for proper pump operation. If the ratio between the upstream pressure
and the downstream pressure falls below 2:1, a warning message (SAMPLE FLOW WARN) is displayed on the
analyzer’s front panel (Section6.2.2) and the sample flow rate will display XXXX instead of an actual value. If
this pressure exceeds 10 in-Hg-A, an RCEL PRESSURE WARNING Is issued, even though the analyzer will
continue to calculate a sample flow up to ~14 in Hg.
Also, if the temperature/pressure compensation (TPC) feature is turned on (Section 10.7.3), the output of this
sensor is used to supply pressure data for that calculation. This measurement is viewable through the
analyzer’s front panel as the test function RCEL.

10.3.10.4. O3 Supply Air Flow Sensor
A mass flow meter connected between the Perma Pure® dryer and the O3 generator measures the flow rate of
O3 supply air through the analyzer. This information is used to validate the O3 gas flow rate. If the flow rate
exceeds ±15% of the nominal flow rate (80 cm³/min), a warning message OZONE FLOW WARNING is
displayed on the analyzer’s front panel (Section 6.2.2) and the O3 generator is turned off. As second warning,
OZONE GEN OFF, is displayed. This flow measurement is viewable through instrument’s front panel display as
the test function OZONE FL.

10.3.11. DILUTION MANIFOLD
Certain applications require to measure NOX in sample gases that do not contain any oxygen. However, the
molybdenum NO2 converter requires a minimum amount of oxygen to operate properly and to ensure constant
conversion efficiency. For these special applications, the M200E analyzer may be equipped with a dilution
manifold (Figure 10-10-15) to provide the instrument with an internal sample stream that contains about 2.5%
O2. This manifold is mounted between converter housing and vacuum manifold on a small mounting bracket. If
the dilution manifold is to be mounted in the M200EH/EM analyzer, it will fit on the back of the shown bracket as
the front of the bracket is occupied by the bypass manifold.
The manifold is equipped with two orifice holders that control the flow of the O2-free sample gas and the bleeds
in a small amount of zero air before the combined sample stream goes to the NO/NOX valve for measurement.
The zero air is produced by an external zero air scrubber cartridge, mounted on the rear panel (Figure 3-2 and
)LJXUH).
The dilution manifold is not temperature controlled, although the residual heat of the NO2 converter housing
provides some temperature stability. Tight temperature stability is not critical to the dilution application.

207
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Theory of Operation

Figure 10-10-15:

Dilution Manifold

Please inquire with Teledyne-API sales if the M200E can be modified to fit your application.

208
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Theory of Operation

10.4. ELECTRONIC OPERATION
Figure 10-10-16 shows a block diagram of the major electronic components of the M200EH/EM.
Back Panel
Connectors

Analog Outputs

A1

COM1

Optional
4-20 mA

A2

COM2

Control Inputs:
1–6

A3

Optional
Ethernet
Interface

Status Outputs:
1–8

A4
Analog
Outputs
(D/A)

External
Digital I/O)

RS–232 ONLY

RS–232 or RS–485

A/D
Converter(
V/F)

Power-Up
Circuit
Box
Temp

MOTHER
BOARD

PC 104
CPU Card
Disk On
Chip

CPU STATUS
LED

Flash Chip

PC 104
Bus

PMT TEMPERATURE

PMT
Temperature
Sensor

(Externally Powered)

I2C Bus
Pneumatic
Sensor
Board

PMT OUTPUT (PMT DET)

O2 OPTION
TEMPERATURE

OPTIC TEST CONTROL

ELECTRIC TEST CONTROL

REACTION CELL
TEMPERATURE

IZS OPTION
PERMEATION TUBE
TEMPERATURE

PUMP

Analog
Sensor Inputs

Internal
Digital I/O

HIGH VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY LEVEL

Thermistor
Interface

Sample
Pressure
Sensor
Vacuum
Pressure
Sensor
O3 Flow Sensor

PMT

I2C Status
LED

Keybd &
Display

RELAY
BOARD

TEMPERATURE SIGNAL

NO/NOx
Valve

Reaction Cell
Heater

Autozero
Valve

MOLYBDENUM CONVERTER

Molybdenum
Converter Heater

PREAMP PCA
PMT

PMT TEC

TEC Drive
PCA

Figure 10-10-16:

IZS Option
Permeation Tube
Heater
O2 Sensor
Option

Sample Cal
Valve Option
Option

IZS Valve
Option

MOLYBDENUM CONVERTER
TEMPERATURE

M200EH/EM Electronic Block Diagram

The core of the analyzer is a microcomputer (CPU) that controls various internal processes, interprets data,
calculates data, and reports results using specialized firmware developed by Teledyne Instruments. It
communicates with the user, receives data from and issues commands to a variety of peripheral devices through
the motherboard, the main printed circuit assembly on the rear panel (Figure 3-1).

209
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Theory of Operation

10.4.1. CPU
The CPU is a low power (5 VDC, 0.8A max), high performance, 386-based microcomputer running a version of
the DOS operating system. Its operation and assembly conform to the PC-104 specification, version 2.3 for
embedded PC and PC/AT applications. It has 2 MB of DRAM memory on board and operates at 40 MHz clock
rate over an internal, 32-bit data and address bus. Chip to chip data handling is performed by two 4-channel,
direct memory access (DMA) devices over data busses of either 8-bit or 16-bit bandwidth. The CPU supports
both RS-232 and RS-485 serial protocols. Figure 10-10-17 shows the CPU board.


The CPU communicates with the user and the outside world in a variety of ways:



Through the analyzer’s keyboard and vacuum fluorescence display over a clocked, digital, serial I/O bus
using the I2C protocol (read I-square-C bus)



RS-232 and/or RS-485 serial ports (one of which can be connected to an Ethernet converter)



Various analog voltage and current outputs



Several digital I/O channels

Figure 10-10-17:

M200EH/EM CPU Board Annotated

Finally, the CPU issues commands (also over the I2C bus) to a series of relays and switches located on a
separate printed circuit assembly, the relay board (located in the right rear of the chassis on its own mounting
bracket) to control the function of heaters and valves. The CPU includes two types of non-volatile data storage,
one disk-on-chip and one or two flash chips.

210
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Theory of Operation

10.4.1.1. Disk On Chip
Technically, the disk-on-chip is an EEPROM, but appears to the CPU as, behaves as, and performs the same
functions in the system as an 8 mb disk drive, internally labeled as DOS drive C:\. It is used to store the
computer’s operating system files, the Teledyne Instruments firmware and peripheral files, and the operational
data generated by the analyzer’s internal data acquisition system (iDAS - Sections 10.7.5 and 6.7).

10.4.1.2. Flash Chip
The flash chip is another, smaller EEPROM with about 64 kb of space, internally labeled as DOS drive B:\. The
M200EH/EM CPU board can accommodate up to two EEPROM flash chips. The M200EH/EM standard
configuration is one chip with 64 kb of storage capacity, which is used to store the analyzer configuration as
created during final checkout at the factory. Separating these data onto a less frequently accessed chip
significantly decreases the chance of data corruption through drive failure.
In the unlikely event that the flash chip should fail, the analyzer will continue to operate with just the DOC.
However, all configuration information will be lost, requiring the unit to be recalibrated.

10.4.2. SENSOR MODULE, REACTION CELL
Electronically, the M200EH/EM sensor assembly (see Figure 9-6) consists of several subassemblies with
different tasks: to detect the intensity of the light from the chemiluminescence reaction between NO and O3 in
the reaction cell, to produce a current signal proportional to the intensity of the chemiluminescence, to control
the temperature of the PMT to ensure the accuracy and stability of the measurements and to drive the high
voltage power supply that is needed for the PMT. The individual functions are described individually below,
Section 11.6.6 shows the sensor assembly and its components.

10.4.2.1. Reaction Cell Heating Circuit
The stability of the chemiluminescence reaction between NO and O3 can be affected by changes in the
temperature and pressure of the O3 and sample gases in the reaction cell. In order to reduce temperature
effects, the reaction cell is maintained at a constant 50 C, just above the high end of the instrument’s operation
temperature range.
Two AC heaters, one embedded into the bottom of the reaction cell, the other embedded directly above the
chamber’s exhaust fitting, provide the heat source. These heaters operate off of the instrument’s main AC
power and are controlled by the CPU through a power relay on the relay board (Section 10.4.7). A thermistor,
also embedded in the bottom of the reaction cell, reports the cell’s temperature to the CPU through the
thermistor interface circuitry of the motherboard (Section 0).

211
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Theory of Operation

10.4.3. PHOTO MULTIPLIER TUBE (PMT)
The M200EH/EM uses a photo multiplier tube (PMT) to detect the amount of chemiluminescence created in the
sample chamber.
PMT Housing End Plate
This is the entry to the PMT Exchange
PMT Output
Connector

PMT Preamp PCA

PMT Power Supply
& Aux. Signal
Connector

High voltage Power Supply
(HVPS)

PMT
O-Test LED

PMT Cold Block
Connector to PMT
Pre Amp PCA
12V Power
Connector

Insulation Gasket

PMT Temperature
Sensor

Light from Reaction
Chamber shines
through hole in side
of Cold Block

Thermo-Electric Cooler
(TEC)
PMT Heat Exchange Fins
TEC Driver PCA
Cooling Fan
Housing

Figure 10-10-18:

PMT Housing Assembly

A typical PMT is a vacuum tube containing a variety of specially designed electrodes. Photons from the reaction
are filtered by an optical high-pass filter, enter the PMT and strike a negatively charged photo cathode causing it
to emit electrons. A high voltage potential across these focusing electrodes directs the electrons toward an
array of high voltage dynodes. The dynodes in this electron multiplier array are designed so that each stage
multiplies the number of emitted electrons by emitting multiple, new electrons. The greatly increased number of
electrons emitted from one end of electron multiplier are collected by a positively charged anode at the other
end, which creates a useable current signal. This current signal is amplified by the preamplifier board and then
reported to the motherboard.

Figure 10-10-19:

Basic PMT Design

212
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Theory of Operation

A significant performance characteristic of the PMT is the voltage potential across the electron multiplier. The
higher the voltage, the greater is the number of electrons emitted from each dynode of the electron multiplier,
making the PMT more sensitive and responsive to small variations in light intensity but also more noisy (dark
noise). The gain voltage of the PMT used in the M200EH/EM is usually set between 450 V and 800 V. This
parameter is viewable through the front panel as test function HVPS (see Section 6.2.1). For information on
when and how to set this voltage, see Section 11.6.3.8.
The PMT is housed inside the PMT module assembly (see Figure 10-18). This assembly also includes the high
voltage power supply required to drive the PMT, an LED used by the instrument’s optical test function, a
thermistor that measures the temperature of the PMT and various components of the PMT cooling system
including the thermo-electric cooler (TEC).

10.4.4. PMT COOLING SYSTEM.
The performance of the analyzer’s PMT is significantly affected by temperature. Variations in PMT temperature
are directly reflected in the signal output of the PMT. Also the signal to noise ratio of the PMT output is radically
influenced by temperature as well. The warmer The PMT is, the noisier its signal becomes until the noise
renders the concentration signal useless. To alleviate this problem a special cooling system exists that
maintains the PMT temperature at a stable, low level

TEC PCA sets
appropriate
drive voltage
for cooler

Preamp PCA sends
buffered and
amplified thermistor
signal to TEC PCA

TEC
Control
PCA

PMT Preamp
PCA

Heat Sink

ThermoElectric Cooler

Thermistor
outputs temp of
cold block to
preamp PCA

PMT

Cold Block

Heat form PMT is absorbed
by the cold block and
transferred to the heat sink
via the TEC then bled off
into the cool air stream.

Cooling Fan

Figure 10-10-20:

PMT Cooling System

10.4.4.1. TEC Control Board
The TEC control printed circuit assembly is located ion the sensor housing assembly, under the slanted shroud,
next to the cooling fins and directly above the cooling fan. Using the amplified PMT temperature signal from the
PMT preamplifier board (see Section 10.4.5), it sets the drive voltage for the thermoelectric cooler. The warmer
the PMT gets, the more current is passed through the TEC causing it to pump more heat to the heat sink.
A red LED located on the top edge of this circuit board indicates that the control circuit is receiving power. Four
test points are also located at the top of this assembly. For the definitions and acceptable signal levels of these
test points see Chapter 11.

213
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Theory of Operation

10.4.5. PMT PREAMPLIFIER
The PMT preamplifier board amplifies the PMT signal into a useable analog voltage (PMT) that can be
processed by the motherboard into a digital signal to be used by the CPU to calculate the NO, NO2 and NOx
concentrations of the gas in the sample chamber.
The output signal of the PMT is controlled by two different adjustments. First, the voltage across the electron
multiplier array of the PMT is adjusted with a set of two hexadecimal switches. Adjusting this voltage directly
affects the HVPS voltage and, hence, the signal from the PMT. Secondly, the gain of the amplified signal can
further be adjusted through a potentiometer. These adjustments should only be performed when encountering
problems with the software calibration that cannot be rectified otherwise. See Section 11.6.3.8 for this hardware
calibration.
O Test Control
From CPU

PMT Fine
Gain Set

PMT
Coarse
Gain Set

To

(Rotary
Switch)

(Rotary

O Test
LED

Motherboard

PMT Preamp PCA

O-Test
Generator

PMT HVPS
Drive Voltage

D-A
Converter

PMT Output

E Test Control
From CPU

MUX

Amp to
Voltage
Converter/
Amplifier

E-Test
Generator
PMT Temp Analog Signal

TEC Control
PCA

PMT

Signal
Offset

to Motherboard

PMT Temp
Sensor

Low
Pass Noise
Filter

PMT
Temperature
Feedback
Circuit
PMT Output Signal
(PMT) to Motherboard

Figure 10-10-21:

PMT Preamp Block Diagram

The PMT temperature control loop maintains the PMT temperature around 7° C and can be viewed as test
function PMT TEMP on the front panel (see Section 6.2.1).
The electrical test (ETEST) circuit generates a constant, electronic signal intended to simulate the output of the
PMT (after conversion from current to voltage). By bypassing the detector’s actual signal, it is possible to test
most of the signal handling and conditioning circuitry on the PMT preamplifier board. See section 6.9.6 for
instructions on performing this test.
The optical test (OTEST) feature causes an LED inside the PMT cold block to create a light signal that can be
measured with the PMT. If zero air is supplied to the analyzer, the entire measurement capability of the sensor
module can be tested including the PMT and the current to voltage conversion circuit on the PMT preamplifier
board. See section 6.9.5 for instructions on performing this test.

214
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Theory of Operation

10.4.6. PNEUMATIC SENSOR BOARD
The flow and pressure sensors of the M200EH/EM are located on a printed circuit assembly just behind the PMT
sensor. Refer to Section 11.5.15 for information on how to test this assembly. The signals of this board are
supplied to the motherboard for further signal processing. All sensors are linearized in the firmware and can be
span calibrated from the front panel.

10.4.7. RELAY BOARD
The relay board is the central switching and power distribution unit of the analyzer. It contains power relays,
valve drivers and status LEDs for all heated zones and valves, as well as thermocouple amplifiers, power
distribution connectors and the two switching power supplies of the analyzer. The relay board communicates
with the motherboard over the I2C bus and can be used for detailed trouble-shooting of power problems and
valve or heater functionality. See Figure 11-4 for an annotated view of the relay board.

10.4.7.1. Relay PCA Location and Layout
Generally the relay PCA is located in the right-rear quadrant of the analyzer and is mounted vertically on the
back side of the same bracket as the instrument’s DC power supplies, however the exact location of the relay
PCA may differ from model to model (see Figure 3-1)

10.4.7.2. Heater Control
The heater control loop is illustrated in Figure 10-22. Two T/C inputs can be configured for either type-T or typeK thermocouples. Additionally:



Both T/C’s can be configured as either grounded or ungrounded thermocouples.
Standard configuration of the both type of thermocouples is 10 mV/°C. In order to accommodate the
M200EH’s Mini High-Con converter option, a type-K; 5mV/°C output configuration has been added.
Thermistor(s) –

Low Temperature Sensing:
(e.g. Sample Chamber and Reaction
Cell temperatures)

MOTHER BOARD
A/D
Converter
(V/F)

RELAY PCA
Preamplifiers
and Signal
Conditioning

THERMOCOUPLE
CONFIGURATION
JUMPER
(JP5)

Themocouple(s)
(High Temperature Sensing;
e.g. Moly and HiCon
Converter temperatures)

CPU

Cold Junction
Compensation

DC
Control
Logic
Solid State
AC Relays

DC HEATERS

Figure 10-10-22:

AC HEATERS

Heater Control Loop Block Diagram.
215

04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Theory of Operation

10.4.7.3. Thermocouple Inputs and Configuration Jumper (JP5)
Although the relay PCA supports two thermocouple inputs, the current M200EH/EM series analyzers only utilize
one. By default, this single thermocouple input is plugged into the TC1 input (J15). TC2 (J16) is currently not
used. See Figure 11-4 for location of J15 and J16

Table 10-4: Thermocouple Configuration Jumper (JP5) Pin-Outs
TC INPUT

JUMPER PAIR

DESCRIPTION

1 – 11

FUNCTION

Gain Selector

Selects preamp gain factor for J or K TC
- IN = J TC gain factor

Output Scale Selector

Selects preamp gain factor for J or K TC
- IN = 5 mV / °C

- OUT = K TC gain factor

2 – 12

- OUT = 10 mV / °C

TC1

3 – 13

Type J Compensation

When present, sets Cold Junction
Compensation for J type Thermocouple

4 – 14

Type K Compensation

When present, sets Cold Junction
Compensation for K type Thermocouple
Selects between Isolated and grounded TC
- IN = Isolate TC

Termination Selector

5 – 15

- OUT = Grounded TC
Gain Selector

Same as Pins 1 – 11 above.

7 – 17

Output Scale Selector

Same as Pins 2 – 12 above.

8 – 18

Type J Compensation

Same as Pins 3 – 13 above.

9 – 19

Type K Compensation

Same as Pins 4 – 14 above.

10 – 20

Termination Selector

Same as Pins 5 – 15 above.

Figure 10-10-23:

Termination Selector 10 – 20

Type J Compensation 9 – 19

Output Scale Selector 7 – 17

Input Gain Selector 6 – 16

Termination Selector 5 – 15

TC2

Type J Compensation 4 – 14

Type J Compensation 3 – 13

Output Scale Selector 2 – 12

Input Gain Selector 1 – 11

TC1

Type J Compensation 8 – 18

TC2

6 – 16

Thermocouple Configuration Jumper (JP5) Pin-Outs

216
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Theory of Operation

Table 10-5: Typical Thermocouple Settings For M200E Series Analyzers
TC
TYPE

TERMINATION
TYPE

OUTPUT
SCALE TYPE

JUMPER
BETWEEN
PINS

USED ON

JUMPER
COLOR

INPUT TC1 (J15)

K

GROUNDED

5mV / °C

2 – 12
4 – 14

M200EH/EM with Mini HiCon Converter

BROWN

K

ISOLATED

5mV / °C

2 – 12
4 – 14
5 – 15

M200EH/EM with Mini HiCon Converter

GREY

K

ISOLATED

10mV / °C

4 – 14
5 – 15

M200EH/EM models with Moly
Converter

PURPLE

J

ISOLATED

10mV / °C

1 – 11
3 – 13
5 – 15

M200EH/EM models with Moly
Converter

RED

J

GROUNDED

10mV / °C

1 – 11
3 – 13

M200EH/EM models with Moly
Converter

GREEN

10.4.7.4. Valve Control
The relay board also hosts two valve driver chips, each of which can drive up four valves. The main valve
assembly in the M200EH/EM is the NO/NOX - Auto-zero solenoid valve component mounted right in front of the
NO2 converter housing. These two valves are actuated with 12 V supplied from the relay board and driven by
the CPU through the I2Z bus.
A second set of valves may be installed if the zero/span valve or the IZS option is enabled in the analyzer.
Specialty manifold valves may be present in the analyzer.

217
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Theory of Operation

10.4.8. STATUS LEDS & WATCH DOG CIRCUITRY
Thirteen LEDs are located on the analyzer’s relay board to indicate the status of the analyzer’s heating zones
and valves as well as a general operating watchdog indicator. Table 11-2 shows the states of these LEDs and
their respective functionality.

D7 (Green) – Zero / Span Valv
D8 (Green) – Sample / Cal

D4 (Yellow) – Manifold Heater
D3 (Yellow) – NO2 Converter Heater

D9 (Green ) – Auto / Z

D2 (Yellow) – Reaction Cell Heater

D10 (Green) – NOx

D5(Yellow)
D6 (Yellow) – O2 Sensor Heater

D1 (RED)
Watchdog
Indicator

Figure 10-10-24:

Status LED Locations – Relay PCA

10.4.8.1. Watchdog Indicator (D1)
The most important of the status LED’s on the relay board is the red I1C Bus watch-dog LED. It is controlled
directly analyzer’s CPU over the I2C bus. Special circuitry on the relay PCA watches the status of D1. Should
this LED ever stay ON or OFF for 30 seconds, indicating that the CPU or I2C bus has stopped functioning, this
Watchdog Circuit automatically shuts all valves and turn off all heaters and lamps.

218
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Theory of Operation

10.4.9. MOTHERBOARD
This is the largest electronic assembly in the analyzer and is mounted to the rear panel as the base for the CPU
board and all I/O connectors. This printed circuit assembly provides a multitude of functions including A/D
conversion, digital input/output, PC-104 to I2C translation, temperature sensor signal processing and is a pass
through for the RS-232 and RS-485 signals.

10.4.9.1. A to D Conversion
Analog signals, such as the voltages received from the analyzer’s various sensors, are converted into digital
signals that the CPU can understand and manipulate by the analog to digital converter (A/D).Under the control of
the CPU, this functional block selects a particular signal input and then coverts the selected voltage into a digital
word.
The A/D consists of a voltage-to-frequency (V-F) converter, a programmable logic device (PLD), three
multiplexers, several amplifiers and some other associated devices. The V-F converter produces a frequency
proportional to its input voltage. The PLD counts the output of the V-F during a specified time period, and sends
the result of that count, in the form of a binary number, to the CPU.
The A/D can be configured for several different input modes and ranges but in the is used in uni-polar mode with
a +5V full scale. The converter includes a 1% over and under-range. This allows signals from -0.05V to +5.05V
to be fully converted.
For calibration purposes, two reference voltages are supplied to the A/D converter: Reference ground and
+4.096 VDC. During calibration, the device measures these two voltages, outputs their digital equivalent to the
CPU. The CPU uses these values to compute the converter’s offset and slope and uses these factors for
subsequent conversions. See Section 6.13.5.4 for instructions on performing this calibration.

10.4.9.2. Sensor Inputs
The key analog sensor signals are coupled to the A/D converter through the master multiplexer from two
connectors on the motherboard. Terminating resistors (100 kΩ ) on each of the inputs prevent cross-talk
between the sensor signals.
PMT DETECTOR OUTPUT: This signal, output by the PMT preamp PCA, is used in the computation of the NO,
NO2 and NOx concentrations displayed at the top right hand corner of the front panel display and output through
the instruments analog outputs and COMM ports.
PMT HIGH VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY LEVEL: This input is based on the drive voltage output by the PMT
pram board to the PMT’s high voltage power supply (HVPS). It is digitized and sent to the CPU where it is used
to calculate the voltage setting of the HVPS and stored in the instruments memory as the test function HVPS.
HVPS is viewable as a test function (see Section 6.2.1) through the analyzer’s front panel.
PMT TEMPERATURE: This signal is the output of the thermistor attached to the PMT cold block amplified by the
PMT temperature feedback circuit on the PMT preamp board. It is digitized and sent to the CPU where it is used
to calculate the current temperature of the PMT.
This measurement is stored in the analyzer. Memory as the test function PMT TEMP and is viewable as a test
function (see Section 6.2.1) through the analyzer’s front panel.

219
04521C (DCN5731)

Theory of Operation

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

NO2 CONVERTER TEMPERATURE: This parameter is measured with a Type-K thermocouple attached to the
NO2 converter heater and its analog signal is amplified by the circuitry on the relay board. It is sent to the CPU
and then digitized and is used to calculate the current temperature of the NO2 converter. It is also stored in the
iDAS and reported as test function MOLY TEMP.
SAMPLE GAS PRESSURE: This is measured upstream of the reaction cell, stored in the iDAS and reported as
SAMPLE. The vacuum gas pressure is measured downstream of the reaction cell and is stored in the iDAS and
reported as RCEL. For more information on these sensor’s functions see Section 10.3.10.

O3 GAS FLOW This sensor measures the gas flow upstream of the ozone generator, stored in the iDAS and
reported as test function OZONE FL. For more information on this sensor’s function see Section 10.3.10.

10.4.9.3. Thermistor Interface
This circuit provides excitation, termination and signal selection for several negative-coefficient, thermistor
temperature sensors located inside the analyzer. They are:
REACTION CELL TEMPERATURE SENSOR A thermistor embedded in the reaction cell manifold. This
temperature is used by the CPU to control the reaction cell heating circuit and as a parameter in the
temperature/pressure compensation algorithm. This measurement is stored in the analyzer’s iDAS and reported
as test function RCEL TEMP.
BOX TEMPERATURE SENSOR: A thermistor is attached to the motherboard. It measures the analyzer’s inside
temperature. This information is stored by the CPU and can be viewed by the user for troubleshooting purposes
through the front panel display. It is also used as part of the NO, NOX and NO2 calculations when the
instrument’s Temperature/Pressure Compensation feature is enabled. This measurement is stored in the
analyzer. Memory as the test function BOX TEMP and is viewable as a test function (Section 6.2.1) through the
analyzer’s front panel.
The thermistor inside the PMT cold block as well as the thermistor located on the preamplifier board are both
converted to analog signals on the preamplifier board before being sent to the motherboard’s A/D converter.
O2 SENSOR TEMPERATURE: For instruments with the oxygen sensor option installed, the thermistor
measuring the temperature of the heating block mounted to the sensor is reported as test function O2 TEMP on
the front panel. This temperature is maintained at 50° C.

10.4.10. ANALOG OUTPUTS
The analyzer comes equipped with four Analog Outputs: A1, A2, A3 and a fourth that is a spare.

A1 and A2 Outputs: The first two, A1 and A2 are normally set up to operate in parallel so that the same data can
be sent to two different recording devices. While the names imply that one should be used for sending data to a
chart recorder and the other for interfacing with a datalogger, either can be used for both applications.
Output Loop-back: All of the functioning analog outputs are connected back to the A/D converter through a
Loop-back circuit. This permits the voltage outputs to be calibrated by the CPU without need for any additional
tools or fixtures (see Section 6.13.5.4)

220
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Theory of Operation

10.4.11. EXTERNAL DIGITAL I/O
The external digital I/O performs two functions.
The STATUS outputs carry logic-level (5V) signals through an optically isolated 8-pin connector on the rear
panel of the analyzer. These outputs convey on/off information about certain analyzer conditions such as CONC
VALID. They can be used to interface with certain types of programmable devices (Section 6.15.1.1).
The CONTROL inputs can be initiated by applying 5V DC power from an external source such as a PLC or data
logger (Section 6.15.1.2). Zero and span calibrations can be initiated by contact closures on the rear panel.

10.4.12. I2C DATA BUS
I2C is a two-wire, clocked, digital serial I/O bus that is used widely in commercial and consumer electronic
systems. A transceiver on the motherboard converts data and control signals from the PC-104 bus to I2C. The
data are then fed to the keyboard/display interface and finally onto the relay board.
Interface circuits on the keyboard/display interface and relay board convert the I2C data to parallel inputs and
outputs. An additional interrupt line from the keyboard to the motherboard allows the CPU to recognize and
service key strokes on the keyboard.

10.4.13. POWER-UP CIRCUIT
This circuit monitors the +5V power supply during analyzer start-up and sets the analog outputs, external digital
I/O ports, and I2C circuitry to specific values until the CPU boots and the instrument software can establish
control.

221
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Theory of Operation

10.5. POWER DISTRIBUTION &CIRCUIT BREAKER
The analyzer operates in two main AC power ranges: 100-120 VAC and 220-240 VAC (both ± 10%) between 47
and 63 Hz. A 5 ampere circuit breaker is built into the ON/OFF switch. In case of a wiring fault or incorrect
supply power, the circuit breaker will automatically turn off the analyzer.

CAUTION
Should the power circuit breaker trip correct the condition causing
this situation before turning the analyzer back on.

SENSOR SUITES
ANALOG
SENSORS
(e.g. UV sensors,
Temp Sensors,
Flow Sensors,
PMT HVPS,
etc.)

KEY

Sensor Control
& I/O Logic
Pre-Amplifiers
& Amplifiers

AC POWER

LOGIC DEVICES

DC POWER

(e.g. CPU, I2 C bus,
Keyboard, Display,
MotherBoard, etc.)

PS 1
+5 VDC

PUMP

AC HEATERS

AC HEATERS for
O2 SENSOR

UV Lamp
P/S

±15 VDC

Configuration
Jumpers

ON / OFF
SWITCH

Configuration
Jumpers

Configuration
Jumpers

PS 2
(+12 VDC)

RELAY PCA

Solenoid
Drivers

AC
POWER IN
MODEL SPECIFIC
VALVES
(e.g. NO X – NO Valves,
Auto-zero valves, etc.)

Figure 10-10-25:

OPTIONAL
VALVES
(e.g. Sample/Cal,
Zero/Spans, etc.)

TEC and
Cooling Fan(s)

Power Distribution Block Diagram

Under normal operation, the M200EH/EM draws about 1.5 A at 115 V and 2.0 A during start-up.

222
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Theory of Operation

10.6. COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE
The analyzer has several ways to communicate the outside world, see Figure 10-26. Users can input data and
receive information directly through the front panel keypad and display. Direct, two-way communication with the
CPU is also available by way of the analyzer’s RS232 & RS485 I/O ports (see Section 6.11 and 6.15).
Alternatively, an Ethernet communication option can be substituted for one of the COMM ports.
The analyzer can also send status information and data via the eight digital status output lines (see Section
6.15.1.1) and the three analog outputs (see Section 6.7) located on the rear panel as well as receive commands
by way of the six digital control inputs also located on the rear pane (see Section 6.15.1.2).

Figure 10-10-26:

Interface Block Diagram

223
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Theory of Operation

10.6.1. FRONT PANEL INTERFACE
MODE FIELD

MESSAGE FIELD

CONCENTRATION FIELD

FASTENER

FASTENER

KEY
DEFINITIONS

SAMPLE

A1:NXCNC1=100PPM

< TST TST > CAL

NOX=XXX.X
SETUP

SAMPLE
CAL
FAULT

STATUS
LED’s

KEYBOARD
POWER

ON / OFF
SWITCH
? ? ?? ?? ??? ? ?? ?? ?? ?? ?? ?? ?? ?? ?? ?? ??? ? ??

CHEMILUMINESENCE NOx ANALYZER – M200EH

HINGE

Figure 10-10-27:

M200EH/EM Front Panel Layout

The most commonly used method for communicating with the M200EH/EM UV Chemiluminescence NOx
Analyzer is via the instrument’s front panel which includes a set of three status LEDs, a vacuum florescent
display and a keyboard with 8 context sensitive keys.

10.6.1.1. Analyzer Status LED’s
Three LEDS are used to inform the user of the instruments basic operating status

Table 10-6: Front Panel Status LED’s
NAME

SAMPLE

COLOR

Green

STATE

Unit is not operating in sample mode, iDAS is disabled.

On

Sample Mode active; Front Panel Display being updated, iDAS data being stored.

Blinking
CAL

Yellow

Red

Unit is operating in sample mode, front panel display being updated, iDAS hold-off mode is
ON, iDAS disabled

Off

Auto Cal disabled

On

Auto Cal enabled

Blinking
FAULT

DEFINITION

Off

Off
Blinking

Unit is in calibration mode
No warnings exist
Warnings exist

10.6.1.2. Keyboard
A row of eight keys just below the vacuum florescent display (see Figure 10-27) is the main method by which the
user interacts with the analyzer. As the software is operated, labels appear on the bottom row of the display
directly above each active key, defining the function of that key as it is relevant for the operation being
performed. Pressing a key causes the associated instruction to be performed by the analyzer.

224
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Theory of Operation

Note that the keys do not auto-repeat. In circumstances where the same key must be activated for two
consecutive operations, it must be released and re-pressed.

10.6.1.3. Display
The main display of the analyzer is a vacuum florescent display with two lines of 40 text characters each.
Information is organized in the following manner (see Figure 10-27):


MODE FIELD: Displays the name of the analyzer’s current operating mode.



MESSAGE FIELD: Displays a variety of informational messages such as warning messages, operation
data and response messages during interactive tasks.



CONCENTRATION FIELD: Displays the actual concentration of the sample gas currently being
measured by the analyzer



KEYPAD DEFINITION FIELD: Displays the definitions for the row of keys just below the display. These
definitions dynamic, context sensitive and software driven.

I2C to/from CPU

I2C Interface
Serial
Data

Display
Controller
Display Power
Watchdog
Clock

Display Data
Decoder

Display Write

Keypad
Decoder

2

I C to Relay Board

Parallel Data

Key Press
Detect

Keyboard Interrupt Status Bit

10.6.1.4. Keyboard/Display Interface Electronics

From 5 VDC
Power Supply

Sample LED
(Green)

Cal LED
(Yellow)

KEYBOARD

Maint.
Switch
2nd Lang.
Switch

2 x 40 CHAR. VACUUM
FLUORESCENT DISPLAY

Fault LED
(Red)
Beeper

Figure 10-10-28:

Optional
Maintenance
LED

FRONT PANEL

Keyboard and Display Interface Block Diagram

The keyboard/display interface electronics of the M200EH/EM Analyzer watches the status of the eight front
panel keys, alerts the CPU when keys are depressed, translates data from parallel to serial and back and
manages communications between the keyboard, the CPU and the front panel display. Except for the Keyboard
interrupt status bit, all communication between the CPU and the keyboard/display is handle by way of the
instrument’s I2C buss. The CPU controls the clock signal and determines when the various devices on the bus
are allowed to talk or required to listen. Data packets are labeled with addresses that identify for which device
the information is intended.

225
04521C (DCN5731)

Theory of Operation

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

KEYPAD DECODER
Each key on the front panel communicates with a decoder IC via a separate analog line. When a key is
depressed the decoder chip notices the change of state of the associated signal; latches and holds the state of
all eight lines (in effect creating an 8-bit data word); alerts the key-depress-detect circuit (a flip-flop IC);
translates the 8-bit word into serial data and; sends this to the I2C interface chip.

KEY-DEPRESS-DETECT CIRCUIT
This circuit flips the state of one of the inputs to the I2C interface chip causing it to send an interrupt signal to the
CPU

I2C INTERFACE CHIP


This IC performs several functions:



Using a dedicated digital status bit, it sends an interrupt signal alerting the CPU that new data from the
keyboard is ready to send.



Upon acknowledgement by the CPU that it has received the new keyboard data, the I2C interface chip
resets the key-depress-detect flip-flop.



In response to commands from the CPU, it turns the front panel status LEDs on and off and activates
the beeper.



Informs the CPU when the optional maintenance and second language switches have been opened or
closed (see Chapter 5 for information on these options).

DISPLAY DATA DECODER
This decoder translates the serial data sent by the CPU (in TTY format) into a bitmapped image which is sent
over a parallel data bus to the display.

DISPLAY CONTROLLER
This circuit manages the interactions between the display data decoder and the display itself. It generates a
clock pulse that keeps the two devices synchronized. It can also, in response to commands from the CPU turn
off and/or reset the display.
Additionally, for analyzers with the optional maintenance switch is installed (See Chapter 5), the display
controller turns on an LED located on the back of the keyboard interface PCA whenever the instrument is placed
in maintenance mode.

DISPLAY POWER WATCHDOG
The Model 200EH/EM’s display can begin to show garbled information or lock-up if the DC voltage supplied to it
falls too low, even momentarily. To alleviate this, a brown-out watchdog circuit monitors the level of the power
supply and in the event that the voltage level falls below a certain level resets the display by turning it off, then
back on.

I2C LINK TO THE RELAY PCA
While the CPU’s I2C communication with the relay board is also routed through the keyboard/display interface,
information passed to and from the relay board via this channel is not recognized by, acted upon or affected by
the circuitry of the keyboard.

226
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Theory of Operation

10.7. SOFTWARE OPERATION
The M200EH/EM NOX analyzer’s core module is a high performance, 386-based microcomputer running a
version of DOS. On top of the DOS shell, special software developed by Teledyne Instruments interprets user
commands from various interfaces, performs procedures and tasks, stores data in the CPU’s memory devices
and calculates the concentrations of NOX in the sample gas. Figure 10-10-29 shows a block diagram of this
software functionality.

Figure 10-10-29:

Schematic of Basic Software Operation

227
04521C (DCN5731)

Theory of Operation

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

10.7.1. ADAPTIVE FILTER
The M200EH/EM NOX analyzer software processes sample gas concentration data through a built-in adaptive
filter. Unlike other analyzers that average the output signal over a fixed time period, the M200EH/EM averages
over a defined number of samples, with samples being about 8 seconds apart (reflecting the switching time of 4
s each for NO and NOX). This technique is known as boxcar filtering. During operation, the software may
automatically switch between two different filters lengths based on the conditions at hand.
During constant or nearly constant concentrations, the software, by default, computes an average of the last 42
samples, or approximately 5.6 minutes. This provides smooth and stable readings and averages out a
considerable amount of random noise for an overall less noisy concentration reading.
If the filter detects rapid changes in concentration the filter reduces the averaging to only 6 samples or about 48
seconds to allow the analyzer to respond more quickly. Two conditions must be simultaneously met to switch to
the short filter. First, the instantaneous concentration must differ from the average in the long filter by at least 50
ppb. Second, the instantaneous concentration must differ from the average in the long filter by at least 10% of
the average in the long filter.
If necessary, these boxcar filter lengths can be changed between 1 (no averaging) and 1000 samples but with
corresponding tradeoffs in rise time and signal-to-noise ratio. Signal noise increases accordingly when in
adaptive filter mode, but remains within the official M200EH/EM specifications as long as the filter size remains
at or above 3 samples.
In order to avoid frequent switching between the two filter sizes, the analyzer has a delay of 120 s before
switching out of adaptive filter mode, even if the two threshold conditions are no longer met.
Note that the filter settings in NOX only or NO only

10.7.2. CALIBRATION - SLOPE AND OFFSET
Aside from the hardware calibration of the preamplifier board (Section 11.6.5) upon factory checkout, calibration
of the analyzer is usually performed in software. During instrument calibration (Chapters 7) the user enters
expected values for span gas concentration through the front panel keypad and supplies the instrument with
sample gas of know NO and NOX concentrations. The readings are then compared to the expected values and
the software computes values for the new instrument slope and offset for both NO and NOX response. These
values are stored in memory for use in calculating the NO, NOX and NO2 concentration of the sample gas. By
default, the iDAS stores 200 software calibration settings for documentation, review and data analysis.
Instrument slope and offset values recorded during the last calibration can be viewed on the front panel. NO
SLOPE, NOX SLOPE, NO OFFS and NOX OFFS are four of the test parameters accessible through the  buttons.

228
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Theory of Operation

10.7.3. TEMPERATURE/PRESSURE COMPENSATION (TPC)
The software features a compensation of some temperature and pressure changes critical in the measurement
of NO and NOX concentration. When the TPC feature is enabled (default setting), the analyzer divides the value
of the PMT output signal (PMTDET) by a value called TP_FACTOR. TP_FACTOR is calculated according to
the following equation.

TP _ FACTOR= A

RCELLTEMP(K)
7 (in Hg)
SAMP(in Hg
BOXTEMP(K)
×B
×C
×D
323(K)
RCEL(in Hg)
29.92(in Hg)
298(K)
(Equation 10-5)

Where A, B, C, D are gain functions. The four parameters used to compute TP_FACTOR are:


RCELL TEMP: The temperature of the reaction cell, measured in K.



RCEL: The pressure of the gas in the vacuum manifold, measured in in-Hg-A.



SAMP: The pressure of the sample gas before it reaches the reaction cell, measured in in-Hg-A. This
measurement is ~1 in-Hg-A lower than atmospheric pressure.



BOX TEMP: The temperature inside the analyzer’s case measured in K. This is typically about 5 K
higher than room temperature.

The current value of all four of these measurements are viewable as TEST FUNCTIONS through the
instrument’s front panel display.
Note that, as RCEL TEMP, BOX TEMP and SAMP pressure increase, the value of TP_FACTOR increases
and, hence, the PMTDET value decreases. Conversely, increases in the reaction cell pressure (RCEL)
decrease TP_FACTOR and, hence increase the PMTDET value. These adjustments are meant to counter-act
changes in the concentrations caused by these parameters.
Each of the terms in the above equation is attenuated by a gain function with a numerical value based on a
preset gain parameter (shown below in CAPITALIZED ITALICS) normalized to the current value of the
parameter being attenuated. The gain functions A, B, C and D are defined as:

A = 1+ [(

rcell _ temp(K )
1) × RCTEMP _ TPC _ GAIN ]
323(K )
(Equation 10-6)

5(" Hg )
1) × RCPRESS _ TPC _ GAIN ]
B = 1+ [(
rcell _ pressure(" Hg )
(Equation 10-7)

rcell _ temp(K )
1) × SPRESS _ TPC _ GAIN ]
C = 1+ [(
323(K )
(Equation 10-8)

D = 1+ [(

box _ temp(K )
1) × BXTEMP _ TPC _ GAIN ]
298(K )

(Equation 10-9)
The preset gain parameters are set at the factory and may vary from analyzer to analyzer. Section 6.12
describes the method for enabling/disabling the TPC feature.

229
04521C (DCN5731)

Theory of Operation

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

10.7.4. NO2 CONVERTER EFFICIENCY COMPENSATION
Over time, the molybdenum in the NO2 converter oxidizes and looses its original capacity of converting NO2 into
NO, eventually resulting in a decreased converter efficiency (CE). Even though we recommend to replace the
converter if CE drops below 96%, the analyzer’s firmware allows adjusting minor deviations of the CE from 1.000
and enables reporting the true concentrations of NO2 and NOX. Converter efficiency is stored in the instrument’s
memory as a decimal fraction that is multiplied with the NO2 and NOX measurements to calculate the final
concentrations for each. Periodically, this efficiency factor must be measured and - if it has changed from
previous measurements - entered into the analyzer’s memory (Section 7.1.5).

10.7.5. INTERNAL DATA ACQUISITION SYSTEM (IDAS)
The iDAS is designed to implement predictive diagnostics that stores trending data for users to anticipate when
an instrument will require service. Large amounts of data can be stored in non-volatile memory and retrieved in
plain text format for further processing with common data analysis programs. The iDAS has a consistent user
interface among all Teledyne Instruments A- and E-series instruments. New data parameters and triggering
events can be added to the instrument as needed. Section 6.7 describes the iDAS and its default configuration
in detail, Chapter 8 shows the parameters that can be used for predictive diagnostics.
Depending on the sampling frequency and the number of data parameters, the iDAS can store several months
of data, which are retained even when the instrument is powered off. However, if new firmware or a new iDAS
configuration are uploaded to the analyzer, we recommend retrieving data before doing so to avoid data loss.
The iDAS permits users to access the data through the instrument’s front panel or the remote interface. The
latter can automatically report stored data for further processing. APICOM, a user-friendly remote control
program is the most convenient way to view, retrieve and store iDAS data (Section 6.15.2.8)

USER NOTES:

230
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Troubleshooting & Repair

11. TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR
This section contains a variety of methods for identifying and solving performance problems with the analyzer.

NOTE
The operations outlined in this chapter must be performed by qualified
maintenance personnel only.

CAUTION
Risk of electrical shock. Some operations need to be carried out with
the analyzer open and running. Exercise caution to avoid electrical
shocks and electrostatic or mechanical damage to the analyzer. Do not
drop tools into the analyzer or leave those after your procedures. Do
not shorten or touch electric connections with metallic tools while
operating inside the analyzer. Use common sense when operating
inside a running analyzer.

11.1. GENERAL TROUBLESHOOTING
The analyzer has been designed so that problems can be rapidly detected, evaluated and repaired. During
operation, the analyzer continuously performs diagnostic tests and provides the ability to evaluate its key
operating parameters without disturbing monitoring operations.
A systematic approach to troubleshooting will generally consist of the following five steps:


Note any warning messages and take corrective action as necessary.



Examine the values of all TEST functions and compare them to factory values. Note any major
deviations from the factory values and take corrective action.



Use the internal electronic status LED’s to determine whether the electronic communication channels
are operating properly. Verify that the DC power supplies are operating properly by checking the
voltage test points on the relay board. Note that the analyzer’s DC power wiring is color-coded and
these colors match the color of the corresponding test points on the relay board.



Suspect a leak first! Customer service data indicate that the majority of all problems are eventually
traced to leaks in the pneumatic system of the analyzer (including the external pump), the source of zero
air or span gases or the sample gas delivery system. Check for gas flow problems such as clogged or
blocked internal/external gas lines, damaged seals, punctured gas lines, a damaged pump diaphragm,
etc.



Follow the procedures defined in Section 3.2.4. to confirm that the analyzer’s vital functions are working
(power supplies, CPU, relay board, keyboard, PMT cooler, etc.). See Figure 3-1, Figure 3-2, and Figure
3-3 for general layout of components and sub-assemblies in the analyzer. See the wiring interconnect
diagram (document 04504) and interconnect list (document 04496) in Appendix D.

231
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Troubleshooting & Repair

11.1.1. WARNING MESSAGES
The most common and/or serious instrument failures will result in a warning message displayed on the front
panel. Table A-2 in Appendix A.3 contains a list of warning messages, along with their meaning and
recommended corrective action.
It should be noted that if more than two or three warning messages occur at the same time, it is often an
indication that some fundamental analyzer sub-system (power supply, relay board, motherboard) has failed
rather than an indication of the specific failures referenced by the warnings. In this case, a combined-error
analysis needs to be performed.
The analyzer will alert the user that a warning is active by displaying the keypad labels MSG and CLR on the
front panel and a text message in the top center line of the display as shown in this example:
SAMPLE

AZERO WARNING

< TST TST > CAL

NOX =123.4

MSG CLR SETUP

The analyzer will also issue a message to the serial port and cause the red FAULT LED on the front panel to
blink.
To view or clear a warning messages press:
SAMPLE
 keys replaced with
TEST key. Pressing TEST
deactivates warning messages
until new warning(s) are activated.

TEST

SAMPLE

SYSTEM RESET
CAL

If warning messages re-appear,
the cause needs to be found. Do
not repeatedly clear warnings
without corrective action.

MSG

SYSTEM RESET

< TST TST > CAL

Figure 11-1:

MSG

A1:NXCNC1=100PPM

< TST TST > CAL

SAMPLE

NOX = XXX.X
CLR

SETUP

NOX=XXX.X
CLR

SETUP

NOX = XXX.X
MSG

CLR

SETUP

MSG indicates that warning
messages are active.
All Warning messages are hidden,
but MSG button appears

Press CLR to clear the current
warning message.
If more than one warning is
active, the next message will
take its place.
Once the last warning has been
cleared, the analyzer returns to
SAMPLE Mode.

Viewing and Clearing Warning Messages

11.1.2. FAULT DIAGNOSIS WITH TEST FUNCTIONS
Besides being useful as predictive diagnostic tools, the TEST functions, viewable from the front panel, can be
used to isolate and identify many operational problems when combined with a thorough understanding of the
analyzer’s theory of operation (Chapter 10). We recommend to use the APICOM remote control program to
download, graph and archive TEST data for analysis and long-term monitoring of diagnostic data ( Section
6/15.2.8).
The acceptable ranges for these test functions are listed in Appendix A-3. The actual values for these test
functions on checkout at the factory were also listed in the Final Test and Validation Data Sheet, which was
shipped with the instrument. Values outside the acceptable ranges indicate a failure of one or more of the
analyzer’s subsystems. Functions with values that are within the acceptable range but have significantly
changed from the measurements recorded on the factory data sheet may also indicate a failure or a
232
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Troubleshooting & Repair

maintenance item. A problem report worksheet has been provided in Appendix C (Teledyne Instruments part
number 04503) to assist in recording the value of these test functions. The following table contains some of the
more common causes for these values to be out of range.

Table 11-1: Test Functions - Possible Causes for Out-Of-Range Values
TEST FUNCTION
NOX STB

INDICATED FAILURE(S)
Unstable concentrations; leaks

SAMPLE FL

Leaks; clogged critical flow orifice

OZONE FL

Leaks; clogged critical flow orifice

PMT
NORM PMT
AZERO
HVPS
RCELL TEMP

Calibration off; HVPS problem; no flow (leaks)
AutoZero too high
Leaks; malfunctioning NO/NOx or AutoZero valve; O3 air filter cartridge exhausted
HVPS broken; calibration off; preamp board circuit problems
Malfunctioning heater; relay board communication (I2C bus); relay burnt out

BOX TEMP

Environment out of temperature operating range; broken thermistor

PMT TEMP

TEC cooling circuit broken; relay board communication (I2C bus); 12 V power supply

IZS TEMP (OPTION)
MOLY TEMP

Malfunctioning heater; relay board communication (I2C bus); relay burnt out
Malfunctioning heater; disconnected or broken thermocouple; relay board communication
(I2Z bus); relay burnt out; incorrect AC voltage configuration

RCEL (PRESSURE)

Leak; malfunctioning valve; malfunctioning pump; clogged flow orifices

SAMP (PRESSURE)

Leak; malfunctioning valve; malfunctioning pump; clogged flow orifices; sample inlet
overpressure;

NOX SLOPE
NOX OFF
NO SLOPE
NO OFFS
TIME OF DAY

HVPS out of range; low-level (hardware) calibration needs adjustment; span gas
concentration incorrect; leaks
Incorrect span gas concentration; low-level calibration off
HVPS out of range; low-level calibration off; span gas concentration incorrect; leaks
Incorrect span gas concentration; low-level calibration off
Internal clock drifting; move across time zones; daylight savings time?

11.1.3. USING THE DIAGNOSTIC SIGNAL I/O FUNCTION
The signal I/O parameters found under the diagnostics (DIAG) menu combined with a thorough understanding of
the instrument’s theory of operation (Chapter 10) are useful for troubleshooting in three ways:


The technician can view the raw, unprocessed signal level of the analyzer’s critical inputs and outputs.



All of the components and functions that are normally under instrument control can be manually
changed.



Analog and digital output signals can be manually controlled.

This allows to systematically observe the effect of these functions on the operation of the analyzer. Figure 11-2
shows an example of how to use the signal I/O menu to view the raw voltage of an input signal or to control the
state of an output voltage or control signal. The specific parameter will vary depending on the situation.

233
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Troubleshooting & Repair

SAMPLE

A1:NXCNC1=100PPM

< TST TST >

SETUP X.X

NOX=XXX.X

CAL

SETUP

PRIMARY SETUP MENU

CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE

SETUP X.X
COMM

SECONDARY SETUP MENU

VARS DIAG

SETUP X.X
8

1

DIAG

EXIT

ALRM

EXIT

ENTER PASSWORD:818
8

ENTR EXIT

SIGNAL I/O
NEXT

DIAG I/O

ENTR

0) EXT_ZERO_CAL =OFF

NEXT JUMP

DIAG I/O
0

EXIT

ENTR EXIT

JUMP TO:0
0

ENTR EXIT
Enter 07 to Jump
to Signal 7:
(CAL_LED)

DIAG I/O
0

DIAG AIO

JUMP TO:7
7

ENTR EXIT

7) CAL LED=OFF

PREV NEXT JUMP

OFF PRNT EXIT

Toggle this Key to
turn the CAL LED
ON/OFF

Figure 11-2:

Switching Signal I/O Functions

234
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Troubleshooting & Repair

11.1.4. STATUS LED’S
Several color-coded, light-emitting diodes (LED) are located inside the instrument to determine if the analyzer’s
CPU, I2C communications bus and the relay board are functioning properly.

11.1.4.1. Motherboard Status Indicator (Watchdog)
A red LED labeled DS5 in the upper portion of the motherboard (Figure 11-3), just to the right of the CPU board,
flashes when the CPU is running the main program. After power-up, DS5 should flash on and off about once per
second. If characters are visible on the front panel display but DS5 does not flash then the program files have
become corrupted. Contact customer service because it may be possible to recover operation of the analyzer.
If 30 - 60 seconds after a restart neither DS5 is flashing nor any characters are visible on the front panel display,
the firmware may be corrupted or the CPU may be defective. If DS5 is permanently off or permanently on, the
CPU board is likely locked up and the analyzer should not respond (either with locked-up or dark front panel).

Figure 11-3:

Motherboard Watchdog Status Indicator

11.1.4.2. CPU Status Indicator
The CPU board has two red LEDs, the lower of which is the watchdog timer (the device that pulses the
motherboard watchdog). This LED is labeled LED2 and blinks about twice per second (twice as fast as the
motherboard LED) when operating normally. LED1 above LED2 should always be on. However, both CPU
LEDs only indicate if the CPU is powered up properly and generally working. The lower LED can continue to
blink even if the CPU or firmware are locked up.

11.1.4.3. Relay Board and Status LEDs
The most important status LED on the relay board is the red I2C Bus watch-dog LED, labeled D1, which
indicates the health of the I2C communications bus. This LED is the left-most in LED row 1 in the center of the
relay board when looking at the electronic components. If D1 is blinking, then the other LEDs can be used in

235
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Troubleshooting & Repair

conjunction with the DIAG menu I/O functions to test hardware functionality by manually switching devices on
and off and watching the corresponding LED go on or off.
Figure 11-4 illustrates the relay board layout including the two rows of LEDs,
Table 11-2 lists the individual LED functions and the menu tree below shows how to access the manual control
of the I/O functions. Note that only some or the LEDs may be functional in your analyzer model; the relay board
layout is conceptualized for spare, future functionality and is also common to many of the E-series analyzers.
Thermocouple
Signal Output

Status LED’s
(D2 through D16)
Watchdog
Status LED (D1)

(JP5)
Thermocouple
Configuration
Jumpers

DC Power Supply
Test Points

I2C Connector

(J15)
TC1 Input

Power
Connection
for DC
Heaters

(J16)
TC2 Input

Shutter Control
Connector

(JP7)
Pump AC
Configuration
Jumper

(M100E Series
Only)

Valve Control
Drivers

Pump Power
Output

Valve Option
Control
Connector

AC Power
IN

AC Heater
Power Output

Solid State AC
Power Relays
(Not Present on
P/N 45230100)

(JP6)
(JP2)
AC Configuration Jumpers
for Optional IZS Valve
Heaters & 02Sensors

Figure 11-4:

DC Power
Distribution
Connectors

Main AC Heater
Configuration Jumpers
AC Power Output for
Optional IZS Valve
Heaters & 02 sensors

Relay Board PCA

236
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Troubleshooting & Repair

Table 11-2: Relay Board Status LEDs
COLOR

FUNCTION

FAULT
STATUS

INDICATED FAILURE(S)

D1

Red

Watchdog Circuit; I2C bus
operation.

Continuously
ON or OFF

Failed or halted CPU; faulty motherboard,
keyboard, relay board; wiring between
motherboard, keyboard or relay board; +5
V power supply

D2

Yellow

Relay 0 - reaction cell heater

Continuously
ON or OFF

Heater broken, thermistor broken

D3

Yellow

Relay 1 - NO2 converter heater

Continuously
ON or OFF

Heater broken, thermocouple broken

D4

Yellow

Relay 2 - manifold heater

Continuously
ON or OFF

Heater broken, thermistor broken

D7 1

Green

Valve 0 - zero/span valve status

Continuously
ON or OFF

Valve broken or stuck, valve driver chip
broken

D8 1

Green

Valve 1 - sample/cal valve status

Continuously
ON or OFF

Valve broken or stuck, valve driver chip
broken

D9

Green

Valve 2 - auto-zero valve status

Continuously
ON or OFF

Valve broken or stuck, valve driver chip
broken

D10

Green

Valve 3 - NO/NOx valve status

Continuously
ON or OFF

Valve broken or stuck, valve driver chip
broken

D5

Yellow

Relay 3 - IZS heater

Continuously
ON or OFF

Heater broken, thermistor broken

D6

Yellow

Relay 4 – (O2 sensor heater
200EH/EM)

N/A

N/A

D11- 16

Green

Spare

N/A

N/A

LED
LED ROW 1

LED ROW 2

1

Only active for instruments with Z/S valve options installed

To enter the signal I/O test mode to manually control I/O functions such as valves and heaters, press the
following keys while observing the relay board LEDs when toggling:
SAMPLE

A1:NXCNC1=100PPM

< TST TST >

SETUP X.X

NOX=XXX.X

CAL

PRIMARY SETUP MENU

COMM

EXIT

0

1

JUMP TO:0
0

ENTR EXIT
Enter 07 to Jump
to Signal 7:
(CAL_LED)

ALRM

EXIT

DIAG I/O
0

8

JUMP TO:25
7

ENTR EXIT

ENTER PASSWORD:818
8

ENTR EXIT

DIAG AIO

25) RELAY_WATCHDOG=ON

PREV NEXT JUMP
DIAG

SIGNAL I/O
NEXT

ENTR EXIT

SECONDARY SETUP MENU

VARS DIAG

SETUP X.X

0) EXT_ZERO_CAL =OFF

NEXT JUMP

DIAG I/O

CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE

SETUP X.X

DIAG I/O

SETUP

ENTR

EXIT

Toggle this Key to
turn the CAL LED
ON/OFF

ON

PRNT EXIT
See Menu Tree
A-6 in Appendix
A.1 for a list of
I/O Signals

237
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Troubleshooting & Repair

11.2. GAS FLOW PROBLEMS
The M200EH/EM has two main flow paths, the sample flow and the flow of the ozone supply air. With IZS or
zero/span valve option installed, there is a third (zero air) and a fourth (span gas) flow path, but either one of
those is only controlled by critical flow orifices and not displayed on the front panel or stored to the iDAS. The
full flow diagrams of the standard configuration and with options installed (Appendix D, document 04574) help in
trouble-shooting flow problems. In general, flow problems can be divided into three categories:


Flow is too high



Flow is greater than zero, but is too low, and/or unstable



Flow is zero (no flow)

When troubleshooting flow problems, it is essential to confirm the actual flow rate without relying on the
analyzer’s flow display. The use of an independent, external flow meter to perform a flow check as described in
Section 6.13.7.5 is essential.
The flow diagrams found in a variety locations within this manual depicting the M200EH and M200EM in their
standard configuration and with options installed can help in trouble-shooting flow problems. For your
convenience they are colleted here in Sections 11.2.1 (M200EH) and 11.2.2 (M200EM)

11.2.1. M200EH INTERNAL GAS FLOW DIAGRAMS

Figure 11-5:

M200EH – Basic Internal Gas Flow

238
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Troubleshooting & Repair

Figure 11-6:

M200EH – Internal Gas Flow With OPT 50

Figure 11-7:

M200EH – Internal Gas Flow With OPT 52
239

04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Troubleshooting & Repair

Figure 11-8:

Figure 11-9:

M200EH – Internal Gas Flow With OPT 65

M200EH – Internal Gas Flow With OPT 50 + OPT 65

240
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Troubleshooting & Repair

11.2.2. M200EM INTERNAL GAS FLOW DIAGRAMS

Figure 11-10: M200EM – Basic Internal Gas Flow

Figure 11-11: M200EM – Internal Gas Flow With OPT 50

241
04521C (DCN5731)

Troubleshooting & Repair

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Figure 11-12: M200EM – Internal Gas Flow With OPT 52

Figure 11-13: M200EM – Internal Gas Flow With OPT 65
242
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

SAMPLE/ CAL
VALVE

BYPASS
MANIFOLD

Orifice Dia.
0.003"

SPAN
GAS
INLET

FLOW PRESSURE
SENSOR PCA
NO/NOX
VALVE

VACUUM
PRESSURE
SENSOR

NO2
Converter

ZERO GAS
INLET

ZERO/SPAN
VALVE

O2
Sensor

EXHAUST
GAS
OUTLET

SAMPLE
PRESSURE
SENSOR

AUTOZERO
VALVE

EXHAUST MANIFOLD

O3
Purifier

NOX Exhaust
Scrubber

O3 FLOW
SENSOR

SAMPLE
GAS
INLET

Troubleshooting & Repair

Orifice Dia.
0.007"

Orifice Dia.
0.004"

O3
GENERATOR

O3
Scrubber

REACTION
CELL
Orifice Dia.
0.004"

PUMP

PMT
Filter
PERMAPURE
DRYER

INSTRUMENT CHASSIS

Figure 11-14: M200EM – Internal Gas Flow With OPT 50 + OPT 65

11.2.3. ZERO OR LOW FLOW PROBLEMS
11.2.3.1. Sample Flow is Zero or Low
The M200EH/EM does not actually measure the sample flow but rather calculates it from a differential pressure
between sample and vacuum manifold. On flow failure, the unit will display a SAMPLE FLOW WARNING on
the front panel display and the respective test function reports XXXX instead of a value “0”. This message
applies to both a flow rate of zero as well as a flow that is outside the standard range (200-600 cm³/min; 300-700
cm³/min with O2 option installed).
If the analyzer displays XXXX for the sample flow, confirm that the external sample pump is operating and
configured for the proper AC voltage. Whereas the M200EH/EM can be internally configured for two different
power regimes (100-120 V and 220-240 V, either 50 or 60 Hz), the external pump is physically different for each
of three power regimes (100 V / 50 Hz, 115 V / 60 Hz and 230 V / 50 Hz). If the pump is not running, use an AC
Voltmeter to make sure that the pump is supplied with the proper AC power. If AC power is supplied properly,
but the pump is not running, replace the pump.
NOTE
Sample and vacuum pressures mentioned in this chapter refer to operation of the
analyzer at sea level. Pressure values need to be adjusted for elevated locations, as the
ambient pressure decreases by about 1 in-Hg per 300 m / 1000 ft.
If the pump is operating but the unit reports a XXXX gas flow, do the following three steps:

243
04521C (DCN5731)

Troubleshooting & Repair

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual



Check for actual sample flow. To check the actual sample flow, disconnect the sample tube from the
sample inlet on the rear panel of the instrument. Make sure that the unit is in basic SAMPLE mode.
Place a finger over the inlet and see if it gets sucked in by the vacuum or, more properly, use a flow
meter to measure the actual flow. If there is proper flow (see Table 10-3 for flow rates), contact
customer service. If there is no flow or low flow, continue with the next step.



Check pressures. Check that the sample pressure is at or around 28 in-Hg-A at sea level (adjust as
necessary when in elevated location, the pressure should be about 1” below ambient atmospheric
pressure) and that the RCEL pressure is below 10 in-Hg-A. The M200EH/EM will calculate a sample
flow up to about 14 in-Hg-A RCEL pressure but a good pump should always provide less than 10 in.
 If both pressures are the same and around atmospheric pressure, the pump does not operate
properly or is not connected properly. The instrument does not get any vacuum.
 If both pressures are about the same and low (probably under 10 in-Hg-A, or ~20” on sample and 15”
on vacuum), there is a cross-leak between sample flow path and vacuum, most likely through the
Perma Pure dryer flow paths. See troubleshooting the Perma Pure dryer later in this chapter.
 If the sample and vacuum pressures are around their nominal values (28 and <10 in-Hg-A,
respectively) and the flow still displays XXXX, carry out a leak check as described in Section 0



If gas flows through the instrument during the above tests but goes to zero or is low when it is connected
to zero air or span gas, the flow problem is not internal to the analyzer but likely caused by the gas
source such as calibrators/generators, empty gas tanks, clogged valves, regulators and gas lines.



If an IZS or Zero/Span valve option is installed in the instrument, press CALZ and CALS. If the sample
flow increases, suspect a bad Sample/Cal valve.



If none of these suggestions help, carry out a detailed leak check of the analyzer as described in Section
0.

11.2.3.2. Ozone Flow is Zero or Low
If there is zero or a low (<200 cm³/min) ozone flow, the unit displays an OZONE FLOW WARNING message on
the front panel and a value between 0.0 and 200 cm³/min for the actual ozone flow as measured by the internal
mass flow meter. In this case, carry out the following steps:


Check the actual flow rate through the ozone dryer by using an external flow meter to the inlet port of the
dryer. This inlet port is inside the analyzer at the end of the plastic particle filter (Section 9.3.2 for
illustration). If there is nominal flow (see Table 10-3 for flow rates), consult customer service as there is
a problem with the firmware or electronics.



If the actual flow is low or zero, check if the pump operates properly. The RCEL pressure should be
below 10 in-Hg-A at sea level. If it is above 10”, rebuild the pump (Section 9.3.3). Check the spare
parts list in Appendix B on how to order pump rebuild kits.



Check if the particle filter is clogged. Briefly remove the particle filter to see if this improves the flow.
Be very cautious about handling the Perma Pure dryer fittings - refer to Section 9.3.2 on proper handling
instructions. If the filter is clogged, replace it with a new unit. If taking off this filter does not solve the
problem, continue to the next step. Do not leave the Perma Pure dryer without filter for more than a few
seconds, as you may draw in dust, which will reduce the performance of the dryer.



A leak between the flow meter and the reaction cell (where the flow-determining critical orifice is located)
may cause a low flow (the system draws in ambient air through a leak after the flow meter). Check for
leaks as described in Section 0. Repair the leaking fitting, line or valve and re-check.

244
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual


Troubleshooting & Repair

The most likely cause for zero or low ozone flow is a clogged critical flow orifice or sintered filter within
the orifice assembly. The orifice that sets the ozone flow is located on the reaction cell. Check the
actual ozone flow by disconnecting the tube from the reaction cell and measuring the flow going into the
cell. If this flow is correct (see Table 10-3 for flow rates), the orifice works properly. If this flow is low,
replace or clean the orifice. The orifice holder assembly allows a quick and easy replacement of the
orifice, refer to Section 9.3.8 on how to do this. Appendix B lists a spare part kit with a complete orifice
assembly that allows a quick replacement with minimum instrument down-time. The clogged orifice can
then be cleaned while the instrument is running with the replacement.

11.2.4. HIGH FLOW
Flows that are significantly higher than the allowed operating range (typically ±10-11% of the nominal flow)
should not occur in the M200EH/EM unless a pressurized sample, zero or span gas is supplied to the inlet ports.
Ensure to vent excess pressure and flow just before the analyzer inlet ports.
When supplying sample, zero or span gas at ambient pressure, a high flow would indicate that one or more of
the critical flow orifices are physically broken (very unlikely case), allowing more than nominal flow, or were
replaced with an orifice of wrong specifications. If the flows are within 15% higher than normal, we recommend
to re-calibrate the flow electronically using the procedure in Section 6.13.7.5, followed by a regular review of
these flows over time to see if the new setting is retained properly.

11.2.5. SAMPLE FLOW IS ZERO OR LOW BUT ANALYZER REPORTS
CORRECT FLOW
Note that the M200EH/EM analyzer can report a correct flow rate even if there is no or a low actual sample flow
through the reaction cell. The sample flow on the M200EH/EM is only calculated from the sample pressure and
critical flow condition is verified from the difference between sample pressure and vacuum pressure. If the
critical flow orifice is partially or completely clogged, both the sample and vacuum pressures are still within their
nominal ranges (the pump keeps pumping, the sample port is open to the atmosphere), but there is no flow
possible through the reaction cell.
Although measuring the actual flow is the best method, in most cases, this fault can also be diagnosed by
evaluating the two pressure values. Since there is no longer any flow, the sample pressure should be equal to
ambient pressure, which is about 1 in-Hg-A higher than the sample pressure under normal operation. The
reaction cell pressure, on the other hand, is significantly lower than under normal operation, because the pump
no longer has to remove 500 cm³/min of sample gas and evacuates the reaction cell much better. Those two
indicators, taken together with a zero or low actual flow, indicate a clogged sample orifice.
The M200EH/EM features a new orifice holder, which makes switching sample and ozone flow orifices very
easy, refer to Section 9.3.8 on how to change the sample orifices and Appendix B for part numbers of these
assemblies. Again, monitoring the pressures and flows regularly will reveal such problems, because the
pressures would slowly or suddenly change from their nominal, mean values. Teledyne Instruments
recommends to review all test data once per week and to do an exhaustive data analysis for test and
concentration values once per month, paying particular attention to sudden or gradual changes in all parameters
that are supposed to remain constant, such as the flow rates.

245
04521C (DCN5731)

Troubleshooting & Repair

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

11.3. CALIBRATION PROBLEMS
11.3.1. NEGATIVE CONCENTRATIONS
Negative concentration values can be caused for several reasons:


A slight, negative signal is normal when the analyzer is operating under zero gas and the signal is
drifting around the zero calibration point. This is caused by the analyzer’s zero noise and may cause
reported concentrations to be negative for a few seconds at a time down to -0.2 ppm, but should
randomly alternate with similarly high, positive values. The M200EH/EM has a built-in Auto-zero
function, which should take care of most of these deviations from zero, but may yield a small, residual,
negative value. If larger, negative values persist continuously, check if the Auto-zero function was
accidentally turned off using the remote variables in Appendix A-2. In this case, the sensitivity of the
analyzer may be drifting negative.



A corruption of the Auto-zero filter may also cause negative concentrations. If a short, high noise value
was detected during the AutoZero cycle, that higher reading will alter the Auto-zero filter value. As the
value of the Auto-zero filter is subtracted from the current PMT response, it will produce a negative
concentration reading. High AutoZero readings can be caused by
 a leaking or stuck AutoZero valve (replace the valve),
 by an electronic fault in the preamplifier causing it to have a voltage on the PMT output pin during the
AutoZero cycle (replace the preamplifier),
 by a reaction cell contamination causing high background (>40 mV) PMT readings (clean the reaction
cell),
 by a broken PMT temperature control circuit, allowing high zero offset (repair the faulty PMT cooler).
After fixing the cause of a high Auto-zero filter reading, the M200EH/EM will take 15 minutes for the
filter to clear itself, or
 by an exhausted chemical in the ozone scrubber cartridge (Section 



Mis-calibration is the most likely explanation for negative concentration values. If the zero air contained
some NO or NO2 gas (contaminated zero air or a worn-out zero air scrubber) and the analyzer was
calibrated to that concentration as “zero”, the analyzer may report negative values when measuring air
that contains little or no NOx. The same problem occurs, if the analyzer was zero-calibrated using zero
gas that is contaminated with ambient air or span gas (cross-port leaks or leaks in supply tubing or user
not waiting long enough to flush pneumatic systems).



If the response offset test functions for NO (NO OFFS) or NOX (NOX OFFS) are greater than 150 mV, a
reaction cell contamination is indicated. Clean the reaction cell according to Section 9.3.7.

11.3.2. NO RESPONSE
If the instrument shows no response (display value is near zero) even though sample gas is supplied properly
and the instrument seems to perform correctly.


Check if the ozone generator is turned on. Usually, the analyzer issues a warning whenever the ozone
generator is turned off. Go to SETUP-MORE-DIAG-ENTR, then scroll to the OZONE GEN OVERRIDE
and see if it shows ON. If it shows OFF, turn it ON and EXIT the DIAG menu. If this is done and the
ozone flow is correct, the analyzer should be properly supplied with ozone unless the generator itself is
broken. A more detailed description of the ozone generator subsystem checks are in Section 11.5.17.



Confirm the lack of response by supplying NO or NO2 span gas of about 80% of the range value to the
analyzer.



Check the sample flow and ozone flow rates for proper values.

246
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Troubleshooting & Repair



Check for disconnected cables to the sensor module.



Carry out an electrical test with the ELECTRICAL TEST procedure in the diagnostics menu, see Section
6.13.7.3. If this test produces a concentration reading, the analyzer’s electronic signal path is correct.



Carry out an optical test using the OPTIC TEST procedure in the diagnostics menu, see Section
6.13.6.2. If this test results in a concentration signal, then the PMT sensor and the electronic signal path
are operating properly. If the M200EH/EM passes both ETEST and OTEST, the instrument is capable
of detecting light and processing the signal to produce a reading. Therefore, the problem must be in the
pneumatics or the ozone generator.



If NO2 signal is zero while NO signal is correct, check the NO/NOX valve and the NO2 converter for
proper operation.

11.3.3. UNSTABLE ZERO AND SPAN
Leaks in the M200EH/EM or in the external gas supply and vacuum systems are the most common source of
unstable and non-repeatable concentration readings.


Check for leaks in the pneumatic systems as described in Section 0. Consider pneumatic components
in the gas delivery system outside the M200EH/EM such as a change in zero air source (ambient air
leaking into zero air line or a worn-out zero air scrubber) or a change in the span gas concentration due
to zero air or ambient air leaking into the span gas line.



Once the instrument passes a leak check, do a flow check (this chapter) to make sure that the
instrument is supplied with adequate sample and ozone air.



Confirm the sample pressure, sample temperature, and sample flow readings are correct and steady.



Verify that the sample filter element is clean and does not need to be replaced.

11.3.4. INABILITY TO SPAN - NO SPAN KEY
In general, the M200EH/EM will not display certain keyboard choices whenever the actual value of a parameter
is outside of the expected range for that parameter. If the calibration menu does not show a SPAN key when
carrying out a span calibration, the actual concentration must be outside of the range of the expected span gas
concentration, which can have several reasons.


Verify that the expected concentration is set properly to the actual span gas concentration in the CONC
sub-menu.



Confirm that the NOx span gas source is accurate. This can be done by comparing the source with
another calibrated analyzer, or by having the NOx source verified by an independent traceable
photometer.



Check for leaks in the pneumatic systems as described in Section 0. Leaks can dilute the span gas and,
hence, the concentration that the analyzer measures may fall short of the expected concentration
defined in the CONC sub-menu.



If the low-level, hardware calibration has drifted (changed PMT response) or was accidentally altered by
the user, a low-level calibration may be necessary to get the analyzer back into its proper range of
expected values. One possible indicator of this scenario is a slope or offset value that is outside of its
allowed range (0.7-1.3 for slope, -20 to 150 for offsets). See Section 11.6.5 on how to carry out a lowlevel hardware calibration.

247
04521C (DCN5731)

Troubleshooting & Repair

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

11.3.5. INABILITY TO ZERO - NO ZERO KEY
In general, the M200EH/EM will not display certain keyboard choices whenever the actual value of a parameter
is outside of the expected range for that parameter. If the calibration menu does not show a ZERO key when
carrying out a zero calibration, the actual gas concentration must be significantly different from the actual zero
point (as per last calibration), which can have several reasons.


Confirm that there is a good source of zero air. If the IZS option is installed, compare the zero reading
from the IZS zero air source to a zero air source using NOX-free air. Check any zero air scrubber for
performance. It may need to be replaced (Section 9.3.5).



Check to make sure that there is no ambient air leaking into zero air line. Check for leaks in the
pneumatic systems as described in Section 11.5.

11.3.6. NON-LINEAR RESPONSE
The M200EH/EM was factory calibrated to a high level of NO and should be linear to within 1% of full scale.
Common causes for non-linearity are:


Leaks in the pneumatic system. Leaks can add a constant of ambient air, zero air or span gas to the
current sample gas stream, which may be changing in concentrations as the linearity test is performed.
Check for leaks as described in Section 11.5.



The calibration device is in error. Check flow rates and concentrations, particularly when using low
concentrations. If a mass flow calibrator is used and the flow is less than 10% of the full scale flow on
either flow controller, you may need to purchase lower concentration standards.



The standard gases may be mislabeled as to type or concentration. Labeled concentrations may be
outside the certified tolerance.



The sample delivery system may be contaminated. Check for dirt in the sample lines or reaction cell.



Calibration gas source may be contaminated (NO2 in NO gas is common).



Dilution air contains sample or span gas.



Ozone concentration too low because of wet air in the generator. Generator system needs to be
cleaned and dried with dry supply air. Check the Perma Pure dryer for leaks. This mostly affects
linearity at the low end.



Sample inlet may be contaminated with NOX exhaust from this or other analyzers. Verify proper venting
of the pump exhaust.



Span gas overflow is not properly vented and creates a back-pressure on the sample inlet port. Also, if
the span gas is not vented at all and does not supply enough sample gas, the analyzer may be
evacuating the sample line. Make sure to create and properly vent excess span gas.



Diffusion of oxygen into Teflon-type tubing over long distances. PTFE or related materials can act as
permeation devices. In fact, the permeable membrane of NO2 permeation tubes is made of PTFE.
When using very long supply lines (> 1 m) between high concentrations span gases and the dilution
system, oxygen from ambient air can diffuse into the line and react with NO to form NO2. This reaction
is dependent on NO concentration and accelerates with increasing NO concentration, hence, affects
linearity only at high NO levels. Using stainless steel for long span gas supply lines avoids this problem.
5

5

248
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Troubleshooting & Repair

11.3.7. DISCREPANCY BETWEEN ANALOG OUTPUT AND DISPLAY
If the concentration reported through the analog outputs does not agree with the value reported on the front
panel, you may need to re-calibrate the analog outputs. This becomes more likely when using a low
concentration or low analog output range. Analog outputs running at 0.1 V full scale should always be calibrated
manually. See Section 6.13.4.4 for a detailed description of this procedure.

11.3.8. DISCREPANCY BETWEEN NO AND NOX SLOPES
If the slopes for NO and NOX are significantly different after software calibration (more than 1%), consider the
following two problems


NO2 impurities in the NO calibration gas. NO gases often exhibit NO2 on the order of 1-2% of the NO
value. This will cause differences in the calibration slopes. If the NO2 impurity in NO is known, it can
easily be accounted for by setting the expected values for NO and NO2 accordingly to different values,
e.g., 0.448 ppm NO and 0.45 ppm NOX. This problem is worse if NO gas is stored in a cylinder with
balance air instead of balance gas nitrogen or large amounts of nitrous oxide (N2O). The oxygen in the
air slowly reacts with NO to yield NO2, increasing over time.



The expected concentrations for NO and NOX in the calibration menu are set to different values. If a gas
with 100% pure NO is used, this would cause a bias. See Section 7.2 on how to set expected
concentration values.



The converter efficiency parameter has been set to a value not equal to 1.000 even though the
conversion efficiency is 1.0. The actual conversion efficiency needs to match the parameter set in the
CAL menu. See Section 7.1.5 for more information on this feature.

An instrument calibration with the IZS option (and expected concentrations set to the same amount) will always
yield identical slopes for NO and NOX, as the instrument measures only NOX and assumes NO to be the same
(with NO2 being zero).

11.4. OTHER PERFORMANCE PROBLEMS
Dynamic problems (i.e. problems which only manifest themselves when the analyzer is monitoring sample gas)
can be the most difficult and time consuming to isolate and resolve. The following section provides an itemized
list of the most common dynamic problems with recommended troubleshooting checks and corrective actions.

11.4.1. EXCESSIVE NOISE
Excessive noise levels under normal operation usually indicate leaks in the sample supply or the analyzer itself.
Make sure that the sample or span gas supply is leak-free and carry out a detailed leak check as described
earlier in this chapter.
Another possibility of excessive signal noise may be the preamplifier board, the high voltage power supply
and/or the PMT detector itself. Contact the factory on trouble-shooting these components.

11.4.2. SLOW RESPONSE
If the analyzer starts responding too slow to any changes in sample, zero or span gas, check for the following:


Dirty or plugged sample filter or sample lines.



Sample inlet line is too long.



Leaking NO/NOX valve. Carry out a leak check.

249
04521C (DCN5731)

Troubleshooting & Repair

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual



Dirty or plugged critical flow orifices. Check flows, pressures and, if necessary, change orifices (Section
9.3.8).



Wrong materials in contact with sample - use glass, stainless steel or Teflon materials only. Porous
materials, in particular, will cause memory effects and slow changes in response.



Dirty reaction cell. Clean the reaction cell.



Insufficient time allowed for purging of lines upstream of the analyzer. Wait until stability is low.



Insufficient time allowed for NO or NO2 calibration gas source to become stable. Wait until stability is
low.



NO2 converter temperature is too low. Check for proper temperature.

11.4.3. AUTO-ZERO WARNINGS
Auto-zero warnings occur if the signal measured during an auto-zero cycle is lower than –20 mV or higher than
200 mV. The Auto-Zero warning displays the value of the auto-zero reading when the warning occurs.


If this value is higher than 150 mV, check that the auto-zero valve is operating properly. To do so, use
the SIGNAL I/O functions in the DIAG menu to toggle the valve on and off. Listen if the valve is
switching, see if the respective LED on the relay board is indicating functionality. Scroll the TST
functions until PMT is displayed and observe the PMT value change between the two valve states.



If the valve is operating properly, you should be able to hear it switch (once a minute under normal
operation or when manually activated from the SIGNAL I/O menu), the PMT value should drop from its
nominal reading for span gas level measurements to less than 150 mV and the LED on the relay board
should light up when the valve is activated. If the PMT value drops significantly but not to less than 150
mV, the valve is probably leaking across its ports. In this case, replace the valve. If the PMT value does
not change at all, the valve is probably not switching at all. Check the power supply to the valve (12 V to
the valve should turn on and off when measured with a voltmeter).
Note that it takes only a small leak across the ports of the valve to show excessive auto-zero values
when supplying high concentrations of span gas.



Another reason for high (although not necessarily out-of-range) values for AutoZero could be the ozone
air filter cartridge, if its contents has been exhausted and needs to be replaced. This filter cartridge
(Figure 3-1) filters chemicals that can cause chemiluminescence and, if saturated, these chemicals can
break through to the reaction cell, causing an erroneously high AutoZero value (background noise).



A dirty reaction cell can cause high AutoZero values. Clean the reaction cell according to Section 9.3.7.



Finally, a high HVPS voltage value may cause excess background noise and a high AZERO value. The
HVPS value changes from analyzer to analyzer and could show nominal values between 450 and 800
V. Check the low-level hardware calibration of the preamplifier board and, if necessary, recalibrate
exactly as described in Section 11.6.5 in order to minimize the HVPS.

250
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Troubleshooting & Repair

11.5. SUBSYSTEM CHECKOUT
The preceding sections of this manual discussed a variety of methods for identifying possible sources of failures
or performance problems within the analyzer. In most cases this included a list of possible causes and, in some
cases, quick solutions or at least a pointer to the appropriate sections describing them. This section describes
how to determine if a certain component or subsystem is actually the cause of the problem being investigated.

11.5.1. SIMPLE VACUUM LEAK AND PUMP CHECK
Leaks are the most common cause of analyzer malfunction; This section presents a simple leak check, whereas
Section 0 details a more thorough procedure. The method described here is easy, fast and detects, but does
not locate, most leaks. It also verifies the sample pump condition.


Turn the analyzer ON, and allow at least 30 minutes for flows to stabilize.



Cap the sample inlet port (cap must be wrench-tight).



After several minutes, when the pressures have stabilized, note the SAMP (sample pressure) and the
RCEL (vacuum pressure) readings.



If both readings are equal to within 10% and less than 10 in-Hg-A, the instrument is free of large leaks.
It is still possible that the instrument has minor leaks.



If both readings are < 10 in-Hg-A, the pump is in good condition. A new pump will create a pressure
reading of about 4 in-Hg-A (at sea level).

11.5.2. DETAILED PRESSURE LEAK CHECK
If a leak cannot be located by the above procedure, obtain a leak checker similar to Teledyne Instruments part
number 01960, which contains a small pump, shut-off valve, and pressure gauge to create both over-pressure
and vacuum. Alternatively, a tank of pressurized gas, with the two stage regulator adjusted to ≤ 15 psi, a shutoff
valve and pressure gauge may be used.
CAUTION
Once tube fittings have been wetted with soap solution under a pressurized system, do
not apply or re-apply vacuum as this will cause soap solution to be sucked into the
instrument, contaminating inside surfaces.
Do not exceed 15 psi when pressurizing the system.


Turn OFF power to the instrument and remove the instrument cover.



Install a leak checker or a tank of gas (compressed, oil-free air or nitrogen) as described above on the
sample inlet at the rear panel.



Disconnect the pump tubing on the outside rear panel and cap the pump port. If IZS or zero/span valves
are installed, disconnect the tubing from the zero and span gas ports and plug them (Figure 3-2). Cap
the DFU particle filter on the Perma Pure dryer (Figure 9-2).

251
04521C (DCN5731)

Troubleshooting & Repair

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual



Pressurize the instrument with the leak checker or tank gas, allowing enough time to fully pressurize the
instrument through the critical flow orifice. Check each tube connection (fittings, hose clamps) with soap
bubble solution, looking for fine bubbles. Once the fittings have been wetted with soap solution, do not
re-apply vacuum as it will draw soap solution into the instrument and contaminate it. Do not exceed 15
psi pressure.



If the instrument has the zero and span valve option, the normally closed ports on each valve should
also be separately checked. Connect the leak checker to the normally closed ports and check with soap
bubble solution.



If the analyzer is equipped with an IZS Option Connect the leak checker to the Dry Air inlet and check
with soap bubble solution.



Once the leak has been located and repaired, the leak-down rate of the indicated pressure should be
less than 1 in-Hg-A (0.4 psi) in 5 minutes after the pressure is turned off.



Clean surfaces from soap solution, re-connect the sample and pump lines and replace the instrument
cover. Restart the analyzer.

11.5.3. PERFORMING A SAMPLE FLOW CHECK
CAUTION
Use a separate, calibrated flow meter capable of measuring flows between 0 and 1000
cm³/min to measure the gas flow rate though the analyzer. Do not use the built in flow
measurement viewable from the front panel of the instrument. This value is only
calculated, not measured.
Sample flow checks are useful for monitoring the actual flow of the instrument, as the front panel display shows
only a calculated value. A decreasing, actual sample flow may point to slowly clogging pneumatic paths, most
likely critical flow orifices or sintered filters. To perform a sample flow check:


Disconnect the sample inlet tubing from the rear panel SAMPLE port shown in Figure 3-2.



Attach the outlet port of a flow meter to the sample inlet port on the rear panel. Ensure that the inlet to
the flow meter is at atmospheric pressure.



The sample flow measured with the external flow meter should be within  10% of the nominal values
shown in Table 10-3.



Low flows indicate blockage somewhere in the pneumatic pathway. ]

252
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Troubleshooting & Repair

11.5.4. AC POWER CONFIGURATION
The E-Series digital electronic systems will operate with any of the specified power regimes. As long as
instrument is connected to 100-120 VAC or 220-240 VAC at either 50 or 60 Hz it will turn on and after about 30
seconds show a front panel display. Internally, the status LEDs located on the Relay PCA, Motherboard and
CPU should turn on as soon as the power is supplied.
On the other hand, some of the analyzer’s non-digital components, such as the pump and the various AC
powered heaters must be properly configured for the type of power being supplied to the instrument. Figure 1116shows the location of the various sets of AC Configuration jumpers.

JP6
IZS Permeation
Tube Heater and O2
Sensor Connection.
(optional)

JP7
Pump
Configuration

JP2
Main AC Heater
Configuration

Figure 11-15: Location of AC power Configuration Jumpers

There are several changes between the Relay PCA 04523 and previous version regarding AC power
configuration and distribution.


Previously, in analyzer models with internal pumps, the AC power for the pump came directly from the
instrument back panel. The 04523 version handles all AC and DC power distribution including power to
the pump.



Prior to this change, configuring the pump for compatibility with various line voltages and frequencies
was done with a set of hard-wired, in-line connections. The Relay PCA 04523, now includes a set of
jumpers that perform this function. This change increase reliability and simplifies troubleshooting and
repair operations.

253
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Troubleshooting & Repair



The Relay PCA 04523, includes a set of jumpers that connect AC power to heaters included in several
optional items, such as the zero/span valve options and the O2 sensor option available on the
M200EH/EM analyzers. In earlier versions of the relay PCA this was also handled by in-line
connections.

11.5.4.1. AC configuration – Internal Pump (JP7)
AC power configuration for internal pumps is set using Jumper set JP7 (see Figure 11-4 for the location of JP7).

Table 11-3: AC Power Configuration for Internal Pumps (JP7)
LINE
POWER

LINE
FREQUENCY

60 HZ

WHITE

110VAC
115 VAC
1

50 HZ

220VAC
240 VAC
1

60 HZ
50 HZ1

FUNCTION

JUMPER
BETWEEN
PINS

Connects pump pin 3 to 110 / 115 VAC power line

2 to 7

Connects pump pin 3 to 110 / 115 VAC power line

3 to 8

Connects pump pins 2 & 4 to Neutral

4 to 9

Connects pump pin 3 to 110 / 115 VAC power line

2 to 7

Connects pump pin 3 to 110 / 115 VAC power line

3 to 8

Connects pump pins 2 & 4 to Neutral

4 to 9

Connects pump pins 3 and 4 together

1 to 6

Connects pump pin 1 to 220 / 240VAC power line

3 to 8

Connects pump pins 3 and 4 together

1 to 6

Connects pump pin 1 to 220 / 240VAC power line

3 to 8

JUMPER
COLOR

BLACK

BROWN
BLUE

A jumper between pins 5 and 10 may be present on the jumper plug assembly, but is only functional on the M300E and
has no function on the M200EH/EM analyzers.

110 VAC /115 VAC

220 VAC /240 VAC

1

6

1

6

2

7

2

7

8

3

3

8

4

9

4

9

5

10

5

10

Present on 50 Hz version of jumper set,
and functional for M300E but not
Models M100E, M200E & M400E
Figure 11-16: Pump AC Power Jumpers (JP7)

254
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Troubleshooting & Repair

11.5.4.2. AC Configuration – Standard Heaters (JP2)
Power configuration for the AC the standard heaters is set using Jumper set JP2 (see Figure 11-4 for the
location of JP2).

Table 11-4: Power Configuration for Standard AC Heaters (JP2)

LINE VOLTAGE

JUMPER
BETWEEN
PINS

FUNCTION

1 to 8

Common

2 to 7

Neutral to Load

3 to 10

Common

4 to 9

Neutral to Load

3 to 10

Common

4 to 9

Neutral to Load

5 to 12

Common

6 to 11

Neutral to Load

Reaction Cell / Sample
Chamber Heaters2

1 to 7

Load

Hi Concentration
Converter

3 to 9

Load

Moly Converter

3 to 9

Load

Bypass Manifold

5 to 11

Load

JUMPER
COLOR

HEATER(S)

Reaction Cell / Sample
Chamber Heaters

110 VAC / 115 VAC
50Hz & 60 Hz

Mini Hi-Con
Converter

WHITE

Moly Converter

Bypass Manifold

220 VAC / 240 VAC
50Hz & 60 Hz

Reaction Cell or
Sample Chamber
Heaters
Mini Hi-Con or
Moly Converter
Heaters
200EM/EH
By Pass Manifold
Heater

BLUE

1

7

1

7

2

8

2

8

Reaction Cell or
Sample Chamber
Heaters

3

9

3

9

4

10

4

10

5

11

5

11

6

12

6

12

110 VAC /115 VAC

Mini Hi-Con or
Moly Converter
Heaters
200EM/EH
By Pass Manifold
Heater

220 VAC / 240 VAC

Figure 11-17: Typical Set Up of AC Heater Jumper Set (JP2)

255
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Troubleshooting & Repair

11.5.4.3. AC Configuration –Heaters for Option Packages (JP6)
Both the IZS valve option or an O2 sensor options include AC heaters that maintain an optimum operating
temperature for key components of those options. Jumper set JP6 is used to connect the heaters associated
with those options to AC power. Since these heaters work with either 110/155 VAC or 220/240 VAC, there is
only one jumper configuration.

Table 11-5: Power Configuration for Optional AC Heaters (JP6)
JUMPER
COLOR

FUNCTION

M100E’s,
M200E’s &
M400E

1 to 8

Common

2 to 7

Neutral to Load

M100E’s &
M200E’s

3 to 10

Common

4 to 9

Neutral to Load

MODEL’S
USED ON1

IZS1 Permeation Tube
Heater

RED
O2 Sensor Heater
1

JUMPER
BETWEEN
PINS

HEATER(S)

This Option Not Available on the M200EH/EM

10

IZS
Permeation Tube 12
Heater

11

6

5

4

9

3

8

7

2

1

O2 Sensor
Heater

Figure 11-18: Typical Set Up of AC Heater Jumper Set (JP2)

256
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Troubleshooting & Repair

11.5.5. DC POWER SUPPLY TEST POINTS
Table 11-6: DC Power Test Point and Wiring Color Code
NAME

TEST POINT#

COLOR

DEFINITION

DGND

1

Black

Digital ground

+5V

2

Red

AGND

3

Green

+15V

4

Blue

-15V

5

Yellow

+12R

6

Purple

+12V

7

Orange

Analog ground

12 V return (ground) line

Table 11-7: DC Power Supply Acceptable Levels
CHECK RELAY BOARD TEST POINTS
POWER
SUPPLY

VOLTAG
E

FROM

TO

Test Point

Test Point

MIN V

MAX V

NAME

#

NAME

#

DGND

1

+5

2

+4.80

+5.25

PS1

+5

PS1

+15

AGND

3

+15

4

+13.5

+16.0

PS1

-15

AGND

3

-15V

5

-14.0

-16.0

PS1

AGND

AGND

3

DGND

1

-0.05

+0.05

PS1

Chassis

DGND

1

Chassis

N/A

-0.05

+0.05

PS2

+12

+12V Ret

6

+12V

7

+11.8

+12.5

PS2

DGND

+12V Ret

6

DGND

1

-0.05

+0.05

The test points are located at the top, right-hand corner of the PCA (see Figure 11-4)

11.5.6. I2C BUS
Operation of the I2C bus can be verified by observing the behavior of the LED labeled D1 on the relay board in
conjunction with the performance of the front panel display. Assuming that the DC power supplies are operating
properly and the wiring from the motherboard to the keyboard as well as from the keyboard to the relay board is
intact, the I2C bus is operating properly if:


D1 on the relay board is flashing or



D1 is not flashing but pressing a key on the front panel results in a change to the display.

If the display is locked up or if the analyzer is not booting up at all, the I2C bus may be the cause. Contact
customer service if you suspect a problem with the I2C bus.

257
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Troubleshooting & Repair

11.5.7. KEYBOARD / DISPLAY INTERFACE
The front panel keyboard, the display and the keyboard/display circuit board can be verified by observing the
operation of the display when power is applied to the instrument and when a key is pressed on the front panel.
Assuming that there are no wiring problems and that the DC power supplies are operating properly:


The vacuum fluorescence display is working properly if, on power-up, a “-“ character is visible on the
upper left hand corner of the display.



If there is no “-“ character on the display at power-up but the D1 LED on the relay board is flashing, the
keyboard/display circuit may be bad.



If the analyzer starts operation with a normal display but pressing a key on the front panel does not
change the display, then there are three possible problems:



One or more of the keys is bad,



The interrupt signal between the keyboard and the motherboard is broken or



The keyboard circuit is bad.

You can verify this failure by logging on to the instrument using APICOM or a terminal program. If the analyzer
responds to remote commands and the display changes accordingly, the display wiring or the I2C bus may be
faulty.

11.5.8. GENREAL RELAY BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
The relay board circuit can most easily be checked by observing the condition of its status LEDs as described in
Section 11.1.4.3, and the associated output when toggled on and off through the SIGNAL I/O function in the
DIAG menu, see Section 6.13.1.
If the front panel display responds to key presses and D1 on the relay board is not flashing, then either the wiring
between the keyboard and the relay board is bad, or the relay board itself is bad.
If D1 on the Relay board is flashing and the status indicator for the output in question (heater, valve, etc.) does
not toggle properly using the Signal I/O function, then the associated device (valve or heater) or its control
device (valve driver, heater relay) is malfunctioning. Several of the control devices are in sockets and can easily
be replaced. The table below lists the control device associated with a particular function:

Table 11-8: Relay Board Control Devices
Function

Control Device

Socketed

All valves

U5

Yes

All heaters

K1-K5

Yes

258
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Troubleshooting & Repair

11.5.9. MOTHERBOARD
11.5.9.1. A/D functions
A basic check of the analog to digital (A/D) converter operation on the motherboard is to use the Signal I/O
function under the DIAG menu. Check the following two A/D reference voltages and input signals that can be
easily measured with a voltmeter.


Using the Signal I/O function (Section 6.13.1 Appendix D), view the value of REF_4096_MV and
REF_GND. If both are within 3 mV of their nominal values (4096 and 0) and are stable to within ±0.5
mV, the basic A/D converter is functioning properly. If these values fluctuate largely or are off by more
than 3 mV, one or more of the analog circuits may be overloaded or the motherboard may be faulty.



Choose one parameter in the Signal I/O function such as SAMPLE_PRESSURE (see previous section
on how to measure it). Compare its actual voltage with the voltage displayed through the SIGNAL I/O
function. If the wiring is intact but there is a difference of more than ±10 mV between the measured and
displayed voltage, the motherboard may be faulty.

11.5.9.2. Analog Output Voltages
To verify that the analog outputs are working properly, connect a voltmeter to the output in question and perform
an analog output step test as described in Section 6.13.3.
For each of the steps, taking into account any offset that may have been programmed into the channel (Section
6.13.4.4), the output should be within 1% of the nominal value listed in the table below except for the 0% step,
which should be within 2-3 mV. If one or more of the steps is outside of this range, a failure of one or both D/A
converters and their associated circuitry on the motherboard is likely.

Table 11-9: Analog Output Test Function - Nominal Values
FULL SCALE OUTPUT VOLTAGE
100mV
STEP

%

1V

5V

10V

NOMINAL OUTPUT VOLTAGE

1

0

0 mV

0

0

0

2

20

20 mV

0.2

1

2

3

40

40 mV

0.4

2

4

4

60

60 mV

0.6

3

6

5

80

80 mV

0.8

4

8

6

100

100 mV

1.0

5

10

259
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Troubleshooting & Repair

11.5.9.3. Status Outputs
The procedure below can be used to test the Status outputs.

V

+DC

Gnd

Figure 11-19: Typical Set Up of Status Output Test
1. Connect a cable between the “D“ pin and the “” pin on the status output connector.
2. Connect a 1000 Ω resistor between the “+” pin and the pin for the status output that is being tested.
3. Connect a voltmeter between the “D“ pin and the pin of the output being tested (Table 11-10).
4. Under the DIAG / SIGNAL I/O menu (Section 6.13.1), scroll through the inputs and outputs until you get
to the output in question. Alternately turn the output on and off.
 The Voltmeter will read approximately 5 VDC when the output is OFF.
 The Voltmeter will read approximately 0 VDC when the output is ON.

Table 11-10:

Status Outputs Pin Assignments

PIN #

STATUS

1

SYSTEM OK

2

CONC VALID

3

HIGH RANGE

4

ZERO CAL

5

SPAN CAL

6

DIAG MODE

7

LOW

8

SPARE

260
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Troubleshooting & Repair

11.5.9.4. Control Inputs
The control input bits can be tested by the following procedure:


Connect a jumper from the +5 V pin on the STATUS connector to the +5 V on the CONTROL IN
connector.



Connect a second jumper from the ‘-‘ pin on the STATUS connector to the A pin on the CONTROL IN
connector. The instrument should switch from SAMPLE mode to ZERO CAL R mode.



Connect a second jumper from the ‘-‘ pin on the STATUS connector to the B pin on the CONTROL IN
connector. The instrument should switch from SAMPLE mode to
SPAN CAL R mode.

In each case, the M200EH/EM should return to SAMPLE mode when the jumper is removed.

11.5.10. CPU
There are two major types of CPU board failures, a complete failure and a failure associated with the Disk-OnChip (DOC). If either of these failures occur, contact the factory.
For complete failures, assuming that the power supplies are operating properly and the wiring is intact, the CPU
is faulty if on power-on:


The vacuum fluorescence display does not show a dash in the upper left hand corner



There is no activity from the primary RS-232 port (COM1) on the rear panel even if “? ” is
pressed.

In some rare circumstances, this failure may be caused by a bad IC on the motherboard, specifically U57, the
large, 44 pin device on the lower right hand side of the board. If this is true, removing U57 from its socket will
allow the instrument to start up but the measurements will be incorrect.


If the analyzer stops during initialization (the vacuum fluorescence display shows some text), it is likely
that the DOC, the firmware or the configuration and data files have been corrupted or that the wrong
firmware was uploaded or does not have the correct filename.

261
04521C (DCN5731)

Troubleshooting & Repair

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

11.5.11. RS-232 COMMUNICATION
11.5.11.1. General RS-232 Troubleshooting
Teledyne Instruments analyzers use the RS-232 protocol as the standard, serial communications protocol. RS232 is a versatile standard, which has been used for many years but, at times, is difficult to configure. Teledyne
Instruments conforms to the standard pin assignments in the implementation of RS-232. Problems with RS-232
connections usually center around 4 general areas:


Incorrect cabling and connectors. This is the most common problem. See 6.11.3 for connector and pinout information.



The communications (baud) rate and protocol parameters are incorrectly configured. See Section
6.11.9 on how to set the baud rate.



The COM port communications mode is set incorrectly (Section 6.11.8).



If a modem is used, additional configuration and wiring rules must be observed. See Section 6.15.2.6.



Incorrect setting of the DTE - DCE switch. Typically, the red LED is on as soon as you power up the
analyzer. If not, contact the factory, as this indicates a problem with the motherboard. As the analyzer
is connected to the computer with a cable, the green LED should also illuminate. If not, set the
DCE/DTE switch to the other position. See also Section 6.11.5.



Note that some laptops do not enable their RS-232 port when in power-saving mode. In this case,
connect the laptop and start either APICOM or a Hyperterminal window and start communicating with
the analyzer. This will enable the serial port on the laptop and the green LED should illuminate. You
may have to switch back and forth while communicating to get the right setting.

11.5.11.2. Modem or Terminal Operation
These are the general steps for troubleshooting problems with a modem connected to a Teledyne Instruments
analyzer.


Check cables for proper connection to the modem, terminal or computer.



Check the correct position of the DTE/DCE as described in Section 6.11.5.



Check the correct setup command (Section 6.15.2.6).



Verify that the Ready to Send (RTS) signal is at logic high. The M200EH/EM sets pin 7 (RTS) to greater
than 3 volts to enable modem transmission.



Make sure the baud rate, word length, and stop bit settings between modem and analyzer match, see
Section 6.15.2.6 and 6.11.8.



Use the RS-232 test function to send “w” characters to the modem, terminal or computer; See Section
6.11.10.



Get your terminal, modem or computer to transmit data to the analyzer (holding down the space bar is
one way). The green LED on the rear panel should flicker as the instrument is receiving data.



Make sure that the communications software is functioning properly.

Further help with serial communications is available in a separate manual “RS-232 Manual”, Teledyne
Instruments part number 013500000, available online at http://www.Teledyne-api.com/manuals/.

262
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Troubleshooting & Repair

11.5.12. PMT SENSOR
The photo multiplier tube detects the light emitted by the reaction of NO with ozone. It has a gain of about 1:
500000 to 1:1000000. It is not possible to test the detector outside of the instrument in the field. The best way
to determine if the PMT is working properly is by using the optical test (OTEST), which is described in Section
6.13.6.2. The basic method to diagnose a PMT fault is to eliminate the other components using ETEST, OTEST
and specific tests for other sub-assemblies.

11.5.13. PMT PREAMPLIFIER BOARD
To check the correct operation of the preamplifier board, we suggest to carry out the optical and electrical tests
described in Sections 6.13.6.2 and 6.13.7.3. If the ETEST fails, the preamplifier board may be faulty. Refer to
Section 11.6.5 on hardware calibration through the preamplifier board.

11.5.14. HIGH VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY
The HVPS is located in the interior of the sensor module and is plugged into the PMT tube (Section 10.4.2). It
requires 2 voltage inputs. The first is +15 V, which powers the supply. The second is the programming voltage
which is generated on the preamplifier board. Adjustment of the HVPS is covered in the factory calibration
procedure in Section 11.6.5. This power supply has 10 independent power supply steps, one to each pin of the
PMT. The following test procedure below allows you to test each step.


Turn off the instrument.



Remove the cover and disconnect the 2 connectors at the front of the NOX sensor module.



Remove the end cap from the sensor (4 screws).



Remove the HVPS/PMT assembly from the cold block inside the sensor (2 plastic screws).



Re-connect the 7 pin connector to the sensor end cap, and power-up the instrument. Scroll the front
panel display to the HVPS test parameter. Divide the displayed HVPS voltage by 10 and test the pairs
of connector points as shown in Table 11-11.



Check the overall voltage (should be equal to the HVPS value displayed on the front panel, for example
700 V) and the voltages between each pair of pins of the supply (should be 1/10th of the overall voltage,
in this example 70 V):

Table 11-11:

Example of HVPS Power Supply Outputs

If HVPS reading = 700 VDC



PIN PAIR

NOMINAL READING

12

70 VDC

23

70 VDC

34

70 VDC

45

70 VDC

56

70 VDC

67

70 VDC

78

70 VDC

6

7

5

8

4
3

9
2

10
11

1

KEY

Turn off the instrument power, and reconnect the PMT, then reassemble the sensor.

If any faults are found in the test, you must obtain a new HVPS as there are no user serviceable parts inside the
supply.

263
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Troubleshooting & Repair

11.5.15. PNEUMATIC SENSOR ASSEMBLY
The pressure/flow sensor circuit board, located behind the sensor assembly, can be checked with a voltmeter
using the following procedure, which assumes that the wiring is intact and that the motherboard and the power
supplies are operating properly. Refer to Figure 11- for trouble-shooting.
Measure the voltage across TP1 and TP2, it should be 10.0  0.25 V. If not, the board is faulty. Measure the
voltage across the leads of capacitor C2. It should be 5.0 ± 0.25 V, if not, the board may be faulty.

11.5.15.1. Reaction Cell Pressure
Measure the voltage across test points TP1 and TP5. With the sample pump disconnected or turned off, the
voltage should be 4500  250 mV. With the pump running, it should be 800-1700 mV depending on the
performance of the vacuum pump. The lower the reaction cell pressure, the lower the resulting voltage is. If this
voltage is significantly different, the pressure transducer S1 or the board may be faulty. If this voltage is
between 2 and 5 V, the pump may not be performing well, check that the reaction cell pressure is less than
10 in-Hg-A (at sea level). Ensure that the tubing is connected to the upper port, which is closer to the sensor’s
contacts; the lower port does not measure pressure.

11.5.15.2. Sample Pressure
Measure the voltage across test points TP1 and TP4. With the sample pump disconnected or turned off, this
voltage should be 4500  250 mV. With the pump running, it should be about 0.2 V less as the sample pressure
drops by about 1 in-Hg-A below ambient pressure. If this voltage is significantly different, the pressure
transducer S2 or the board may be faulty. A leak in the sample system to vacuum may also cause this voltage
to be between about 0.6 and 4.5. Make sure that the front panel reading of the sample pressure is at about 1 inHg-A less than ambient pressure. Ensure that the tubing is connected to the upper port, which is closer to the
sensor’s contacts; the lower port does not measure pressure.

Figure 11-20: Pressure / Flow Sensor Assembly

264
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Troubleshooting & Repair

11.5.15.3. Ozone Flow
Measure the voltage across TP1 and TP3. With proper ozone flow (250 cm3/min), this should be approximately
3.0 ± 0.3 V (this voltage will vary with altitude). With flow stopped (pump turned off), the voltage should be
approximately 0 V. If the voltage is incorrect, the flow sensor or the board may be faulty. A cross-leak to
vacuum inside the Perma Pure dryer may also cause this flow to increase significantly, and the voltage will
increase accordingly. Also, make sure that the gas flows from P1 to P2 as labeled on the flow sensor (“high”
pressure P1 to “low” pressure P2 or “Port” 1 to “Port” 2).

11.5.16. NO2 CONVERTER
The NO2 converter assembly can fail in two ways, an electrical failure of the band heater and/or the
thermocouple control circuit and a performance failure of the converter itself.
1) NO2 converter heater failures can be divided into two possible problems:


Temperature is reported properly but heater does not heat to full temperature. In this case, the heater is
either disconnected or broken or the power relay is broken.
 Disconnect the heater cable coming from the relay board and measure the resistance between any
two of the three heater leads with a multi-meter. The resistance between A and B should be about
1000 Ω and that between A and C should be the same as between B and C, about 500 Ω each. If
any of these resistances is near zero or without continuity, the heater is broken.



Temperature reports zero or overload (near 500° C). This indicates a disconnected or failing
thermocouple or a failure of the thermocouple circuit.
 First, check that the thermocouple is connected properly and the wire does not show signs of a
broken or kinked pathway. If it appears to be properly connected, disconnect the yellow
thermocouple plug (marked K) from the relay board and measure the voltage (not resistance)
between the two leads with a multi-meter capable of measuring in the low mV range. The voltage
should be about 12 mV (ignore the sign) at 315° C and about 0 mV at room temperature.
 Measure the continuity with an Ohm-meter. It should read close to zero Ω. If the thermocouple does
not have continuity, it is broken. If it reads zero voltage at elevated temperatures, it is broken. To
test the thermocouple at room temperature, heat up the converter can (e.g., with a heat gun) and see
if the voltage across the thermocouple leads changes. If the thermocouple is working properly, the
electronic circuit is broken. In both cases, consult the factory.

2) If the converter appears to have performance problems (conversion efficiency is outside of allowed range of
96-102%), check the following:


Conversion efficiency setting in the CAL menu. If this value is different from 1.000, this correction needs
to be considered. Section 7.1.5 describes this parameter in detail.



Accuracy of NO2 source (GPT or gas tank standard). NO2 gas standards are typically certified to only
±2% and often change in concentrations over time. You should get the standard re-certified every year.
If you use GPT, check the accuracy of the ozone source.



Age of the converter. The NO2 converter has a limited operating life and may need to be replaced every
~3 years or when necessary (e.g., earlier if used with continuously high NO2 concentrations). We
estimate a lifetime of about 10000 ppm-hours (a cumulative product of the NO2 concentration times the
exposure time to that concentration). However, this lifetime heavily depends on many factors such as
absolute concentration (temporary or permanent poisoning of the converter is possible), sample flow
rate and pressure inside the converter, converter temperature, duty cycle etc. This lifetime is only an
estimated reference and not a guaranteed lifetime.

265
04521C (DCN5731)

Troubleshooting & Repair

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual



In some cases with excessive sample moisture, the oxidized molybdenum metal chips inside the
converter cartridge may bake together over time and restrict air flow through the converter, in which
case it needs to be replaced. To avoid this problem, we recommend the use of a sample gas
conditioner (Section 5.10). Section 9.3.6 describes how to replace the NO2 converter cartridge.



With no NO2 in the sample gas and a properly calibrated analyzer, the NO reading is negative, while the
NO2 reading remains around zero. The converter destroys NO and needs to be replaced.



With no NO2 in the sample gas and a properly calibrated analyzer, the NOX reading is significantly
higher than the actual (gas standard) NO concentration. The converter produces NO2 and needs to be
replaced.

11.5.17. O3 GENERATOR
The ozone generator can fail in two ways, electronically (printed circuit board) and functionally (internal
generator components). Assuming that air is supplied properly to the generator, the generator should
automatically turn on 30 minutes after the instrument is powered up or if the instrument is still warm. See
Section 10.3.6 for ozone generator functionality. Accurate performance of the generator can only be determined
with an ozone analyzer connected to the outlet of the generator. However, if the generator appears to be
working properly but the sensitivity or calibration of the instrument is reduced, suspect a leak in the ozone
generator supply air.
A leak in the dryer or between the dryer and the generator can cause moist, ambient air to leak into the air
stream, which significantly reduces the ozone output. The generator will produce only about half of the nominal
O3 concentration when run with moist, ambient air instead of dried air. In addition, moist supply air will produce
large amounts of nitric acid in the generator, which can cause analyzer components downstream of the
generator to deteriorate and/or causes significant deposit of nitrate deposits on the reaction cell window,
reducing sensitivity and causing performance drift. Carry out a leak check as described earlier in this chapter.

11.5.18. BOX TEMPERATURE
The box temperature sensor (thermistor) is mounted on the motherboard below the bottom edge of the CPU
board when looking at it from the front. It cannot be disconnected to check its resistance. Box temperature will
vary with, but will usually read about 5° C higher than, ambient (room) temperature because of the internal
heating zones from the NO2 converter, reaction cell and other devices.


To check the box temperature functionality, we recommend to check the BOX_TEMP signal voltage
using the SIGNAL I/O function under the DIAG Menu (Section 6.13.1). At about 30° C, the signal
should be around 1500 mV.



We recommend to use a certified or calibrated external thermometer / temperature sensor to verify the
accuracy of the box temperature by placing it inside the chassis, next to the thermistor labeled XT1
(above connector J108) on the motherboard.

11.5.19. PMT TEMPERATURE
PMT temperature should be low and constant. It is more important that this temperature is maintained constant
than it is to maintain it low. The PMT cooler uses a Peltier, thermo-electric cooler element supplied with 12 V
DC power from the switching power supply PS2. The temperature is controlled by a proportional temperature
controller located on the preamplifier board. Voltages applied to the cooler element vary from 0.1 to 12 VDC.
The temperature set point (hard-wired into the preamplifier board) will vary by ±1C due to component
tolerances. The actual temperature will be maintained to within 0.1° C around that set point. On power-up of
the analyzer, the front panel enables the user to watch that temperature drop from about ambient temperature
down to its set point of 6-8° C. If the temperature fails to adjust after 30 minutes, there is a problem in the cooler
circuit. If the control circuit on the preamplifier board is faulty, a temperature of –1° C is reported.
266
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Troubleshooting & Repair

11.6. REPAIR PROCEDURES
This section contains some procedures that may need to be performed when a major component of the analyzer
requires repair or replacement. Note that maintenance procedures (e.g., replacement of regularly changed
expendables) are discussed in Chapter 8 (Maintenance) are not listed here. Also note that Teledyne-API
customer service may have a more detailed service note for some of the below procedures. Contact customer
service.

11.6.1. DISK-ON-CHIP REPLACEMENT
Replacing the Disk-on-Chip (DOC) will cause all of the instrument configuration parameters to be lost unless the
replacement chip carries the exact same firmware version. iDAS data will always be lost and, if possible, should
be downloaded prior to changing the DOC. If the analyzer is equipped with at least one EEPROM flash chip
(standard configuration), the configuration settings are stored on the EEPROM. It is recommended to document
all analyzer parameters that may have been changed, such as calibration, range, auto-cal, analog output, serial
port and other settings before replacing the CPU chip. Refer to Figure 10-10-17 for locating the DOC and other
CPU components.
1. Ground yourself to prevent electrostatic damage to electronic components.
2. Turn off power to the instrument.
3. Fold down the rear panel by loosening the mounting screws.
 You may have to lift up the analyzer cover to prevent some connectors on the CPU board to brush
against the cover.
4. Locate the Disk-on-Chip on the CPU board.
 The chip should carry a label with analyzer model number (M200EH/EM), firmware revision
(example: M200EH/EM_C7.EXE), date and initials of the programmer.
5. Remove the IC with a dedicated IC removal tool or by gently prying it up from the socket.
 Do not bend the connector pins.
6. Reinstall the new Disk-on-Chip, making sure the notch at the end of the chip matches the notch in the
socket.
 It may be necessary to straighten the pins somewhat to fit them into the socket. Gently but firmly
press the chip all the way in. Do not bend the pins.
7. Close the rear panel, replace the cover and turn on power to the machine.
Generally, all of the setup information will need to be re-entered, including analog input and output calibration
unless the firmware revision has not changed and the analyzer is equipped and properly configured with an
EEPROM chip. Note especially that the A/D converter must be re-calibrated, and all information collected in
step 1 above must be re-entered before the instrument will function correctly. The analyzer typically issues an
ANALOG CALIBRATION WARNING if the analog circuitry was not calibrated within 10 minutes after restart.

267
04521C (DCN5731)

Troubleshooting & Repair

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

11.6.2. FLASH CHIP REPLACEMENT OR UPGRADE
The M200EH/EM CPU board can accommodate up to two EEPROM flash chips. The standard configuration is
one chip with 64 kb of storage capacity, which is used to store the analyzer configuration as created during final
checkout at the factory. Replacing this chip will erase that configuration, which will be recreated with a new copy
when restarting the analyzer. However, if the firmware and/or the DOC is changed at the same time, all
analyzer configuration settings and iDAS data will be lost. Adding a second EEPROM chip to the existing chip
will double memory but this procedure will require a BIOS configuration and is not a standard sales option. Also
make sure that you receive a fully formatted EEPROM chip for replacement. Contact the factory for details.
1. Ground yourself to prevent electrostatic damage to electronic components.
2. Turn off power to the instrument, fold down the rear panel by loosening the mounting screws.
 If necessary, lift the cover to prevent the rear panel connectors from brushing against it.
3. Locate the EEPROM chip in the left-most socket of the CPU board.
 The chip is almost square with one corner cut off, the socket is shaped accordingly and the chip is
recessed into the socket.
4. Remove the old chip by using a special tool or gently pry the chip out using a very fine screwdriver.
Make sure not to bend or destroy any of the contacts of the socket.
 When upgrading the CPU with a second chip, no removal is necessary as the second socket should
be empty.
5. Reinstall the new or additional EEPROM chip, making sure the cut-off edge matches that of the socket.
Press the chip symmetrically and straight all the way in.
6. Close the rear panel and cover and turn on power to the machine.
 If a front panel message Flash Format INVALID appears on start-up, the EEPROM was not properly
formatted. Contact the factory for a proper replacement.

11.6.3. O3 GENERATOR REPLACEMENT
The ozone generator is a black, brick-shaped device with printed circuit board attached to its rear and two tubes
extending out the right side in the front of the analyzer. To replace the ozone generator:
1. Turn off the analyzer power, remove the power cord and the analyzer cover.
2. Disconnect the 1/8” black tube from the ozone scrubber cartridge and the ¼” clear tube from the plastic
extension tube at the brass fitting nearest to the ozone generator.
3. Unplug the electrical connection on the rear side of the brick.
4. Unscrew the two mounting screws that attach the ozone generator to the chassis and take out the entire
assembly.
5. If you received a complete replacement generator with circuit board and mounting bracket attached,
simply reverse the above steps to replace the current generator.
6. Make sure to carry out a leak check and a recalibration after the analyzer warmed up for about 30
minutes.

268
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Troubleshooting & Repair

11.6.4. SAMPLE AND OZONE DRYER REPLACEMENT
The M200EH/EM standard configuration is equipped with a dryer for the ozone supply air. An optional dryer is
available for the sample stream and a combined dryer for both gas streams can also be purchased. To change
one or all of these options:
1. Turn off power to the analyzer and pump, remove the power cord and the analyzer cover.
2. Locate the dryers in the center of the instrument, between sensor and NO2 converter.
 They are mounted to a bracket, which can be taken out when unscrewing the two mounting screws (if
necessary).
3. Disconnect all tubing that extends out of the dryer assembly,
 These are usually the purge tube connecting to the vacuum manifold, the tube from the exit to the
ozone flow meter (ozone dryer) or to the NO/NOx valve (sample dryer) or two tubes to the ozone flow
meter and the NO/NOX valve (combo-dryer).
 Take extra care not to twist any of the white plastic fittings on the dryer, which connect the inner
drying tube to the outer purge tube. See Section 9.3.2 and Figure 9-2.
4. Note the orientation of the dryer on the bracket.
5. Cut the tie wraps that hold the dryer to the mounting bracket and take out the old dryer.
 If necessary, unscrew the two mounting screws on the bracket and take out the entire assembly.
6. Attach the replacement dryer to the mounting bracket in the same orientation as the old dryer.
7. Fix the dryer to the bracket using new tie wraps.
8. Cut off excess length of the wraps.
9. Put the assembly back into the chassis and tighten the mounting screws.
10. Re-attach the tubes to vacuum manifold, flow meter and/or NO/NOx valve using at least two wrenches.
 Ttake extra care not to twist the dryer’s white plastic fittings, as this will result in large leaks that are
difficult to trouble-shoot and fix.
11. Carry out a detailed leak check (Section 0),
12. Close the analyzer.
13. Power up pump and analyzer and re-calibrate the instrument after it stabilizes

269
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Troubleshooting & Repair

11.6.5. PMT SENSOR HARDWARE CALIBRATION
The sensor module hardware calibration is used in the factory to adjust the slope and offset of the PMT output
and to optimize the signal output and HVPS. If the instrument’s slope and offset values are outside of the
acceptable range and all other more obvious causes for this problem have been eliminated, the hardware
calibration can be used to adjust the sensor as has been done in the factory. This procedure is also
recommended after replacing the PMT or the preamplifier board.
1. Perform a full zero calibration using zero air (Section 7.2, 7.4, or 7.6).
2. Locate the preamplifier board (Figure 3-1).
3. Locate the following components on the preamplifier board (Figure 11-):
 HVPS coarse adjustment switch (Range 0-9, then A-F).
 HVPS fine adjustment switch (Range 0-9, then A-F).
 Gain adjustment potentiometer (Full scale is 10 turns).
4. Turn the gain adjustment potentiometer 12 turns clockwise to its maximum setting.
5. Feed NO to the analyzer:
 For the M200EH use 450 ppm NO.
 For the M200Em use 18 ppm NO.
6. Wait until the STABIL value is below 0.5 ppm
7. Scroll to the NORM PMT value on the analyzer’s front panel.
8. With the NO gas concentrations mentioned instep 5 above, the NORM PMT value should be 3600 mV.
9. Set the HVPS coarse adjustment to its minimum setting (0). Set the HVPS fine adjustment switch to its
maximum setting (F).
10. Set the HVPS coarse adjustment switch to the lowest setting that will give you just above 3600 mV
NORM PMT signal. The coarse adjustment typically increments the NORM PMT signal in 100-300 mV
steps.

Figure 11-22: Pre-Amplifier Board Layout
270
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Troubleshooting & Repair

11. Adjust the HVPS fine adjustment such that the NORM PMT value is 3600-3700 mV.
 The fine adjustment typically increments the NORM PMT value by about 30 mV.
 It may be necessary to go back and forth between coarse and fine adjustments if the proper value is
at the threshold of the min/max coarse setting.
NOTE
Do not overload the PMT by accidentally setting both adjustment switches to their
maximum setting. Start at the lowest setting and increment slowly. Wait 10 seconds
between adjustments.
12. If the NORM PMT value set above is now between 3560-3640 mV, skip this step. Otherwise, adjust the
NORM PMT value with the gain potentiometer down to 3600±10 mV.
 his is the final very-fine adjustment.
13. Note that during adjustments, the NORM PMT value may be fluctuating, as the analyzer continues to
switch between NO and NOX streams as well as between measure and AutoZero modes.
 You may have to mentally average the values of NO and NOX response for this adjustment.
14. Perform a software span calibration (Section 7.2, 7.4, or 7.6) to normalize the sensor response to its
new PMT sensitivity.
15. Review the slope and offset values, the slopes should be 1.000±0.300 and the offset values should be
0.0±20 mV (-20 to +150 mV is allowed).

11.6.6. REPLACING THE PMT, HVPS OR TEC
The photo multiplier tube (PMT) should last for the lifetime of the analyzer. However, in some cases, the high
voltage power supply (HVPS) or the thermo-electric cooler (TEC) may fail. In case of PMT, HVPS or TEC
failure, the sensor assembly needs to be opened in order to change one of these components. Refer to Figure
11- for the structure of the 200EH/EM sensor assembly and follow the steps below for replacement of one of its
components. We recommend to ensure that the PMT, HVPS or TEC modules are, indeed, faulty to prevent
unnecessary opening of the sensor.
NOTE
Whereas it is possible for a skilled technician to change the PMT or HVPS through the
front panel with the sensor assembly mounted to the analyzer, we recommend to
remove the entire assembly and carry this procedure out on a clean, anti-static table
with the user wearing an anti-static wrist strap to prevent static discharge damage to
the assembly or its circuits.

1. Power down the analyzer, disconnect the power cord.
2. Remove the cover and disconnect all pneumatic and electrical connections from the sensor assembly.

271
04521C (DCN5731)

Troubleshooting & Repair

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

3. If the TEC is to be replaced, remove the reaction cell assembly at this point by unscrewing two holding
screws. This is necessary only if the PMT cold block is to be removed.
 This step is not necessary if the HVPS or the PMT only are exchanged.

Figure 11-22: M200EH/EM Sensor Assembly
4. Remove the two connectors on the PMT housing end plate facing towards the front panel.
5. Remove the end plate itself (4 screws with plastic washers).
6. Remove the dryer packages inside the PMT housing.
7. Along with the plate, slide out the OPTIC TEST LED and the thermistor that measures the PMT
temperature.
 Both may be coated with a white, thermal conducting paste.
 Do not contaminate the inside of the housing with this grease, as it may contaminate the PMT glass
tube on re-assembly.
8. Unscrew the PMT assembly, which is held to the cold block by two plastic screws.
9. Discard the plastic screws and replace with new screws at the end of this procedure (the threads get
stripped easily and it is recommended to use new screws).
10. Carefully take out the assembly consisting of the HVPS, the gasket and the PMT.
11. Change the PMT or the HVPS or both, clean the PMT glass tube with a clean, anti-static wipe and do
not touch it after cleaning.
272
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Troubleshooting & Repair

12. If the cold block or TEC is to be changed:
a) Disconnect the TEC driver board from the preamplifier board, remove the cooler fan duct (4 screws
on its side) including the driver board.
b) Disconnect the driver board from the TEC and set the sub-assembly aside.
13. Remove the end plate with the cooling fins (4 screws) and slide out the PMT cold block assembly, which
contains the TEC.
14. Unscrew the TEC from the cooling fins and the cold block and replace it with a new unit.
15. Re-assemble this TEC subassembly in reverse order.
 Make sure to use thermal grease between TEC and cooling fins as well as between TEC and cold
block and that the side opening in the cold block will face the reaction cell when assembled.
 Evenly tighten the long mounting screws for good thermal conductivity.
CAUTION
The thermo-electric cooler needs to be mounted flat to the heat sink. If there is any
significant gap, the TEC might burn out. Make sure to apply heat sink paste before
mounting it and tighten the screws evenly and cross-wise.
16. Re-insert the TEC subassembly in reverse order.
 Make sure that the O-ring is placed properly and the assembly is tightened evenly.
17. Re-insert the PMT/HVPS subassembly in reverse order and don’t forget the gasket between HVPS and
PMT.
 Use new plastic screws to mount the PMT assembly on the PMT cold block.
18. Insert the LED and thermistor into the cold block, insert new drying packages and carefully replace the
end plate by making sure that the O-ring is properly in place.
 Improperly placed O-rings will cause leaks, which – in turn – cause moisture to condense on the
inside of the cooler and likely cause a short in the HVPS.
19. Reconnect the cables and the reaction cell (evenly tighten these screws).
20. Replace the sensor assembly into the chassis and fasten with four screws and washers.
21. Reconnect all electrical and pneumatic connections.
22. leak check the system.
23. Power up the analyzer.
24. Verify the basic operation of the analyzer using the ETEST and OTEST features or zero and span
gases, then carry out a hardware calibration of the analyzer (Section 11.6.5) followed by a software
calibration.

273
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Troubleshooting & Repair

11.7. REMOVING / REPLACING THE RELAY PCA FROM THE
INSTRUMENT
This is the most commonly used version of the Relay PCA. It includes a bank of solid state AC relays. This
version is installed in analyzers where components such as AC powered heaters must be turned ON & OFF. A
retainer plate is installed over the relay to keep them securely seated in their sockets.

Retainer
Mounting
Screws

AC Relay
Retainer Plate
Figure 11-23: Relay PCA with AC Relay Retainer In Place
The Relay retainer plate installed on the relay PCA covers the lower right mounting screw of the relay PCA.
Therefore, when removing the relay PCA, the retainer plate must be removed first.

Mounting
Screws

AC Relay Retain Occludes
Mounting Screw on
P/N 045230200
Figure 11-24: Relay PCA Mounting Screw Locations
274
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

Troubleshooting & Repair

11.8. TECHNICAL ASSISTANCE
If this manual and its trouble-shooting / repair sections do not solve your problems, technical assistance may be
obtained from Teledyne-API, Customer Service, 9480 Carroll Park Drive, San Diego, CA 92121. Phone: +1 858
657 9800 or 1-800 324 5190. Fax: +1 858 657 9816. Email: api-customerservice@teledyne.com. Before you
contact customer service, fill out the problem report form in Appendix C, which is also available online for
electronic submission at http://www.teledyne-api.com/forms/.

USER NOTES:

275
04521C (DCN5731)

04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

A Primer on Electro-Static Discharge

12. A PRIMER ON ELECTRO-STATIC DISCHARGE
Teledyne Instruments considers the prevention of damage caused by the discharge of static electricity to be
extremely important part of making sure that your analyzer continues to provide reliable service for a long time.
This section describes how static electricity occurs, why it is so dangerous to electronic components and
assemblies as well as how to prevent that damage from occurring.

12.1. HOW STATIC CHARGES ARE CREATED
Modern electronic devices such as the types used in the various electronic assemblies of your analyzer, are very
small, require very little power and operate very quickly. Unfortunately, the same characteristics that allow them
to do these things also make them very susceptible to damage from the discharge of static electricity. Controlling
electrostatic discharge begins with understanding how electro-static charges occur in the first place.
Static electricity is the result of something called triboelectric charging which happens whenever the atoms of the
surface layers of two materials rub against each other. As the atoms of the two surfaces move together and
separate, some electrons from one surface are retained by the other.
Materials
Makes
Contact

+

Materials
Separate

+

+

+

PROTONS = 3
ELECTRONS = 3

PROTONS = 3
ELECTRONS = 3

NET CHARGE = 0

NET CHARGE = 0

PROTONS = 3
ELECTRONS = 2

PROTONS = 3
ELECTRONS = 4

NET CHARGE = -1

NET CHARGE = +1

Figure 12-1: Triboelectric Charging
If one of the surfaces is a poor conductor or even a good conductor that is not grounded, the resulting positive or
negative charge cannot bleed off and becomes trapped in place, or static. The most common example of
triboelectric charging happens when someone wearing leather or rubber soled shoes walks across a nylon carpet
or linoleum tiled floor. With each step, electrons change places and the resulting electro-static charge builds up,
quickly reaching significant levels. Pushing an epoxy printed circuit board across a workbench, using a plastic
handled screwdriver or even the constant jostling of StyrofoamTM pellets during shipment can also build hefty
static charges

Table 12-1: Static Generation Voltages for Typical Activities
MEANS OF GENERATION

65-90% RH

10-25% RH

1,500V

35,000V

Walking across vinyl tile

250V

12,000V

Worker at bench

100V

6,000V

Poly bag picked up from bench

1,200V

20,000V

Moving around in a chair padded
with urethane foam

1,500V

18,000V

Walking across nylon carpet

277
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

A Primer on Electro-Static Discharge

12.2. HOW ELECTRO-STATIC CHARGES CAUSE DAMAGE
Damage to components occurs when these static charges come into contact with an electronic device. Current
flows as the charge moves along the conductive circuitry of the device and the typically very high voltage levels of
the charge overheat the delicate traces of the integrated circuits, melting them or even vaporizing parts of them.
When examined by microscope the damage caused by electro-static discharge looks a lot like tiny bomb craters
littered across the landscape of the component’s circuitry.
A quick comparison of the values in Table 12-1 with the those shown in the Table 12-2, listing device
susceptibility levels, shows why Semiconductor Reliability News estimates that approximately 60% of device
failures are the result of damage due to electro-static discharge.

Table 12-2: Sensitivity of Electronic Devices to Damage by ESD

DEVICE

DAMAGE SUSCEPTIBILITY VOLTAGE
RANGE
DAMAGE BEGINS
OCCURRING AT

CATASTROPHIC
DAMAGE AT

MOSFET

10

100

VMOS

30

1800

NMOS

60

100

GaAsFET

60

2000

EPROM

100

100

JFET

140

7000

SAW

150

500

Op-AMP

190

2500

CMOS

200

3000

Schottky Diodes

300

2500

Film Resistors

300

3000

This Film Resistors

300

7000

ECL

500

500

SCR

500

1000

Schottky TTL

500

2500

Potentially damaging electro-static discharges can occur:


Any time a charged surface (including the human body) discharges to a device. Even simple contact of a
finger to the leads of a sensitive device or assembly can allow enough discharge to cause damage. A
similar discharge can occur from a charged conductive object, such as a metallic tool or fixture.



When static charges accumulated on a sensitive device discharges from the device to another surface
such as packaging materials, work surfaces, machine surfaces or other device. In some cases, charged
device discharges can be the most destructive.
A typical example of this is the simple act of installing an electronic assembly into the connector or wiring
harness of the equipment in which it is to function. If the assembly is carrying a static charge, as it is
connected to ground a discharge will occur.



Whenever a sensitive device is moved into the field of an existing electro-static field, a charge may be
induced on the device in effect discharging the field onto the device. If the device is then momentarily
grounded while within the electrostatic field or removed from the region of the electrostatic field and
grounded somewhere else, a second discharge will occur as the charge is transferred from the device to
ground.

278
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

A Primer on Electro-Static Discharge

12.3. COMMON MYTHS ABOUT ESD DAMAGE


I didn’t feel a shock so there was no electro-static discharge: The human nervous system isn’t able
to feel a static discharge of less than 3500 volts. Most devices are damaged by discharge levels much
lower than that.



I didn’t touch it so there was no electro-static discharge: Electro-static charges are fields whose lines
of force can extend several inches or sometimes even feet away from the surface bearing the charge.



It still works so there was no damage: Sometimes the damaged caused by electro-static discharge can
completely sever a circuit trace causing the device to fail immediately. More likely, the trace will be only
partially occluded by the damage causing degraded performance of the device or worse, weakening the
trace. This weakened circuit may seem to function fine for a short time, but even the very low voltage and
current levels of the device’s normal operating levels will eat away at the defect over time causing the
device to fail well before its designed lifetime is reached.
These latent failures are often the most costly since the failure of the equipment in which the damaged
device is installed causes down time, lost data, lost productivity, as well as possible failure and damage to
other pieces of equipment or property.



Static Charges can’t build up on a conductive surface: There are two errors in this statement.
Conductive devices can build static charges if they are not grounded. The charge will be equalized
across the entire device, but without access to earth ground, they are still trapped and can still build to
high enough levels to cause damage when they are discharged.
A charge can be induced onto the conductive surface and/or discharge triggered in the presence of a
charged field such as a large static charge clinging to the surface of a nylon jacket of someone walking up
to a workbench.



As long as my analyzer is properly installed, it is safe from damage caused by static discharges:
It is true that when properly installed the chassis ground of your analyzer is tied to earth ground and its
electronic components are prevented from building static electric charges themselves. This does not
prevent discharges from static fields built up on other things, like you and your clothing, from discharging
through the instrument and damaging it.

12.4. BASIC PRINCIPLES OF STATIC CONTROL
It is impossible to stop the creation of instantaneous static electric charges. It is not, however difficult to prevent
those charges from building to dangerous levels or prevent damage due to electro-static discharge from
occurring.

279
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

A Primer on Electro-Static Discharge

12.4.1. General Rules
Only handle or work on all electronic assemblies at a properly set up ESD station. Setting up an ESD safe
workstation need not be complicated. A protective mat properly tied to ground and a wrist strap are all that is
needed to create a basic anti-ESD workstation (see figure 12-2).
P r o t e c t iv e M a t

W r is t S t r a p

G r o u n d P o in t

Figure 12-2: Basic anti-ESD Work Station
For technicians that work in the field, special lightweight and portable anti-ESD kits are available from most
suppliers of ESD protection gear. These include everything needed to create a temporary anti-ESD work area
anywhere.


Always wear an Anti-ESD wrist strap when working on the electronic assemblies of your analyzer.
An anti-ESD wrist strap keeps the person wearing it at or near the same potential as other grounded
objects in the work area and allows static charges to dissipate before they can build to dangerous levels.
Anti-ESD wrist straps terminated with alligator clips are available for use in work areas where there is no
available grounded plug.
Also, anti-ESD wrist straps include a current limiting resistor (usually around one meg-ohm) that protects
you should you accidentally short yourself to the instrument’s power supply.



Simply touching a grounded piece of metal is insufficient. While this may temporarily bleed off static
charges present at the time, once you stop touching the grounded metal new static charges will
immediately begin to re-build. In some conditions, a charge large enough to damage a component can
rebuild in just a few seconds.



Always store sensitive components and assemblies in anti-ESD storage bags or bins: Even when
you are not working on them, store all devices and assemblies in a closed anti-Static bag or bin. This will
prevent induced charges from building up on the device or assembly and nearby static fields from
discharging through it.



Use metallic anti-ESD bags for storing and shipping ESD sensitive components and assemblies
rather than pink-poly bags. The famous, “pink-poly” bags are made of a plastic that is impregnated with
a liquid (similar to liquid laundry detergent) which very slowly sweats onto the surface of the plastic
creating a slightly conductive layer over the surface of the bag.
While this layer may equalizes any charges that occur across the whole bag, it does not prevent the build
up of static charges. If laying on a conductive, grounded surface, these bags will allow charges to bleed
away but the very charges that build up on the surface of the bag itself can be transferred through the bag
by induction onto the circuits of your ESD sensitive device. Also, the liquid impregnating the plastic is
eventually used up after which the bag is as useless for preventing damage from ESD as any ordinary
plastic bag.
Anti-Static bags made of plastic impregnated with metal (usually silvery in color) provide all of the charge
equalizing abilities of the pink-poly bags but also, when properly sealed, create a Faraday cage that
completely isolates the contents from discharges and the inductive transfer of static charges.

280
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

A Primer on Electro-Static Discharge

Storage bins made of plastic impregnated with carbon (usually black in color) are also excellent at
dissipating static charges and isolating their contents from field effects and discharges.


Never use ordinary plastic adhesive tape near an ESD sensitive device or to close an anti-ESD
bag. The act of pulling a piece of standard plastic adhesive tape, such as Scotch® tape, from its roll will
generate a static charge of several thousand or even tens of thousands of volts on the tape itself and an
associated field effect that can discharge through or be induced upon items up to a foot away.

12.4.2. Basic anti-ESD Procedures for Analyzer Repair and Maintenance
12.4.2.1. Working at the Instrument Rack
When working on the analyzer while it is in the instrument rack and plugged into a properly grounded power
supply.
1. Attach your anti-ESD wrist strap to ground before doing anything else.


Use a wrist strap terminated with an alligator clip and attach it to a bare metal portion of the instrument
chassis. This will safely connect you to the same ground level to which the instrument and all of its
components are connected.

2. Pause for a second or two to allow any static charges to bleed away.
3. Open the casing of the analyzer and begin work. Up to this point, the closed metal casing of your analyzer
has isolated the components and assemblies inside from any conducted or induced static charges.
4. If you must remove a component from the instrument, do not lay it down on a non-ESD preventative surface
where static charges may lie in wait.
5. Only disconnect your wrist strap after you have finished work and closed the case of the analyzer.

12.4.2.2. Working at an Anti-ESD Work Bench.
When working on an instrument of an electronic assembly while it is resting on an anti-ESD work bench:
1. Plug your anti-ESD wrist strap into the grounded receptacle of the work station before touching any items
on the work station and while standing at least a foot or so away. This will allow any charges you are
carrying to bleed away through the ground connection of the workstation and prevent discharges due to
field effects and induction from occurring.
2. Pause for a second or two to allow any static charges to bleed away.
3. Only open any anti-ESD storage bins or bags containing sensitive devices or assemblies after you have
plugged your wrist strap into the workstation.


Lay the bag or bin on the workbench surface.



Before opening the container, wait several seconds for any static charges on the outside surface of the
container to be bled away by the workstation’s grounded protective mat.

4. Do not pick up tools that may be carrying static charges while also touching or holding an ESD Sensitive
Device.


Only lay tools or ESD-sensitive devices and assemblies on the conductive surface of your workstation.
Never lay them down on any non-ESD preventative surface.

5. Place any static sensitive devices or assemblies in anti-static storage bags or bins and close the bag or
bin before unplugging your wrist strap.

281
04521C (DCN5731)

A Primer on Electro-Static Discharge

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

6. Disconnecting your wrist strap is always the last action taken before leaving the workbench.

12.4.2.3. Transferring Components from Rack to Bench and Back
When transferring a sensitive device from an installed Teledyne Instruments analyzer to an Anti-ESD workbench
or back:
1. Follow the instructions listed above for working at the instrument rack and workstation.
2. Never carry the component or assembly without placing it in an anti-ESD bag or bin.
3. Before using the bag or container allow any surface charges on it to dissipate:


If you are at the instrument rack, hold the bag in one hand while your wrist strap is connected to a ground
point.



If you are at an anti-ESD workbench, lay the container down on the conductive work surface.



In either case wait several seconds.

4. Place the item in the container.
5. Seal the container. If using a bag, fold the end over and fastening it with anti-ESD tape.


Folding the open end over isolates the component(s) inside from the effects of static fields.



Leaving the bag open or simply stapling it shut without folding it closed prevents the bag from forming a
complete protective envelope around the device.

6. Once you have arrived at your destination, allow any surface charges that may have built up on the bag or bin
during travel to dissipate:


Connect your wrist strap to ground.



If you are at the instrument rack, hold the bag in one hand while your wrist strap is connected to a ground
point.



If you are at a anti-ESD work bench, lay the container down on the conductive work surface



In either case wait several seconds

7. Open the container.

12.4.2.4. Opening Shipments from Teledyne Instruments Customer Service.
Packing materials such as bubble pack and Styrofoam pellets are extremely efficient generators of static electric
charges. To prevent damage from ESD, Teledyne Instruments ships all electronic components and assemblies in
properly sealed anti-ESD containers.
Static charges will build up on the outer surface of the anti-ESD container during shipping as the packing
materials vibrate and rub against each other. To prevent these static charges from damaging the components or
assemblies being shipped make sure that you always unpack shipments from Teledyne Instruments Customer
Service by:
1. Opening the outer shipping box away from the anti-ESD work area.
2. Carry the still sealed ant-ESD bag, tube or bin to the anti-ESD work area.
3. Follow steps 6 and 7 of Section 12.4.2.3 above when opening the anti-ESD container at the work station.

282
04521C (DCN5731)

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

A Primer on Electro-Static Discharge

4. Reserve the anti-ESD container or bag to use when packing electronic components or assemblies to be
returned to Teledyne Instruments.

12.4.2.5. Packing Components for Return to Teledyne Instruments Customer Service.
Always pack electronic components and assemblies to be sent to Teledyne Instruments Customer Service in antiESD bins, tubes or bags.

WARNING
 DO NOT use pink-poly bags.
 NEVER allow any standard plastic packaging materials to touch the
electronic component/assembly directly
 This includes, but is not limited to, plastic bubble-pack, Styrofoam
peanuts, open cell foam, closed cell foam, and adhesive tape
 DO NOT use standard adhesive tape as a sealer. Use ONLY anti-ESD
tape

1. Never carry the component or assembly without placing it in an anti-ESD bag or bin.
2. Before using the bag or container allow any surface charges on it to dissipate:


If you are at the instrument rack, hold the bag in one hand while your wrist strap is connected to a ground
point.



If you are at an anti-ESD workbench, lay the container down on the conductive work surface.



In either case wait several seconds.

3. Place the item in the container.
4. Seal the container. If using a bag, fold the end over and fastening it with anti-ESD tape.


Folding the open end over isolates the component(s) inside from the effects of static fields.



Leaving the bag open or simply stapling it shut without folding it closed prevents the bag from forming a
complete protective envelope around the device.
NOTE

If you do not already have an adequate supply of anti-ESD bags or containers available,
Teledyne Instruments’ Customer Service department will supply them. Follow the
instructions listed above for working at the instrument rack and workstation.

User Notes:

283
04521C (DCN5731)

A Primer on Electro-Static Discharge

Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual

USER NOTES:

284
04521C (DCN5731)

Addendum to the M200EM/EH Operators Manual (P/N 04521)

(Ref: 06116A)

ADDENDUM TO THE M200EM/EH OPERATORS
MANUAL (P/N 04521)
1. PREFACE
This addendum is an update to the Model M200EM/EH Operators Manual. It documents the
following improvements:


STAINLESS STEEL OZONE DESTRUCT P/N 051210000: The Ozone Destruct now resides
down stream of the vacuum manifold. Previously, it was located downstream of the
reaction cell.



BYPASS MANIFOLD ASSEMBLY P/N 044430100: As a cost reduction, the bypass manifold is
now incorporated into the three port reaction cell.

2. CHANGES AND UPDATES
2.1. OZONE DESTRUCT
The following photograph identifies the Ozone Destruct assembly and pneumatic connections.

FIGURE 1.0 - OZONE DESTRUCT ASSY P/N 05121
Addendum-1
04521C (DCN5731)

(Ref: 06116A)

Addendum to the M200EM/EH Operators Manual (P/N 04521)

2.2. THREE PORT REACTION CELL
By incorporating the bypass flow orifice into the reaction cell, the bypass manifold assembly,
which previously resided between the vacuum manifold and Molycon container, is no longer
required.

Ozone Flow Orifice:
7 Mil for M200EM Or EH

Sample Flow:
No Orifice

Bypass Flow Orifice:
7 Mil for M200EM
3 Mil for M200EH

FIGURE 2.0 – THREE PORT REACTION CELL ASSY P/N 06028

Addendum-2
04521C (DCN5731)

Model 200EH/EM (Ref: 05147F)

APPENDIX A - Version Specific Software Documentation

APPENDIX A - Version Specific Software Documentation
APPENDIX A-1: Model 200EH/EM Software Menu Trees
APPENDIX A-2: Model 200EH/EM Setup Variables Available Via Serial I/O
APPENDIX A-3: Model 200EH/EM Warnings and Test Measurements Via Serial I/O
APPENDIX A-4: Model 200EH/EM Signal I/O Definitions
APPENDIX A-5: Model 200EH/EM iDAS Functions
APPENDIX A-6: Model 200EH/EM Terminal Command Designators

A-1
04521C (DCN5731)

APPENDIX A-1: M200EH/EM Software Menu Trees, Revision F.0

Model 200EH/EM (Ref: 05147F)

APPENDIX A-1: M200EH/EM Software Menu Trees, Revision F.0

SAMPLE

TEST 1


A1:
A2:
A3:
A4:

User
User
User
User

CALS 4

MSG 1

HIGH

LOW

HIGH

LOW

HIGH

SPAN

CONC

2

Selectable Range
Selectable Range 2
Selectable Range 2
Selectable Range 2
NOX STB
SAMP FLOW
0ZONE FLOW
PMT
NORM PMT
AZERO
HVPS
RCELL TEMP
BOX TEMP
PMT TEMP
MF TEMP
O2 CELL TEMP 3
MOLY TEMP
RCEL
SAMP
NOX SLOPE
NOX OFFSET
NO SLOPE
NO OFFSET
O2 SLOPE 3
O2 OFFSET 3
TIME

ZERO

CLR

1

SETUP

O2 3

NOX

LOW

CALZ 4

SPAN

CONC

NOX

NO
NO2

ZERO

Press to cycle
through the
active warning
messages.
Press to clear
an active
warning
messages.

CONV
CAL
CFG

PRIMARY SETUP
MENU

SET
ACAL 4

DAS

RANGE

PASS

CLK

MORE

SECONDARY
SETUP MENU
1

Only appears when warning messages are active.
User selectable analog outputs A1 – A4 (see Section X.X.X)
3
Only appears if analyzer is equipped with O2 sensor option.
4
Only appears if analyzer is equipped with Zero/Span or IZS valve
options.
2

Figure A-1:

COMM

VARS

DIAG

ALAR

Basic Sample Display Menu

A-2
04521C (DCN5731)

APPENDIX A-1: M200EH/EM Software Menu Trees, Revision F.0

Model 200EH/EM (Ref: 05147F)

SAMPLE

ACAL 1

CFG



PREV

DAS

NEXT

RNGE

PASS

Go to iDAS
Menu Tree

MODE

MORE

ON
OFF

SEQ 1)
SEQ 2)
SEQ 3)

 MODEL TYPE AND
NUMBER
 PART NUMBER
 SERIAL NUMBER
 SOFTWARE REVISION
 LIBRARY REVISION
 iCHIP SOFTWARE
PREV
REVISION
 HESSEN PROTOCOL
REVISION 2
 CPU TYPE & OS
REVISION
 DATE FACTORY
CONFIGURATION SAVED

1

CLK

ACAL menu and its submenus only appear if
analyzer is equipped with Zero/Span or IZS
valve options.
2
Only appears if Dilution option is active
3
Only appears if Hessen protocol is active.
4
O 2 Modes only appear if analyzer is
equipped with O2 sensor option.
5
DOES NOT appear if one of the three O2
modes is selected

TIME

NEXT

UNIT

DISABLED
ZERO
ZERO-LO
ZERO-LO-HI
ZERO-HI
LO
LO-HI
HI
O2 ZERO 4
O2 ZERO-SP 4
O2 SPAN 4

Figure A-2:

PPM

DIL 3

MGM

DATE

Go to
SECONDARY SETUP
Menu Tree

SET


ON
TIMER ENABLE
DURATION
CALIBRATE
5
RANGE TO CAL

OFF

STARTING DATE
STARTING TIME
DELTA DAYS
DELTA TIME

LOW 5 HIGH 5

Primary Setup Menu (Except iDAS)

A-3
04521C (DCN5731)

APPENDIX A-1: M200EH/EM Software Menu Trees, Revision F.0

Model 200EH/EM (Ref: 05147F)

SAMPLE

SETUP

CFG ACAL 1

RNGE PASS CLK MORE

DAS
VIEW
PREV

EDIT

NEXT

ENTER PASSWORD: 818

CONC
CALDAT
CALCHE
HIRES
DIAG

PREV
CONC
CALDAT
CALCHE
HIRES
DIAG

VIEW
PV10 PREV NEXT NX10



Selects the data point to be viewed
Cycles through
parameters
assigned to this
iDAS channel

PREV

INS

DEL
YES

 NEXT NX10

NAME
EVENT
PARAMETERS
REPORT PERIOD
NUMBER OF RECORDS
RS-232 REPORT
CHANNEL ENABLE
NO
CAL MODE

YES 2
Cycles through
list of available
trigger events 3

NEXT

Create/edit the name of the channel

Sets the time lapse between
each report

ON
PREV

NEXT

INS

DEL

EDIT 2 PRNT

OFF
YES 2

Cycles through list of
currently active
parameters for this
channel

YES



NO

Sets the maximum number of
records recorded by this
channel

EDIT PRNT

SAMPLE MODE

PRECISION
1

2

Cycles through list of available &
currently active parameters for
this channel

PREV

NEXT

Figure A-3:

INST

NO

AVG

MIN

MAX

3

ACAL menu only appear if analyzer is equipped with
Zero/Span or IZS valve options.

Editing an existing iDAS channel will erase any
data stored on the channel options.
Changing the event for an existing iDAS
channel DOES NOT erase the data stored on
the channel.

Primary Setup Menu  iDAS Submenu

A-4
04521C (DCN5731)

APPENDIX A-1: M200EH/EM Software Menu Trees, Revision F.0

Model 200EH/EM (Ref: 05147F)

SAMPLE
CFG

DAS RNGE PASS

ACAL

SETUP
MORE

CLK

COMM

VARS

INET 1

HESN 2

ENTER PASSWORD: 818

Go to
COMM / Hessen
Menu Tree

ID



EDIT

ENTER PASSWORD: 818

1
COM1 COM2



EDIT

PREV

DHCP
OFF

EDIT

EDIT
INSTRUMENT IP 3
GATEWAY IP 3
SUBNET MASK 3

TCP PORT 4
HOSTNAME 5

300
1200
2400
4800
9600
19200
38400
57600
115200

QUIET
COMPUTER
SECURITY
HESSEN PROTOCOL
E, 7, 1
RS-485
MULTIDROP PROTOCOL
ENABLE MODEM
ERROR CHECKING
XON/XOFF HANDSHAKE
HARDWARE
HANDSHAKE
HARDWARE FIFO
COMMAND PROMPT

ON
OFF

Figure A-4:

NEXT

0)
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)

BAUD RATE TEST PORT
TEST

ON

DIAG

JUMP EDIT

PRNT

DAS_HOLD_OFF
TPC_ENABLE
RCELL_SET
DYN_ZERO
DYN_SPAN
CONC_PRECISION
CLOCK_ADJ
ENTER PASSWORD: 818

Go to DIAG Menu Tree

1

Only appears if optional Ethernet PCA is installed.
NOTE: When Ethernet PCA is present COM2
submenu disappears.

2

Only appears if HESSEN PROTOCOL mode is ON
(See COM1 & COM2 – MODE submenu above).

3

INSTRUMENT IP, GATEWAY IP & SUBNET MASK
are only editable when DHCP is OFF.

4

Although TCP PORT is editable regardless of the
DHCP state, do not change the setting for this
property.

5

HOST NAME is only editable when DHCP is ON.

Secondary Setup Menu  COMM and VARS Submenus

A-5
04521C (DCN5731)

APPENDIX A-1: M200EH/EM Software Menu Trees, Revision F.0

Model 200EH/EM (Ref: 05147F)

SAMPLE
CFG

ACAL

DAS RNGE PASS

SETUP
MORE

CLK

COMM
HESN 2

INET 1

ID

COM1

COM2

ENTER PASSWORD: 818

ENTER PASSWORD: 818

ENTER PASSWORD: 818



RESPONSE MODE

BCC

TEXT

PREV
NOX, 211, REPORTED

EDIT

Go to COMM / VARS
Menu Tree

GAS LIST

NO2, 213 REPORTED

STATUS FLAGS

CMD

NEXT

INS

DEL
YES

NO, 212, REPORTED

NO

EDIT

PRNT

GAS TYPE
GAS ID
REPORTED

O2, 214, REPORTED
ON
OFF
1

Only appears if Ethernet Option is installed.

2

Only appears if HESSEN PROTOCOL mode is ON.

Figure A-5:

Go to DIAG Menu Tree

Set/create unique gas ID number


NOX
NO
NO2
O2

Secondary Setup Menu  Hessen Protocol Submenu

A-6
04521C (DCN5731)

APPENDIX A-1: M200EH/EM Software Menu Trees, Revision F.0

Model 200EH/EM (Ref: 05147F)

SETUP

SAMPLE
CFG

ACAL

DAS RNGE PASS

CLK

MORE

DIAG
COMM

VARS

ENTER PASSWORD: 818

PREV
DISPLAY
SEQUENCE
CONFIGURATION

ANALOG
CONFIGURATION

ANALOG
OUTPUT

SIGNAL
I/O

Press ENTR
to start test

PREV

NEXT

0)
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)

EXT ZERO CAL
EXT SPAN CAL
EXT LOW SPAN
REMOTE RANGE HI
MAINT MODE
LANG2 SELECT

6)
7)
8)
9)
10)
11)
12)
13)
14)
15)
16)
17)
18)
19)
20)
21)
22)
23)
24)
25)
26)
27)
28)
29)
30)
31)
32)
33)
34)
35)

SAMPLE LED
CAL LED
FAULT LED
AUDIBLE BEEPER
ELEC TEST
OPTIC TEST
PREAMP RANGE HIGH
O3GEN STATUS
ST SYSTEM OK
ST CONC VALID
ST HIGH RANGE
ST ZERO CAL
ST SPAN CAL
ST DIAG MODE
ST LOW SPAN CAL
ST O2 CAL
ST SYSTEM OK2
ST CONC ALARM 1
ST CONC ALARM 2
RELAY WATCHDOG
RCELL HEATER
CONV HEATER
MANIFOLD HEATER
O2 CELL HEATER
ZERO VALVE
CAL VALVE
AUTO ZERO VALVE
NOX VALVE
LOW SPAN VALVE
HIGH SPAN VALVE

NEXT
FLOW
ELECTRICAL OZONE GEN
OVERRIDE CALIBRATION
TEST

OPTIC
TEST
Press ENTR
to start test



ON

Press ENTR
to start test

EDIT
PREV

AOUTS CALIBRATED
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
ON

OUT
OUT
OUT
OUT

NEXT

INS

PREV

AIN CALIBRATED

OFF

DEL
YES

Cycles through list of
already programmed
display sequences

11
21
31
41

SAMP

OFF

EDIT

PRNT

NO

NOX
NXL
NXH
NO
NOL
NOH
NO2
N2L
N2H
O2

NEXT

DISPLAY DATA

CAL

RANGE OVER
RANGE AUTO 2 CALIBRATED OUTPUT
RANGE OFFSET 2 CAL
ON
OFF

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

Sets the
degree of
offset

36 INTERNAL ANALOG
to VOLTAGE SIGNALS
61 (see Appendix A)

CAL 2

Auto Cal

0.1V

1V

5V

10V

1

Correspond to analog Output A1 – A4 on back of analyzer

2

Only appears if one of the voltage ranges is selected.

3

Manual adjustment menu only appears if either the Auto Cal feature is OFF or the
range is set for CURRent.

Manual Cal3

DATA

SCALE UPDATE

Sets the scale
width of the
reporting range.

Cycles
through the
list of iDAS
data types.

OZONE

ENTR

DISPLAY DURATION

Sets time lapse
between data
updates on
selected output

CURR
U100

Figure A-6:

UP10

UP

DOWN

DN10

D100

DIAG Menu
A-7

04521C (DCN5731)

APPENDIX A-2: Setup Variables For Serial I/O, Revision F.0

Model 200EH/EM (Ref: 05147F)

APPENDIX A-2: Setup Variables For Serial I/O, Revision F.0
Table A-1: M200EH/EM Setup Variables, Revision F.0
Setup Variable

Numeric
Units

Default Value

Value Range

DAS_HOLD_OFF

Minutes

15

0.5–20

MEASURE_MODE

—

NO-NOX,

NO, NOX,
NOX-NO,
NON-OX

Gas measure mode. Enclose value in
double quotes (") when setting from
the RS-232 interface.

TPC_ENABLE

—

ON

OFF, ON

ON enables temperature/ pressure
compensation; OFF disables it.

DYN_ZERO

—

OFF

ON, OFF

ON enables remote dynamic zero
calibration; OFF disables it.

DYN_SPAN

—

OFF

ON, OFF

ON enables remote dynamic span
calibration; OFF disables it.

CONC_PRECISION

—

3

CLOCK_ADJ

Sec./Day

0

AUTO, 0, 1, 2, 3,
4
-60–60
ENGL, SECD,

Description
Duration of DAS hold off period.

Number of digits to display to the
right of the decimal point for
concentrations on the display.
Enclose value in double quotes (")
when setting from the RS-232
interface.
Time-of-day clock speed adjustment.
Selects the language to use for the
user interface. Enclose value in
double quotes (") when setting from
the RS-232 interface.

LANGUAGE_SELECT

—

ENGL

MAINT_TIMEOUT

Hours

2

0.1–100

BXTEMP_TPC_GAIN

—

0

0–10

Box temperature compensation
attenuation factor.

RCTEMP_TPC_GAIN

—

0

0–10

Reaction cell temperature
compensation attenuation factor.

RCPRESS_TPC_GAIN

—

1

0–10

Reaction cell pressure compensation
attenuation factor.

SPRESS_TPC_GAIN

—

1

0–10

Sample pressure compensation
attenuation factor.

CE_FACTOR1

—

1

0.8–1.2

Moly converter efficiency factor for
range 1.

CE_FACTOR2

—

1

0.8–1.2

Moly converter efficiency factor for
range 2.

1 SEC

33 MS,
66 MS,
133 MS,
266 MS,
533 MS, 1 SEC,
2 SEC

CONV_TIME

SG_CONV_TIME

—

—

33 MS

EXTN

Same as above.

NEG_NO2_SUPPRESS

—

ON

ON, OFF

FILT_SIZE

Samples

1
2
5 , 10

1–500

Time until automatically switching out
of software-controlled maintenance
mode.

Conversion time for PMT detector
channel. Enclose value in double
quotes (") when setting from the RS232 interface.

Conversion time for PMT detector
channel in single-gas measure
modes. Enclose value in double
quotes (") when setting from the RS232 interface.
ON suppresses negative NO2 in
during switching mode;
OFF does not suppress negative NO2
readings
Moving average filter size.

A-8
04521C (DCN5731)

Model 200EH/EM (Ref: 05147F)

APPENDIX A-2: Setup Variables For Serial I/O, Revision F.0

Setup Variable

Numeric
Units

Default Value

Value Range

SG_FILT_SIZE

Samples

60

1–500

FILT_ADAPT

—

ON

ON, OFF

FILT_OMIT_DELTA

PPM

FILT_OMIT_PCT

%

FILT_SHORT_DELT

PPM

5 , 0.5

FILT_SHORT_PCT

%

5 ,7

1

2

1–100

Percent change in concentration to
shorten filter.

FILT_ASIZE

Samples

2 ,3

1

2

1–500

Moving average filter size in adaptive
mode.

SG_FILT_ASIZE

Samples

10

1–500

Moving average filter size in adaptive
mode, in single-gas measure modes.

60 1,80 2

0–200

Delay before leaving adaptive filter
mode.

Seconds

60

0–200

Delay before leaving adaptive filter
mode in single-gas measure modes.

—

ON

ON, OFF

O2_FILT_SIZE 4

Samples

60

1–500

O2 moving average filter size in
normal mode.

O2_FILT_ASIZE 4

Samples

10

1–500

O2 moving average filter size in
adaptive mode.

O2_FILT_DELTA 4

%

2

0.1–100

Absolute change in O2 concentration
to shorten filter.

%

2

0.1–100

Relative change in O2 concentration
to shorten filter.

Seconds

20

0–300

Delay before leaving O2 adaptive
filter mode.

0.1–30

Dwell time after switching valve to
NOX position.

1

10 , 0.8

2

10

Moving average filter size in singlegas measure modes.

1
5–100 ,

0.1–100

2

1–100
1

Seconds

FILT_DELAY
SG_FILT_DELAY
O2_FILT_ADAPT

O2_FILT_PCT

4

4

O2_FILT_DELAY

4

1

1

5–100 ,

2

0.1–100 2

2

Description

ON enables adaptive filter; OFF
disables it.
Absolute change in concentration to
omit readings.
Percent change in concentration to
omit readings.
Absolute change in concentration to
shorten filter.

ON enables O2 adaptive filter; OFF
disables it.

NOX_DWELL

Seconds

SG_NOX_DWELL

Seconds

1

0.1–30

Dwell time after switching valve to
NOX position in single-gas measure
modes.

NOX_SAMPLE

Samples

2

1–30

Number of samples to take in NOX
mode.

SG_NOX_SAMPLE

Samples

2

1–30

Number of samples to take in NOX
mode in single-gas measure modes.

NO_DWELL

Seconds

SG_NO_DWELL

Seconds

NO_SAMPLE

4.2 , 3.5

0.1–30

Dwell time after switching valve to
NO position.

1

0.1–30

Dwell time after switching valve to
NO position in single-gas measure
modes.

Samples

2

1–30

Number of samples to take in NO
mode.

SG_NO_SAMPLE

Samples

2

1–30

Number of samples to take in NO
mode in single-gas measure modes.

USER_UNITS

—

PPM

PPM, MGM

Concentration units for user
interface. Enclose value in double
quotes (") when setting from the RS232 interface.

1

4.2 , 3.0

2

A-9

04521C (DCN5731)

APPENDIX A-2: Setup Variables For Serial I/O, Revision F.0

Model 200EH/EM (Ref: 05147F)

Setup Variable

Numeric
Units

Default Value

Value Range

Description

DIL_FACTOR

—

1

1–1000

Dilution factor. Used only if is dilution
enabled with FACTORY_OPT
variable.

AZERO_ENABLE

—

ON

ON, OFF

ON enables auto-zero; OFF disables
it.

AZERO_FREQ

Minutes

2

0–60

AZERO_DWELL

Seconds

4

0.1–60

Dwell time after opening auto-zero
valve.

AZERO_POST_DWELL

Seconds

4

0–60

Dwell time after closing auto-zero
valve.

AZERO_SAMPLE

Samples

2

1–10

Number of auto-zero samples to
average.

SG_AZERO_SAMP

Samples

2

1–10

Number of auto-zero samples to
average in single-gas measure
modes.

AZERO_FSIZE

Samples

8

1–50

Moving average filter size for autozero samples.

AZERO_LIMIT

mV

200

0–1000

Maximum auto-zero offset allowed.

NOX_SPAN1

Conc.

1
2
80 , 16

1–5000

Target NOX concentration during
span calibration of range 1.

NO_SPAN1

Conc.

1
2
80 , 16

1–5000

Target NO concentration during span
calibration of range 1.

NO2_SPAN1

Conc.

1
2
80 , 16

1–5000

Target NO2 concentration during
converter efficiency calibration of
range 1.

NOX_SLOPE1

PPM/mV

1

0.25–4

NOX slope for range 1.

NOX_OFFSET1

mV

0

-10000–10000

NOX offset for range 1.

NO_SLOPE1

PPM/mV

1

0.25–4

NO slope for range 1.

NO_OFFSET1

mV

0

-10000–10000

NO offset for range 1.

NOX_SPAN2

Conc.

1
2
80 , 16

1–5000

Target NOX concentration during
span calibration of range 2.

NO_SPAN2

Conc.

1
2
80 , 16

1–5000

Target NO concentration during span
calibration of range 2.

NO2_SPAN2

Conc.

1
2
80 , 16

1–5000

Target NO2 concentration during
converter efficiency calibration of
range 2.

NOX_SLOPE2

PPM/mV

1

0.25–4

NOX slope for range 2.

NOX_OFFSET2

mV

0

-10000–10000

NOX offset for range 2.

NO_SLOPE2

PPM/mV

1

0.25–4

NO slope for range 2.

mV

0

-10000–10000

NO offset for range 2.

%

20.95

0–100

Target O2 concentration during span
calibration.

NO_OFFSET2
O2_TARG_SPAN_CONC
O2_SLOPE 4

4

Auto-zero frequency.

—

1

0.5–2

O2 slope.

O2_OFFSET

4

%

0

-10–10

O2 offset.

O2_RANGE

4

%

100

0.1–500

O2 concentration range.

STD_O2_CELL_TEMP 4

ºK

323

1–500

PHYS_RANGE1

PPM

1
2
500 , 20

PHYS_RANGE2
CONC_RANGE1

PPM
Conc.

1

5000 , 200
1
2
100 , 20

2

Standard O2 cell temperature for
temperature compensation.

5–5000

Low pre-amp range.

5–5000

High pre-amp range.

1

5–5000 ,
2
1–500

D/A concentration range 1 or range
for NOX.

A-10
04521C (DCN5731)

Model 200EH/EM (Ref: 05147F)

Setup Variable

APPENDIX A-2: Setup Variables For Serial I/O, Revision F.0

Numeric
Units

Default Value

Value Range

50
RCELL_SET

ºC

Warnings:

30–70

Description
Reaction cell temperature set point
and warning limits.

45–55
50
MANIFOLD_SET

ºC

Warnings:

30–70

Manifold temperature set point and
warning limits.

45–55
50
O2_CELL_SET 4

ºC

Warnings:

30–70

O2 sensor cell temperature set point
and warning limits.

45–55
CONV_TYPE

—

MOLY

NONE, MOLY,
CONV, O3KL

315
CONV_SET

ºC

Warnings:

0–800

Converter type. “CONV” is minihicon. Enclose value in double
quotes (") when setting from the RS232 interface.
Converter temperature set point and
warning limits.

305–325
CONV_TEMP_TRIG

Cycles

10

0–100

30
BOX_SET

ºC

Warnings:

0–70

Number of converter temperature
errors required to trigger warning.
Nominal box temperature set point
and warning limits.

7–48
7
PMT_SET

ºC

Warnings:

0–40

PMT temperature warning limits. Set
point is not used.

5–12
1

1+4

Sample flow warning limits. Set point
is not used.

290 , 360 ,
250 2, 320 2+4
SFLOW_SET

cc/m

Warnings:
350–600,

100–1000

200–600 1,2,
300–700 1+4, 2+4
SAMP_FLOW_SLOPE

—

1

0.001–100

250
OFLOW_SET

cc/m

OZONE_FLOW_SLOPE

—

1

0.001–100

RCELL_SAMP_RATIO

—

0.53

0.1–2

Warnings:

100–1000

Slope term to correct sample flow
rate.
Ozone flow warning limits. Set point
is not used.

200–600

298
STD_BOX_TEMP

ºK

Valid limits:

1–500

Slope term to correct ozone flow rate.
Maximum reaction cell pressure /
sample pressure ratio for valid
sample flow calculation.
Standard box temperature and valid
limits for temperature compensation.

278–338
323
STD_RCELL_TEMP

ºK

Valid limits:

1–500

Standard reaction cell temperature
and valid limits for temperature
compensation.

278–338

A-11

04521C (DCN5731)

APPENDIX A-2: Setup Variables For Serial I/O, Revision F.0

Setup Variable

Numeric
Units

Model 200EH/EM (Ref: 05147F)

Default Value

Value Range

5
STD_RCELL_PRESS

"Hg

Valid limits:

0.1–50

Description
Standard reaction cell pressure and
valid limits for pressure
compensation.

0.5–12
29.92
STD_SAMP_PRESS

"Hg

Valid limits:

0.1–50

Standard sample pressure and valid
limits for pressure compensation.

0.5–32
RS-232 COM1 mode flags. Add
values to combine flags.
1 = quiet mode
2 = computer mode
4 = enable security
16 = enable Hessen protocol

3

32 = enable multidrop

RS232_MODE

—

0

0–65535

64 = enable modem
128 = ignore RS-232 line errors
256 = disable XON / XOFF support
512 = reserved
1024 = enable RS-485 mode
2048 = even parity, 7 data bits, 1
stop bit
4096 = enable command prompt

BAUD_RATE

—

19200

300, 1200, 2400,
4800, 9600,
19200, 38400,

RS-232 COM1 baud rate. Enclose
value in double quotes (") when
setting from the RS-232 interface.

57600, 115200
Any character in
the allowed
character set. Up
to 100
characters long.

RS-232 COM1 modem initialization
string. Sent verbatim plus carriage
return to modem on power up or
manually. Enclose value in double
quotes (") when setting from the RS232 interface.

MODEM_INIT

—

“AT Y0 &D0
&H0 &I0 S0=2
&B0 &N6 &M0
E0 Q1 &W0”

RS232_MODE2

BitFlag

0,

0–65535

—

19200

300, 1200, 2400,
4800, 9600,
19200, 38400,
57600, 115200

RS-232 COM2 baud rate. Enclose
value in double quotes (") when
setting from the RS-232 interface.

MODEM_INIT2

—

“AT Y0 &D0
&H0 &I0 S0=2
&B0 &N6 &M0
E0 Q1 &W0”

Any character in
the allowed
character set. Up
to 100
characters long.

RS-232 COM2 modem initialization
string. Sent verbatim plus carriage
return to modem on power up or
manually. Enclose value in double
quotes (") when setting from the RS232 interface.

RS232_PASS

Password

940331

0–999999

MACHINE_ID

ID

200

0–9999

“Cmd> ”

Any character in
the allowed
character set. Up
to 100
characters long.

BAUD_RATE2

COMMAND_PROMPT

—

RS-232 COM2 mode flags.
(Same settings as RS232_MODE)

RS-232 log on password.
Unique ID number for instrument.
RS-232 interface command prompt.
Displayed only if enabled with
RS232_MODE variable. Enclose
value in double quotes (") when
setting from the RS-232 interface.

A-12
04521C (DCN5731)

Model 200EH/EM (Ref: 05147F)

APPENDIX A-2: Setup Variables For Serial I/O, Revision F.0

Setup Variable

Numeric
Units

Default Value

Value Range

Description

REMOTE_CAL_MODE

—

LOW

LOW, HIGH

Range to calibrate during remote
calibration. Enclose value in double
quotes (") when setting from the RS232 interface.

PASS_ENABLE

—

OFF

ON, OFF

STABIL_GAS

—

NOX

NO, NO2, NOX

STABIL_FREQ

Seconds

10

1–300

STABIL_SAMPLES

Samples

25

2–40

1

550 , 600
HVPS_SET

Volts

2

Warnings:
400–700 1,

ON enables passwords; OFF
disables them.
Selects gas for stability
measurement. Enclose value in
double quotes (") when setting from
the RS-232 interface.
Stability measurement sampling
frequency.
Number of samples in concentration
stability reading.
High voltage power supply warning
limits. Set point is not used.

0–2000

450–750 2
6
RCELL_PRESS_SET

In-Hg

Warnings:

0–100

Reaction cell pressure warning limits.
Set point is not used.

0.5–15
Reaction cell temperature control
cycle period.

RCELL_CYCLE

Seconds

10

0.5–30

RCELL_PROP

1/ºC

1

0–10

Reaction cell PID temperature control
proportional coefficient.

RCELL_INTEG

—

0.1

0–10

Reaction cell PID temperature control
integral coefficient.

RCELL_DERIV

—

0 (disabled)

0–10

Reaction cell PID temperature control
derivative coefficient.

MANIFOLD_CYCLE

Seconds

5

0.5–30

MANIFOLD_PROP

1/ºC

0.2

0–10

Manifold PID temperature control
proportional coefficient.

MANIFOLD_INTEG

—

0.1

0–10

Manifold PID temperature control
integral coefficient.

MANIFOLD_DERIV

—

0.5

0–10

Manifold PID temperature control
derivative coefficient.

O2_CELL_CYCLE 4

Seconds

10

0.5–30

O2 cell temperature control cycle
period.

Manifold temperature control cycle
period.

O2_CELL_PROP

4

—

1

0–10

O2 cell PID temperature control
proportional coefficient.

O2_CELL_INTEG

4

—

0.1

0–10

O2 cell PID temperature control
integral coefficient.

O2_CELL_DERIV

4

—

0 (disabled)

0–10

O2 cell PID temperature control
derivative coefficient.

—

8

0.1–100
Any character in
the allowed
character set. Up
to 100
characters long.

Unique serial number for instrument.
Enclose value in double quotes (")
when setting from the RS-232
interface.

HIGH,MED,

Front panel display intensity. Enclose
value in double quotes (") when
setting from the RS-232 interface.

SLOPE_CONST

SERIAL_NUMBER

—

“00000000 ”

DISP_INTENSITY

—

HIGH

LOW, DIM

Slope constant factor to keep visible
slope near 1.

A-13

04521C (DCN5731)

APPENDIX A-2: Setup Variables For Serial I/O, Revision F.0

Model 200EH/EM (Ref: 05147F)

Setup Variable

Numeric
Units

Default Value

Value Range

I2C_RESET_ENABLE

—

ON

OFF, ON

ALARM_TRIGGER

Cycles

10

1–100

Description
2

I C bus automatic reset enable.
Number of valve cycles to trigger
concentration alarm.
Time-of-day clock format flags.
Enclose value in double quotes (")
when setting from the RS-232
interface.
“%a” = Abbreviated weekday name.
“%b” = Abbreviated month name.
“%d” = Day of month as decimal
number (01 – 31).
“%H” = Hour in 24-hour format (00 –
23).
“%I” = Hour in 12-hour format (01 –
12).

CLOCK_FORMAT

—

“TIME=%H:%M:
%S”

Any character in
the allowed
character set. Up
to 100
characters long.

“%j” = Day of year as decimal
number (001 – 366).
“%m” = Month as decimal number
(01 – 12).
“%M” = Minute as decimal number
(00 – 59).
“%p” = A.M./P.M. indicator for 12hour clock.
“%S” = Second as decimal number
(00 – 59).
“%w” = Weekday as decimal number
(0 – 6; Sunday is 0).
“%y” = Year without century, as
decimal number (00 – 99).
“%Y” = Year with century, as decimal
number.
“%%” = Percent sign.
Factory option flags. Add values to
combine flags.
1 = enable dilution factor
2 = display units in concentration field
4 = zero/span valves installed
8 = low span valve installed
16 = IZS and zero/span valves
installed
32 = enable software-controlled
maintenance mode

FACTORY_OPT

—

0, 512

0–65535

64 = display temperature in converter
warning message
128 = enable switch-controlled
maintenance mode
256 = enable simultaneous display of
all gas concentrations
512 = enable manifold temperature
control
1024 = enable O2 sensor cell
temperature control (temporarily
removed)
2048 = enable Internet option

A-14
04521C (DCN5731)

Model 200EH/EM (Ref: 05147F)

Setup Variable
1

M200EH.

2

M200EM.

APPENDIX A-2: Setup Variables For Serial I/O, Revision F.0

Numeric
Units

Default Value

3

Must power-cycle instrument for these options to fully take effect.

4

O2 option.

Value Range

Description

A-15

04521C (DCN5731)

APPENDIX A-3: Warnings and Test Functions, Revision F.0

Model 200EH/EM (Ref: 05147F)

APPENDIX A-3: Warnings and Test Functions, Revision F.0
Table A-2: M200EH/EM Warning Messages, Revision F.0
Name

Message Text

WSYSRES

SYSTEM RESET

Description
Instrument was power-cycled or the CPU was reset.

WDATAINIT

DATA INITIALIZED

WCONFIGINIT

CONFIG INITIALIZED

WSAMPFLOW

SAMPLE FLOW WARN

Sample flow outside of warning limits specified by SFLOW_SET
variable.

WOZONEFLOW

OZONE FLOW WARNING

Ozone flow outside of warning limits specified by OFLOW_SET
variable.

WOZONEGEN

OZONE GEN OFF

WRCELLPRESS

RCELL PRESS WARN

Reaction cell pressure outside of warning limits specified by
RCELL_PRESS_SET variable.

WBOXTEMP

BOX TEMP WARNING

Chassis temperature outside of warning limits specified by
BOX_SET variable.

WRCELLTEMP

RCELL TEMP WARNING

Reaction cell temperature outside of warning limits specified by
RCELL_SET variable.

WMANIFOLDTEMP 4

MANIFOLD TEMP WARN

Bypass or dilution manifold temperature outside of warning limits
specified by MANIFOLD_SET variable.

WO2CELLTEMP 5

O2 CELL TEMP WARN

O2 sensor cell temperature outside of warning limits specified by
O2_CELL_SET variable.

WIZSTEMP

IZS TEMP WARNING

IZS temperature outside of warning limits specified by IZS_SET
variable.

WCONVTEMP

CONV TEMP WARNING

WPMTTEMP

PMT TEMP WARNING

PMT temperature outside of warning limits specified by PMT_SET
variable.

WAUTOZERO

AZERO WRN XXX.X MV

Auto-zero reading above limit specified by AZERO_LIMIT variable.
Value shown in message indicates auto-zero reading at time
warning was displayed.

WHVPS

HVPS WARNING

WDYNZERO

CANNOT DYN ZERO

Contact closure zero calibration failed while DYN_ZERO was set to
ON.

WDYNSPAN

CANNOT DYN SPAN

Contact closure span calibration failed while DYN_SPAN was set
to ON.

1

Data storage was erased.
Configuration storage was reset to factory configuration or erased.

Ozone generator is off. This is the only warning message that
automatically clears itself. It clears itself when the ozone generator
is turned on.

Converter temperature outside of warning limits specified by
CONV_SET variable.

High voltage power supply output outside of warning limits
specified by HVPS_SET variable.

WREARBOARD

REAR BOARD NOT DET

WRELAYBOARD

RELAY BOARD WARN

Firmware is unable to communicate with the relay board.

WFRONTPANEL

FRONT PANEL WARN

Firmware is unable to communicate with the front panel.

WANALOGCAL

ANALOG CAL WARNING

Rear board was not detected during power up.

The A/D or at least one D/A channel has not been calibrated.

O2 option.

A-16
04521C (DCN5731)

Model 200EH/EM (Ref: 05147F)

APPENDIX A-3: Warnings and Test Functions, Revision F.0

Table A-3:
TEST Function

M200EH/EM Test Functions, Revision F.0

Message Text

Description

RNG_DATA_OUT_1

“A1:= ”

D/A #1 range.

RNG_DATA_OUT_2

“A2:= ”

D/A #2 range.

RNG_DATA_OUT_3

“A3:= ”

D/A #3 range.

RNG_DATA_OUT_4

“A4:= ”

D/A #4 range.

NONOXCONC

1

NO=396.5 NOX=396.5

3

Simultaneously displays NO and NOX
concentrations.

RANGE

RANGE=500.0 PPB 3

RANGE1

RANGE1=500.0 PPB 3

D/A #1 range in independent range mode.

RANGE2

RANGE2=500.0 PPB

3

D/A #2 range in independent range mode.

RANGE3

RANGE3=500.0 PPB

3

O2RANGE 2

O2 RANGE=200.00 %

STABILITY

NOX STB=0.0 PPB

2

D/A range in single or auto-range modes.

3

D/A #3 range in independent range mode.
D/A #4 range for O2 concentration.
Concentration stability (standard deviation
based on setting of STABIL_FREQ and
STABIL_SAMPLES). Select gas with
STABIL_GAS variable.

RSP=8.81(1.30) SEC

Instrument response. Length of each signal
processing loop. Time in parenthesis is
standard deviation.

SAMPFLOW

SAMP FLW=460 CC/M

Sample flow rate.

OZONEFLOW

OZONE FL=87 CC/M

Ozone flow rate.

PMT

PMT=800.0 MV

Raw PMT reading.

NORMPMT

NORM PMT=793.0 MV

PMT reading normalized for temperature,
pressure, auto-zero offset, but not range.

AUTOZERO

AZERO=1.3 MV

Auto-zero offset.

HVPS

HVPS=650 V

High voltage power supply output.

RCELLTEMP

RCELL TEMP=50.8 C

Reaction cell temperature.

BOXTEMP

BOX TEMP=28.2 C

Internal chassis temperature.

PMTTEMP

PMT TEMP=7.0 C

PMT temperature.

MANIFOLDTEMP

MF TEMP=50.8 C

Bypass or dilution manifold temperature.

O2 CELL TEMP=50.8 C

O2 sensor cell temperature.

RESPONSE

O2CELLTEMP

2

IZSTEMP

IZS TEMP=50.8 C

IZS temperature.

CONVTEMP

MOLY TEMP=315.0 C

Converter temperature. Converter type is
MOLY, CONV, or O3KL.

RCELLPRESS

RCEL=7.0 IN-HG-A

Reaction cell pressure.

SAMPPRESS

SAMP=29.9 IN-HG-A

Sample pressure.

NOXSLOPE

NOX SLOPE=1.000

NOX slope for current range, computed during
zero/span calibration.

NOXOFFSET

NOX OFFS=0.0 MV

NOX offset for current range, computed during
zero/span calibration.

NOSLOPE

NO SLOPE=1.000

NO slope for current range, computed during
zero/span calibration.

NOOFFSET

NO OFFS=0.0 MV

NO offset for current range, computed during
zero/span calibration.

NO2

NO2=0.0 PPB

NOX

3

NOX=396.5 PPB

NO2 concentration for current range.
3

NOX concentration for current range.

A-17

04521C (DCN5731)

APPENDIX A-3: Warnings and Test Functions, Revision F.0

TEST Function

Message Text

Model 200EH/EM (Ref: 05147F)

Description

NO=396.5 PPB 3

NO concentration for current range.

O2 SLOPE=1.000

O2 slope computed during zero/span
calibration.

O2OFFSET 2

O2 OFFSET=0.00 %

O2 offset computed during zero/span
calibration.

O2 2

O2=0.00 %

O2 concentration.

TESTCHAN

TEST=3627.1 MV

Value output to TEST_OUTPUT analog
output, selected with TEST_CHAN_ID
variable.

CLOCKTIME

TIME=10:38:27

Current instrument time of day clock.

NO
O2SLOPE

2

1

Factory option.

2

O2 option.

A-18
04521C (DCN5731)

Model 200EH/EM (Ref: 05147F)

APPENDIX A-4: M200EH/EM Signal I/O Definitions, Revision F.0

APPENDIX A-4: M200EH/EM Signal I/O Definitions, Revision F.0
Table A-4: M200EH/EM Signal I/O Definitions, Revision F.0
BIT OR CHANNEL
NUMBER

SIGNAL NAME

DESCRIPTION

Internal inputs, U7, J108, pins 9–16 = bits 0–7, default I/O address 322 hex
0–7

Spare

Internal outputs, U8, J108, pins 1–8 = bits 0–7, default I/O address 322 hex
ELEC_TEST

0

1 = electrical test on

OPTIC_TEST

1

1 = optic test on

PREAMP_RANGE_HI

2

1 = select high preamp range

O3GEN_STATUS

3

0 = ozone generator on

0 = off
0 = off
0 = select low range
1 = off
4–5
I2C_RESET

6

Spare
2

1 = reset I C peripherals
0 = normal

I2C_DRV_RST

7

0 = hardware reset 8584 chip
1 = normal

Control inputs, U11, J1004, pins 1–6 = bits 0–5, default I/O address 321 hex
EXT_ZERO_CAL

0

0 = go into zero calibration
1 = exit zero calibration

EXT_SPAN_CAL

1

0 = go into span calibration
1 = exit span calibration

EXT_LOW_SPAN

2

0 = go into low span calibration
1 = exit low span calibration

REMOTE_RANGE_HI

3

0 = remote select high range
1 = default range

4–5

Spare

6–7

Always 1

Control inputs, U14, J1006, pins 1–6 = bits 0–5, default I/O address 325 hex
0–5

Spare

6–7

Always 1

Control outputs, U17, J1008, pins 1–8 = bits 0–7, default I/O address 321 hex
0–7

Spare

Control outputs, U21, J1008, pins 9–12 = bits 0–3, default I/O address 325 hex
0–3

Spare

Alarm outputs, U21, J1009, pins 1–12 = bits 4–7, default I/O address 325 hex
ST_SYSTEM_OK2

2

4

1 = system OK
0 = any alarm condition or in diagnostics mode

ST_CONC_ALARM_1

5

1 = conc. limit 1 exceeded
0 = conc. OK

ST_CONC_ALARM_2

6

1 = conc. limit 2 exceeded
0 = conc. OK

A-19

04521C (DCN5731)

APPENDIX A-4: M200EH/EM Signal I/O Definitions, Revision F.0

Model 200EH/EM (Ref: 05147F)

BIT OR CHANNEL
NUMBER

SIGNAL NAME

7

DESCRIPTION
Spare

A status outputs, U24, J1017, pins 1–8 = bits 0–7, default I/O address 323 hex
ST_SYSTEM_OK

0

0 = system OK
1 = any alarm condition

ST_CONC_VALID

1

0 = conc. valid
1 = hold off or other conditions

ST_HIGH_RANGE

2

0 = high auto-range in use

ST_ZERO_CAL

3

0 = in zero calibration

1 = low auto-range
1 = not in zero
ST_SPAN_CAL

4

0 = in span calibration
1 = not in span

ST_DIAG_MODE

5

ST_LOW_SPAN_CAL

6

0 = in diagnostic mode
1 = not in diagnostic mode
0 = in low span calibration
1 = not in low span

ST_O2_CAL 1

7

0 = in O2 calibration mode
1 = in NOX calibration mode

B status outputs, U27, J1018, pins 1–8 = bits 0–7, default I/O address 324 hex
0–7

Spare

2

Front panel I C keyboard, default I2C address 4E hex
MAINT_MODE

5 (input)

0 = maintenance mode
1 = normal mode

LANG2_SELECT

6 (input)

SAMPLE_LED

8 (output)

0 = select second language
1 = select first language (English)
0 = sample LED on
1 = off

CAL_LED

9 (output)

0 = cal. LED on
1 = off

FAULT_LED

10 (output)

0 = fault LED on

AUDIBLE_BEEPER

14 (output)

0 = beeper on (for diagnostic testing only)

1 = off
1 = off
Relay board digital output (PCF8575), default I2C address 44 hex
RELAY_WATCHDOG

0

RCELL_HEATER

1

Alternate between 0 and 1 at least every 5 seconds to keep
relay board active
0 = reaction cell heater on
1 = off

CONV_HEATER

2

0 = converter heater on
1 = off

MANIFOLD_HEATER

3

0 = bypass or dilution manifold heater on
1 = off

IZS_HEATER

4

0 = IZS heater on
1 = off

A-20
04521C (DCN5731)

Model 200EH/EM (Ref: 05147F)

APPENDIX A-4: M200EH/EM Signal I/O Definitions, Revision F.0

SIGNAL NAME

BIT OR CHANNEL
NUMBER

O2_CELL_HEATER 1

5

DESCRIPTION
0 = O2 sensor cell heater on
1 = off

ZERO_VALVE

6

0 = let zero gas in
1 = let sample gas in

SPAN_VALVE

6

0 = let span gas in
1 = let zero gas in

CAL_VALVE

7

0 = let cal. gas in
1 = let sample gas in

AUTO_ZERO_VALVE

8

0 = let zero air in
1 = let sample gas in

NOX_VALVE

9

0 = let NOX gas into reaction cell
1 = let NO gas into reaction cell

LOW_SPAN_VALVE

10

0 = let low span gas in
1 = let sample gas in

HIGH_SPAN_VALVE

11

0 = let high span gas in
1 = let sample gas in

12–15

Spare

Rear board primary MUX analog inputs, MUX default I/O address 32A hex
PMT_SIGNAL

0

PMT detector

HVPS_VOLTAGE

1

HV power supply output

PMT_TEMP

2

PMT temperature

3

Spare

4

Temperature MUX

5

Spare

O2_SENSOR

1

6

O2 concentration sensor

SAMPLE_PRESSURE

7

Sample pressure

RCELL_PRESSURE

8

Reaction cell pressure

REF_4096_MV

9

4.096V reference from MAX6241

OZONE_FLOW

10

Ozone flow rate

TEST_INPUT_11

11

Diagnostic test input

CONV_TEMP

12

Converter temperature

TEST_INPUT_13

13

Diagnostic test input

14

DAC loopback MUX

REF_GND

15

Ground reference

Rear board temperature MUX analog inputs, MUX default I/O address 326 hex
BOX_TEMP

0

Internal box temperature

RCELL_TEMP

1

Reaction cell temperature

IZS_TEMP

2

IZS temperature

3

Spare

4

O2 sensor cell temperature

TEMP_INPUT_5

5

Diagnostic temperature input

TEMP_INPUT_6

6

Diagnostic temperature input

MANIFOLD_TEMP

7

Bypass or dilution manifold temperature

O2_CELL_TEMP

1

A-21

04521C (DCN5731)

APPENDIX A-4: M200EH/EM Signal I/O Definitions, Revision F.0

SIGNAL NAME

Model 200EH/EM (Ref: 05147F)

BIT OR CHANNEL
NUMBER

DESCRIPTION

Rear board DAC MUX analog inputs, MUX default I/O address 327 hex
DAC_CHAN_1

0

DAC channel 0 loopback

DAC_CHAN_2

1

DAC channel 1 loopback

DAC_CHAN_3

2

DAC channel 2 loopback

DAC_CHAN_4

3

DAC channel 3 loopback

Rear board analog outputs, default I/O address 327 hex
CONC_OUT_1,

0

DATA_OUT_1
CONC_OUT_2,

Data output #1
1

DATA_OUT_2
CONC_OUT_3,
TEST_OUTPUT,
DATA_OUT_4
1

O2 option.

2

Optional

Concentration output #2 (NO) ,
Data output #2

2

DATA_OUT_3
CONC_OUT_4 1,

Concentration output #1 (NOX),

Concentration output #3 (NO2) ,
Data output #3

3

Test measurement output,
Concentration output #4 (O2) ,
Data output #4

A-22
04521C (DCN5731)

Model 200EH/EM (Ref: 05147F)

APPENDIX A-5: M200EH/EM iDAS Functions, Revision F.0

APPENDIX A-5: M200EH/EM iDAS Functions, Revision F.0
Table A-5: M200EH/EM DAS Trigger Events, Revision F.0
NAME

DESCRIPTION

ATIMER

Automatic timer expired

EXITZR

Exit zero calibration mode

EXITLS

Exit low span calibration mode

EXITHS

Exit high span calibration mode

EXITMP

Exit multi-point calibration mode

EXITO2

1

Exit O2 calibration mode

SLPCHG

Slope and offset recalculated

O2SLPC 1

O2 slope and offset recalculated

EXITDG

Concentration exceeds limit 1 warning

CONC2W

Concentration exceeds limit 2 warning

AZEROW

Auto-zero warning

OFLOWW

Ozone flow warning

RPRESW

Reaction cell pressure warning

RTEMPW

Reaction cell temperature warning

MFTMPW

Bypass or dilution manifold temperature
warning

O2TMPW

1

Exit diagnostic mode

CONC1W

1

O2 sensor cell temperature warning

IZTMPW

IZS temperature warning

CTEMPW

Converter temperature warning

PTEMPW

PMT temperature warning

SFLOWW

Sample flow warning

BTEMPW

Box temperature warning

HVPSW

HV power supply warning

O2 option.

A-23

04521C (DCN5731)

APPENDIX A-5: M200EH/EM iDAS Functions, Revision F.0

Table A-6:

Model 200EH/EM (Ref: 05147F)

M200EH/EM iDAS Data Types, Revision F.0

NAME

DESCRIPTION

UNITS

PMTDET

PMT detector reading

mV

NXSLP1

NOX slope for range #1

—

NXSLP2

NOX slope for range #2

—

NOSLP1

NO slope for range #1

—

NOSLP2

NO slope for range #2

—

NXOFS1

NOX offset for range #1

mV

NXOFS2

NOX offset for range #2

mV

NOOFS1

NO offset for range #1

mV

NOOFS2

NO offset for range #2

mV

O2SLPE 1

O2 slope

—

O2OFST 1

O2 offset

Weight %

NXZSC1

Concentration for NOX reporting range #1 during zero/span
calibration, just before computing new slope and offset

PPB

NXZSC2

Concentration for NOX reporting range #2 during zero/span
calibration, just before computing new slope and offset

PPB

NOZSC1

Concentration for NO reporting range #1 during zero/span calibration,
just before computing new slope and offset

PPB

NOZSC2

Concentration for NO reporting range #2 during zero/span calibration,
just before computing new slope and offset

PPB

N2ZSC1

Concentration for NO2 reporting range #1 during zero/span
calibration, just before computing new slope and offset

PPB

N2ZSC2

Concentration for NO2 reporting range #2 during zero/span
calibration, just before computing new slope and offset

PPB

O2 concentration during zero/span calibration of the O2 sensor, just
before computing new slope and offset

Weight %

NXCNC1

Concentration for NOX reporting range #1

PPB

NXCNC2

Concentration for NOX reporting range #2

PPB

NOCNC1

Concentration for NO reporting range #1

PPB

NOCNC2

Concentration for NO reporting range #2

PPB

N2CNC1

Concentration for NO2 reporting range #1

PPB

N2CNC2

Concentration for NO2 reporting range #2

PPB

O2 concentration

Weight %

Concentration stability

PPB

O2ZSCN 1

1

O2CONC
STABIL
AZERO

Auto zero offset (range de-normalized)

mV

O3FLOW

Ozone flow rate

cc/m

RCPRES

Reaction cell pressure

"Hg

RCTEMP

Reaction cell temperature

°C

MFTEMP

Bypass or dilution manifold temperature

°C

O2TEMP

1

O2 sensor cell temperature

°C

IZTEMP

IZS block temperature

°C

CNVEF1

Converter efficiency factor for range #1

—

CNVEF2

Converter efficiency factor for range #2

—

CNVTMP

Converter temperature

°C

PMTTMP

PMT temperature

°C

A-24
04521C (DCN5731)

Model 200EH/EM (Ref: 05147F)

NAME

DESCRIPTION

UNITS

SMPFLW

Sample flow rate

cc/m

SMPPRS

Sample pressure

"Hg

BOXTMP
HVPS
REFGND

1

APPENDIX A-5: M200EH/EM iDAS Functions, Revision F.0

Internal box temperature

°C

High voltage power supply output

Volts

Ground reference (REF_GND)

mV

RF4096

4096 mV reference (REF_4096_MV)

mV

TEST11

Diagnostic test input (TEST_INPUT_11)

mV

TEST13

Diagnostic test input (TEST_INPUT_13)

mV

TEMP5

Diagnostic temperature input (TEMP_INPUT_5)

°C

TEMP6

Diagnostic temperature input (TEMP_INPUT_6)

°C

O2 option.

A-25

04521C (DCN5731)

APPENDIX A-6: Terminal Command Designators, Revision F.0

Model 200EH/EM (Ref: 05147F)

APPENDIX A-6: Terminal Command Designators, Revision F.0
Table A-7: Terminal Command Designators, Revision F.0
COMMAND

ADDITIONAL COMMAND SYNTAX

? [ID]
LOGON [ID]

password

LOGOFF [ID]

T [ID]

W [ID]

C [ID]

D [ID]

V [ID]

DESCRIPTION
Display help screen and this list of commands
Establish connection to instrument
Terminate connection to instrument

SET ALL|name|hexmask

Display test(s)

LIST [ALL|name|hexmask] [NAMES|HEX]

Print test(s) to screen

name

Print single test

CLEAR ALL|name|hexmask

Disable test(s)

SET ALL|name|hexmask

Display warning(s)

LIST [ALL|name|hexmask] [NAMES|HEX]

Print warning(s)

name

Clear single warning

CLEAR ALL|name|hexmask

Clear warning(s)

ZERO|LOWSPAN|SPAN [1|2]

Enter calibration mode

ASEQ number

Execute automatic sequence

COMPUTE ZERO|SPAN

Compute new slope/offset

EXIT

Exit calibration mode

ABORT

Abort calibration sequence

LIST

Print all I/O signals

name[=value]

Examine or set I/O signal

LIST NAMES

Print names of all diagnostic tests

ENTER name

Execute diagnostic test

EXIT

Exit diagnostic test

RESET [DATA] [CONFIG] [exitcode]

Reset instrument

PRINT ["name"] [SCRIPT]

Print iDAS configuration

RECORDS ["name"]

Print number of iDAS records

REPORT ["name"] [RECORDS=number]
[FROM=][TO=][VERBOSE|COMPACT|HEX] (Print DAS
records)(date format: MM/DD/YYYY(or YY)
[HH:MM:SS]

Print iDAS records

CANCEL

Halt printing iDAS records

LIST

Print setup variables

name[=value [warn_low [warn_high]]]

Modify variable

name="value"

Modify enumerated variable

CONFIG

Print instrument configuration

MAINT ON|OFF

Enter/exit maintenance mode

MODE

Print current instrument mode

DASBEGIN []
DASEND

Upload iDAS configuration

CHANNELBEGIN propertylist CHANNELEND

Upload single iDAS channel

CHANNELDELETE ["name"]

Delete iDAS channels

A-26
04521C (DCN5731)

Model 200EH/EM (Ref: 05147F)

APPENDIX A-6: Terminal Command Designators, Revision F.0

The command syntax follows the command type, separated by a space character. Strings in [brackets] are
optional designators. The following key assignments also apply.
TERMINAL KEY ASSIGNMENTS
ESC
CR (ENTER)
Ctrl-C

Abort line
Execute command
Switch to computer mode

COMPUTER MODE KEY ASSIGNMENTS
LF (line feed)
Ctrl-T

Execute command
Switch to terminal mode

USER NOTES:

A-27

04521C (DCN5731)

APPENDIX A-6: Terminal Command Designators, Revision F.0

Model 200EH/EM (Ref: 05147F)

A-28
04521C (DCN5731)

Model 200EH/EM Instruction Manual

APPENDIX B: Spare Parts and Expendables

APPENDIX B: Spare Parts and Expendables
NOTE
Use of replacement parts other than those supplied by Teledyne-API may result in
non-compliance with European standard EN 61010-1.
The following lists contain spare parts recommended for the proper care and maintenance of your
M200EH/EM:



05480 – Spare Parts List, M200EH



04416 – Recommended Spare Parts Stocking Level, M200EH



05483 – Spare Parts List, M200EM



04415 – Recommended Spare Parts Stocking Level, M200EM



04715 – Expendables Kit M200E/EH/EM

04521C (DCN5731)

B-1

APPENDIX B: Spare Parts and Expendables

B-2

Model 200EH/EM Instruction Manual

04521C (DCN5731)

M200EH Spare Parts List (Ref: 05480S)
Part Number
000940100
000940300
000940400
000940500
001761800
002270100
002730000
003290000
005960000
005970000
008830000
009690200
009690300
009810300
009810600
009810700
010680100
010820000
011630000
011930100
013140000
014080100
016290000
016301400
016680600
018080000
018720100
02190020A
022630200
037860000
040010000
040030800
040400000
040410200
040420200
040900000
041800500
041920000
042580000
042680100
042900100
043170000
043220100
043420000
043940000
044340000
044430100
044440000

04521C (DCN5731)

Description
ORIFICE, 3 MIL, BYPASS MANIFOLD, SAMPLE FLOW
CD, ORIFICE, .020 VIOLET
ORIFICE, 4 MIL, OZONE DRYER FLOW, O2 OPTION
ORIFICE, 7 MIL, OZONE FLOW/BYPASS FLOW
ASSY, FLOW CTL, 90CC, OZONE DRYER
AKIT, GASKETS, WINDOW, (12)
CD, FILTER, 665NM (KB)
THERMISTOR, BASIC (VENDOR ASSY)(KB)
AKIT, EXPEND, 6LBS ACT CHARCOAL
AKIT, EXPENDABLE, 6LB PURAFIL
COLD BLOCK (KB)
AKIT, TFE FLTR (FL19) ELEM, 47MM, (100)
AKIT, TFE FLTR ELEM (FL19), 47MM, 1UM (3
ASSY, PUMP PK, 115V/60HZ w/FL34/NO/SO
ASSY, PUMP PACK, 100V/60HZ w/FL34
ASSY, PUMP, 220-240V/50-60HZ (wo)
BAND HTR W/TC, 50W @115V, CE/VDE *
ASSY, THERMOCOUPLE, HICON, M501
HVPS INSULATOR GASKET (KB)
CD, PMT (R928), NOX, M200AH, M200EM/EH *
ASSY, COOLER FAN (NOX/SOX)
ASSY, HVPS, SOX/NOX
WINDOW, SAMPLE FILTER, 47MM (KB)
ASSY, SAMP FILT, 47MM, ANG BKT, 1UM, TEE
PCA, O3 GEN DRIVER, NOX, E SERIES
AKIT, DESSICANT BAGGIES, (12)
ASSY, MOLY CONVERTER W/03 DESTRUCTOR
ASSY, TC, TYPE K, LONG, WELDED MOLY
PCA, TEMP CONTROL BOARD, W/PS, M501
ORING, TFE RETAINER, SAMPLE FILTER
ASSY, FAN REAR PANEL, E SERIES
PCA, PRESS SENSORS (2X), FLOW, E (NOX)
ASSY, HEATERS/THERMAL SWITCH, RX CELL
ASSY, VACUUM MANIFOLD, M200EH
ASSY, O3 GEN BRK, M200E, HIGH-O/P
ORIFICE HOLDER, M200E REACTION CELL (KB)
PCA, PMT PREAMP, VR, M200E/EM/EH
ASSY, THERMISTOR, REACTION CELL
PCA, KEYBOARD, E-SERIES, W/V-DETECT
ASSY, VALVE (SS), M200E
PROGRAMMED FLASH, E SERIES
MANIFOLD, RCELL, M200E, (KB) *
THERMOCOUPLE INSULATING SLEEVE, M501NH *
ASSY, HEATER/THERM, O2 SEN, "E" SERIES
PCA, INTERFACE, ETHERNET, E-SERIES
ASSY, HTR, BYPASS MANIFOLD, M200EH
ASSY, BYPASS MANIFOLD, M200EH (KB)
ASSY, HI-CON CONVERTER W/03 DESTRUCTOR

B-3

M200EH Spare Parts List (Ref: 05480S)
Part Number
044530000
044540000
044610100
045210000
045230200
045500200
045500400
045500500
046030000
047050100
047210000
048830000
049310100
049760300
050610700
050610900
050611100
051210000
051990000
052930200
054250000
055740000
055740100
055740200
058021100
059940000
061400000
062390000
062420200
062870000
063540100
064540000
064540100
064540200
065190100
065200100
CN0000458
CN0000520
CP0000014
DS0000025
FL0000001
FL0000003
FL0000034
FM0000004
FT0000010
HW0000005
HW0000020
HW0000030
HW0000036
HW0000041

B-4

Description
OPTION, O2 SENSOR ASSY, M200EX (KB)
ASSY, THERMISTOR, BYPASS MANIFOLD
ASSY, VALVES, MOLY/HICON, M200EM/H
MANUAL, OPERATORS, M200EH/EM
PCA, RELAY CARD, M100E/200E
ASSY, ORIFICE HOLDER, 7 MIL, OZONE FLOW
ASSY, ORIFICE HOLDER, 3 MIL
ASSY, ORIFICE HOLDER, NOX ORIFICE
AKIT, CH-43, 3 REFILLS
ASSY, ORIFICE HOLDER, BYPASS MANIFOLD
ASSY, MINI-HICON GUTS, GROUNDED, M200EH
AKIT, EXP KIT, EXHAUST CLNSR, SILCA GEL
PCA, TEC CONTROL, E SERIES
ASSY, TC PROG PLUG, MOLY,TYP K, TC1
CONFIGURATION PLUGS, 115V, M200E
CONFIGURATION PLUGS, 220-240V, M200E
CONFIGURATION PLUGS, 100V, M200E
ASSY, OZONE DESTRUCTOR
ASSY, SCRUBBER, INLINE, PUMP PACK
ASSY, BAND HEATER TYPE K, M200EX
OPTION, CO2 SENSOR (20%)
ASSY, PUMP, NOx PUMP PACK, 115V/60HZ
ASSY, PUMP, NOx PUMP PACK, 220V/60HZ
ASSY, PUMP, NOx PUMP PACK, 220V/50HZ
PCA, E-SERIES MOTHERBD, GEN 5-ICOP
OPTION, SAMPLE GAS CONDITIONER, M200A/E
ASSY, DUAL HTR, MINI-HICON, 120/240VAC
ASSY, MOLY GUTS w/WOOL, M101E/M200EX
PCA, SER INTRFACE, ICOP CPU, E- (OPTION)
CPU, PC-104, VSX-6150E, ICOP *(KB)
DOM, w/SOFTWARE, M200EH *
ASSY, PUMP NOX INTERNAL, 115V/60HZ
ASSY, PUMP NOX INTERNAL, 230V/60HZ
ASSY, PUMP NOX INTERNAL, 230V/50HZ
ASSY, NOX CELL TOP-FLO, M200EH >S/N612
ASSY SENSOR, TOP-FLOW, M200EH
PLUG, 12, MC 1.5/12-ST-3.81 (KB)
PLUG, 10, MC 1.5/10-ST-3.81 (KB)
CONTROLLER, TEMP, W/PG-08 (CN262)
DISPLAY, E SERIES (KB)
FILTER, FLOW CONTROL
FILTER, DFU (KB)
FILTER, DISPOSABLE, PENTEK (IC-101L)(KB)
FLOWMETER (KB)
FITTING, FLOW CONTROL
FOOT, CHASSI/PUMP PACK
SPRING, FLOW CONTROL
ISOLATOR, SENSOR ASSY
TFE TAPE, 1/4" (48 FT/ROLL)
STNOFF,#6-32X3/4"

04521C (DCN5731)

M200EH Spare Parts List (Ref: 05480S)
Part Number
HW0000099
HW0000101
HW0000453
KIT000095
KIT000219
KIT000231
KIT000253
KIT000254
OP0000030
OP0000033
OR0000001
OR0000002
OR0000025
OR0000027
OR0000034
OR0000039
OR0000044
OR0000083
OR0000086
OR0000094
OR0000101
PU0000005
PU0000011
PU0000052
PU0000054
PU0000083
RL0000009
RL0000015
SW0000006
SW0000040
SW0000051
SW0000058
SW0000059
WR0000008

04521C (DCN5731)

Description
STANDOFF, #6-32X.5, HEX SS M/F
ISOLATOR, PUMP PACK
SUPPORT, CIRCUIT BD, 3/16" ICOP
AKIT, REPLACEMENT COOLER, A/E SERIES
KIT, 4-20MA CURRENT OUTPUT (E SERIES)
KIT, RETROFIT, M200E/EM/EH Z/S VALVE
ASSY & TEST, SPARE PS37, E SERIES
ASSY & TEST, SPARE PS38, E SERIES
OXYGEN TRANSDUCER, PARAMAGNETIC
CO2 MODULE, 0-20%
ORING, FLOW CONTROL
ORING, REACTION CELL SLEEVE
ORING, 2-133V
ORING, COLD BLOCK/PMT HOUSING & HEATSINK
ORING, (USED W/FT10)
ORING, FLOW CONTROL
ORING, REACTION CELL MANIFOLD
ORING, PMT SIGNAL & OPTIC LED
ORING, 2-006, CV-75 COMPOUND(KB)
ORING, SAMPLE FILTER
ORING, CO2 OPTION
PUMP, THOMAS 607, 115V/60HZ (KB)
REBUILD KIT, THOMAS 607(KB)
PUMP, THOMAS 688, 220/240V 50HZ/60HZ
PUMP, THOMAS 688, 100V, 50/60HZ
KIT, REBUILD, PU80, PU81, PU82
SSRT RELAY
RELAY, DPDT, (KB)
SWITCH, THERMAL, 60 C
PWR SWITCH/CIR BRK, VDE CE (KB)
SWITCH, POWER CIRC BREAK VDE/CE, w/RG(KB
SWITCH, THERMAL/450 DEG F
PRESSURE SENSOR, 0-15 PSIA, ALL SEN
POWER CORD, 10A

B-5

M200EH Recommended Spare Parts Stocking Levels (Ref: 04416N)

Part Number
011310000
011930000
014080100
040010000
040030800
040400000
040420200
041800500
042580000

Description
ASSY, DRYER, NOX
CD, PMT (R928), NOX, M200A, M200E(KB)
ASSY, HVPS, SOX/NOX
ASSY, FAN REAR PANEL, E SERIES
PCA, PRESS SENSORS (2X), FLOW, E (NOX)
ASSY, HEATERS/THERMAL SWITCH, RX CELL
ASSY, O3 GEN BRK, M200E, HIGH-O/P
PCA, PMT PREAMP, VR, M200E/EH, (KB)
PCA, KEYBOARD, E-SERIES, W/V-DETECT

042680100

ASSY, VALVE (SS), M200E

044440000
044610000
045230200
045500200
045500400
058021100
059940000
062870000
DS0000025
FM0000004
HE0000017
KIT000095
KIT000129

ASSY, HICON w/O3 DEST, M200EH/EM
ASSY, VALVES, MOLY/HICON, M200E
PCA, RELAY CARD, M100E/200E
ASSY, ORIFICE HOLDER, 7 MIL
ASSY, ORIFICE HOLDER, 3 MIL
PCA, E-SERIES MOTHERBOARD, GEN 5-I
OPTION, SAMPLE GAS CONDITIONER, M200A/E
CPU, PC-104, VSX-6150E, ICOP *(KB)
DISPLAY, E SERIES (KB)
FLOWMETER (KB)
HTR, 12W/120V (50W/240V), CE AP (KB)
AKIT, REPLACEMENT COOLER, A/E SERIES
REPLACEMENT, MOLY CONV WELDED CARTRIDGE

OP0000030

OXYGEN TRANSDUCER, PARAMAGNETIC

OR0000034
OR0000044
OR0000045
PS0000037
PS0000038
PU0000005
RL0000015

ORING, 2-011V FT10
ORING, 2-125V
ORING, 2-226V
PS, 40W SWITCHING, +5V, +/-15V(KB) *
PS, 60W SWITCHING, 12V(KB) *
PUMP, THOMAS 607, 115V/60HZ (KB) *1
RELAY, DPDT, (KB)

1

2-5

6-10

1

1

1

1

2
1
2

1

2

1

1
1

1
1

1
2
2
1

1
1

11-20
3
1
1
4
2
2

21-30 UNITS

1
1

4
1
1
4
3
3
1
1
1

2
1
1
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
2
3
3
1

4
2
2
2
4
4
2
2
1
1
3
3
3
1
10
10
10
2
2
1
3
3

1
1

1
2
2

1
1

2
2
2
1
1

5
5
5
1
1

1
1

1
1

2
2

With IZS,
ZS Option

*

With O2
Option

*1

* Use KIT000208 To upgrade from 039550200 to 045230200 Relay Board:

*1 PU0000005 Use PU0000006 for 220V / 50Hz applications

B-6

04521C (DCN5731)

M200EM Spare Parts List (Ref: 05483S)
Part Number
000940300
000940400
000940500
000941200
001761800
002270100
002730000
009690200
009690300
009810300
009810600
009810700
011630000
011930100
013140000
014080100
016290000
016301400
018080000
018720100
037860000
040010000
040030800
040400000
040410300
040420200
040900000
041800500
041920000
042580000
042680100
042900100
043170000
043420000
043940000
044340000
044430200
044530000
044540000
044610100
045210000
045230200
045500200
047050500
048830000
049310100

04521C (DCN5731)

Description

CD, ORIFICE, .020 VIOLET
ORIFICE, 4 MIL, OZONE DRYER FLOW, O2 OPTION
ORIFICE, 7 MIL, OZONE FLOW/SAMPLE FLOW
CD, ORIFICE, .008, RED/NONE
ASSY, FLOW CTL, 90CC, 1/4" TEE-TMT, B
AKIT, GASKETS, WINDOW, (12)
CD, FILTER, 665NM (KB)
AKIT, TFE FLTR (FL19) ELEM, 47MM, (100)
AKIT, TFE FLTR ELEM (FL19), 47MM, 1UM (3
ASSY, PUMP PK, 115V/60HZ w/FL34/NO/SO
ASSY, PUMP PACK, 100V/60HZ w/FL34
ASSY, PUMP, 220-240V/50-60HZ (wo)
HVPS INSULATOR GASKET (KB)
CD, PMT (R928), NOX, M200AH, M200EM/EH *
ASSY, COOLER FAN (NOX/SOX)
ASSY, HVPS, SOX/NOX
WINDOW, SAMPLE FILTER, 47MM (KB)
ASSY, SAMP FILT, 47MM, ANG BKT, 1UM, TEE
AKIT, DESSICANT BAGGIES, (12)
ASSY, MOLY CONVERTER W/03 DESTRUCTOR
ORING, TFE RETAINER, SAMPLE FILTER
ASSY, FAN REAR PANEL, E SERIES
PCA, FLOW/PRESSURE
ASSY, HEATERS/THERMAL SWITCH, RX CELL
ASSY, VACUUM MANIFOLD, M200EM
ASSY, O3 GEN BRK, M200E, HIGH-O/P
ORIFICE HOLDER, M200E REACTION CELL (KB)
PCA, PMT PREAMP, VR, M200E/EM/EH
ASSY, THERMISTOR, REACTION CELL
PCA, KEYBOARD, E-SERIES, W/V-DETECT
ASSY, VALVE (SS), M200E
PROGRAMMED FLASH, E SERIES
MANIFOLD, RCELL, M200E, (KB) *
ASSY, HEATER/THERM, O2 SEN, "E" SERIES
PCA, INTERFACE, ETHERNET, E-SERIES
ASSY, HTR, BYPASS MANIFOLD, M200EH
ASSY, BYPASS MANIFOLD, M200EM (KB)
OPTION, O2 SENSOR ASSY, M200EX (KB)
ASSY, THERMISTOR, BYPASS MANIFOLD
ASSY, VALVES, MOLY/HICON, M200EM/H
MANUAL, OPERATORS, M200EH/EM
PCA, RELAY CARD, M100E/200E
ASSY, ORIFICE HOLDER, 7 MIL, OZONE FLOW
ASSY, ORIFICE HOLDER, BYPASS MANIFOLD
AKIT, EXP KIT, EXHAUST CLNSR, SILCA GEL
PCA, TEC CONTROL, E SERIES

B-7

M200EM Spare Parts List (Ref: 05483S)
Part Number
049760300
050610700
050610900
050611100
051210000
051990000
052930200
054250000
055740000
055740100
055740200
057660000
058021100
059940000
061400000
062390000
062420200
062870000
063530100
064540000
064540100
064540200
065190000
CN0000458
CN0000520
DS0000025
FL0000001
FL0000003
FM0000004
FT0000010
HW0000005
HW0000020
HW0000030
HW0000036
HW0000099
HW0000101
HW0000453
KIT000095
KIT000219
KIT000231
KIT000253
KIT000254
OP0000030
OP0000033
OR0000001
OR0000002
OR0000025
OR0000027
OR0000034

B-8

Description
ASSY, TC PROG PLUG, MOLY,TYP K, TC1
CONFIGURATION PLUGS, 115V, M200E
CONFIGURATION PLUGS, 220-240V, M200E
CONFIGURATION PLUGS, 100V, M200E
ASSY, OZONE DESTRUCTOR
ASSY, SCRUBBER, INLINE, PUMP PACK
ASSY, BAND HEATER TYPE K, M200EX
OPTION, CO2 SENSOR (20%)
ASSY, PUMP, NOx PUMP PACK, 115V/60HZ
ASSY, PUMP, NOx PUMP PACK, 220V/60HZ
ASSY, PUMP, NOx PUMP PACK, 220V/50HZ
ASSY, DFU FILTER, M703E
PCA, E-SERIES MOTHERBD, GEN 5-ICOP
OPTION, SAMPLE GAS CONDITIONER, M200A/E
ASSY, DUAL HTR, MINI-HICON, 120/240VAC
ASSY, MOLY GUTS w/WOOL, M101E/M200EX
PCA, SER INTRFACE, ICOP CPU, E- (OPTION)
CPU, PC-104, VSX-6150E, ICOP *(KB)
DOM, w/SOFTWARE, M200EM *
ASSY, PUMP NOX INTERNAL, 115V/60HZ
ASSY, PUMP NOX INTERNAL, 230V/60HZ
ASSY, PUMP NOX INTERNAL, 230V/50HZ
ASSY, NOX CELL TOP-FLO, M200EM >S/N417
CONNECTOR, REAR PANEL, 12 PIN
CONNECTOR, REAR PANEL, 10 PIN
DISPLAY, E SERIES (KB)
FILTER, FLOW CONTROL
FILTER, DFU (KB)
FLOWMETER (KB)
FITTING, FLOW CONTROL
FOOT, CHASSI/PUMP PACK
SPRING, FLOW CONTROL
ISOLATOR, SENSOR ASSY
TFE TAPE, 1/4" (48 FT/ROLL)
STANDOFF, #6-32X.5, HEX SS M/F
ISOLATOR, PUMP PACK
SUPPORT, CIRCUIT BD, 3/16" ICOP
AKIT, REPLACEMENT COOLER, A/E SERIES
KIT, 4-20MA CURRENT OUTPUT (E SERIES)
KIT, RETROFIT, M200E/EM/EH Z/S VALVE
ASSY & TEST, SPARE PS37, E SERIES
ASSY & TEST, SPARE PS38, E SERIES
OXYGEN TRANSDUCER, PARAMAGNETIC
CO2 MODULE, 0-20%
ORING, FLOW CONTROL
ORING, REACTION CELL SLEEVE
ORING, 2-133V
ORING, COLD BLOCK/PMT HOUSING & HEATSINK
ORING, (USED W/FT10)

04521C (DCN5731)

M200EM Spare Parts List (Ref: 05483S)
Part Number
OR0000039
OR0000044
OR0000083
OR0000086
OR0000094
OR0000101
PU0000005
PU0000011
PU0000052
PU0000054
PU0000083
RL0000015
SW0000051
SW0000059
WR0000008

04521C (DCN5731)

Description
ORING, FLOW CONTROL
ORING, REACTION CELL MANIFOLD
ORING, PMT SIGNAL & OPTIC LED
ORING, 2-006, CV-75 COMPOUND(KB)
ORING, SAMPLE FILTER
ORING, CO2 OPTION
PUMP, THOMAS 607, 115V/60HZ (KB)
REBUILD KIT, THOMAS 607(KB)
PUMP, THOMAS 688, 220/240V 50HZ/60HZ
PUMP, THOMAS 688, 100V, 50/60HZ
KIT, REBUILD, PU80, PU81, PU82
RELAY, DPDT, (KB)
SWITCH, POWER CIRC BREAK VDE/CE, w/RG(KB
PRESSURE SENSOR, 0-15 PSIA, ALL SEN
POWER CORD, 10A

B-9

M200EM Recommended Spare Parts Stocking Levels (Ref: 04415N)

Part Number
011310000
011930000
014080100
040010000
040030800
040400000
040420200
041800500
042580000

Description
ASSY, DRYER, NOX
CD, PMT (R928), NOX, M200A, M200E(KB)
ASSY, HVPS, SOX/NOX
ASSY, FAN REAR PANEL, E SERIES
PCA, PRESS SENSORS (2X), FLOW, E (NOX)
ASSY, HEATERS/THERMAL SWITCH, RX CELL
ASSY, O3 GEN BRK, M200E, HIGH-O/P
PCA, PMT PREAMP, VR, M200E/EM/EH
PCA, KEYBOARD, E-SERIES, W/V-DETECT

042680100

ASSY, VALVE (SS), M200E

044440000
044610000
045230200
045500200
058021100
059940000
062870000
DS0000025
FM0000004
KIT000095
KIT000129

ASSY, HICON w/O3 DEST, M200EH/EM
ASSY, VALVES, MOLY/HICON, M200E
PCA, RELAY CARD, M100E/200E
ASSY, ORIFICE HOLDER, 7 MIL
PCA, E-SERIES MOTHERBD, GEN 5-ICOP
OPTION, SAMPLE GAS CONDITIONER, M200A/E
CPU, PC-104, VSX-6150E, ICOP *(KB)
DISPLAY, E SERIES (KB)
FLOWMETER (KB)
AKIT, REPLACEMENT COOLER, A/E SERIES
REPLACEMENT, MOLY CONV WELDED CARTRIDGE

OP0000030

OXYGEN TRANSDUCER, PARAMAGNETIC

OR0000034
OR0000044
OR0000045
PS0000037
PS0000038
PU0000005
RL0000015

ORING, 2-011V FT10
ORING, 2-125V
ORING, 2-226V
PS, 40W SWITCHING, +5V, +/-15V(KB) *
PS, 60W SWITCHING, 12V(KB) *
PUMP, THOMAS 607, 115V/60HZ (KB)
RELAY, DPDT, (KB)

B-10

1

2-5

6-10

1

1

1

1

2
1
2

1

2

1

1

1

1
2
1

1

1

1
2

1
1

2
2
2
1
1

1

1

11-20
3
1
1
4
2
2

21-30 UNITS

1
1

4
1
1
4
3
3
1
1
1

2
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
2
3
1

4
2
2
2
4
2
2
1
1
3
3
1

1
5
5
5
1
1
1
2

1
10
10
10
2
2
1
3

With IZS,
ZS Option

With O2
Option

04521C (DCN5731)

Part Number
018080000
002270100
009690300
046030000
FL0000001
FL0000003
HW0000020
OR0000086
OR0000034
OR0000039

04521C (DCN5731)

Description
KIT, DESSICANT BAGGIES (12)
KIT, WINDOW GASKET (12)
KIT, TFE FILTER ELEMENTS, 47MM, 1UM (30)
KIT, CH-43, 3 REFILLS
FILTER, SS
FILTER, DFU
SPRING
ORING, FLOW CONTROL
ORING, FLOW CONTROL
ORING, FLOW CONTROL

Quantity
M200E
M200EM/EH
"00"
"01"
1
1
1
1
4
1
4
8
2
2

1
1
1

4
1
4
8
2
2

B-11

This page intentionally left blank.

B-12

04521C (DCN5731)

Warranty/Repair
Questionnaire Model
200EH/EM

Appendix C
(Ref: 05149A)

TELEDYNE

INSTRUMENTS
Advanced Pollution Instrumentation
A Teledyne Technologies Company

CUSTOMER:_____________________________________

PHONE: ________________________________

CONTACT NAME: ________________________________

FAX NO. _______________________________

SITE ADDRESS:_____________________________________________________________________________
MODEL TYPE: ______________

SERIAL NO.: _________________

FIRMWARE REVISION: ___________

1. Are there any failure messages? ______________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________ (Continue on back if necessary)
PLEASE COMPLETE THE FOLLOWING TABLE:
TEST FUNCTION

RECORDED VALUE

NOx STAB

UNITS

ACCEPTABLE VALUE

PPB/PPM

 1 PPB WITH ZERO AIR

3

SAMPLE FLOW

CM

OZONE FLOW

CM3

80 ± 15

PMT SIGNAL WITH ZERO AIR

MV

-20 to 150

MV

0-5000MV
1
2
0-5,000 PPM , 200 PPM

PMT SIGNAL AT SPAN GAS CONC

PPB

500 ± 50

NORM PMT SIGNAL AT SPAN
GAS CONC

MV
PPB

0-5000MV
1
2
0-5,000 PPM , 200 PPM

AZERO

MV

-20 to 150

HVPS

V

400 to 900

RCELL TEMP

ºC

50 ± 1

BOX TEMP

ºC

AMBIENT ± 5ºC

PMT TEMP

ºC

7 ± 2ºC

ºC

30ºC to 70ºC

3

O2 CELL TEMP
3

IZS TEMP

ºC

50 ± 1ºC

MOLY TEMP

ºC

315 ± 5ºC

RCEL

IN-HG-A

<10

SAMP

IN-HG-A

AMBIENT ± 1

NOx SLOPE

1.0 ± 0.3

NOx OFFSET

mV

50 to 150

NO SLOPE

1.0 ± 0.3

NO OFFSET

mV

50 to 150

3

O2 SLOPE

O2 OFFSET

0.5 to 2.0

3

%

-10 to + 10

PMT SIGNAL DURING ETEST

MV

PMT SIGNAL DURING OTEST

MV

2000 ± 1000

MV

4096mv ±2mv and Must be
Stable

MV

0± 0.5 and Must be Stable

REF_4096_MV

4

REF_GND4
1

2

M200EH
M200EM
4
Located in Signal I/O list under DIAG menu

3

2000 ± 1000

If option is installed

TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS CUSTOMER SERVICE
EMAIL: api-customerservice@teledyne.com
PHONE: (858) 657-9800
TOLL FREE: (800) 324-5190
FAX: (858) 657-9816
C-1

04521C (DCN5731)

Appendix C
(Ref: 05149A)

Warranty/Repair
Questionnaire Model
200EH/EM

TELEDYNE

INSTRUMENTS
Advanced Pollution Instrumentation
A Teledyne Technologies Company

2. What is the rcell & sample pressures with the sample inlet on rear of machine capped?
RCELL PRESS - __________________ IN-HG-A

SAMPLE PRESSURE: _______________ IN-HG-A

3. What are the failure symptoms? ______________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
4. What test have you done trying to solve the problem? _____________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
5. If possible, please include a portion of a strip chart pertaining to the problem. Circle pertinent data.
Thank you for providing this information. Your assistance enables Teledyne Instruments to respond faster to the
problem that you are encountering.
OTHER NOTES: ____________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________________

C-2

TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS CUSTOMER SERVICE
EMAIL: api-customerservice@teledyne.com
PHONE: (858) 657-9800
TOLL FREE: (800) 324-5190
FAX: (858) 657-9816

04521C (DCN5731)

Model 200EH/EM (Ref 05150D)

APPENDIX D: Diagrams and Schematics

APPENDIX D: Diagrams and Schematics
Table D-1: List of Included Diagrams and Schematics
DOCUMENT #

DOCUMENT TITLE

04504

Document, M200EH/EM Electronic Interconnect Diagram

04496

Document, M200EH/EM Electronic Interconnect Listing

01669

PCA 016680300, Ozone generator board

01840

PCA Thermo-electric cooler board

03632

PCA 03631, 0-20mA Driver

03956

PCA 039550200, Relay Board

05703

PCA 05702, Motherboard, E-series, Gen 4

04259

PCA 04258, Keyboard & Display Driver

04354

PCA 04003, Pressure/Flow Transducer Interface

04395

PCA 4394, Ethernet board (optional equipment)

04181

PCA 041800200, PMT pre-amplifier board

04468

PCA, 04467, Analog Output E-Series

USER NOTES:

04521C (DCN5731)

D-1

APPENDIX D: Diagrams and Schematics

D-1

Model 200EH/EM (05150D)

04521C (DCN5731)

M200E INTERCONNECT LIST (Ref: 04496D)

CONNECTION FROM
Cable Part
Signal
Assembly
PN
J/P Pin
#
00729
CBL, KEYBOARD/DISPLAY
D7
Display
DS0000025 CN1
1
D6
Display
DS0000025 CN1
2
D5
Display
DS0000025 CN1
3
D4
Display
DS0000025 CN1
4
D3
Display
DS0000025 CN1
5
D2
Display
DS0000025 CN1
6
D1
Display
DS0000025 CN1
7
D0
Display
DS0000025 CN1
8
DISP WRITE
Display
DS0000025 CN1
9
DGND
Display
DS0000025 CN1
10
Spare
Display
DS0000025 CN1
11
DISP_BUSY
Display
DS0000025 CN1
12
DISP_RETURN
Display
DS0000025 CN1
13
DISP_RETURN
Display
DS0000025 CN1
14
DISP_PWR
Display
DS0000025 CN1
15
DISP_PWR
Display
DS0000025 CN1
16
0364901 CBL, AC Power, E-series
AC Line
Power Entry
CN0000073
L
AC Neutral
Power Entry
CN0000073
N
Power Grnd
Power Entry
CN0000073
Power Grnd
Power Entry
CN0000073
AC Line Switched
Power Switch
SW0000051
L
AC Neutral Switched
Power Switch
SW0000051
N
Power Grnd
Power Entry
CN0000073
AC Line Switched
Power Switch
SW0000051
L
AC Neutral Switched
Power Switch
SW0000051
N
Power Grnd
Power Entry
CN0000073
AC Line Switched
Power Switch
SW0000051
L
AC Neutral Switched
Power Switch
SW0000051
N
Power Grnd
Power Entry
CN0000073
03829
CBL, DC power to motherboard, E-series
DGND
Relay Board
045230100
P7
1
+5V
Relay Board
045230100
P7
2
AGND
Relay Board
045230100
P7
3
+15V
Relay Board
045230100
P7
4
AGND
Relay Board
045230100
P7
5
-15V
Relay Board
045230100
P7
6
+12V RET
Relay Board
045230100
P7
7
+12V
Relay Board
045230100
P7
8
Chassis Gnd
Relay Board
045230100
P7
10
04021
CBL, Preamp, O2 sensor, O3 generator, fan, relay board, motherboard, M200E
DGND
Relay Board
045230100
P12
1
+5V
Relay Board
045230100
P12
2
+15V
Relay Board
045230100
P12
4
AGND
Relay Board
045230100
P12
3
+12V
Relay Board
045230100
P12
8
+12V RET
Relay Board
045230100
P12
7
O3GEN enable signal
Ozone generator
040420200
P1
6
ETEST
Motherboard
057020100
P108 8
OTEST
Motherboard
057020100
P108 16
PHYSICAL RANGE
Motherboard
057020100
P108 7
PMT TEMP
Preamplifier board
041800500
P6
5
HVPS
Preamplifier board
041800500
P6
6
PMT SIGNAL+
Preamplifier board
041800500
P6
7
AGND
Preamplifier board
041800500
P6
S
AGND
Motherboard
057020100
P109 9
O2 SIGNAL Motherboard
057020100
P109 7
O2 SIGNAL +
Motherboard
057020100
P109 1
DGND
O2 Sensor (optional)
OP0000030
P1
5
+5V
O2 Sensor (optional)
OP0000030
P1
6

04521C (DCN5731)

Assembly

CONNECTION TO
PN

J/P

J3
J3
J3
J3
J3
J3
J3
J3
J3
J3
J3
J3
J3
J3
J3
J3

Pin

Keyboard/Interface
Keyboard/Interface
Keyboard/Interface
Keyboard/Interface
Keyboard/Interface
Keyboard/Interface
Keyboard/Interface
Keyboard/Interface
Keyboard/Interface
Keyboard/Interface
Keyboard/Interface
Keyboard/Interface
Keyboard/Interface
Keyboard/Interface
Keyboard/Interface
Keyboard/Interface

042580000
042580000
042580000
042580000
042580000
042580000
042580000
042580000
042580000
042580000
042580000
042580000
042580000
042580000
042580000
042580000

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16

Power Switch
Power Switch
Shield
Chassis
PS2 (+12)
PS2 (+12)
PS2 (+12)
PS1 (+5, ±15)
PS1 (+5, ±15)
PS1 (+5, ±15)
Relay Board
Relay Board
Relay Board

SW0000051
SW0000051
SW0000051
042190000
PS0000038
PS0000038
PS0000038
PS0000037
PS0000037
PS0000037
045230100
045230100
045230100

SK2
SK2
SK2
SK2
SK2
SK2
J1
J1
J1

1
3
2
1
3
2
1
3
2

Motherboard
Motherboard
Motherboard
Motherboard
Motherboard
Motherboard
Motherboard
Motherboard
Motherboard

057020100
057020100
057020100
057020100
057020100
057020100
057020100
057020100
057020100

P15
P15
P15
P15
P15
P15
P15
P15
P15

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

Ethernet board
Ethernet board
Ozone generator
Ozone generator
PMT cooling fan
PMT cooling fan
Motherboard
Preamplifier board
Preamplifier board
Preamplifier board
Motherboard
Motherboard
Motherboard
Motherboard
O2 Sensor (optional)
O2 Sensor (optional)
O2 Sensor (optional)
Relay Board
Relay Board

043940000
043940000
040420200
040420200
013140000
013140000
057020100
041800500
041800500
041800500
057020100
057020100
057020100
057020100
OP0000030
OP0000030
OP0000030
045230100
045230100

P102
P102
P1
P1
P1
P1
P108
P6
P6
P6
P109
P109
P109
P109
P1
P1
P1
P5
P5

1
2
4
5
1
2
15
1
2
4
4
5
6
11
S
9
10
1
2

L
N

D-3

M200E INTERCONNECT LIST (Ref: 04496D)

CONNECTION FROM
CONNECTION TO
Cable Part
Signal
Assembly
PN
J/P Pin
Assembly
PN
#
04022
CBL, DC Power, fan, keyboard, TEC, sensor board, M200E
TEC +12V
TEC board
049310100
P1
1 Relay Board
045230100
TEC +12V RET
TEC board
049310100
P1
2 Relay Board
045230100
DGND
Relay Board
045230100
P10
1 Keyboard
042580000
+5V
Relay Board
045230100
P10
2 Keyboard
042580000
DGND
Keyboard
042580000
P1
2 Relay Board
045230100
+5V
Keyboard
042580000
P1
3 Relay Board
045230100
+12V RET
Relay Board
045230100
P11
7 Chassis fan
040010000
+12V
Relay Board
045230100
P11
8 Chassis fan
040010000
P/Flow Sensor AGND
Relay Board
045230100
P11
3 P/Flow Sensor board
040030800
P/Flow Sensor +15V
Relay Board
045230100
P11
4 P/Flow Sensor board
040030800
Pressure signal 1
P/Flow Sensor board
040030800
P1
2 Motherboard
057020100
Pressure signal 2
P/Flow Sensor board
040030800
P1
4 Motherboard
057020100
Flow signal 1
P/Flow Sensor board
040030800
P1
5 Motherboard
057020100
Flow signal 2
P/Flow Sensor board
040030800
P1
1 Motherboard
057020100
Shield
P/Flow Sensor board
040030800
P1
S Motherboard
057020100
Shield
Motherboard
057020100
P110 9 Relay Board
045230100
Thermocouple signal 1
Motherboard
057020100
P110 2 Relay Board
045230100
TC 1 signal DGND
Motherboard
057020100
P110 8 Relay Board
045230100
Thermocouple signal 2
Motherboard
057020100
P110 1 Relay Board
045230100
TC 2 signal DGND
Motherboard
057020100
P110 7 Relay Board
045230100
04023
CBL, I2C, relay board to motherboard, E-series
I2C Serial Clock
Motherboard
057020100
P107 3 Relay Board
045230100
I2C Serial Data
Motherboard
057020100
P107 5 Relay Board
045230100
I2C Reset
Motherboard
057020100
P107 2 Relay Board
045230100
I2C Shield
Motherboard
057020100
P107 6 Relay Board
045230100
CBL, Nox, zero/span, IZS valves, M200E
04024
Zero/Span valve +12V
Relay Board
045230100
P4
1 Zero/Span valve
042680100
Zero/Span valve +12V RET Relay Board
045230100
P4
2 Zero/Span valve
042680100
Sample valve +12V
Relay Board
045230100
P4
3 Sample valve
042680100
Sample valve +12V RET
Relay Board
045230100
P4
4 Sample valve
042680100
AutoZero valve +12V
Relay Board
045230100
P4
5 AutoZero valve
042680100
AutoZero valve +12V RET
Relay Board
045230100
P4
6 AutoZero valve
042680100
NONOx valve +12V
Relay Board
045230100
P4
7 NONOx valve
042680100
NONOx valve +12V RET
Relay Board
045230100
P4
8 NONOx valve
042680100
0402603 CBL, IZS & O2 sensor heaters/thermistors; reaction cell & manifold thermistors, M200E
Rcell thermistor A
Reaction cell thermistor
041920000
P1
2 Motherboard
057020100
Rcell thermistor B
Reaction cell thermistor
041920000
P1
1 Motherboard
057020100
IZS thermistor A
Motherboard
057020100
P27
6 IZS thermistor/heater
003290000
IZS thermistor B
Motherboard
057020100
P27 13 IZS thermistor/heater
003290000
IZS heater L
IZS thermistor/heater
003290000
P1
4 Relay Board
045230100
IZS heater N
IZS thermistor/heater
003290000
P1
1 Relay Board
045230100
Shield
Relay Board
045230100
O2 sensor heater
Relay Board
045230100
P18
6 O2 sensor therm./heater 043420000
O2 sensor heater
Relay Board
045230100
P18
7 O2 sensor therm./heater 043420000
Shield
Relay Board
045230100
P18 12 O2 sensor therm./heater 043420000
O2 sensor thermistor A
O2 sensor therm./heater 043420000
P1
3 Motherboard
057020100
O2 sensor thermistor B
O2 sensor therm./heater 043420000
P1
1 Motherboard
057020100
Byp/dil. man. thermistor A
Motherboard
057020100
P27
1 Manifold thermistor
044530000
Byp/dil. man. thermistor B
Motherboard
057020100
P27
8 Manifold thermistor
044530000
Configuration jumper intern. Relay Board
045230100
P18
3 Relay Board
045230100
Configuration jumper intern. Relay Board
045230100
P18
8 Relay Board
045230100
04027
CBL, NO2 converter, reaction cell & manifold heaters, M200E
Bypass/dil. manifold heater L Manifold heater 1
044340000
P1
1 Relay Board
045230100
Bypass/dil. manifold heater N Manifold heater 1
044340000
P1
2 Relay Board
045230100
Bypass/dil. manifold heater L Relay Board
045230100
P2
11 Manifold heater 2
044340000
Bypass/dil. manifold heater N Relay Board
045230100
P2
15 Manifold heater 2
044340000
Moly heater A
Relay Board
045230100
P2
7 Moly heater A
039700100
Moly heater C
Relay Board
045230100
P2
6 Moly heater C
039700100
Moly heater B
Relay Board
045230100
P2
10 Moly heater B
039700100
Configuration jumper intern. Relay Board
045230100
P2
13 Relay Board
045230100
Configuration jumper intern. Relay Board
045230100
P2
8 Relay Board
045230100
Reaction cell heater/switch
Relay Board
045230100
P2
1 Reaction cell heater 1B
040400000
Reaction cell heater/switch
Relay Board
045230100
P2
1 Reaction cell heater 2B
040400000
Reaction cell heater/switch
Relay Board
045230100
P2
2 Reaction cell heater 1A
040400000
Reaction cell heater/switch
Relay Board
045230100
P2
3 Reaction cell heat switch 040400000
Reaction cell heater/switch
Relay Board
045230100
P2
4 Reaction cell heat switch 040400000
Reaction cell heater/switch
Relay Board
045230100
P2
5 Reaction cell heater 2A
040400000

D-3

J/P

Pin

P10
P10
P1
P1
P11
P11
P1
P1
P1
P1
P110
P110
P110
P110
P110
P17
P17
P17
P17
P17

8
7
8
1
1
2
1
2
3
6
6
5
4
3
12
S
1
2
3
4

P3
P3
P3
P3

1
2
4
5

P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1

1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2

P27
P27
P1
P1
P18
P18
P18
P1
P1
P1
P27
P27
P1
P1
P18
P18

7
14
2
3
1
2
11
4
2

P2
P2
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P2
P2
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1
P1

11
12
1
2
1
2
3
14
9
4
6
3
1
2
5

4
11
1
2
4
9

04521C (DCN5731)

M200E INTERCONNECT LIST (Ref: 04496D)

CONNECTION FROM
Cable Part
Signal
Assembly
PN
#
04105
CBL, Keyboard, display to motherboard, E-series
Kbd Interrupt
Keyboard
042580000
DGND
Keyboard
042580000
SDA
Keyboard
042580000
SCL
Keyboard
042580000
Shld
Keyboard
042580000
04176
CBL, DC power to relay board, E-series
DGND
Relay Board
045230100
+5V
Relay Board
045230100
+15V
Relay Board
045230100
AGND
Relay Board
045230100
-15V
Relay Board
045230100
+12V RET
Relay Board
045230100
+12V
Relay Board
045230100
04211
CBL, Serial data, motherboard to CPU, E-series
RXD(0)
CPU board
CP0000026
RTS(0)
CPU board
CP0000026
TXD(0)
CPU board
CP0000026
CTS(0)
CPU board
CP0000026
GND(0)
CPU board
CP0000026
RXD(1)
CPU board
CP0000026
RTS(1)
CPU board
CP0000026
TXD(1)
CPU board
CP0000026
CTS(1)
CPU board
CP0000026
GND(1)
CPU board
CP0000026
NET+
CPU board
CP0000026
NETCPU board
CP0000026
GND
CPU board
CP0000026
Shield
CPU board
CP0000026
04339
CBL, CPU to Ethernet (optional), E-series
Ethernet DCD
CPU board
CP0000026
Ethernet DSR
CPU board
CP0000026
Ethernet RXD
CPU board
CP0000026
Ethernet RTS
CPU board
CP0000026
Ethernet TXD
CPU board
CP0000026
Ethernet CTS
CPU board
CP0000026
Ethernet DTR
CPU board
CP0000026
Ethernet GND
CPU board
CP0000026
Ground
CPU board
CP0000026
04433
CBL, preamplifier to relay board, M200E
Preamplifier DGND
Relay Board
045230100
Preamplifier +5V
Relay Board
045230100
Preamplifier AGND
Relay Board
045230100
Preamplifier +15V
Relay Board
045230100
Preamplifier -15V
Relay Board
045230100
04437
CBL, preamplifier to TEC, M200E
Preamp TEC drive VREF
Preamplifier board
041800500
Preamp TEC drive CTRL
Preamplifier board
041800500
Preamp TEC drive AGND
Preamplifier board
041800500

04521C (DCN5731)

J/P

Pin

Assembly

J2
J2
J2
J2
J2

7
2
5
6
10

Motherboard
Motherboard
Motherboard
Motherboard
Motherboard

P8
P8
P8
P8
P8
P8
P8

1
2
4
5
6
7
8

CN3
CN3
CN3
CN3
CN3
CN4
CN4
CN4
CN4
CN4
CN5
CN5
CN5
CN5

CONNECTION TO
PN

J/P

Pin

057020100
057020100
057020100
057020100
057020100

J106
J106
J106
J106
J106

1
8
2
6
5

Power Supply Triple
Power Supply Triple
Power Supply Triple
Power Supply Triple
Power Supply Triple
Power Supply Single
Power Supply Single

PS0000037
PS0000037
PS0000037
PS0000037
PS0000037
PS0000038
PS0000038

J1
J1
J1
J1
J1
J1
J1

3
1
6
4
5
3
1

3
4
5
6
9
3
4
5
6
9
2
4
6

Motherboard
Motherboard
Motherboard
Motherboard
Motherboard
Motherboard
Motherboard
Motherboard
Motherboard
Motherboard
Motherboard
Motherboard
Motherboard
Motherboard

057020100
057020100
057020100
057020100
057020100
057020100
057020100
057020100
057020100
057020100
057020100
057020100
057020100
057020100

J12
J12
J12
J12
J12
J12
J12
J12
J12
J12
J12
J12
J12
J12

14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
9
7
5
2

CN4
CN4
CN4
CN4
CN4
CN4
CN4
CN4
CN4

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
9

Ethernet board
Ethernet board
Ethernet board
Ethernet board
Ethernet board
Ethernet board
Ethernet board
Ethernet board
Ethernet board

043940000
043940000
043940000
043940000
043940000
043940000
043940000
043940000
043940000

P101
P101
P101
P101
P101
P101
P101
P101
P101

6
4
3
10
8
5
9
16
2

P9
P9
P9
P9
P9

1
2
3
4
6

Preamplifier board
Preamplifier board
Preamplifier board
Preamplifier board
Preamplifier board

041800500
041800500
041800500
041800500
041800500

P5
P5
P5
P5
P5

1
2
3
4
6

J1
J1
J1

1
2
3

TEC board
TEC board
TEC board

049310100
049310100
049310100

J3
J3
J3

1
2
3

D-5

D-6

04521C (DCN5731)

1

2

3

4

6

5
VERSION TABLE

016680000 - CE MARK VERSION
STD PROD. VERSION UP TO 10/99
016680100 - NON CE MARK (OBSOLETE)

+15V

016680200 - SUB PS 17 SWITCHER FOR LINEAR SUPPLY
DELETE COMPONENTS
T1, D1, D2, C9, C11, PTC1, PTC2, U2
ADD COMPONENTS
PS1

+15V
+15V

D
R1

R5

TP1

016680300 - LOW OUTPUT + FIXED FREQ
REPLACE VR2 WITH A WIRE JUMPER
REPLACE R4 WITH RS297 127KOHM

1.2K
4.7K 1%

+15V

TP6

R6

+

R2
10K 1%

Q1
IRFZ924

C2
.01

L1

C7

J2

1000uF/25V

1
2
3
4

.1

10
16
2
9
6
7
1
4

C3

.1

VR2
100K

"FREQ"
6
5
4
3
2
1

VIN
C_B
C_A
E_B
E_A
OSC
-SEN
GND

SD
VREF
INV+
COMP
RT
CT
INV+SEN

C5
.1

J1

68uH

TP2

U1

C

016680400 - HI OUTPUT + FIXED FREQ
REPLACE VR2 WITH A WIRE JUMPER
REPLACE R4 WITH RS13 11 KOHM

10

C1

15
13
12
14
11
3
5
8

Q2
IRFZ24

R7

+

016680600 - HI OUTPUT,E SERIES
DELETE COMPONENTS
T1,D1,D2,C9,PTC1,PTC2,U2

C8
1000uF/25V

10
R8
1.2K

C

SG3524B

+

D

C6
100pF

R10
C4

4.7uF/16V
3K

TP3

Text

R11
150K

R4
10K 1%

TP4

115V

15V

B

1
1.1A

1N4007

IN

Text

R9

3

OUT

.1
R13
10K 1%

R12

7
6

2
3

115V

D1

8

GND

PTC2

T1

+

C9
2200uF/35V

10K 1%

2

1

+15V

TP5

LM7815
U2

C10
.1

C11

Text
B

15V
5

4
PWR XFRMR

PTC1

D2

1.1A

1N4007

.22
R14

VR1
1K 20T

4.7K 1%

"PW"

C12
.22

R15
4.7K 1%

Error : LOGO.BMP file not found.
10/15/96 REV. D:

Added PTC1,2 secondary overcurrent protection.

11/21/96 REV. E:

Minor cosmetic fixes

The information herein is the
property of API and is
submitted in strictest confidence for reference only.
Unauthorized use by anyone
for any other purposes is
prohibited. This document or
any information contained
in it may not be duplicated
without proper authorization.

A
10/01/99 REV. F

1

04521C (DCN5731)

2

ADDED VERSION TABLE AT D6

3

4

5

APPROVALS

DATE

OZON_ GEN
A

DRAWN

DRIVER
CHECKED

SIZE

B
APPROVED

DRAWING NO.

REVISION

01669

G

LAST MOD.

SHEET

30-Nov-2006

1

of

1

6

D-7

1

2

3

4

5

6

D

1
2

D

2

7

2

5

1

4

+15

4

6

+15

3
5

1

6

7

+15

+15
3

+15

1
2
2

C

5

7

+15

+15

10

4

6

3

1

1

2

3

4

12

8

11
11

9

8

67

8

12

8

11

8

32

7

10

5

9

2

6

1

4

5

9

3

8

3
2
1

10

1

C

B

B

12

4
67

14

13

+15

+15

5

+

+15

+

The information herein is the
property of API and is
submitted in strictest confidence for reference only.
Unauthorized use by anyone
for any other purposes is
prohibited. This document or
any information contained
in it may not be duplicated
without proper authorization.

A

1

D-8

+15

2

3

4

5

APPROVALS
DRAW N

DATE

T
H
E
R
M
O
E
L
E
C
T
A
COOLER_CONTROL

CH ECKED

SIZ E

DRAW ING NO.

APPROVED

LAST MOD.

REVISION

B 01840

B

14-Jul-1999

SH EET

1 of 1

6

04521C (DCN5731)

1

2

3

4

6

5

D

1

0.1

C4
1000PF

U4

U3

ISO_-15V

+12V

9

C6

ISO_+15V

D

15
12
11

VOUT

7

4

VIN(10)

GATEDRV

U2
2
R1

R2

4.75K

9.76K

GND
TP6

C5
220PF

3
5

6

3

OPA277
8

+VS2

VIN

15

TESTPOINT
TP1

7
1

TESTPOINT
TP2

+V
SR
SSENSE

4

+VS1

VREF
SENSE
VRADJ

2

D1
1N914

OFFADJ
OFFADJ
SPAN
4MA
16MA

VREFIN
VIN(5V)
GND

16
1

ISO_+15V

13
14

Q1
MOSFETP

7
6
8
10
9

IOUT+

XTR110

J1

+12V

-VS1 GND1 -VS2
GND2
C7
0.1

-12V

C

ISO_+15V

HEADER 4X2

IOUT-

VINVIN+

ISO124

10
8

2
4
6
8

-12V
ISO_-15V

+15V

1
3
5
7

2

C

16

IOUTIOUT+

+15V
U1

C1
0.47

ISO+15
TP3

1
2
5
6
7

ISO_+15V

ISO_GND
TP5

B

C2
0.47

ISO_GND

ISO_-15V

0V
+VOUT
-VOUT

SIN

SOUT

14

8

B

DCP010515

C3
0.47
VIN-

TP4
ISO-15

VS
0V

JP1
JUMPER2

Error : LOGO.BMP file not found.

A

04521C (DCN5731)

1

2

Date

Rev.

Change Description

Engineer

8/9/00

A

INITIAL RELEASE (FROM 03039)

KL

3

4

The information herein is the
property of API and is
submitted in strictest confidence for reference only.
Unauthorized use by anyone
for any other purposes is
prohibited. This document or
any information contained
in it may not be duplicated
without proper authorization.
5

APPROVALS

DATE

PCA 03631, Isolated 0-20ma, E Series
A

DRAWN

CHECKED

SIZE

B
APPROVED

DRAWING NO.

REVISION

03632

A

LAST MOD.

SHEET

19-Jul-2002

1

6

of

D-9

1

1

2

J1
1
2
3
4
4 PIN

D

3

4

6

5

General Trace Width Requirements
1. Vcc (+5V) and I2C VCC should be 15 mil
2. Digitial grounds should be at least 20 mils
3. +12V and +12V return should be 30 mils
4. All AC lines (AC Line, AC Neutral, RELAY0 - 4, All signals on JP2) should be 30 mils wide, with 120 mil isolation/creepage distance around them
5. Traces between J7 - J12 should be top and bottom and at least 140 mils.
6. Traces to the test points can be as small as 10 mils.

AC_Line
AC_Neutral

RELAY0
VCC
RN1
330

R1
R2
2.2K 2.2K

RELAY1

RELAY0
K1

9

1

4

3

2

1

4

3

K3

JP2
Heater Config Jumper
2

COMMON0
LOAD0
TS0
RELAY0

RELAY2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12

2

K2

RELAY2

I2C_Vcc

10

8

7

6

5

4

3

I2C_Vcc

2

1

1
JP1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
HEADER 4X2

D

RELAY1

3

+-

SLD-RLY

+-

4
TS0
TS1
TS2

SLD-RLY

COMMON1
LOAD1
TS1
RELAY1

A

SLD-RLY

+-

YEL
RL0

YEL
RL1

D8

D9

YEL
RL2

GRN
VA0

GRN
VA1

GRN
VA2

D10
GRN
VA3

1
IO10
IO11
IO12
IO13
IO14
IO15

2
SN74HC04

VCC

U2B

Q1

VCC
4
11

3
R5
10K

JP4
1
2
3

C3
1

U2D
R6
10K

1

11

CON10THROUGH

2

1
C6
2000/25
VCC

J11

1

SPARE
J10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

14

TP1 TP2 TP3 TP4 TP5 TP6 TP7
DGND +5V AGND +15V -15V +12RT +12V
1

SYNC DEMOD
J9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

U2F

REV
B

J12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

13

+

AUTH
CAC

DATE
10/3/02

CE MARK LINE VOLTAGE TRACE SPACING FIX

12
A
Title

CON10THROUGH
CON10THROUGH
CON10THROUGH
3

Te
T

D-10

8 PIN

10

1

CON10THROUGH

VLV_ENAB

U2E

1

CON10THROUGH

8

+

1

MTHR BRD
J8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

B

VALVE3

7

A

KEYBRD
J7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

VALVE2

2 1

C5
10/16

2
DC PWR IN
J5
DGND
1
VCC
2
AGND
3
+15V
4
AGND
5
-15V
6
+12RET
7
+12V
8
EGND
9
CHS_GND
10
CON10THROUGH

VALVE1

2

+ C4
10/16

1

R4
1M

2 1

MAX693

AK

C2
0.001

D17
RLS4148

VALVE0

UDN2540B(16)
9

A

JP3
1 2
HEADER 1X2

J4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

WTCDG OVR
1

16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9

K

VBATT
RESET
VOUT
RESET'
VCC
WDO'
GND
CD IN'
BATT_ONCD OUT'
LOW LINE' WDI
OSC IN
PFO'
OSC SEL
PFI

6

IN 4
OUT4
IN 3
K
ENABLE OUT 3
IN 2
OUT 2
IN 1
K
OUT 1
VCC

U2C

I2C_Vcc

IRF7205

1
2
3
6
7
8

GND
GND
GND
GND

U4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

+12V
U5

16
15
14
10
9

13
12
5
4

R3
20K

VCC

C

U2A

5
B

COMMON2
LOAD2
TS2
RELAY2

AC_Neutral

IO3
IO4

PCF8575
12

D7

1

P00
P01
P02
P03
P04
SCL P05
SDA P06
P07
P10
P11
P12
P13
P14
P15
P16
P17
Vss

22
23

A0
A1
A2
INT

4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20

D4

KA

24
J3
1
2
3
4
5
CON5

21
2
3
1

D3

RED

U1
Vdd

C1
0.1

C

D2

K

D1
WDOG

I2C_Vcc

J216 PIN
1
2
RELAY0
3
4
5
6
7
RELAY1
8
9
10
11
12
RELAY2
13
14
15
16

Size
B
Date:
File:

APPLIES TO PCB 03954

4

5

M100E/M200E Relay PCB

Number

03956

Revision

A

3
3
30-Jun-2004
Sheet 1 of
N:\PCBMGR\RELEASED\03954cc\PROTEL\03954a.ddb
Drawn By:
6

Te
T

04521C (DCN5731)

1

2

3

4

5

6

AC_Line
J20
1
2
3
4
5
6

RELAY3
RN2
330

D

RELAY4

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

RELAY3
1

K4

RELAY4
2

1

4

3

K5

Aux Relay Connector

D

MOLEX6
2

AC_Neutral

I2C_Vcc
3

I2C_Vcc

+-

SLD-RLY

RL3

RL4

VA4

D12
GRN

D13
GRN

D14
GRN

D15
GRN

D16
GRN

VA5

VA6

VA7

TR0

TR1
C

K

C

D11
GRN

KA

D6
YEL

A

SLD-RLY

D5
YEL

4

+-

IO3
IO4

VCC

IO13

+12V

11

U3A
1
SN74HC04

16
15
14
10
9

VLV_ENAB

IN 4
OUT4
IN 3
K
ENABLE OUT 3
IN 2
OUT 2
IN 1
K
OUT 1
GND
GND
GND
GND

U3D
9

J6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

U6

2
VCC

IO10
IO11
IO12

8

1
2
3
6
7
8

13
12
5
4

UDN2540B(16)
U3B
U3E
IO14

3

Valve4
Valve5
Valve6
Valve7

CON10

4
11

10

B

B
U3C

14

VCC

U3F
13

IO15

5

6

12
J13
1
2
MINIFIT-2

C13
0.1

7

+12V

Q2
IRL3303
Use 50 mil traces
+12V

J14
1
2
MINIFIT-2

Q3
IRL3303

A

A
Title

Use 40 mil traces
Size
B
Date:
File:

+12RET
1

04521C (DCN5731)

2

3
Te
T

4
Te
T

5

100E/200E/400E RELAY PCB

Number

03956

Revision

A

3
3
30-Jun-2004
Sheet 2 of
N:\PCBMGR\RELEASED\03954cc\PROTEL\03954a.ddb
Drawn By:
6

D-11

1

2

3

4

R7
2.55K

+15V

6

5

VDD_TC
ZR1

C15

C7
D

0.1

0.1

+15V

D

LTC1050
U8

K

1

2

2
4
CCW
CW

JP5
1 2
JUMPER

R13
332K

1K

CCW

K

R17

R19

J17
1
2
3
4
MICROFIT-4

1

10K

5K
C

C9
0.1

ZR2
5.6V

A

AK

VEE_TC

W

W

C8
0.1

C

R15
11K C17

CW

R11
249K

R9

TYPE k
K TC Connector

-15V

CW

5

4
1

OPA2277
J18
- 2
+ 1

ZR3
10V

3
6

TYPE J
J TC Connector

R21
20k

U7A

3

KA

C16
0.1

8

7

J15
2
+ 1
-

8

A

5.6V

R8
2.55K
VDD_TC

B

8

7

ZR4
LTC1050
U9

U7B

3
6

7

2
J16
- 2
+ 1

20k
R22

5
6

10V

B
K

-15V

KA

A

C10
0.1

J

8

K

7

R-

5

R14
676K

1K

JP6
1 2
JUMPER

R16
11K
R20
10K

R18

Vin
Gnd

C14
0.1

R10

U10
3
TOUT

CW

R12
249K

2

TYPE J
J TC Connector

5

4
1

OPA2277

C20
1 uF

5K

C11

LT1025
4

0.1

C12
0.1

A

A
VEE_TC

Title

TYPE K
J19
- 2
+ 1
K TC Connector

Size
B
Date:
File:
1

2

3
Te

D-12

4

5

100E/200E/400E RELAY PAB

Number

03956

Revision

A

3
3
30-Jun-2004
Sheet 3 of
N:\PCBMGR\RELEASED\03954cc\PROTEL\03954a.ddb
Drawn By:
6

Te

04521C (DCN5731)

3
U2
74HC154

ENAB2

U4B
10
11
D0 12
13

PRE
CLK
D
CLR

4
3
2
1

8

Q

U51D

AEN

IOEN

A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

1
2
3
4
6
7
8
9

Y1
Y2
Y3
Y4
Y5
Y6
Y7
Y8

5

Q

74HC74

TP56

VCC
1.2 uF, 6.3V ceramic

2
4

74HC32
U50A

1
4
5
6
19

INT
A0

6
5

17
16
18

U50B

2

1

shorted - sldr side

JP4

IRQ10
JP5

8
10
74HC08
U6C

74HC08
12

A15

13

11

10

74HC32

74HC08

JP2
2

1

4

2

U3
LTC699CS8

7
8
9
11
12
13
14
15

D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7

47k, 5%
R5

VCC
VCC

74AHC1GU04

2

1

IOR
IOW

INLINE-6
J106

KBINT
SDA
3

SCL

VCC

2

SDA

DB0
DB1
DB2
DB3
DB4
DB5
DB6
DB7

6

IDC-HEADER

IOR
IOW

SCL
DGND

MICROFIT-8

2

10

VSS

JP6

1

IDC-HEADER
B

WDI

RESET

C3

7
0.15 uF, ceramic

I2C_RESET
SHDN
SHDN

IOR
IOW

U5B
10
11
12
13

U51A
1

+12V

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

INT

shorted - sldr side

JP3

6

VCC

8

U39

Q

1
2

A14

Q

9

U50D

VCC

PRE
CLK
D
CLR

5

20

VCC

GND
GND
GND

64
63
62
61
60
59
58
57
56
55
54
53
52
51
50
49
48
47
46
45
44
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33

5

U5A 74HC74
4
3
2
1

9

CS
RD
WR

1
2
3
4
5
6

3
4
8

GND
GND
J101B
OSC
PC104
+5V
BALE
TC
DACK2
IRQ3
IRQ4
IRQ5
IRQ6
IRQ7
SYSCLK
REFRESH
DRQ1
DACK1
DRQ3
DACK3
IOR
IOW
SMEMR
SMEMW
(KEY)
+12V
ENDXFR
-12V
DRQ2
-5V
IRQ9
+5V
RESETDRV
GND

A13

I2C_DRV_RST

U50C
6

CLK
IACK
INT
A0
RESET

C

J107

DGND
SDA
VCC
SCL
I2C_RESET

U10
PCF8584

SYSCLK

U51B

1

R3

74HC08
4

R4
2.2K, 5%

C39

2.2K, 5%
R38
2.2K, 5%

IOW 1
3

R25

R24

2

LED, RED, smt 1206

X3

NOT INSTALLED

A12

1

1
JITO-2-DC5F-10OHM
4

10

U6D
3

12

IOEN

11

2

13

PRE
CLK
D
CLR

Q

Q

9

8

SHDAC

SHDAC

74HC74

74HC08

74HC32
R61
47k, 5%
A

KBINT

IDC-HEADER

Notes:

Title

1) This schematic is for PCA #05702
2) This schematic is for PCB 05701

Size

Schematic for E Series Motherboard PCA 05702

Orcad B
Date:
File:
1

04521C (DCN5731)

D

2.2K, 5%
74HC08

VCC

1
2
3

HEADER3-DEFAULTED-1

DS5

VCC

TC1

13

6

Q

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16

MICROFIT-16

12
11

PRE
CLK
D
CLR

Pins 1&2 shorted on PCA
JP7

JP1
2

10
5

9

Q

18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11

D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7

RN16
47Kx8

G1
G2

U4A
D1

1

74HC74

I2C_RESET

ADDR=0x360 (DEFAULT)
ADDR = 0x320 (JP1 INSTALLED)

EN

1
19

U8

J108

DI6
DI4
DI2
DI0
DO6
DO4
DO2
DO0
DI7
DI5
DI3
DI1
DO7
DO5
DO3
DO1

DO0
DO1
DO2
DO3
DO4
DO5
DO6
DO7
DI0
DI1
DI2
DI3
DI4
DI5
DI6
DI7

12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19

Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Q5
Q6
Q7
Q8

D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8

74HC574

U7
74HC541
IOR

19

P=Q

TP2

0X32F

20

VCC
B0
B7
B1
B6
B2
B5
B3
B4
A0
A7
A1
A6
A2
A5
A3
A4

0X32C

9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2

D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7

74HC32

VCC

U1
74HC688
3
18
5
16
7
14
9
12
2
17
4
15
6
13
8
11

IOW

DIGIO2
DIGIO3
DIGIO4
TEMP
DACV
WRDAC
VFPROG
CHGAIN
VFREAD

6

R59
47k, 5%

G1
G2

DIGIO1

OC
CLK

2

IDC-HEADER

IRQ12
2

18
19

C38
0.15 uF, ceramic

D[0..7]

B

1

VCC

GND

PC104CD

A

TP44

1
11

3

C

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40

6

1

DIGIO0

0X32D
0X32E

C

J102

VCC

1

D

32
31
A0
30
A1
29
A2
28
A3
27
A4
26
A5
25
A6
24
A7
23
A8
22
A9
21
A10
20
A11
19
A12
18
A13
17
A14
16
A15
15
14
13
12
AEN
11
10
9
D0
8
D1
7
D2
6
D3
5
D4
4
D5
3
D6
2
D7
1

GND
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16
A17
A18
A19
AEN
IOCHRDY
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
IOCHECK

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
13
14
15
16
17

Y0
Y1
Y2
Y3
Y4
Y5
Y6
Y7
Y8
Y9
Y10
Y11
Y12
Y13
Y14
Y15

A
B
C
D

5

U6A

1

23
22
21
20

J101A
PC104

4

1

2

3

1

2

3

4

5

Number

Revision
A

05703

17-Jun-2008
Sheet 1of
8
N:\Pcbmgr\05701dn.E-motherboard.gen4\Source\05701a.DDB
Drawn By:
6

D-13

1

2

3

4

5

6

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

RX1
TX1
RS-GND1

DS2

DS1
1

1
2
3
4

RX for Com1

R12

10k, 1%
4.9K, 5%
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

1

2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4

7
9

DB9M

1
2
3
4

DTE

10

TV ARRAY
11

8
7
6
5

R2
2.2K, 5%VCC

R1
2.2K, 5%

8
7
6
5

VCC
R14

R13
NOT INSTALLED

1

1

12

C

TV2
SMDA15LCC
SW1001
SW PUSHBUTTON-4PDT

NOT INSTALLED

DS3

DS4

R10
NOT INSTALLED

2

RX for Com2

1

TX for Com2

1

LED, RED, smt 1206

LED, GRN, smt 1206

1

2

NC
RXD
TXD
NC
GND
NC
RTS
CTS
NC

8

1

INLINE-12

J1013

DCE side of switch is side towards pin 1,

RX0
RTS0
TX0
CTS0
RS-GND0
RX1
RTS1
TX1
CTS1
RS-GND1

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14

R111

Com1 - RS232-A

J12

D

-15V

1

R11
4.9K, 5%

LED, GRN, smt 1206

TV1
TV ARRAY
SMDA15LCC

8
7
6
5

TX for Com1

1 2

LED, RED, smt 1206

2

8
7
6
5

1
2

2

C

1
2
3
4

RTS1
CTS1
D

Com2 - RS232-B/RS485

J1010
DB9 FEMALE

MT6

MT7

MT8

MT9

TP17

+12V

+12VRET +15V

-15V

1

1

1

1

VCC
1

MT1

MT2

MT3

MT4

MT5

TP18

B
1

1

TP16

1

TP15

1

TP14

1

TP13

MOUNTING HOLE

1

MOUNTING HOLE MOUNTING HOLE MOUNTING HOLE

MOUNTING HOLE MOUNTING HOLE MOUNTING HOLE

MOUNTING HOLE

MOUNTING HOLE

B

J15
AUX DC

POWER IN

+12V
+12RET
DGND
+15V
-15V
AGND
+5V
AGND
EGND
CHASGND

8
7
1
4
6
3
2
5
9
10

VCC
U51C
9
8

10 uF, 35V, TANTALUM
+ C2

10

D1

C1 +
74HC08
10 uF, 35V, TANTALUM

MOLEX-10

MBRS340CT
D9

D1, D9 & R35 must be
within 1" of J15

MBRS340CT
R35
A

A

NOT INSTALLED

Title
Schematic for E Series Motherboard PCA 05702

Size
Orcad B
Date:
File:
1

D-14

2

3

4

5

Number

Revision
A

05703

17-Jun-2008
Sheet 2of
8
N:\Pcbmgr\05701dn.E-motherboard.gen4\Source\05701a.DDB
Drawn By:
6

04521C (DCN5731)

3

-15V
2
4
6
8

2

-

OP-AMP, PRECISION DUAL
1

0.15 uF, ceramic

U29B

U30
74HC574

U20C
9
8

CLK

10

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

0.15 uF, ceramic

+

Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Q5
Q6
Q7
Q8

D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8

19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12

CSDACA

2
4
6
8

-

CSDACA

CSRANGE1
CSDACB

2
4
6
8

4
3
2
1
5
6
7
8

SMDA15LCC

L5
L6
L7
L15

SMDA15LCC
1
3
5
7

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

DAC3V

DAC0
DAC1
DAC2
DAC3

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

0.15 uF, ceramic

MICROFIT-10
+15V

C

D[0..7]

0.15 uF, ceramic
C10

C9
C

+15V

4

U35A
OP-AMP, PRECISION QUAD

1

U32

D0
CLK

11
12
14
13

3
B

15
10

SHDAC

W1
B1
AGND1

18.7K

W2
B2
AGND2

5

4
2
1

10k, 1%

5
6
7
8

23

11
12
14
13

D0
CLK

A1

-

3

OP-AMP, PRECISION QUAD

16

SHDAC

A2

U36B
5

C17

10

W2
B2
AGND2

9

C11
0.15 uF, ceramic

+

4
2
1

6

-

-15V

OP-AMP, PRECISION QUAD

OP-AMP, PRECISION QUAD

DGND

16

B

+15V

U36C
VCC

0.15 uF, ceramic

10

+

9

-

8

9

R20

DAC3V

DAC3
18.7K

OP-AMP, PRECISION QUAD

+

8

TP32

R18
10k, 1%

0.15 uF, ceramic

U35C

DAC1

+15V

-15V

7

VCC

+15V

18
20
17

DAC2V

TP29

C16

C14
0.15 uF, ceramic

0.15 uF, ceramic

18.7K

RS
SHDN

VCC

VCC

9

15
10

22
24
21

CS
SDI
CLK
SDO

7
6

W1
B1
AGND1

0.15 uF, ceramic

-15V

+

C18

-

19
DAC1V

A3

DAC1V

R22

W3
B3
AGND3

18
20
17

-15V

TP33
U36D +15V

R21
10k, 1%

18.7K

1

-15V
7

+15V

U35D

POT, DIGITAL

R23
10k, 1%

+

MBRS340CT

13

-

12

+

13

-

14

-15V
OP-AMP, PRECISION QUAD

14

A

8
6
5

POT, DIGITAL

D7
12

A4

W4
B4
AGND4

11

A4

8
6
5
4

7

W4
B4
AGND4

11

1

4

W3
B3
AGND3

VOA
GND
VCC
VOB

C12

-15V

DGND

A3

DOUT
CS
DIN
CLK

SOCKET U33

+15V

U35B

VCC

19

4
3
2
1

DAC, 12 BIT
R19

RS
SHDN

VCC

CSDACB
D0
CLK

TP28

CS
SDI
CLK
SDO

A2

U33

R17

22
24
21

11

A1

DAC 2

11

DAC, 12 BIT

23

DUAL DAC A2
U34

4

5
6
7
8

4

VOA
GND
VCC
VOB

11

DOUT
CS
DIN
CLK

1

U31

R16

DAC0V

11

DAC0V

4

-

DUAL DAC A1

-

4

2

2

1

1

4
3
CSDACA
2
D0
1
CLK
SOCKET U31

OP-AMP, PRECISION QUAD
+
3

+

1

1

3

TP27

4

U36A

TP26

D

J22

CSRANGE2

74HC32

0
0G
1
1G
2
2G
3
3G

TERMBLOCK-8

FE BEAD
1
3
5
7

IDC-8

OP-AMP, PRECISION DUAL

CSDACB

C19
C13
10000 pF 10000 pF

C5
C4
10000 pF 10000 pF

TV4
TV ARRAY

J23
7

6

1
3
5
7

TV3

TV ARRAY

IDC-8

4

D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7

5

OC
CLK

2
4
6
8

1
3
5
7

J1020
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

11

1
11

74HC32

WRDAC

-15V
8

U20B
5

L2
L3
L4

5
6
7
8

C53

IOW
IOW

2
4
6
8

C8

TC2

6

1
3
5
7

J21

4

R63
10k, 1%

4

1
3
5
7

IDC-8

D

DACV
DACV

2
4
6
8

C20
10000 pF

C15
10000 pF

4
3
2
1

+

4
3
2
1

1

VREF

3

C7
10000 pF

10000 pF
C21
L1 FE BEAD

+15V

DAC RANGE & OFFSET PROGRAM
40K
R15

6
ANALOG VOLTAGE & CURRENT OUTPUTS

J19

0.15 uF, ceramic

8

U29A

5

5
6
7
8

TP21

4
ISOLATED 0-20MA OPTIONAL BOARDS

C6

+15V

5
6
7
8

2

4
3
2
1

1

A

D8

Title
11

Schematic for E Series Motherboard PCA 05702

D7 and D8
Must be located
within 1" of U32 & U34
1

04521C (DCN5731)

-15V
OP-AMP, PRECISION QUAD

MBRS340CT

Size
Orcad B
Date:
File:

2

3

4

5

Number

Revision
A

05703

17-Jun-2008
Sheet 3 of
8
N:\Pcbmgr\05701dn.E-motherboard.gen4\Source\05701a.DDB
Drawn By:
6

D-15

1

2

3

4

5

5
10

6

+15V
5
10

-

C46
0.15 uF, ceramic

VCC

U54

.022 uF, 50V

VCC

U55
DG444DY
3
14
11
6
1
16
9
8

2
15
10
7
12
4
5
13

D1
D2
D3
D4
VCC
-VS
GND
+VS

100 R47

1

IOW

1
3
2

Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Q5
Q6
Q7
Q8

19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12

D6
D2

VCC
10 uF, 35V, TANTALUM

10
5

C50

VCC

C

D4

D3
D7

C51
0.15 uF, ceramic
D0

SEL60

D[0..7]

IOW

5
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7

74HC32

A

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8

Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Q5
Q6
Q7
Q8

19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12

7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17

TP54

R9

100

TP57

DB4
RDMBYTE
DB3
GND
U57
DB7
TIE
TIE
DB0
Xilinx CPLD
TDI
TMS
TCK

TC8
TIE
TIE
TIE
TIE
FREQ
TIE
TIE
VCCIO
GND
TDO
SEL60

B

C52
0.15 uF, ceramic

SEL60

IOR

SA
SB
SC
START

VFREAD

MSB
MID
LSB

A

Title Schematic for E Series Motherboard PCA 05702

Date:
File:

D-16

VCC

D1

Orcad B

2

39
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
29

TP55

Size

1

X1
MB100H-4.8MHZ

5

18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28

TP53

1

OE
CLK

TP52

1

TP51

1

6

1

VFPROG

1
11

1

U60
74HC574

TP50

U59B
4

D5

RDMSB
TIE
DB1
VCCINT
IOR
GND
SA
SB
SC
READ
START

74HC32

1
4

4

0.15 uF, ceramic
R49
100

6
5
4
3
2
1
44
43
42
41
40

1
2
3
4
6
7
8
9

OE
CLK
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8

C

1

TP48 PLACE 100
OHM
RESISTOR AS
CLOS AS
POSSIBLE TO
VCC
X1 AND X2

R47 and R48 reduce the gain
for analog inputs by 1%, so
that we can read slightly above
full scale, to prevent overflow
of ADC reading

+

U59A

CHGAIN

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

C54

X2
JITO-2-DCA5AE-4.8MHZ

C49

-15V

TC6

D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7

AD652KP

1

1.2 uF, 6.3V ceramic

U58
74HC574

B

VCC

8

+15V
-15V

RN17
100Kx8

1
11

10 uF, 35V, TANTALUM

C48
1
2
3
4

VREF

SHDN

+
R46
1.1K, 5%

0.15 uF, ceramic

VOLTAGE REF

TP49

C45
18
17
16
15
14

COMP+
COMPAGND
GND
FOUT

R48 200

VREF

DACMUX

OP OUT
OPOP+
5VI
10VI

6

+15V

S1
S2
S3
S4
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4

4
5
6
7
8

1

TP1

VCC

3
2
1
20
19

-15V

1M, 1%, 1206 CHIP
R45

C44
13
2
3
18
14
15
16
17

VREF
NC
NC
ENB
A3
A2
A1
A0

U56
C47
1.2 uF, 6.3V ceramic
8
NC
NC
7
NC
VIN
6
VOUT NR
5
TRIM GND

TC7

NC
+VS
NC
REF
NC

C43
0.15 uF, ceramic

12

GND

R45 induces an
offset in analog
signal to give a
'live 0' for sensors
with 0 or slightly
negative output

U53

27

-VSS

AN MUX

AGND

1

1

+VSS

TP3

1

TEMPMUX

0.15 uF, ceramic2

OP-AMP, PRECISION
6

3

CH14
CH13
CH12
CH11
CH9
CH8

+

C42

8VI
OPT10V
-VS
COS
CLK

CH11
CH12
CH13
CH14

3

28

OUT

1

MICROFIT-12

10 uF, 35V, TANTALUM

9
10
11
12
13

CH7
CH8

D

+

RDLSB
DB2
DB6
TIE
TIE
TIE
DB5
VFCLK
ICLK
VCCINT
TIE

9
8
7
6
4
3
2
1

CH6

IN 1
IN 2
IN 3
IN 4
IN 5
IN 6
IN 7
IN 8
IN 9
IN 10
IN 11
IN 12
IN 13
IN 14
IN 15
IN 16

C41

0.15 uF, ceramic

4

19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4

CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4

CH9

C

C40

0.15 uF, ceramic
U52

J110

100

C55

RN15
100Kx8

MICROFIT-12

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12

R43

ANALOG INPUTS

9
8
7
6
4
3
2
1

D

CH7
CH6
CH4
CH3
CH2
CH1

C

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12

+15V
-15V +15V

7

C

J109

RN14
100Kx8

3

4

5

Number

Revision

05703

A

4
17-Jun-2008
Sheet
of 8
N:\Pcbmgr\05701dn.E-motherboard.gen4\Source\05701a.DDB
Drawn By:

6

04521C (DCN5731)

1

2

3

4

5

6

+15V

+5VANA

U23
1
3

+ C60
10 uF, 35V, TANTALUM

LP2981IM5

D

2

D

OUT
IN
ON/OFF NC
GND

BYPASS CAPS
MUST BE WITHIN
1/2" OF THE
REGULATOR
INPUT/OUTPUT
PINS

5
4

C29
1 uF

D[0..7]

+5VANA
VCC

+15V

XT1
U48
MAX382CWN
9
14
15
4
3
2
17
16
18
1

TEMPMUX

D0
D1
D2

C

SHDN

OUT
+VSS
GND
VENB
A0
A1
A2
RS
WR

J27
THERMISTER

THERMISTER1

5
6
7
8
13
12
11
10

IN 1
IN 2
IN 3
IN 4
IN 5
IN 6
IN 7
IN 8

THERMISTER2
THERMISTER3
THERMISTER4
THERMISTER5
THERMISTER6
THERMISTER7
THERMISTER8

2
3
4
6
7
8
9
10

U59D

TEMP 12
IOW

THERMISTER6
THERMISTER5

11

1

C

74HC32

C

MICROFIT-14

RN20
10Kx9, 2%

13

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14

B

B

+15V-15V
RN18

U49

DACMUX

10K
R34

C36 0.15 uF, ceramic

VCC

C37

2
15
10
7
12
4
5
13

D1
D2
D3
D4
VCC
-VS
GND
+VS

S1
S2
S3
S4
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4

3
14
11
6
1
16
9
8

1
2
3
4

8
7
6
5

1
2
3
4

1Kx4
8
7
6
5

DAC0V

DAC0V
DAC1V
DAC2V
DAC3V

DAC1V
DAC2V

DAC3V

DAC0
DAC1
DAC2
DAC3

0.15 uF, ceramic

DG444DY

10Kx4
RN21

A

A

Title
Schematic for E Series Motherboard PCA 05702

Size
Orcad B
Date:
File:
1

04521C (DCN5731)

2

3

4

5

Number

Revision
A

05703

17-Jun-2008
Sheet 5of
8
N:\Pcbmgr\05701dn.E-motherboard.gen4\Source\05701a.DDB
Drawn By:
6

D-17

1

2

3

4

5

6

CONTROL INPUTS

5
10

5
10

VCC

C

C

RN3
510x8

TP7

RN2
15Kx8

D

U11
1

D

74HC541

10000 pF

C

D[0..7]

R27 R28 R29
100 100 100
C97

R26
100

D7

9

R31 R32 R33
100 100 100

R30
100

330 pF, 50V

L23
L24
L26

C59

C62

L25 FE BEAD

16

2
3

15
14

4
5

13
12

6
7

11
10

8

9

330 pF, 50V

C102

C98

C96

1

C100

330 pF, 50V
U13
PS2702-4

C

C103

8

D6

11
10

D5

6
7

D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7

D4

13
12

D0

C22

C56

4
5

10000 pF
EXT_+5V_OUT

TERMBLOCK-10
C34

L9

15
14

18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11

Y1
Y2
Y3
Y4
Y5
Y6
Y7
Y8

A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8

C101

C57

C23

L8

2
3

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

D3

L22 FE BEAD

C35

EXTERNAL
CONTROL
IN
A

16

DIGIO0
IOR

C99

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

1

D2

L19
L20
L21

D1

J1004

1
19

G1
G2

9
8
7
6
4
3
2
1

9
8
7
6
4
3
2
1

U12
PS2702-4

330 pF, 50V

Place these termination resistors at the end of each data
line. Each data line
should be laid out as a daisy-chain, the signal passing
from one IC to the next.

VCC

C61

C58

10000 pF

10000 pF

B
5
10

B

8
7
6
5

C

RN4
15Kx8

U14

RN1

1
2
3
4

L28
L29
L30
L27

1

16

2
3

15
14

4
5

13
12

6
7

11
10

8

9

A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8

DIGIO4

D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7

L11

C66

10000 pF

A

EXT_+5V_OUT

Title
Schematic for E Series Motherboard PCA 05702

C65

C63

C64

C25

FE BEAD

Size
Orcad B
Date:
File:

D-18

18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11

IOR

74HC541

10000 pF

1

Y1
Y2
Y3
Y4
Y5
Y6
Y7
Y8

1
19

D[0..7]

L10

C24

A

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
TERMBLOCK-10

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

U15
PS2702-4

J1006

EXTERNAL
CONTROL
IN
B

G1
G2

9
8
7
6
4
3
2
1

510x4

2

3

4

5

Number

Revision
A

05703

17-Jun-2008
Sheet 6of
8
N:\Pcbmgr\05701dn.E-motherboard.gen4\Source\05701a.DDB
Drawn By:
6

04521C (DCN5731)

1

2

3

4

5

6

5
10

VCC
DIGITAL

OUTPUTS

C

RN10
510x8

D

D

U22
9
8
7
6
4
3
2
1

1

C80

PS2702-4
16

C82
10000 pF

TP19

SHDN

SHDN

1

U6B
4
DIGIO2
IOW

U24
74HC574
1
11

6

5

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7

74HC32

OE
CLK
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8

Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Q5
Q6
Q7
Q8

19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12

2
3

15
14

4
5

13
12

6
7

11
10

8

9

U25

D[0..7]

C

1

PS2702-4
16

2
3

15
14

4
5

13
12

6
7

11
10

8

C79

C81
10000 pF

L43
L44
L45
L46 FE BEAD

J1017
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12

L48
L49
L50

L47 FE BEAD

C84

C86

9

FE BEAD

C83

C

TERMBLOCK-12

10000 pF

L12

A STATUS OUTPUTS

C85

C26
10000 pF

C27
RESETTABLE FUSE, 0.3A, 60V

VCC
5
10

D6

F1

L13

VCC
C

FE BEAD

RN12
510x8

9
8
7
6
4
3
2
1

U26
B

SHDN

U27
74HC574

U20D
12

DIGIO3

1
11

11
13

IOW IOW

74HC32

D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

OE
CLK
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8

Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Q5
Q6
Q7
Q8

19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12

EXT_+5V_OUT

DIODE, SCHOTTKY
1

PS2702-4
16

2
3

15
14

4
5

13
12

6
7

11
10

8

9

1

U28

PS2702-4
16

2
3

15
14

4
5

13
12

6
7

11
10

8

9

B

C90
L52
L53
L54

C88

B STATUS OUTPUTS

C89

C87

10000 pF
J1018

L51 FE BEAD
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

L56
L57
L58
L55 FE BEAD

C28

A

10000 pF

L14

TERMBLOCK-10

C92

C91

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
RET
GND

C94
10000 pF
C93

A

10000 pF
Title
Schematic for E Series Motherboard PCA 05702

Size
Orcad B
Date:
File:
1

04521C (DCN5731)

2

3

4

5

Number

Revision
A

05703

17-Jun-2008
Sheet 7of
8
N:\Pcbmgr\05701dn.E-motherboard.gen4\Source\05701a.DDB
Drawn By:
6

D-19

6

5

4

3

2

1

5
10

VCC
DIGITAL

C

IOW

1
11

8

10
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7

74HC32

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

OE
CLK
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8

Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Q5
Q6
Q7
Q8

19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12

15
14

4
5

13
12

6
7

11
10

8

9

U18

D[0..7]

1

PS2702-4
16

2
3

15
14

4
5

13
12

6
7

11
10

8

9

C70

2
3

D

10000 pF
C69

9
8
7
6
4
3
2
1

U17
74HC574

U59C
9
DIGIO0

PS2702-4
16
C67

D

1

C68

RN7
510x8
U16

SHDN

SHDN

OUTPUTS

10000 pF

L32
L33
L34
L31 FE BEAD

J1008

L36
L37
L38
L35 FE BEAD

CO_EXT_RET

C

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14

CONTROL OUTPUTS

C

TERMBLOCK-14

5
10

C74

C72

L59 FE BEAD
VCC

EXTERNAL CONNECTOR
SOLDER SIDE

C71

C95

C

RN5
510x8

C73

10000 pF

10000 pF

10000 pF

SHDN

U21
74HC574

2
3

15
14

IOW

1
2

74HC32

B

1
11

3
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

OE
CLK

4
5

13
12

D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8

Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Q5
Q6
Q7
Q8

19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12

6
7

11
10

8

9

L40
L41
L42
L39 FE BEAD

10000 pF

+12V

D2
RELAY SPDT
4
1
3

K1
2
5

DIODE, SCHOTTKY

B

C77

DIGIO4

C75

U20A

C78

PS2702-4
16

C76

U19

9
8
7
6
4
3
2
1

1

10000 pF

J1009

Q1
R58

+12V

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12

D3
RELAY SPDT

2.2K, 5%

K2

SO2222

4
1
3

2
5

DIODE, SCHOTTKY

RELAY SPDT

Q2
R6

K3

+12V

4
1
3

2
5

D4

2.2K, 5%
SO2222

DIODE, SCHOTTKY

Q3

EXTERNAL
REAR PANEL
ALARM OUTPUTS

TERMBLOCK-12

+12V

RELAY SPDT

D5
K4

R7

2.2K, 5%
SO2222

DIODE, SCHOTTKY

2
5

4
1
3

Q4

A

A

R8
Title
Schematic for E Series Motherboard PCA 05702

2.2K, 5%
SO2222

+12VRET

Size
Orcad B
Date:
File:

1

D-20

2

3

4

5

Number

Revision
A

05703

17-Jun-2008
Sheet 8of
8
N:\Pcbmgr\05701dn.E-motherboard.gen4\Source\05701a.DDB
Drawn By:
6

04521C (DCN5731)

1

M1

2

3

4

5

6

VCC

M2

1
2
3
4
5
6
7

10uF

DS3

S4

KBD_A0
KBD_A1
KBD_A2

21
2
3
1

SCL
SDA

22
23

A0
A1
A2
INT

P00
P01
P02
P03
P04
SCL
P05
SDA
P06
P07
P10
PCF8575 P11
P12
P13
P14
P15
P16
P17

M8
S3

VCC

VCC

S2

R2
1.0K

U3A

1

4
3
2
1

C

MF4

RN1
4.7K

S1

C7

PRE
CLK
D
CLR

5
6

Q
Q

+
DS5

MAINT_SW
LANG_SELCT

DS6

GRN LED
YEL LED
RED LED
LED 4
LED 5
LED 6
HORN
SPR_I/O_0

RI-1000 ONLY

Layout Instructions:
A1
SONALERT

Vss

MF3

DS4

4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20

12

M10

220

2
3
4
5
6

MM74HC74A
300pF

S9

VCC

RI-1000 ONLY

U4
VCC

OPT. MAINT SWITCH
S12

RN5
4.7K

SPR_I/O_1

SDA

TP3

BUSY

SCL

TP8

DISP_PWR

DISP_RET

4.7K

DISP_PWR_EN must
be high for display to
be powered.

DISP_BUSY

A

VCC

6
7
8
9
10

J1

+5_DISP

DISP_CN_A0
DISP_CN_A1
DISP_CN_A2
SCL
SDA

1
2
3
14
15

AO
A1
A2
SCL
SDA

SCL

DISP_RET

VCC

JP3

1
2
3
4
SDA 5

6
7
8
9
10

DISP_RET

(U1)

DISP_RET

SCL
KYBRD_INT

(U2)

(U4)

(U45

PCF8574

C11

C12

C10

220pF

220pF

220pF

+ C14

C4

100uF

.1uF

C17

VCC

4.7K

SCL
KYBRD_INT

B

Q1

C9

C8

220pF

220pF

+ C13

C2

C3

C5

C15

C16

.1uF

.1uF

.1uF

.1uF

P0
P1
P2
P3
P4
P5
P6
P7
INT

4
5
6
7
9
10
11
12

1
2
3

RN2
4.7K

1500uF

VCC
1
2
3
4
SDA 5

DISP_PWR
DISP_RET
VCC

+5_DISP
+5_DISP

DISP_WR
DISP_BUSY

13

DISPLAY CONTROL
U5

NOTES:
1. This schematic is based on
the PWB PN, 03974 and
applies to PCA PN, 03975

R4

1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15

+5_DISP

DISPL CONTROL (DISP_CN_A0 -A1)
011

R3

TP9

2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16

4

KEYBOARD (KBD_A0 - A2)
111

KYBRD_INT

INT

4
5
6
7
9
10
11
12

16

JP1
ADRS SLCTS

TP5

SDA

+5_DISP

DISP_RET
TP7

3

KYBRD INT

TP4

VCC
DISP_PWR

JP2 I2C TERMINATION
SCL
1
2
SDA

DEFAULT ADDRESS SELECTS FOR I2C TO PARALLEL
DECODERS:

2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
+5_DISP

TP2

TP6

PCF8574
Vss

DISP_DA_A0
DISP_DA_A1
DISP_DA_A2

S13

SCL
SDA

DISPLAY DATA

SPR_I/O_2
OPT. LANG. SWITCH

14
15

D
G

SI3443DV

1
2

MCP120T
1

U6

13

Vdd

RST

3

MMBT3904
R20

Q2

1K

4.85V DTCT
SPR_I/O_1
SPR_I/O_2
A

10uF

.1uF

Title

J2

JP4

Schematic for PCA #04258 and PCB #04257, Keyboard/Display Interface for E series
Size

Number

Revision

04259

B
Date:
File:

04521C (DCN5731)

S

+5_DISP

6
5
4

JP5
DISP_PWR_OVR

DISP_WR
DISP_BUSY
DISP_PWR_EN
MAINT_LED

DISP_RET

1

C

J3 TO/FRM DISPLAY
P0
P1
P2
P3
P4
P5
P6
P7

8

SPR_I/O_0

VCC

TP1

SCL
SDA

MM74HC74A
KBD_A0
KBD_A1
KBD_A2
DISP_CN_A0
DISP_CN_A1
DISP_CN_A2

3M-2514-6002UB
GND

KYBRD_INT

AO
A1
A2

1

MAINT_LED_V+
MAINT_LED
LANG_SELCT

9
8

Q
Q

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

MAINT_SW

PRE
CLK
D
CLR

1
2
3

Vss

B

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14

T8201

1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
17

MAINT SW
MAINT SW RET
MAINT LED V+
MAINT LED
LANG SW
LANG SW RET
SPR I/O_0
SPR I/O RET
SPR I/O_1
SPR I/O RET
SPR I/O_2
SPR I/O RET

10
11
12
13

1

VCC

J4

DISP_DA_A0
DISP_DA_A1
DISP_DA_A2

U3B

1. Minimum trace width 8 mil would like to have
10 mil traces if possible.
2. Please run traces on both and backside but
where possible fill one side with GND.
3. Minimum width for +5_DISP, DISP_PWR,
DISP_RET is 40 mil, except to test points.
4. Minimum width for VCC, GND, Vdd, Vss is
30 mil, except to test points

2
3
4
5
6

M9

D

U2

S5

74C923

MAINT_LED_V+

RED

KEYBOARD, LED & HORN

12
11
9
8

10
9
8
7
6

Vss

M7

13

X1
X2
X3
X4

OE

YEL

VCC

AVL

Vss

14

1
2
3
4
5

2

+ C6

.1uF

RN3

GRN

16

C1
S6

DS2

Vdd

M5

DS1

8

M6

19
18
17
16
15

D_A
D_B
D_C
D_D
D_E

Vdd

S7

Y1
Y2
Y3
Y4
Y5
OSC
KBM

24

S8

10

D

M4

Vdd

M3

Vcc

20

VCC

U1

2

3

4

5

a
21-Mar-2002
Sheet of
N:\YHWork\M300B\keyboard\04257a\04259A.ddb
Drawn By:
6

D-21

1

2

3

4

+15V

D

R2
1.1K

S1
ASCX PRESSURE SENSOR

1
2
3
4
5
6

2

VR2

D
3

C2
1.0UF
1
LM4040CIZ

TP4
TP5
S1/S4_OUT S2_OUT

TP3
S3_OUT

TP2
10V_REF

TP1
GND
3
2
1

S2
ASCX PRESSURE SENSOR

C

1
2
3
4
5
6

+15V

J1

6
5
4

MINIFIT6
+15V

C

R1
499
S3
FLOW SENSOR
FM_4

1
2
3

2

+15V

1
2
3
4

B

3

C1
1.0UF
1

CN_647 X 3

S4

VR1

LM4040CIZ

C3
1.0

B

CON4

The information herein is the
property of API and is
submitted in strictest confidence for reference only.
Unauthorized use by anyone
for any other purposes is
prohibited. This document or
any information contained
in it may not be duplicated
without proper authorization.

A

1

D-22

2

3

APPROVALS

DATE

SCH, PCA 04003, PRESS/FLOW, 'E' SERIES

DRAWN

A
CHECKED

SIZE

APPROVED

LAST MOD.

B

DRAWING NO.

REVISION

04354

D
SHEET

3-Dec-2007

1

of

1

4

04521C (DCN5731)

A
+5V

1

6
4
5
8

A18
A19

IC102:A
74AC00D

IC101 +5V
74ACT138
1
2
3

A15
A16
A17

IC102:D
74AC00D

1

3
11

2

2
13
12

6

4

5

6

IC103:C
74ACT32

9

8

43
44
52
68

+5V

STATUS

PL101:2
PL101:16

2
16

PL101:12

12

R101 +5V R102
4.99K
4.99K
IC106
MAX237
10

S

C120
1uF 16V
C121
1uF 16V

S

TXD PL101:3
DTR PL101:4
RTS PL101:5
DCD PL101:6
RI PL101:7

C1V+

RS-232

3
4
5
6
7

2
3
1
24
20

PL101:8
PL101:9
PL101:10

8
9
10

4
23
16

RESET

PL101:11

11

8

TTL

TO1
TO2
TO3
TO4
TO5

TI1
TI2
TI3
TI4
TI5

RI1
RI2
RI3

RO1
RO2
RO3

R103
499

R104
499

DS103
TXD

DS104
RXD

27
28
29
32
66

5
22
17

30
15
59
12
61
62
55
67

+5V

IC107
TL7705

+5V
7
2
3
1

C124
1uF 16V

S

C125
1uF 16V

C126

S 100nF

S

SENSE

VCC

RESIN

RESET

CT

RESET

REF

URTINT
-LMSEL

S

26
63
58
60
20

R105
4.99K

S

-UCS
-LCS

S

R106
4.99K

+5V

PL102-1

-WR
-RD

+5V

7
6
18
19
21

GND

+5V

4

14
15

S

(3) RXD
(4) DSR
(7) CTS

C129
10uF 16V
PL102-2

C2V-

S

DB-9 PIN NUMBERS IN PARENS.
(2)
(6)
(8)
(1)

9
13

S
12
11

+5V

+5V
VCC
C2+

C1+

X2
CLKO

S
40
65

+5V
C119
100nF

14
21

C123 C122
1uF 16V 1uF 16V

GND
(5) GND

VCC
X1

GND

S

-BHE
LANDRQ
ALE

2
7
11
13
15
12
14
16
17
75

31
18
41

Y101
18.432MHz

C105
22pF

1
15

2

3

1
42

13

+5V

IC104
C0561AD-L

+5V

C104
22pF

14

PL101:1
PL101:15

61
62
29
28

10

10

+5V
+5V

33
34
36
49
63
64

5

8

NC

S

IC103:B
74ACT32

4

IC102:C
74AC00D

PL101:14
PL101:13

IC105
CS8900A-CQ

C118
100nF

NC1
NC2
NC3
NC4
NC5
TXD1
-DTR1
-RTS1
-DCD1
-RI1
RXD1
-DSR1
-CTS1
-RES
HLDA
HOLD
GND
GND

A19
A18
A17
A16
A15
A14
A13
A12
A11
A10
A9
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
A0
D15
D14
D13
D12
D11
D10
D9
D8
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0

LANINT

50
39
8
45
49
47
51
48
53
56
54
38
37
33
46
36
35
34
19
57

A19
A18
A17
A16
A15

60
59
58
54
53
52
51
50
48
47
46
45
44
43
42
41
40
39
38
37

25
10
11
23
13
16
17
22
9
24
2
3
4
5
6
7

18
19
20
21
24
25
26
27
74
73
72
71
68
67
66
65

64

35
30
31
32

9
7

IOCS1 6
MEMCS1 6
SBHE
REFRESH
AEN
IOCHRDY

C107
15pF

20.0 MHz

X
T
A
L
2

R108
10.0K

5
6

D
V
D
D
1

D
V
D
D
2

D
V
D
D
3

D
V
D
D
4

A
V
D
D
2

A
V
D
D
1

A
V SLEEP
D
D
TEST
3

LANLED

ELCS
CHIPSEL
DMARQ2
DMARQ1
DMARQ0
DMACK2
DMACK1
DMACK0
CSOUT
RESET

LINKLED/ HC0

77

+5V

R110
4K99

100

99

RES
SA19
SA18
SA17
SA16
SA15
SA14
SA13
SA12
SA11
SA10
SA9
SA8
SA7
SA6
SA5
SA4
SA3
SA2
SA1
SA0

RXD-

DS101
ACT,

R113
499R

DS102
LINK

04521C (DCN5731)

B

S

1

+5V
C128
100nF

C103
100nF

78

93

R114
4K99

C109
100nF

T101
TG43-1406N

92

1

RXD+

TXD-

TXD+
SD15
SD14
SD13
SD12
SD11
SD10
SD09
SD08
SD7
SD6
SD5
SD4
SD3
SD2
SD1
SD0

DODO+
CICI+
DIDI+

D
V
S
S
1

D
V
S
S
1
A

D
V
S
S
2

D
V
S
S
3

D
V
S
S
3
A

D
V
S
S
4

A
V
S
S
0

A
V
S
S
1

A
V
S
S
2

A
V
S
S
3

A
V
S
S
4

EECS
EESK
EEDATAOUT
EEDATAIN

91

88

87

R116
24R3

R117
24R3

1:1

J101
16

15

3

14

3

11

2

1: 2

7

10

8

9

C110
100nF

84

6

2

6

C108
68pF

83

2

RX-

RX+

TX-

1
4
5
7
8
9
10

TX+
NC1
NC2
NC3
NC4
S1
S2

3

82
81
80

+5V
S

3
4
5
6

1 8 8 9 9
9 6 4 6

+5V
C111
100nF S

79

+5V
S

+5V
C112
100nF S

+5V
C115
100nF S

+5V
C113
100nF

+5V
C116
100nF S

C114
100nF

+5V
C117
100nF

C127
100nF

R109
10.0K
TELEDYNE ADVANCED POLLUTION
INSTRUMENTATION INC.
Title

1
2
3

THIS SCHEMATIC APPLIES TO PWB 04393 REV. A.
ALL RESISTANCES IN OHMS, 1%
PARTS DENOTED "S" ON SECONDARY SIDE OF PCA

C

4

ETHERNET INTERFACE SCHEMATIC
Number

Size

B
Date
Filename

A

+5V

C102
100nF

MT1

NOTES:

R107
10.0K

+5V

R112
499R

R115
100R

INTRQ3
INTRQ2
INTRQ1
INTRQ0

S

R111
4K99

76

+5V
C101
100nF S

MT2
BSTATUS/ HC1

8 1 2 5 5 7
0 3 5 7 0

8

+5V

2 5 6 8 9 9
9 2 6 9 5 0 5

9
8

X
T
A
L
1

+5V

+5V

IOR
IOW
MEMR
MEMW

+5V

4

D

Y102

C106
15pF

+5V

11

9

NC

+5V

IC103:D
74ACT32

13

IC102:B
74AC00D

C

IC103:A
74ACT32

1

12
3

16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
7

VCC
Y0
Y1
Y2
Y3
Y4
G1
Y5
Y6
G2
Y7
G3
GND
A
B
C

B

Rev

04395

A
Drawn by
Sheet
1

Thu Jul 25 2002
SLAN.S03

of

1

D

D-23

1

2

3

4

6

5

D

D

C

C

Interconnections
04181H-1-m100e200e.sch

preamp cktry
04181H-2-m100e200e.SCH

HVPS Cktry
04181H-3-m100e200e.SCH

B

B

A

A
Title
M100E/200E PMT Preamp PCA

Size
B
Date:
File:
1

D-24

2

3

4

5

Number

Revision
04181

H

Sheet 0

10-May-2007
of
N:\PCBMGR\04179cc\Source\RevG\04179.ddb
Drawn By:

3

6

04521C (DCN5731)

1

2

3

4

6

5
ON JP2:

+15V

PMT TEMPERATURE FEEDBACK

FOR 100E/200E : SHORT PINS 2 &5 ONLY.
FOR 200EU: SHORT PINS 3 & 6 and PINS 2 & 5.

+12V_REF
JP2

+15V
R28

TH1
FSV

+15V
D1
6.2V ZENER
6.2V

1
2

OPTIC TEST

8

50K

R8
150K

D
3

1
2
3
4
5
6

TJP1A
TJP2A

U2A

2
R27

R18
SEE TABLE

1

499

PMT TEMP CONFIG JUMPER

D

3
LF353
4

+

C23
100 pF

S

R6

R15
SEE TABLE

C1

+12V_REF

TO TEC BOARD

100K
C26
0.1 uF

+12V_REF

*

J2

TP3

VREF
1
COOLER CONTROL
2
AGND
3
3 PIN INLINE

8

Q3
J176
D

R35
1.0K

N/I

G

U3B
R41
300K

R16
100K

R2
51.1K

6
7
5

* TP24

TJP1A

LF353
4

THERMISTOR+

+15V

PREAMP1
LED+

TP23
*

THERMISTOR+

U13

+15V

b

R23

1

4

2

+5V_SYS

C6

COMP. 100E 200E 0200EU
------------------------------------------------R18
10K
10K
14K
R15
55K
55K
47K
R10
8.09K 8.09K 10K

LED+

HVPS

R7
10K
R1
10K

U3A

2

R9
1

PMT_TEMP

3

OPTIC_TEST

2.0K

LF353

R10

4.99K

3

Q2
PN2222

R37
3.3K

4

INLINE-9-RA

74AHC1GU04

C

D2
11DQ05

0.1 uF
8

-15V

2

C

9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

Ec

J3

RT1

R32
499

SEE TABLE
TJP2A

*

TP18

*

TP17

*

TP25

*

TP19

*

TP22

TP21
*

*

TP20
Signal Connector
J6

ETEST
OPTIC_TEST
HIGAIN
PMT_TEMP

B
HVPS

ELEC TEST
OPTIC TEST
PREAMP RNG BIT2
PREAMP RNG BIT1
PMT TEMP
HVPS VOLTAGE
PMT SIGNAL

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

VPMT

B

MICROFIT-8
J5
*TP11
L2
+15V
4.7 uH
C21

+
C49
0.68 uF

100uF

*

*TP16

TP15

*

TP14

*

TP13

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

Power Connector

MINIFIT-10

L1
-15V
4.7 uH

+5V_SYS

C16

A

Printed documents are uncontrolled

+

C46
0.68 uF

4.7uF, 16v

100E/200E PMT PREAMP PCA Schematic

Size
B
Date:
File:
1

04521C (DCN5731)

2

3

4

A

Title

5

Number
04181

Revision
H

10-May-2007
Sheet 1 of
N:\PCBMGR\04179cc\Source\RevG\04179.ddb
Drawn By:

3

6

D-25

1

2

3

4

6

5

D

D

VPMT

5

TP9
*

6
11

NC3

14

NC2

+15V

3

NC1

C31
0.68 uF

8
7
9
10
16
15
1
2

IN 4
COM4
IN 3
COM3
IN2
COM2
IN1
COM1

2

74AHC1GU04
U17
4
HIGAIN

13
12
4
-15V

ETEST

ETEST
ETEST
PREAMP2
HIGAIN

DG444DY
+15V

U5
4

ETEST

2

HIGAIN

-15V
74AHC1GU04

4

PREAMP1

NC4

V+
V(L)
V-

ETEST_SIGNAL

GND

U4

U9A
3

+5V_SYS

C29
0.68 uF

1
2

-15V

C

8

8

C

LF353

U16B

R11

100M

6

C4

0.001 uF

5

7

100 pF

R48
1K

R46 100

TP1
*

4

C2

+15V

LF353, OPAMP
R5

R29
50k, POT

1000M

N/I, SHORTED

R12
TP8
*

+15V C28 10uF/25V

+15V

R50
N/I

R44

+

PREAMP2

SEE TABLE
C48

R3

1
PMT Signal Connector
2

2

4.99K

C5 0.68 uF
U1
6

TP7
*
SEE TABLE
For 1.0 uF use C11.
For 11 uF use C11A & C11B.

PREAMP1

3

COAX

R17
SEE TABLE

4

OPA124

C2710uF/25V

R4

TP6
*

C30 0.68 uF

-15V
ETEST_SIGNAL

3
R19
10K, POT

A

1

VERSION TABLE:
0100 - M10XE
0200 - M20XE

3

R38
N/I

2

COMP. 0100
0200
---------------------------------------------R17
20.0K
10.0 ohms
R44
39.2K
25.5K
R51
10K
not installed
C3
0.1 uF
0.012
C11
11.0
1.0

ELECT. TEST

1

D-26

R13
N/I, POT

2

100

SPAN ADJUST

R43
4.99K

2

1.0uF
C11

1

-2.5V
C36
0.1 uF

5
LF353, OPAMP

250K
C3
SEE TABLE

U11
1
2
3
4

7

R36

+

PMTGND

BUFOUT
FB
OUT
AGND
V+
VDIV RATIO C OSC

8
7
6
5

LTC1062CN8

B

U2B

6

+ C11B
22uF/25V

+ C11A
22uF/25V

8

VREF

0.1 uF
8

J1

B

PMTGND

TP2
*

4

7

GUARD RING

-15V
C47
0.68 uF

+12V_REF
C9
3900 pF, FILM

R51
SEE TABLE
PMTGND

NOTES:
1.

UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED
CAPACITANCE IS IN MICROFARADS.

A
Printed documents are uncontrolled

PMTGND

2.

RESISTORS ARE 1%, 1/4W.

3.

RESISTANCE IS IN OHMS.

4.

THIS CIRCUIT MUST BE USED
AS A MATCHED PAIR WITH THE
TEC CONTROL CIRCUIT

Title
M100E/200E PMT Preamp PCA Schematic

Size

3

B
Date:
File:
4

5

Number

Revision
04181

H

Sheet 2

10-May-2007
of
N:\PCBMGR\04179cc\Source\RevG\04179.ddb
Drawn By:

3

6

04521C (DCN5731)

1

2

3

C45

4

6

5

HIGH VOLTAGE SUPPLY

100pF

TP4
*
VREF

D

R42
4.99K
U16A
2

8

3

3

LF353, OPAMP

0.68 uF

2

Vrf(+)

4

R49
1.0K

Vrf(-)

C33
0.68 uF

16V

4

COMP

5
C24
0.1 uF

TC

7

Vee

-15V

C

GND

C20

Iout

1

1
D7

K A

C22
10uF/25V

4

IN

2
1

C51
0.1uF/ 50V
CA0000192

U6

2

+

R20
4.99K

Vcc

HVPS

D

1

8

0.1 uF

3.92K

C32
1.0uF/16V
CA0000199

+5V_LOCAL

C25

OUT

GND
GND

6

C7
0.68 uF

+15V

R47

+15V
U22 LT1790AIS6-5

4.99K

9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16

D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0

9
8
7
6
4
3
2
1

RN1

C

R33

5
10
100Kx8

+5V_LOCAL

C

DAC0802

8

6

-15V

U9B
6
7
5

1

4

3

6

1

4

3

6

4

LF535

1

2

4

8

1

2

4

8
S2

S1

B

B

OUT

1

1
3

LM78L12ACZ(3)

C34
10uF/25V

+

2

+

C15
10uF/25V

OUT
IN
ON/OFF NC
GND

IN

5

2

2

+5V_LOCAL
TP10
*
U14
5
4

LP2981IM5

+

2

3

+15V

GND

U8

5

+12V_REF
TP5
*

C14
10uF/25V

2

C42
0.68 uF

D6
11DQ05

C50
10uF/25V

TP12
*
1

3

-2.5V

A

Printed documents are uncontrolled

VR1
LM336Z-2.5

R24
2k

M100E/200E PMT PREAMP PCA Schematic

Size
B
-15V

1

04521C (DCN5731)

2

A

Title

3

Date:
File:
4

5

Number

Revision
04181

H

10-May-2007
Sheet 3 of
N:\PCBMGR\04179cc\Source\RevG\04179.ddb
Drawn By:

3

6

D-27

1

2

3

4

A

A

B

B
JP1

R1
Not Used

R2
22

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

C

C

Title

D

Size
A
Date:
File:
1

D-28

2

3

SCH, E-Series Analog Output Isolator, PCA 04467
Number

Revision

04468

6/28/2004
N:\PCBMGR\..\04468B.sch

D

B

Sheet of
Drawn By:
4

04521C (DCN5731)
Source Exif Data: 
File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.6
Linearized                      : Yes
Author                          : Karen Saucedo
Category                        : Manuals
Comments                        : 
Company                         : Teledyne-API
Create Date                     : 2010:05:17 20:24:10-07:00
Keywords                        : M200E, Operator's, Manual
Manager                         : 
Modify Date                     : 2010:05:20 12:41:24-07:00
Subject                         : 
Has XFA                         : No
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 4.2.1-c043 52.372728, 2009/01/18-15:08:04
Creator Tool                    : Acrobat PDFMaker 9.1 for Word
Metadata Date                   : 2010:05:20 12:41:24-07:00
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 9.3.0 (Windows)
Format                          : application/pdf
Creator                         : Karen Saucedo
Title                           : Teledyne API - Model 200EH/EM Operation Manual
Description                     : 
Document ID                     : uuid:bb05150a-d1ec-4680-8a09-96fd03791c58
Instance ID                     : uuid:1a26cc3f-a550-45f7-9e8b-0cadbc02637e
Page Layout                     : OneColumn
Page Mode                       : UseNone
Page Count                      : 370
EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Navigation menu